Skip to main content

Full text of "CSUF Course Catalogs 1959-2007"

See other formats


GENERAL CATALOG 

and 

ANNOUNCEMENT OF COURSES 

1967-1968 



CALIFORNIA STATE 
COLLEGE 

AT FULLERTON 

(Formerly Orange State College) 

800 North State College Boulevard, Fullerton, California 
(714) 871-3300 92631 


All material herein is subject to change without prior notice 


TABLE OF CONTENTS 

I. ORGANIZATION AND ADMINISTRATION 

Page Page 


Calendar 6 

Trustees of the California State 

Colleges 1 1 

Officers of the Trustees 12 

II. THE 

ADMINISTRATION 

College administration . 27 

College committees — 29 

OBJECTIVES AND HISTORY 

Objectives of the college 33 

The history of the college 33 

College accreditation 34 

SPECIAL PROGRAMS 
AND SERVICES 

International programs 35 

Late afternoon and evening classes 35 

Summer sessions 36 

Extension program and services 36 

Library 36 

Audiovisual and Television Center 37 

Computer Center 37 

California State College Foundation 38 

RESEARCH CENTERS AND CLINICS 

Center for Economic Education 39 


Office of the Chancellor 13 

The California State Colleges 14 

The College Advisory Board 15 

Advisory councils 16 

COLLEGE 

Center for Governmental Studies— 39 
Real estate research and 

publications — . 39 

Speech and hearing clinics 39 

STUDENT PERSONNEL SERVICES 

Relations with schools— 40 

Student activities 40 

Student organizations 40 

Student publications 40 

Student news bureau 41 

Athletics 41 

Housing 41 

Student health services 42 

Placement services 42 

Counseling services 1 43 

Testing 43 

Foreign students 44 

International programs 44 

Financial aid 44 


III. ADMISSIONS AND REGISTRATION 


ADMISSION TO THE COLLEGE 

Admission requirements 49 

Freshman 49 

Undergraduate transfers 50 

Graduate students 51 

Foreign students 51 

Summer session student 51 

Procedures 52 

Credential programs 53 

Cancellation of admission 53 

Readmission 53 

Honors at entrance 53 

Undergraduate entrance testing 53 

Health requirements 54 

Evaluations 54 


REGISTRATION 

Orientation 56 

Registration 56 

Late registration 56 

Change of program 56 

Concurrent enrollment 56 

Auditors 56 

Veterans 57 

Selective Service 57 

Fees and expenses 57 

ACADEMIC ADVISEMENT 

Academic advisement 60 


IV. REGULATIONS 


GENERAL REGULATIONS 

Enrollment definitions and 

regulations 63 

Grading practices 63 

Transcripts 64 

Continuous residency regulations 65 

Student honors 66 

Student discipline 66 

Right of petition 67 

Academic probation 66 

GRADUATION REQUIREMENTS FOR 
THE BACHELOR'S DEGREE 

General education 68 

Units. 69 


Scholarship 69 

Major 69 

Minor 69 

Graduation requirement check 69 

Approval and recommendation of 
faculty 69 

THE PROGRAM OF MASTER'S 
DEGREES 

General requirements for the 

master’s degree 70 

Steps in the master’s degree 

program 70 

Graduate policies and procedures— 73 
Standards for graduate study 74 

3 


TABLE OF CONTENTS-Continued 

V. COLLEGE CURRICULA 


Page 


Curricula offered — 77 

SCHOOL OF LETTERS/ ARTS, 

AND SCIENCE 

Anthropology 81 

Art 82 

Biological science 86 

Chemistry .. — 89 

Communications 92 

Comparative literature 94 

Drama 95 

English 98 

Foreign languages 100 

Geography 102 

History 103 

Linguistics 105 

Mathematics 106 

Music 107 

Philosophy 113 

Physics 115 

Political science 117 


Page 

Psychology 119 

Science and mathematics education 121 

Social sciences 121 

Sociology 122 

Speech 124 


SCHOOL OF BUSINESS 
ADMINISTRATION 
AND ECONOMICS 

Undergraduate program in business 


administration and economics 129 

Business education 132 

Master of Business Administration 132 

Economics 135 

SCHOOL OF EDUCATION 

Teacher education curricula 141 

Master of Science in Education 153 

Bachelor of Science in Physical 
Education 154 

SCHOOL OF ENGINEERING 

Engineering 159 


VI. ANNOUNCEMENT OF COURSES 


General course numbering code 168 

Prerequisites 168 

Independent study 168 

SCHOOL OF LETTERS, ARTS, 

AND SCIENCE 

Anthropology 169 

Art 172 

Art education 177 

Biological Science 178 

Chemistry 183 

Communication 184 

Comparative literature 189 

Drama 190 

Drama education 194 

English 194 

English education 198 

Foreign languages education 198 

French 199 

Geography 201 

Geology 203 

German .* 204 

History 206 

Journalism education 211 

Latin 212 

Linguistics 212 

Mathematics 213 

Mathematics education 215 

Music 216 

Music education 221 

Philosophy 222 

Physical science 225 


Physics 225 

Political science 228 

Portuguese 234 

Psychology 234 

Russian 237 

Science education 238 

Social welfare 240 

Sociology 240 

Spanish 243 

Speech 246 

Speech education : 250 

SCHOOL OF BUSINESS 
ADMINISTRATION 
AND ECONOMICS 

Accounting 251 

Business education 253 

Economics 253 

Finance 257 

Management 258 

Marketing 261 

Quantitative methods 263 

SCHOOL OF EDUCATION 

Education, elementary 265 

Education, foundations 267 

Education, school services 267 

Education, secondary 270 

Health education 274 

Physical education 275 

Recreation 278 

SCHOOL OF ENGINEERING 

Engineering 279 


VII. FACULTY 

Faculty 283 Cooperating public school teachers 302 

Part-time faculty 296 

4 


ANNUAL CALENDAR 


1 96 7 


1 968 

JANUARY 

JULY 


JANUARY 

JULY 

S 

M 

T 

W 

T 

F 

S 

S 

M 

T 

W 

T 

F 

S 


S 

M 

T 

W 

T 

F 

S 

S 

M 

T 

W 

T 

F 

S 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 







1 



1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 


1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

8 

9 

10 

11 

12 

13 

14 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 


7 

8 

9 

10 

11 

12 

13 

~7 

8 

9 

10 

11 

12 

13 

15 

16 

17 

18 

19 

20 

21 

9 

10 

11 

12 

13 

14 

15 


14 

15 

16 

17 

18 

19 

20 

14 

15 

16 

17 

18 

19 

20 

22 

23 

24 

25 

26 

27 

28 

16 

17 

18 

19 

20 

21 

22 


21 

22 

23 

24 

25 

26 

27 

21 

22 

23 

24 

25 

26 

27 

29 

30 

31 





S3 

24 

25 

26 

27 

28 

29 


28 

29 

30 

31 




28 

29 

30 

31 








So 

31 









F 

EB 

RU 

AR 

Y 


AU 

GU 

ST 



FEB 

RU 

AR 

Y 




AU 

GU 

fST 






1 

2 

3 

4 



1 

2 

3 

4 

5 






1 

2 

3 





1 

2 

3 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

10 

11 

6 

7 

8 

9 

10 

11 

12 


4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

10 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

10 

12 

13 

14 

15 

16 

17 

18 

13 

14 

15 

16 

17 

18 

19 


11 

12 

13 

14 

16 

16 

17 

11 

12 

13 

14 

15 

16 

17 

19 

20 

21 

22 

23 

24 

25 

£0 

21 

22 

23 

24 

25 

26 


18 

19 

20 

21 

22 

23 

24 

18 

19 

20 

21 

22 

23 

24 

26 

27 

28 





27 

28 

29 

30 

31 




25 

26 

27 

28 

29 



25 

26 

27 

28 

29 

30 

31 

MARCH 

SEPTEMBER 


MARCH 

SEPTEMBER 




1 

2 

3 

4 






1 

2 







1 

2{ 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

10 

11 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 


3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

8 

9 

10 

11 

12 

13 

14 

12 

13 

14 

15 

16 

17 

18 

10 

11 

12 

13 

14 

15 

16 


10 

1 1 

12 

13 

14 

15 

16 

15 

16 

17 

IS 

19 

20 

21 

19 

20 

21 

22 

23 

24 

25 

17 

18 

19 

20 

21 

22 

23 


17 

18 

19 

20 

21 

22 

23j 

22 

23 

24 

25 

26 

27 

28 

26 

27 

28 

29 

30 

31 


24 

25 

26 

27 

28 

29 

30 


24 

25 

26 

27 

28 

29 

30 

29 

30 








31 








a: 

PRIL 




C 

)CTO! 

BE! 

* 


apr: 

LL 




C 

)C1 

roi 

3E1 

* 








1 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 



1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 



] 

2 

3 

4 

5 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

8 

9 

10 

11 

12 

13 

14 


7 

8 

9 

10 

11 

12 

13 

6 

~7 

8 

9 

10 

11 

12 

9 

10 

11 

12 

13 

14 

15 

15 

16 

17 

18 

19 

20 

21 


14 

15 

16 

17 

18 

19 

20 

13 

14 

15 

16 

17 

18 

19 

16 

17 

18 

19 

20 

21 

22 

22 

23 

24 

25 

26 

27 

28 


21 

22 

23 

24 

25 

26 

27 

So 

21 

22 

23 

24 

25 

26 

23 

24 

25 

26 

27 

28 

29 

29 

30 

31 






28 

29 

30 





27 

28 

29 

30 

31 



30 














l 

AA 

Y 




N 

OV 

EM 

[BE 

!R 





l 

Ak 

Y 




N 

OV 

EN 

[BE 

SR 



1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 




1 

2 

3 

4 





1 

2 

3 

4 






1 

2 

~7 

8 

9 

10 

11 

12 

13 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

10 

11 


5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

10 

1 1 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

14 

15 

16 

17 

18 

19 

20 

12 

13 

14 

15 

16 

17 

18 


12 

13 

14 

15 

16 

17 

18 

10 

1 1 

12 

13 

14 

15 

16 

21 

22 

23 

24 

25 

26 

27 

19 

20 

21 

22 

23 

24 

25 


19 

20 

21 

22 

23 

24 

25 

17 

18 

19 

20 

21 

22 

23 

28 

29 

30 

31 




126 

27 

28 

29 

30 


__ 


26 

27 

28 

29 

30 

31 



24 

25 

26 

27 

28 

29 

30 

JUNE 

DECEMBER 


JUNE 

DECEMBER 





1 

2 

3t 






1 

2 








1 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

13 

7 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

10 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 


2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

<s 

9 

10 

11 

12 

14 

11 

12 

13 

14 

15 

16 

17 

10 

11 

12 

13 

14 

15 

16 


9 

10 

11 

12 

13 

14 

15 

15 

16 

17 

18 

19 

20 

21 

18 

19 

20 

21 

22 

23 

24 

17 

18 

19 

20 

21 

22 

23 


16 

17 

18 

19 

20 

21 

22 

22 

23 

24 

25 

26 

27 

28 

25 

26 

27 

28 

29 

30 


24 

25 

26 

27 

28 

29 

30 


23 

24 

25 

26 

27 

28 

291 

[29 

30 

31 












31 








30 












5 



COLLEGE CALENDAR 


1967-68 


SUMMER SESSION 1 967-First Session 


May 19, Friday Application deadline for master’s degree candidates 

for graduation, September 1967 
June 9, Friday Last day to register early 

June 19, Monday First summer session begins — registration and classes 

July 4, Tuesday Independence Day (holiday — all offices closed) 

July 28, Friday First summer session ends 

SUMMER SESSION 1967-Second Session 

July 31, Monday Second summer session begins— registration and 

classes 

September 4, Monday Labor Day (holiday — all offices closed) 

September 8, Friday Second summer session ends 


FALL SEMESTER 1967 


February 1 to July 1, 1967 

Period for filing applications for admission to the fall 
semester 1967 for all new students and former students not 
in attendance during the spring semester 1967. Applicants 
are urged to file early in the period in view of probable 
enrollment limitations. 


September 11, Monday— 
September 12-14, 

Tuesday-Thursday.. 

September 14, Thursday 
September 18, Monday. .. 
October 20, Friday 


November 23, 24 
Thursday, Friday 
December 1, Friday 

December 1, Friday 

December 18, Monday.— 

January 2, Tuesday 

January 12, Friday 

January 17, Wednesday . 
January 24, Wednesday. 
January 26, Friday 


Faculty and student orientation (semester begins) 

Student orientation, advisement and registration 

Last day to register without late registration fee 

Classes begin 

Application deadline for baccalaureate degree can- 
didates for graduation, June 1968 and September 
1968 

Thanksgiving recess (all offices closed both days) 
Application deadline for master’s degree candidates 
for graduation, January 1968 
Applications for admission for spring semester 1968 
due in admissions office 

— Christmas recess begins 

Classes resume 

Last day of classes 

Semester examinations begin 

Semester examinations end 

- Semester ends 


6 


SPRING SEMESTER 1968 


September 15 to December 1, 1967 

Period for filing applications for admission to the spring 
semester 1968 for all new students and former students not 
in attendance during the fall semester 1967. Applicants are 
urged to file early in the period in view of probable enroll- 
ment limitations. 


January 29-31, 

Monday-Wednesday 

January 31, Wednesday 

February 5, Monday- — 

February 12, Monday — 

February 22, Thursday 

March 8, Friday 

April 8, Monday 

April 11, Thursday 

April 15, Monday ..... 

April 27, Saturday 

May 17, Friday 

May 24, Friday 

May 29, Wednesday. 

May 30, Thursday 

June 5, Wednesday 

June 7, Friday 


_ Registration for all classes (semester begins) 

Last day to register without late registration fee 

Classes begin 

Lincoln’s Birthday (holiday — all offices closed) 

Washington’s Birthday (holiday — all offices closed) 

Application deadline for baccalaureate degree candi- 
dates for graduation January 1969 
Spring recess begins 

Application deadline for master’s degree candidates 
for graduation, June 1968 

Classes resume 

Day of the Titan 

Application deadline for master’s degree candidates 

for graduation, September 1968 

Last day of classes 

Semester examinations begin 

Memorial Day (holiday — all offices closed) 

Semester examinations end 
Commencement (semester ends) 


SUMMER SESSION 1968-First Session 

May 17, Friday Application deadline for master’s degree candidates 

for graduation, September 1968 
June 7, Friday Last day to register early 

June 17, Monday ? First summer sessions begins — registration and classes 

July 4, Thursday Independence Day (holiday — all offices closed) 

July 26, Friday - First summer session ends 


SUMMER SESSION 1968— Second Session 


July 29, Monday ^ Second summer session begins — registration and 

classes 

September 2, Monday ... Labor Day (holiday — all offices closed) 

September 6, Friday Second summer session ends 


7 






ORGANIZATION AND 
ADMINISTRATION 


iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii II will mull 1 iiiiiiiiii 

BOARD OF TRUSTEES 
OFFICE OF THE CHANCELLOR 
THE CALIFORNIA STATE COLLEGES 
ADVISORY BOARD AND COUNCILS 



TRUSTEES 

OF THE CALIFORNIA STATE COLLEGES 


Ex Officio Trustees 

Ronald Reagan, B.A State Capitol, Sacramento 95814 

Governor of California and President of the Trustees 

Robert H. Finch, B.A., LL.B State Capitol, Sacramento 95814 

Lieutenant Governor of California 

Jesse M. Unruh, B.A State Capitol, Sacramento 95814 

Speaker of the Assembly 

Max Rafferty, A.B., M.A., Ed.D ..721 Capitol Mall, Sacramento 95814 

State Superintendent of Public Instruction 

Glenn S. Dumke, A.B., M.A., Ph.D., LL.D., L.H.D 5670 Wilshire 

Chancellor of the California State Colleges Boulevard, Los Angeles 90036 

Appointed Trustees 

Appointments are for a term of eight years expiring March 1 on dates in paren- 
theses. Names are listed in order of accession to the board. 

Louis H. Heilbron, A.B., LL.B., LL.D. (1969) 

44 Montgomery Street, San Francisco 94104 
Donald M. Hart, B.A. (1968) 

P.O. Box 1556, Bakersfield 93302 
Charles Luckman, LL.D., A.F.D. (1974) 

9220 Sunset Boulevard, Los Angeles 90069 
Paul Spencer, B.A. (1969) 

1323 La Terracita Drive, San Dimas 91773 
Theodore Meriam, A.B. (1971) 

P.O. Box 370, Chico 95927 
Albert J. Ruffo, LL.B., B.S. in E.E. (1971) 

600 Bank of America Bldg., San Jose 95113 
Mrs. Philip Conley, B.A. (1972) 

3729 Huntington Boulevard, Fresno 93702 
E. Guy Warren, B.A. (1973) 

P.O. Box 59, Hayward 94541 
Daniel H. Ridder, B.A. (1967) 

604 Pine Street, Long Beach 90801 
George D. Hart, A.B. (1967) 

111 Sutter Street, San Frandsco 94104 
Gregson E. Bautzer, B.A., LL.B. (1968) 

190 North Canon Drive, Beverly Hills 90210 
William A. Norris, A.B., LL.B. (1972) 

609 South Grand, Los Angeles 90017 
James F. Thacher, A.B., LL.B. (1970) 

310 Sansome Street, San Francisco 94104 
Victor H. Palmieri, B.A., LL.B. (1970) 

10889 Wilshire Boulevard, Suite 1550, Los Angeles 90024 
Alec L. Cory, B.A., LL.B. (1973) 

530 B Street, Suite 1900, San Diego 92101 
Chester R. Bartalini (1974) 

995 Market Street, Room 810, San Francisco 94102 


11 


Trustees 


Officers of the Trustees 


Governor Ronald Reagan 
President 
Donald M. Hart 
Vice Chairman 


Albert J. Ruffo 
Chairman 

Chancellor Glenn S. Dumke 
Secretary-T reasurer 


12 


OFFICE OF THE CHANCELLOR 

OF THE CALIFORNIA STATE COLLEGES 


5670 Wilshire Boulevard, Los Angeles 90036 
213 938-2981 

Glenn S. Dumke . Chancellor 

Raymond A. Rydell Executive Vice Chancellor 

Harry E. Brakebill Vice Chancellor, Business Affairs 

C. Mansel Keene Assistant Chancellor, Faculty and Staff Affairs 


13 


THE CALIFORNIA STATE COLLEGES 


California State College, Dominguez 
Hills 

809 East Victoria Street 
Dominguez Hills 90247 
Leo F. Cain, President 
213 532-4300 

California State College at Fullerton 
800 North State College Boulevard 
Fullerton 92631 

William B. Langsdorf, President 
714 871-3300 

California State College at Hayward 
25800 Hillary Street 
Hayward 94542 
Fred F. Harcleroad, President 
415 538-8000 

California State College at Long Beach 
6101 East Seventh Street 
Long Beach 90804 
Carl W. McIntosh, President 
213 433-0951 

California State College at Los Angeles 
5151 State College Drive 
Los Angeles 90032 
John A. Greenlee, President 
213 224-2011 

California State College at 
San Bernardino 
5500 State College Parkway 
San Bernardino 92407 
John M. Pfau, President 
714 887-6311 

California State Polytechnic College 
Kellogg-Voorhis Campus 
Pomona 91766 

Robert C. Kramer, President 
213 964-6424 

California State Polytechnic College, 
San Luis Obispo 
San Luis Obispo 93401 
Presidency vacant 
805 546-0111 


Chico State College 
1st and Normal Streets 
Chico 95926 

Robert E. Hill, President 
916 343-4411 
Fresno State College 
Shaw and Cedar Avenues 
Fresno 93726 

Frederic W. Ness, President 
209 222-5161 
Humboldt State College 
Areata 95521 

Cornelius H. Siemens, President 
707 822-1771 

Sacramento State College 
6000 J Street 
Sacramento 95819 
Robert Johns, President 
916 454-6011 
San Diego State College 
5402 College Avenue 
San Diego 92115 
Malcolm A. Love, President 
714 286-5000 

San Fernando Valley State College 
18111 Nordhoff Street 
Northridge 91324 
Ralph Prator, President 
213 349-1200 

San Francisco State College 
1600 Holloway Avenue 
San Francisco 94132 
John Summerskill, President 
415 469-9123 
San Jose State College 
125 South Seventh Street 
San Jose 95114 
Robert D. Clark, President 
408 294-6414 
Sonoma State College 
Rohnert Park 94928 
Ambrose R. Nichols, President 
707 795-2011 
Stanislaus State College 
800 Monte Vista Avenue 
Turlock 95380 

Alexander Capurso, President 
209 634-9101 


14 


THE CALIFORNIA STATE COLLEGES 

The California State Colleges are a unique development of the democratic con- 
cept of tax-supported public higher education for all qualified students. 

Spanning the state from Humboldt County in the north to San Diego in the 
south, the 18 campuses of the California State Colleges (with another campus 
soon to be constructed) represent the largest system of public higher education 
in the western hemisphere and one of the largest in the world. Current enroll- 
ment exceeds 170,000 full- and part-time students. The faculty and administrative 
staff numbers more than 9,000. 

The individual colleges, each with a geographic, curricular and academic char- 
acter of its own, offer solid basic programs in the liberal arts. Beyond this, each 
college is noted for its individuality in academic emphasis which makes for a 
diversified system. Course offerings leading to the bachelor’s and master’s degree 
are designed to satisfy existing student interests and to serve the technical and 
professional manpower requirements of the state. 

The California State Colleges arc dedicated to rigorous academic standards. Con- 
stant striving for academic excellence is at the heart of the system. The primary 
responsibility of each faculty within the system is the instructional process on the 
teacher-student level, with appropriate recognition of the necessary and construc- 
tive role of research in any institution of higher education. 

Responsibility for the California State Colleges is vested in the board of trustees, 
which is appointed by the Governor, and the board’s administrative arm, the chan- 
cellor. The trustees and the chancellor set broad policy for the colleges while dele- 
gating considerable independent responsibility for implementation at the college 
level. A statewide Academic Senate, made up of representatives elected by the 
faculty at each college, acts as a consultative body to the chancellor on academic 
affairs. 

Although the oldest of the colleges, San Jose State College, dates back a cen- 
tury, the California state college system under an independent board of trustees 
was created by the Donahoe Act of 1960. Formerly, the colleges w'ere under the 
jurisdiction of the State Board of Education. 

Today, the California State Colleges arc in a particularly dynamic period of 
their development. Before World War II, there were seven state colleges with a 
peak total enrollment of some 13,000. Since 1947, 11 new colleges have been es- 
tablished and a site has been selected for a new college in Kern County. Enroll- 
ment in the system is expected to reach 225,000 by 1970. 

CALIFORNIA STATE COLLEGE AT FULLERTON 

ADVISORY BOARD 


Leland C. Launer, Chairman 

Partner, Launer, Chaffee and Hanna Fullerton 

Arnold O. Beckman 

Chairman of the Board, Beckman Instruments, Inc Corona del Mar 

Mrs. Nicholas A. Begovich Fullerton 

Donald S. Bums 

President, Don Burns, Inc. — Volkswagen Garden Grove 

E. B. Buster 

Vice President, West Coast, Townsend Company Santa Ana 

H. L. (Jack) Caldwell 

Senior Vice President and Director, Macco Realty Co Newport Beach 

15 


Advisory Councils 


ADVISORY BOARD-Continued 


Rodney (Bud) Coulson 

Manager, Aunt Jemima’s Kitchen, Disneyland — Anaheim 

Manuel E. Esqueda 

Assistant Cashier, Bank of America Santa Ana 

R. Paul Hughes 

President, Pacific Hawaiian Products— Anaheim 

John R. Moore 

Executive Vice President, North American Aviation, Inc El Segundo 

Charles A. Pearson 

Proprietor, Anaheim Truck and Transfer Anaheim 

J. O’Hara Smith 

Real Estate Financial Consultant Corona del Mar 

Mrs. Edward H. (Edna Kraemer) Dunlap 
Honorary Member Placentia 


ADVISORY COUNCILS 


Engineering Advisory Council 


Nicholas A. Begovich 
Vice President, Ground Systems 


John R. Moore, Chairman 
Executive Vice President 
North American Aviation, Inc. 
El Segundo 


Hughes Aircraft Company 
Fullerton 


Group 


Frank W. Lynch 
Vice President and Manager 
Systems Support, Nortronics Division 
Northrop Corporation 
Anaheim 
Wendell B. Sell 
President 

Packard-Bell Electronics Corporation 
Los Angeles 


Alfred V. Gangnes 
President 

Interstate Electronics Corporation 
Anaheim 


John L. Sigrist 

Vice President, Space Systems Center 
Douglas Aircraft Company 
Huntington Beach 


Joseph W. Lewis 
Vice President 
Beckman Instruments, Inc. 
Fullerton 


Warren E. Wilson 
Professor and Chairman 
Department of Engineering 
Harvey Mudd College 
Claremont 


16 


Advisory Councils 


Foundation Advisory Council 
E. A. Bryant III 
Rancho Santa Ana 
Anaheim 
Leland M. Cave 
Vice President 
Bank of America 
Fullerton 
A. W. Effinger 
President 

A. W. Effinger Enterprises 
Santa Monica 
J. E. Fields 
President 

Apsco Products, Inc. 

Los Angeles 
Richard L. Gausewitz 
Patent Attorney 
Orange 

Richard T. Hanna 
Congressman, 34th District 
Washington, D.C., and Anaheim 

John J. Jakosky, Jr. 

President 

Electrophysics Corporation 
Costa Mesa 

Morley M. Kasler 
President 

Chris-Craft Sales of California 
Newport Beach 


William J. Phillips 
Supervisor, Third District 
County of Orange 
Santa Ana 
Frank M. Reid 
Executive Vice President 
Fullerton Chamber of Commerce 
Fullerton 
Jose Rosan, Sr. 

President 
Rosan Company 
Newport Beach 
Joseph Rosencr, Jr. 

Management Consultant 
Newport Beach 
Phil N. Scheid 

Manager, Management Operations 
Department 

Ground Systems Group 
Hughes Aircraft Company 
Fullerton 
Frank H. Trane 
Director 

Trane Corporation 
Corona del Mar 
Lucien D. Truhill 
Manager 

Orange County Chamber of 
Commerce 
Anaheim 

Edward W. Smith ( cx officio ) 
Director of Development 
California State College at Fullerton 
Fullerton 


17 


Advisory Councils 


Science Advisory Council 

A. L. Antonio 
Group Vice President 
Aerojet-General Corporation 
El Monte 

Meri J. Carson, M.D. 

Medical Director 
Children’s Hospital of 
Orange County 
Orange 

Earl A. Coddington 
Professor of Mathematics 
University of California 
Los Angeles 
Robert P. Dilworth 
Professor of Mathematics 
California Institute of Technology 
Pasadena 
Joseph Kaplan 
Professor of Physics 
University of California 
Los Angeles 
Ernst H. Krause 
Vice President 
Aerospace Corporation 
Newport Beach 


H. W. Magoun 
Dean of Graduate Division 
University of California 
Los Angeles 
Thane H. McCulloh 
Professor of Geology 
California Institute of Technology 
Pasadena 

Andreas Rechnitzer 
Project Engineer 
Autonetics, Division of North 
American Aviation, Inc. 
Anaheim 
N. Allen Riley 

Laboratory Director 
Chevron Research Company 
La Habra 

Howard Steinberg 
Vice President and Director of 
Research 

U.S. Borax Research Corporation 
Anaheim 


18 


Advisory Councils 


Teacher Education Advisory Council 
Dr. Hilton D. Bell 
District Superintendent 
Garden Grove Unified School 
District 
Garden Grove 
Mr. A. Stanley Corey 
Assistant Superintendent for 
Instruction 

Buena Park School District 
Buena Park 
Mr. Douglas C. Dyer 
Social Science Department 
Santa Ana Senior High School 
Santa Ana 

Mrs. Cymbre P. Ferguson 
Curriculum Consultant 
Centralia School District 
Buena Park 
Mr. Clarence Johnson 
Fountain Valley School District 
Huntington Beach 
Westminster 
Mr. Donald S. Jordan 
County Board of Education 
Garden Grove 

Dr. William H. Klaustcrmeyer 
Chairman, Division of Social Studies 
Fullerton Junior College 
Fullerton 

Mrs. H. D. Joyner 
La Habra 

Mr. Barron G. Knechtel 
Department of Mathematics 
Orange Coast College 
Costa Mesa 

Mrs. Margaret McKillop 
Coordinator, Child and Welfare 
Attendance 

Garden Grove Unified School 
District 
Garden Grove 


Mrs. Mildred D. Mohney 
Association of Cypress Teachers 
Buena Park 

Mr. William E. Montonna 
Principal, Villa Park High School 
Villa Park 

Mrs. Edward W. Nelson 
President, Fourth District PTA 
Garden Grove 

Dr. Edwin N. Norvcll 
Dean of Liberal Arts 
Santa Ana Junior College 
Santa Ana 

Dr. Robert Peterson 
County Superintendent of Schools 
Santa Ana 

Mrs. Joan Reiner 
Dean of Instruction 
Sonora High School 
La Habra 

Mrs. Marie Smith 
Arbolita School 
La Habra City School District 
La Habra 

Dr. William Stocks 
Assistant Superintendent, Instruction 
and Personnel 
San Joaquin School District 
Irvine 

Mrs. Martha Zabcl 
English Department, 

Katella High School 
Anaheim 


19 


Advisory Councils 


Council 


Technical Communications Advisory 
Norman Abell 
Mangement Systems Analyst 
Information Systems Division 
North American Aviation 
Downey 
L. W. Bunning 
Manager, Publications 
Collins Radio Company 
Newport Beach 
James J. Caron 
Technical Communications 
Management 
Space Division 
North American Aviation 
Downey 
Frank Cueto 

Quality Control Engineer 
Space and Information Systems 
Division 

North American Aviation 
Downey 

Mildred Hannum 
Mercury Publications 
Fullerton 
Walter J. Lower 
Training Representative 
Space and Information Systems 
Division 

North American Aviation 
Downey 


John Pallottini 
Vice President 

Electronic Technical Writing 
Institute 
Los Angeles 
Theresa A. Philler 
Technical Writer 

Allegheny Ludlum Steel Corporation 
Los Angeles 
Frank A. Quackenbush 
Head, Graphic Communications 
Section 

Hughes Aircraft 
Fullerton 
HyDee Small 

Technical Data Consultant and 
Specification Writer-Editor 
Building Specifiers Associates 
San Gabriel 
John M. Stormes 
Publications Coordinator 
Space and Information Systems 
Division 

North American Aviation 
Downey 


20 


Advisory Councils 


Urban Advisory Council 

Ted B. Adsit 
Planning Consultant 
Corona del Mar 

Jack H. L. Caldwell 
Vice Chairman, Board of Directors 
Macco Realty Company 
Corona del Mar 
Jerry F. Christie 
Vice President 
Fullerton Savings and Loan 
Association 
Fullerton 
Forest Dickason 
Planning Director 

Orange County Planning Commission 
Santa Ana 
Ralph Diedrich 
Building Contractor 
Buena Park 
Les Fant 

Manager of Real Estate 
The Irvine Company 
Irvine 

William M. Harrison 
President 

Cypress Park Properties, Inc. 
Fullerton 

Donald P. Kennedy 
President, Orange County Title 
Company, and First American 
Title Insurance and 
Trust Company 
Santa Ana 


William J. McGarvey, Jr. 

President 

McGarvey-Thompson Realty, Inc. 
Fullerton 
John Parker 
Vice President 

Coldwell-Banker and Company 
Newport Beach 
Chester Schultz 
Partner, McLean and Schultz 
Consulting Engineers 
Fullerton 

Don N. Schneider 
Owner 

D. N. Schneider Construction 
Company 
Placentia 
Andrew Trevedi 
Economist 

Economic Research Associates 
Los Angeles 
Ray Watson 
Vice President 
The Irvine Company 
Irvine 
Gin Wong 
President 

W. L. Pereira and Associates 
Los Angeles 


21 


Auxiliary Organizations 


AUXILIARY ORGANIZATIONS 


Friends of the College 

Officers and Executive Committee : 

William J. McGarvey, Jr., President 
Fullerton 

Ralph S. McLean, Vice President 
Fullerton 

Mrs. Phillip S. Twombly, Secretary 
Fullerton 

D. H. Roberts, Treasurer 
Fullerton 

Donald F. Bauman 
Fullerton 

Giles T. Brown 
Newport Beach 

Mrs. C. Stanley Chapman 
Fullerton 

Rodney Coulson 
Anaheim 

Mrs. Joseph Danigcr 
Santa Ana 

Everette Farnsworth 
Fullerton 

Mrs. John G. Fluck 
Fullerton 

Dr. John E. Scheidt 
Fullerton 

M. H. Welds 
Fullerton 


Community Coordinators: 
Max Besler 
Fullerton 
I. Merrill Braucht 
Fullerton 

Mrs. Jack Christensen 
Placentia 
William T. Clary 
Yorba Linda 

Mr. and Mrs. Carl F. Graham 
Garden Grove 
Marsh N. McFie 
Anaheim 
Robert Neasc 
Fullerton 

Owen Richelieu, Jr. 

Santa Ana 
Robert Tiarks 
La Habra 


22 


Auxiliary Organizations 


Patrons of the Library 

Officers and Board of Governors: 

Harold M. Williams, President 
Fullerton 

Robert Erickson, Vice President 
Fullerton 

Mrs. Dorman L. Commons, Second 
Vice President 
Fullerton 

Mrs. Samuel Gendel, Secretary 
Fullerton 

Mrs. Nicholas A. Begovich, Treasurer 
Fullerton 

Everett J. Bannister 
Fullerton 

Jack R. Boettner 
Fullerton 

Mrs. Dean O. Bowman 
Fullerton 

Russell R. Brooks 
La Habra 

Mrs. Irvin C. Chapman 
Fullerton 

Keith F. Cordrey 
Fullerton 

Mrs. Stanley E. Cramer 
La Habra 

Mrs. Jack Dain 
Fullerton 


Mrs. Donald R. Fix 
Fullerton 
Leo J. Friis 
Anaheim 

Herman Hiltscher 
Fullerton 
Robert L. Larsen 
Santa Ana 

Lester W. McLennan 
Fullerton 

John A. Murdy, Jr. 

Newport Beach 
Mrs. Henry E. North, Jr. 
Fullerton 

Col. Jacob W. Onstott 
Laguna Beach 
Mrs. H. George Osbourne 
Fullerton 

Stanley J. Pawlowski 
Anaheim 
N. Allen Riley 
Fullerton 
Earl Roget 
La Habra 
John W. Williams 
Anaheim 


23 




THE COLLEGE 


[[illlllllllliilllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllilllllllllllllllllllllllllM 

ADMINISTRATION 
OBJECTIVES AND HISTORY 
SPECIAL PROGRAMS AND SERVICES 
RESEARCH CENTERS AND CLINICS 
STUDENT PERSONNEL SERVICES 




ADMINISTRATION 


COLLEGE ADMINISTRATION 

’resident William B. Langsdorf 

Administrative Assistant Lois S. Herron 

Executive Assistant — W. Werner Prange 

Director of Development Edward W. Smith 

Executive Dean Stuart F. McComb 


Building Coordinator 


Milton C. Blanchard 

Bernard L. Hyink 

Doris B. Kostal 


Vice President, Academic Affairs 

Administrative Assistant 

Dean, School of Letters, Arts and Science Miles D. McCarthy 

Dean, School of Business Administration and Economics Donald S. Tull 

Dean, School of Education . Kenneth R. Doane 

Dean, School of Engineering Robert G. Valpey 

Dean of Educational Services and Summer Session Gerhard E. Ehmann 

Coordinator of Graduate Studies Sherwood P. Cummings 

College Librarian Ernest W. Toy, Jr. 

Director of Audio Visual and Television Services Raymond E. Denno 

Director of Extension and Coordinator of Evening 

Classes R. Harold Van Cleave 

Dean of Students Ernest A. Becker 

Financial Aids Officer Thomas D. Morris 

Associate Dean of Students and Director of Admissions 

and Records Ralph Bigelow 

Admissions Officer John Campbell 

Registrar Mildred Scott 

Associate Dean of Students and 

Director of Counseling Center 

Counselor 

Counselor 


Counselor and Test Officer 

Foreign Student Adviser 


Ronald M. Bristow 
—..Arthur W. Lynn 

Charles W. Buck 

Jack Russell 

Louise Lee 

Howard Morton 


Psychometrist and Research Coordinator 
Associate Dean of Students and 

Director of Relations with Schools Emmett T. Long 

Associate Dean of Students and 

Director of Student Activities _T. Roger Nudd 

Activities Adviser _Betty Bradley 

Director of Housing ...Dudley A. Stier 

Director of Placement Services Max W. Burke 

Placement Supervisor Bradley Weyman 

Medical Director — Helen L. Morton, M.D. 

Business Manager J. E. Lyons 


Administrative Assistant 

Accounting Officer 

Personnel Officer 


Chief of Plant Operations ... 
Public Information Officer 
Business Services Officer _. 


...Thomas A. Williams 

Stan N. Chase 

Marie M. Hoffman 

Beryl E. Kempton 


Donald Tosten 


27 


Schools and Departments 


Director of Foundation Services - . ... .. ...Norman S. Stanley 

Bookstore Manager —Keith Nastiuk 

Food Service Manager _ _ ..Earl Maxon 

Foundation Accountant Eva Jensen 

SCHOOLS AND DEPARTMENTS 

School of Letters , Arts and Science... Miles D. McCarthy, Dean 

J. Justin Gray, Associate Dean 
Charles A. Povlovich, Associate Dean 

Anthropology Department Wayne W. Untereiner 

Art Department Gregory D. Ivy 

Biological Science Department (acting) Donald D. Sutton 

Chemistry Department Andrew F. Montana 

Communications Department J. William Maxwell 

Drama Department. James D. Young 

English Department M. John Wagner 

Foreign Languages and Literature Department Walter D. Kline 

Geography Department Arthur D. Earick 

History Department Giles T. Brown 

Mathematics Department Dennis B. Ames 

Music Department Joseph W. Landon 

Philosophy Department- William H. Alamshah 

Physics Department .. —.Raymond V. Adams 

Political Science Department Ivan L. Richardson 

Psychology Department -Robert E. Edwards 

Science and Mathematics Education Department George C. Turner 

Sociology Department F. James Davis 

Speech Department Seth A. Fessenden 


School of Business Administration and Economics Donald S. Tull, Dean 

Jack Pontney, Associate Dean 

Accounting Department .. Dorsey E. Wiseman 

Economics Department — Norman Townshend-Zellner 

Finance Department < (acting) Dorsey E. Wisemar 

Management Department Stephen J. Barre: 

Marketing Department Frank L. Robert: 

Quantitative Methods Department —..Herbert C. Rutemiller 


School of Education Kenneth R. Doane, Dear 

Eugene L. McGarry, Associate Dear 


Program Directors: 

Elementary Education 
Secondary Education 

Pupil Personnel 

School Administration- — 

Junior College Education 

Reading Education.— 1 

Special Education 

Health Education, Physical Education and Recreation 
Department 

School of Engineering j 


Barbara A. Hartsig 

—James W. Cusick 

L. O. Brockmann 

Alden W. Smith 

Gerhard E. Ehmann 

Hazel M. Croy 

Wayne D. Lance 

Elmer L. Johnson 
Robert G. Valpey 


28 


College Committees 


COLLEGE COMMITTEES 1966-67 


D resident's Cabinet 

W. B. Langsdorf, Chairman 
Ernest A. Becker 
Kenneth R. Doane 
Gerhard E. Ehmann 
Julian F. S. Foster 
Lois M. Herron 
Bernard L. Hyink 
J. E. Lyons 

C aculty Council 

Julian F. S. Foster, Chairman 

Levern F. Graves, Vice Chairman 

James W. Cusick, Secretary 

Gertrude M. Reith, Treasurer 

Dennis B. Ames 

Warren A. Beck 

Ronald M. Bristow 

Edwin R. Carr 

Roland L. Calhoun 

Sherwood P. Cummings 

Lawrence B. de Graaf 

Seth A. Fessenden 

David M. Feldman 

A4orton C. Fierman 

George Giacumakis, Jr. 

J. Justin Gray 
Paul C. Hayner 
Gregory D. Ivy 
Emmett T. Long 
Walter D. Kline 
William B. Langsdorf, 

President of the College 

Campus Planning Committee 

William B. Langsdorf, Chairman 
Ernest A. Becker 
Jack C. Emmons, College Facility 
Planner , Office of Chancellor 
Bernard L. Hyink 

Academic Affairs Cabinet 

Bernard L. Hyink, Chairman 
Ernest A. Becker 
Ralph E. Bigelow 
Sherwood P. Cummings 
Kenneth R. Doane 
Gerhard E. Ehmann 
J. Justin Gray 


Miles D. McCarthy 
Stuart F. McComb 
Edward W. Smith 
Norman S. Stanley 
Donald S. Tull 
Robert G. Valpey 
A SB President 


Miles D. McCarthy 
James A. McCleary 
Eugene L. McGarry 
Willis E. McNelly 
Paul C. Obler 
Frank L. Roberts 
Danton B. Sailor 
Paulina J. Salz 
L. Donald Shields 
Edsel F. Stiel 
Donald D. Sutton 
Eric A. Teel 

Norman Townshend-Zellner 
Ernest W. Toy, Jr. 

Dorsey E. Wiseman 
Allen M. Zeltzer 

Associated Students Representative 

* * * 

Lee R. Kerschner ( Academic Senate) 
Paul J. Pastor (Academic Senate) 
Charles A. Povlovich 
f Parliamentarian ) 


J. E. Lyons 
Stuart F. McComb 
John W. Olsen 
Herbert J. Powell, 
Consulting Architect 


Miles D. McCarthy 
Eugene L. McGarry 
Jack Pontney 
Charles A. Povlovich 
Ernest W. Toy, Jr. 
Donald S. Tull 
Robert G. Valpey 


29 


College Committees 


Graduate Council 

Sherwood Cummings, Chairman 

Louis O. Brockmann 

Arthur D. Earick 

Jack A. Pontney 

Alvin M. Rothman 

Betty M. Unterberger 

James D. Young 


Advisory Committee on Radiological Safety 

Robert E. Spenger, Chairman L. Jack Bradshaw 


Raymond V. Adams, 

Radiological Safety Officer 

Jack E. Lyons 

Helen L. Morton, M. D. 

Council on Educational Television 

Giles T. Brown, Chairman 

John H. Bryden 

James W. Cusick 

Raymond E. Denno 

Kenneth R. Doane 

J. William Maxwell 

James D. Young 

Allen M. Zeltzer 

Student-Faculty Athletics Board 

James A. McCleary, Chairman 

Elmer L. Johnson, Secretary 

C. Russell Beaton 

Ernest A. Becker 

Andrew F. Montana 

Kit Johnston 

Ronald Pogue 

Robert Roland 

Student-Faculty Lecture Series Board 

Robert S. Feldman, Chairman 

Gerhard E. Ehmann, 

Executive Secretary 

Roger R. Dittman 

Paul T. Kinney 

Thomas M. Sessions 

M. John Wagner 

Milton L. French 

Dennis L. McCleary 

John Moore 

John L. Weiman 

Student-Faculty Publications Board 

Allen M. Zcltzer, Chairman 

David J. Pivar 

M. John Wagner 

Gary Orso 

Michael McEvoy 

Student-Faculty Public Events Board 
Gerald L. Boarino 

Alvin J. Keller 

William C. Langworthy 


STANDING COMMITTEES OF THE FACULTY COUNCIL 

1 966-67 

Academic Standards Committee 


Eugene McGarry, Chairman 

F. James Davis 

Cecil Thompson 

Wayne Untereiner 

Ralph Bigelow, ex officio 

Curriculum Committee 

June Salz, Chairman 

Kenneth Doane 

Gregory Ivy 

Hazel Jones 

Paul Obler 

30 

Jack Pontney 

Don Sutton 

Robert Valpey 

Bernard Hyink, ex officio 


College Committees 


Educational Services Committee 


Don Austin, Chairman 

Warren Beck 

Paul Kinney 

Dorsey Wiseman 

Gerhard Ehmann, ex officio 

Elections Committee 

Charles Bell, Chairman 

Paul Hayner 

Sylvia Lane 

Charles Povlovich 

Alvin Rothman 

Elmer C. Schneider 

C aculty Affairs Committee 

Ida Coppolino, Chairman 

William Alamshah 

Roland Calhoun 

Seth Fessenden 

Ray Johnson 

Walter Kline 

Gertrude Reith, ex officio 

.ibrary Committee 

Morton Fierman, Chairman 

George Etue 

Richard Gilbert 

Joan Greenwood 

Ernest Toy, ex officio 

Personnel Committee 

Barbara Hartsig, Chairman 

Edwin Carr 

Justin Gray 

John Mason 

J. William Maxwell 

James McCleary 

Research Committee 

David Feldman, Chairman 

Robert Edwards 

Myrtle Imhoff 

Ivan Richardson 

Donald Shields 

Norman Townshend-Zellner 
Ernest Toy 

James Young 

Jack Lyons, ex officio 
Edward Smith, ex officio 

Student Affairs Committee 

George Giacumakis, Chairman 

Stephen Barres 

Natalie Barish 

Edwin Duerr 

Edward Livengood 

Willis McNelly 

David Thorsen 

Allen Zeltzer 

Ernest Becker, ex officio 

Constitutional Revision Committee 

Charles Povlovich, Chairman 

Edwin Carr 

Hazel Jones 

James Young 

Execuf/ve Committee 

Julian Foster, Chairman 

Sherwood Cummings 

James Cusick 

Levern Graves 

Gertrude Reith 

Norman Townshend-Zellner 


Lawrence de Graaf 


31 


Preprofessional Committee 

PREPROFESSIONAL COMMITTEE 1966-67 

Premedical Committee 

Miles D. McCarthy, Chairman 
Ernest A. Becker 
Ronald J. Crowley 
Andrew F. Montana 

The president of the college and the chairman of the faculty council are ex 
officio members of all faculty committees. 


Helen L. Morton, M.D. 
Edsel F. Stiel 
Donald D. Sutton 


CALIFORNIA STATE COLLEGE AT FULLERTON 
FOUNDATION 
BOARD OF TRUSTEES 


Charles A. Povlovich, President 
Robert R. Unterberger, 

Vice President 
Jack E. Lyons, Tre astir er 
Ernest A. Becker 
William B. Langsdorf 
Kent E. McKee 
Orrington C. Ramsay 


L. Donald Shields 
Mrs. Walter B. Chaffee 
Paul W. Cook 
Thomas W. Mathew 
Orville F. Recht 
Philip N. Scheid 
Clarence J. Schwartz 


32 


OBJECTIVES AND HISTORY 


OBJECTIVES OF CALIFORNIA STATE COLLEGE 
AT FULLERTON 

The main functions of an institution of higher learning are to disseminate and 
advance knowledge. The philosophy which guides an institution can limit or pro- 
mote the successful achievement of these objectives. Therefore, from its inception, 
the college has directed its educational program toward the fullest possible devel- 
opment of the individuals who participate in it. For both faculty and students this 
entails a commitment to high standards of scholarship, a comprehensive rather than 
a narrow approach to major areas of study, and a concern with research and other 
creative activity. 

The college holds to the belief that an enduring educational experience must be 
founded upon exploration of our cultural heritage, through basic studies in the 
liberal arts and sciences, and that it can and should at the same time prepare for 
success in a chosen occupation or profession. Accordingly, the required general 
education program has as its objective the development in each student of: 

1. The effective use and interpretation of the written and spoken language. 

2. An understanding of the wide range of human endeavor and accomplishments 
in liberal arts and sciences, their interrelationships, and the various choices 
and values they represent. 

3. An understanding of information and principles in some areas of the liberal 
arts and sciences in sufficient depth to encourage critical and creative thought 
and expression. 

4. A spirit of inquiry into the past and into the future, in order to cope with 
conditions in the continually changing world. 

5. An understanding of the rights, privileges and responsibilities of citizenship 
in the community and nation, and of effective participation in today’s world. 

In addition, the college requires of all students who are candidates for a degree — 
whatever their special purpose — the pursuit of a subject major. 

(For specific details, see page 68). 


HISTORY OF CALIFORNIA STATE COLLEGE 
AT FULLERTON 

Orange County is situated on a coastal plain southeast of the City of Los Angeles. 
A decade ago the county was regarded as being one of rural characteristics, with 
emphasis on the production of oranges and other citrus fruits. Today it is referred 
to as one of the fastest growing counties in the nation, having multiplied its pop- 
ulation almost five times in the last fifteen years. Orange County reached the one 
million mark in population in 1963, to make it the third most populous county in 
California. The median age of the population is 26.6 years, and 42 per cent are 
less than 20 years of age. Much of the county is still rural, the county having a 
population density of 1.37 persons per acre. There are sections, however, that are 
as dense as 16.64 persons per acre. Every indication points to continued growth, 
with a predicted population of two million by 1980. Thousands of acres of irri- 
gated agricultural land have been converted to subdivisions, business and industry, 
freeways, and schools. The electronics industry is the leader in growth among in- 
dustries and businesses in the county. 


33 


Accreditation 


California State College at Fullerton was established by act of the Legislature 
under the terms of Chapter 1681 of the Statutes of 1957. On March 13, 1958, the 
Public Works Board selected the site of the college, located in the northeast section 
of the City of Fullerton. It now consists of 225 acres, and is bounded on the north 
by Yorba Linda Boulevard (formerly Pioneer Avenue), on the west by State 
College Boulevard (formerly Cypress Avenue), on the south by Nutwood Avenue, 
and on the east by the proposed Orange Freeway. The college is located within five 
miles of 60 percent of the industry and within 10 miles of 70 percent of the pop- 
ulation of Orange County. It is also within easy driving range of Orange County 
beaches and mountains, and of the other cultural centers of southern California 
and their recreation and entertainment areas. 

Dr. William B. Langsdorf was appointed president of the college on January 16, 
1959, and with two aides came to Fullerton on March 2, 1959, to begin planning 
for the opening of the new college. Arrangements were made with the Fullerton 
Union High School District to lease quarters for the college administrative offices 
on the Fullerton Union High School campus, and to hold classes at the Sunny Hills 
High School for the 1959-60 school year. During the first eight years, the average 
annual enrollment has grown from 466 to 7,500 individuals. Envisioned are average 
annual enrollments of 10,000 in 1969-70; 15,000 in 1974-75; and 30,000 individuals 
when the college reaches its master plan enrollment of 20,000 full time equivalent 
students in the early nineteen* eighties. 

In the fall of 1960, the college opened classes on its own campus where it occu- 
pied 12 temporary buildings. The first permanent building, the Letters and Science 
Building, was occupied in 1963. The Music-Speech-Drama Building was completed 
in 1964, the Physical Education Building in 1965, and the Library and Audiovisual 
Center in 1966. Other permanent buildings will be opened in approximately the 
following order: Cafeteria, 1967; Humanities-Social Sciences Building, 1968; Art 
Building, 1969; Administration-Business Administration Building, and Engineering 
Building, 1970; and Education Building, 1971. Additional buildings are being planned 
for the future. 


ACCREDITATION 

The college is fully accredited by the Western Association of Schools and 
Colleges, California State Board of Education, the American Association of Col- 
legiate Schools of Business, and the National Association of Schools of Music. 


34 


SPECIAL PROGRAMS AND SERVICES 


INTERNATIONAL PROGRAMS 

The California State Colleges offer academic year programs of study at a number 
i>f distinguished universities abroad. For 1967-68 the cooperating universities are: 
University of Aix-Marseille, France; Free University of Berlin and University of 
deidelberg, Germany; University of Florence, Italy; Waseda University, Tokyo, 
fapan; University of Granada and University of Madrid, Spain; University of 
Stockholm and University of Uppsala, Sweden; National University, Taiwan. Aca- 
lemic work successfully completed at the cooperating universities abroad may be 
ipplied toward the degree requirements of the college in accordance with college 
•egulations. 

A selection among applicants from all California State Colleges is made on the 
Dasis of academic, linguistic and personal qualifications. The criteria are: 

(a) Upper division or graduate standing by the beginning of the academic year 
abroad; 

(b) Academic achievement; 

(c) Proficiency in the language of instruction; 

(d) Faculty recommendations. 

Cost to the student includes round trip transportation from San Francisco to the 
host university, room and board for the academic year, and medical insurance. 
In 1967-68 these costs are: France, Germany, Spain, $1,970; Italy, Japan, $2,070; 
Sweden, $2,270; Taiwan, $1,770. Payments may be scheduled throughout the year. 

Programs in Japan, Sweden and Taiwan do not require previous linguistic prepa- 
ration; applicants for all other programs must demonstrate adequate facility in the 
language of instruction at the host university. 

Application for the 1968-69 academic year should be made early in the fall 
semester of 1967. Detailed information may be obtained at the counseling center, 
Room S264, or by writing to the Office of International Programs, the California 
State Colleges, 1600 Holloway Avenue, San Francisco 94132. 

LATE AFTERNOON AND EVENING CLASSES 

The educational program of the college is offered continuously from 8 a.m. 
until 10 p.m., Monday through Friday. Classes held during the late afternoon and 
evening hours are part of the regular college offering and are taught by the 
college faculty. 

Students enrolling in these classes must have met all admission requirements of 
the college, including the filing of an official application for admission, the filing 
of complete official transcripts from other schools and colleges, and in the case 
of lower division applicants, the completion of required tests for admission. 

A class schedule, listing all classes meeting in the late afternoon and evening 
hours, may be obtained at the Titan Bookstore or the Office of the Coordinator 
of Evening Classes. Applications of new students for admission to the college 
must be filed with the Office of Admissions prior to the deadline. This date, for 
both the fall and spring semesters, is carried in the calendar of this catalog. 


Summer Sessions 


SUMMER SESSIONS 

The college will conduct two six-week summer sessions, from June 19 through 
July 28, and from July 31 through September 8. There will also be two-week 
and thrcc-w'cck workshops funning concurrently. Day and evening classes are 
scheduled, and credits earned in the summer sessions meet degree and credential 
requirements with the same validity as credits secured in the fall and spring 
semesters. A maximum of one unit of college credit may be earned for each 
week of attendance. 

In addition to much of the regular curriculum, summer offerings include special 
workshops and seminars for teachers and other professional groups. A program of 
recreational activities is planned to serve a wide variety of interests. 

A tuition fee of $19.75 per unit is charged, plus an associated student member- 
ship fee of $2 per person. The summer session class schedule announcing all 
courses is published on February 1 or earlier, and may be obtained by writing the 
dean of summer session. 

EXTENSION PROGRAM AND SERVICES 

The college cooperates with all community agencies (business and professional 
associations, chambers of commerce, school districts, industrial firms, economic and 
cultural groups, city and county governmental units, etc.) in the development of 
educational programs. These activities may be classes, conferences, institutes, work- 
shops, seminars or they may be consultant services, depending upon the need. In 
this manner, the college provides opportunities for the professional, vocational, and 
cultural improvement of persons unable to pursue an academic program in residence. 

Extension Courses. Off-campus extension courses may be planned for those wash- 
ing to earn college credit and under certain conditions this credit may be applied 
toward a degree or a teaching credential. Extension offerings arc equivalent in level 
and quality to residence courses. These courses may be modified and designed to 
meet the particular needs of certain groups and may be initiated at various times 
during the year. Any adult may enroll in an extension course, provided he meets 
the prerequisites of the course. Matriculation is not required. Refer to the section 
of this catalog on fees and expenses for information on fees. 

Persons wishing information about organizing an extension course or about current 
extension offerings should address inquiries to the director of extension. 

Conferences and Institutes. The college is interested in taking an active part in the 
development of conferences and institutes. The conference director, in cooperation 
w’ith the respective academic departments and divisions, will work w'ith agency repre- 
sentatives in planning the program, selection of a competent staff, and the general 
conduct of the conference. 

Requests for information or assistance with particular educational problems which 
might be met through the extension program should be directed to the conference 
director. 


THE COLLEGE LIBRARY 

The college library’ is housed in the first and fourth through sixth floors of the 
new' Library Building completed in the summer of 1966. The total space occupied 
by the library is approximately 115,000 square feet. As collections and enrollments 
grow', the library' w'ill occupy’ the remaining two floors of the building. The floors 
now available arc designed to seat approximately 1,625 persons and to house about 
205,000 volumes, besides related materials. Group study rooms, typing rooms, study 


36 


Compute / Center 


carrels, seminar rooms, and individual and group music listening rooms arc avail- 
able. The library has facilities for Xerox and Filmac copying. 

The main hook collection will contain about 143,000 volumes at the beginning of 
the 1967-68 academic year. During the year about 60,000 volumes will be added. The 
library also has about 9,000 volumes of sample elementary’ and secondary' textbooks 
and juvenile literature, and a collection of about 6,000 pamphlets and other ephemera. 

The library is a selective depositor for U.S. government documents. This collection 
will reach a total of nearly 60,000 items in the course of the academic year. The 
library" *s also a depository for California curriculum materials, which will reach 
about 3,500 items during the year, and for California state documents. 

In addition to these collections the library has about 7,000 reels of microfilmed 
U.S. government documents, chiefly State Department records, but also including 
such items as the Congressional Record and various presidential papers; about 11,000 
reels of other microfilmed materials, mostly files of newspapers and periodicals, and 
about 7,000 volumes on micro-opaque cards and sheet microfilm. Readers for these 
materials are available adjacent to their storage area on the fourth floor. 

The library subscribes to about 3,000 periodicals. In addition to the filmed back- 
files mentioned above, the periodicals collection contains about 8,000 bound volumes. 

Besides attempting to build a balanced collection of basic works, the library, as 
a part of its development program, has concentrated its efforts in several subject 
areas. As a result, relatively strong collections arc now available in such fields as 
World War II, international relations since 1870, Kant, Shakespeare, Melville, Joyce, 
historiography and historical bibliography, and contemporary music. As the result 
of a gift, a special collection of about 1,200 volumes on angling is also available. 
These collections will increase in strength and number during the next several years. 

Library" hours are posted in the elevator lobby and at other convenient locations 
in the building. A library' handbook is available at the reference desk, where pro- 
fessional librarians are on duty' at all times to aid students and faculty' in the use of 
library resources. 

AUDIOVISUAL AND TELEVISION CENTER 

The Audiovisual and Television Center is located in the basement of the Li- 
brary’ Building and occupies approximately 20,000 square feet. Services to faculty 
and students include use of all types of audiovisual equipment and materials 
(motion pictures, filmstrips, instructional kits, tape recordings and study prints); 
campuswidc distribution of AV materials and equipment upon request, rental of 
films from major rental libraries in the United States; for faculty: production of 
transparencies, embossograph, charts, posters and diagrams; production of three- 
dimensional media; and all types of still and motion photography'. Eight preview 
rooms and four audition rooms arc available for faculty and student use. 

COMPUTER CENTER 

The present computing facilities include an IBM 1620, Model 2, with an IBM 
131! disc drive and other peripheral equipment. This facility is used for college 
administrative applications as well as faculty' research and instruction. 

Instruction on computers is offered by several departments in the college. Stu- 
dents are encouraged to use the computer themselves but processing of students’ 
computer programs by the staff is also available. The Computer Center maintains 
a large library of computer programs and offers consulting facilities. 


37 


State College Foundation 


THE CALIFORNIA STATE COLLEGE FOUNDATION 

The California State College Foundation was established and incorporated in 
October 1959 to provide essential student and faculty services which cannot be 
provided from state appropriations; to supplement the program and activities 
of the college in appropriate ways; and to otherwise assist the college in fulfilling 
its purposes and in serving the people of the State of California — especially those 
of the area in which the school is located. 

Services provided by the foundation include the operation of various college 
auxiliary organizations including the bookstore, residence halls, and food service; 
business administration of scholarship and student loan funds; sponsored research 
programs; and certain institutes. 

The foundation’s overall policies are administered by a board of trustees made 
up of members of the college faculty, administration and community leaders. An 
advisory council to the foundation composed of leading industrial, scientific, busi- 
ness and civic leaders has also been established to provide the board with counsel 
and advice. 


3 & 


RESEARCH CENTERS AND CLINICS 


CENTER FOR ECONOMIC EDUCATION 

The Center for Economic Education is one of 24 such centers at colleges and 
universities in the United States working with the national Joint Council on 
Economic Education to expand economic understanding. Center programs include 
(1) services to schools and colleges, individual educators, and the community; (2) 
research and professional training, and (3) operation of an economic education 
information center. The center consists of a broadly based executive policy board; 
an administrative staff; and formally organized groups of participating users. 

CENTER FOR GOVERNMENTAL STUDIES 

The Center for Governmental Studies is pan of the Department of Political 
Science’s expanding research and teaching activities. Established in 1965, the center 
has four major functions: first, to collect and make available fugitive governmental 
and political materials; second, to assist local government agencies and citizen 
groups in the study of local governmental problems; third, to provide students with 
instruction and experience in research techniques and methodology; and fourth, 
to provide facilities for community institutes and seminars. 

REAL ESTATE RESEARCH AND PUBLICATIONS 

The college participates in a continuing research program, with special emphasis 
on urban development in Orange County. Studies are undertaken in cooperation 
with various public and private agencies, including the University of California 
at Irvine. In conjunction with the research program the college publishes a 
quarterly Urban Rerriew, which is distributed nationally and sponsored by the 
California Division of Real Estate. Opportunities exist for student participation 
in the various research activities. 


SPEECH AND HEARING CLINIC 

The College Speech and Hearing Clinic operates as a nonprofit California State 
College Foundation agency. In addition is an off-campus clinical program for 
graduate students that involves experiences within medical and paramedical set- 
tings. The primary purpose of the clinics both on campus and off campus is to 
provide opportunities for teaching, service and research. College students receive 
clinical experience and opportunity for observation. 


39 


STUDENT PERSONNEL SERVICES 


Student Personnel Services at the college are administered from the Office of 
Admissions and Records, the Office of Relations with Schools, the Counseling 
and Testing Center, the Activities and Housing Office, the Office of Placement 
Services, and the Student Health Center. Collateral responsibilities include foreign 
student advising, coordination of the California State Colleges international student 
programs, selective service and veterans’ affairs, and financial aids. Coordination 
of this general program rests with the dean of students. 

RELATIONS WITH SCHOOLS 

The Office of Relations with Schools administers a collegewidc program to articu- 
late college curricula with other colleges and schools and to offer preadmission 
guidance to prospective students, their parents, and school counselors. The college 
believes this program should be vigorously pursued so students may (1) choose 
the kind of college experience appropriate for them and (2) may have the proper 
academic preparation for the curricula of this college. 

STUDENT ACTIVITIES AND HOUSING 

ACTIVITIES 

The college recognizes the important role of student activities in education. 
The activities program represents a variety of areas intended to serve every student 
according to his interest, ability and available time. 

All registered students are members of Associated Students of California State 
College at Fullerton. The Associated Students are governed through the executive, 
legislative, and judicial branches of the Associated Students organization. The 
president and commissioners constitute the executive branch which has the responsi- 
bility for the development and administration of the program, including such 
activities as publications, drama, religious clubs, intercollegiate athletics, intramural 
athletics, forensics, and music. The Associated Students Senate has full responsi- 
bility' for legislation by which this program is directed and for the allocation of 
student funds for the program. The judicial branch senes as the legal body for 
interpretation of the constitution and enforcement of Associated Student policies. 

Student Organizations 

Student organizations arc encouraged and aided by the college whenever stu- 
dents express a desire for activities which add to their educational opportunities. 
As a relatively young institution, the development of new organizations to serve 
the needs of a growing student population is rapid. More than 50 organizations 
are now recognized, including one local and three national social fraternities, three 
local social sororities, departmental professional fraternities, and many service, spe- 
cial interest and religious groups. 

Student Publications 

The college newspaper, the Tit an Times , is published twice a week as a product 
of the journalism classes and financed by the Associated Students. In addition, a 
handbook is available for use by organizations in the development and operation 
of their program. The Titan Illustrated, a literary magazine, is also published by 
students. The yearbook, the Titan, published annually by the Associated Students, 
records the year's activities. 


40 


Housing 


Student News Bureau 

The Student News Bureau was organized in 1960 to provide the outside press 
with news of student activities on the campus. It is financed by a budgeted alloca- 
tion from Associated Students. 

Athletics 

The intercollegiate athletic program consists of teams in baseball, basketball, 
cross country, golf, gymnastics, soccer, swimming, tennis, track and field, water 
polo and wrestling. Football will be added to the program in 1969-70. A year-round 
program of intramural activities includes basketball, badminton, flag football, hand- 
ball, softball, tennis and wrestling, swimming and weight lifting. 

The college is not a member of an established athletic conference, but plans arc 
underway for membership in a conference which would be compatible with the 
aims and purposes of the college. Since the fall of 1965 all indoor home athletic 
contests have been played in the Titans* new Physical Education Building. 

In the spring of 1960, a group of Orange County citizens organized a Boosters 
Qub to help foster intercollegiate athletic competition at California State College 
at Fullerton. Its members arc dedicated to the encouragement of a sound program 
of athletics and contribute financially and by way of enthusiasm to helping to 
develop a first-rate athletic program based on a well-rounded concept of the rela- 
tionship between sports and academic achievement. All athletic teams compete 
under rules of the National Collegiate Athletic Assocation (NCAA). 

Intramural Activities 

The intramural program is conducted on a seasonal basis and involves a variety of 
athletic and recreational activities for both men and women. Rules and regulations 
which govern participation in the intramural program arc available in the Office 
of the Director of the Intramural Program or in the Office of Student Activities. 

Participation by women in extramural volleyball, basketball, tennis, and golf is 
provided through membership in the Extramural Coordinating Council of Southern 
California and the American Recreation and Athletic Federation for College 
Women. 

HOUSING 

The college provides housing for unmarried students in two modern residence 
halls. Designed for educational living, the halls have study areas plus lounge areas 
for speakers and discussion groups or meetings. Ample social and recreational 
facilities are available. 

Each room has its own private bath. The buildings are fully air conditioned and 
carpeted. The dining hall is between and attached to the two residence halls. 

The residence advisers and assistants of each hall promote a social, cultural and 
educational program which supports and expands the classroom experience. The 
resident has the opportunity to study, assume responsibility through hall govern- 
ment, and discuss serious topics of the day with guest speakers while in a healthful 
living situation. 

Because of the importance of the living arrangements to educational achieve- 
ment, California State College at Fullerton requires that all students under 21 
years of age who are not married must live either at home or in college-approved 
housing. Approved housing is at present limited to the residence halls, fraternities 
and sororities. 


41 


Student Health Services 


STUDENT HEALTH SERVICES 

The purpose of the Student Health Center is to help keep the student in class by 
providing high quality medical service early in the course of an illness, to provide 
a healthy and sanitary environment on campus in which to live and study, to 
stimulate better health awareness among the students, and to educate them to the 
high standards of good therapeutic and preventive care. 

The Student Health Center is in Room 580 of the Letters and Science Building 
and is open from 8 ajn. to 5 p.m. each weekday that classes arc in session. No staff 
is available for night or weekend services of any kind, and there arc no off-campus 
calls made at any time. Special care and time are given to sympathetic counseling 
of both emotional and physical problems. Several physicians and nurses are con- 
tinuously on duty during the day to care for emergencies and for the treatment 
of immediate illnesses and injuries. 

Among the services presently offered arc the following: 

1. Diagnosis and treatment of the usual medical and surgical problems. 

2. Physical examinations as required. 

3. Emergency care. 

4. Routine immunizations. 

5. Laboratory facilities. 

6. Followup care as may be recommended by the student’s private physician 
within the scope of available facilities. 

7. Electrocardiograms. 

8. Physical therapy treatment. 

9. Medical counseling. 

10. Psychiatric counseling and diagnosis. 

11. Specialists' diagnostic services when directly referred by the Student Health 
Center. 

All fees for care in the Student Health Center, unless otherwise specifically stated, 
have been prepaid by the State of California and by the student’s registration fee. 
All undergraduates and all graduates registering for more than 6 units of credit arc 
eligible for all or any of the health services offered. Emergency service is available 
to everyone on campus. 

Health , Accident, Hospital Insurance 

All students arc urged to carry this type of insurance. An excellent policy at a 
low premium is available to all students through the Associated Students’ Business 
Office. 

All students living in college-sponsored housing, and foreign students, are re- 
quired to be covered by this policy. 

PLACEMENT SERVICES 

A centralized Placement Office is maintained with responsibilities for assisting 
students in finding both part-time and career employment. The college believes 
that it best serves both the student and employers only when its graduates have 
been placed in the professions for which they are prepared and trained. 

Part-time Placement 

Students wishing part-time jobs either on or off campus are eligible to receive 
the assistance of the office if they are taking seven units or more. New students 
may receive service as soon as they have notice of their admission to the college. 
Secretarial skills are in great demand; but calls for schoolbus drivers, custodians, 
teacher aids, draftsmen, waiters, clerks, youth and recreation leaders, sitters, gar- 


42 


Counseling Center Services 


dcners, etc., arc received. If students must augment their resources while going to 
school they are encouraged to limit their work hours to approximately 10 per week. 

The college cooperates with the U.S. Department of Health, Education, and 
Welfare in providing work-study jobs. This program is made possible through the 
Economic Opportunity Act of 1964. Students who can establish “need eligibility’* 
may work up to 15 hours a week during the school year and up to 40 hours 
in the summer. Under this program there are on-campus opportunities such as 
library and instructional aides, clerks, buildings-and-grounds aides, computer center 
aides, and laboratory and research assistants. Off-campus jobs in nonprofit com- 
munity agencies include teacher aides, recreation leaders, office trainees, and ad- 
ministrative interns. A limited mnnbcr of these on- and off-campus positions are 
held open for incoming freshmen who qualify. 

Educational Placement 

Students in the teacher education, pupil personnel services, supervision, or admin- 
istration curriculum of the college, who are in the final semester of a credential 
program, or who arc in student teaching or directed field work, are eligible to 
register and receive the services of the Placement Office, chief of which is help in 
establishing a professional employment file. Such registrants arc supplied informa- 
tion in openings and helped to establish their candidacies in the school districts and 
educational institutions. 

Business , Industry , and Government Placement 

The Placement Office’s assistance to students seeking career employment in busi- 
ness, industry, or public service involves help in defining occupational preference, 
providing active job leads, making up resumes, and arranging interviews on and 
off campus. 


COUNSELING CENTER SERVICES 

Students who need assistance with such concerns as choosing an academic major 
or vocational goal, with study skills, or with personal problems affecting their 
academic progress may obtain help through the Counseling Center. The staff 
of professionally trained counselors has available a variety of resources including 
occupational information files, special testing materials, college catalogs, and di- 
rectories of various kinds to assist the student. 

The Counseling Center also maintains contact with agencies and professional 
persons in the community to whom students may be referred. 

Counseling services are available only to fully matriculated, registered students. 

Testing 

Testing programs are designed to serve a variety of purposes: 

1. The primary' purpose is that of giving instructional faculty and Counseling 
Center personnel supplementary' information to use in helping the individual 
student. 

2. Test results are also used to aid in the selection of students who arc applicants 
for admission to the college, and to various programs within the college. 

3. A third use is that of identifying students w'ho have deficiencies in specific 
skills, such as English usage and mathematics. 

Testing requirements for students seeking admission are listed in the admissions 
section of the catalog. Students seeking information about testing requirements for 
specific instructional programs should inquire in the appropriate instructional divi- 
sion or the Counseling Center. 


43 


Financial Aid 


Foreign Students 

Special services for* foreign students are coordinated by the foreign student 
adviser. These sendees include legal problems concerning visa status and em- 
ployment; orientation to academic procedures and requirements; advisement re- 
lated to finances, to social standards and customs; and to resources and oppor- 
tunities offered by campus and community. 

International Programs 

Information concerning study opportunities for American students in foreign 
universities is available in the Counseling Center. The foreign student adviser 
coordinates the selection of students applying for admission to one of the inter- 
national programs operated by the California State Colleges in eight foreign 
countries. 


FINANCIAL AID 

Scholarships 

A limited number of scholarships arc available for outstanding students. Qualified 
students should obtain scholarship applications from the Financial Aid Office, 
Room 270, Letters and Science Building, and return by April 15 for the fall semes- 
ter and December 15 for the spring semester. Scholarship applications are evalu- 
ated by the Financial Aids Review Committee. Awards arc based on scholastic 
record, financial need and personal qualifications. Some scholarships are limited 
to students majoring in specified disciplines. Departmental recommendations weigh 
heavily in such cases. 

Scholarships offered by California State College at Fullerton are made possible 
by interested organizations, business firms and individuals. Recent contributors to 
the scholarship program include: 

Aunt Jemima’s Pancake House, Disneyland 
Bert Noble Foundation 

California Congress of Parents and Teachers, Inc. 

California State Employees Association (CSCF Chapter) 

Edward Mittleman Memorial Scholarship 
Epsilon Lambda Chapter, Epsilon Sigma Alpha Sorority 
Fourth District, California Parents and Teachers Association 
Fullerton District Board of Realtors 
Fullerton Rotary Club 

Gamma Phi Beta Sorority (Orange County Alumnae) 

Kappa Delta Phi Sorority 

Kiwanis Club of Greater Fullerton 

Los Amigos Club of Fullerton 

Mu Phi Epsilon Scholarship Fund 

Music Teachers Association of Orange County 

Roberta King Maxwell Memorial Scholarship Fund 

Sadie Landon Memorial Music Scholarship Fund 

Sheryl Cummings Memorial Scholarship Fund 

Society of California Accountants (Orange County Chapter) 

Loans 

The generosity of organizations and individuals enables the college to offer short- 
term loans to students who meet unexpected financial difficulties of a temporary 
nature. Loans from these funds arc made for various periods of time and to specified 
categories of students, according to college regulations and the wishes of the 


44 


Financial Aid 


donors. The prime purpose of these loans is to meet educationally related expenses, 
and thus loans cannot be made for the purposes which are normally financed by 
private lending institutions. Application for a short-term loan may be made at any 
time during the school year. 

The following is a listing of the loan funds available during the 1966-67 school 
year: 

Altrusa Club of Fullerton Loan Fund 
Betty Casault Memorial Loan Fund 
Brea Rotary Club Loan Fund 

California Retired Teachers Association (Laura Settle Fund) 

Donna Cherry Memorial Fund 

Gordon S. Fyfe Memorial Loan Fund 

Juliann Ashford Memorial Loan Fund 

Kenneth G. Ryhal Memorial Loan Fund 

Laura E. Imhoff Memorial Loan Fund 

Marcella Fisk Memorial Loan Fund 

Michael R. Young Memorial Loan Fund 

National Defense Education Act Loan 

Newport Harbor Children’s Theater Loan Fund 

Pan-Hellenic Club of Northern Orange County Loan Fund 

Rotary Club of Fullerton, Foreign Students Loan Fund 

Soroptimist International Club of Fullerton Loan Fund 

Student Emergency Loan Fund 

Trust-Davis Memorial Loan Fund 

Wilma Doig Steen Memorial Loan Fund 

Zonta Club of Fullerton Loan Fund 

California State College at Fullerton joins with the federal government and the 
State of California in making long-term, low-interest loans available to students 
under the National Defense Education Act. Details and applications are available 
at the Financial Aid Office. Deadlines for submissions of applications arc December 
1 for the spring semester, April 1 for the summer sessions and July 15 for the 
fall semester. 

All unmarried first-time applicants for an NDEA loan arc required to file a par- 
ents’ confidential statement with the College Scholarship Service, Box 1025, Berke- 
ley 94701, designating California State College at Fullerton as one of the recipients. 
The parents’ confidential statement assists the college to evaluate financial need, 
and, since it must be on hand before the loan application can be acted upon, early 
submission is advised. These forms can be obtained at most secondary schools 
or at the Financial Aid Office. 

United Student Aid Funds 

Long-term loans are also available under the United Student Aid P'unds program 
to assist students who have completed their freshman year. United Student Aid 
Funds, Inc., a private, nonprofit corporation, will endorse loans to students upon 
recommendation by the college. 

A maximum of $1,000 per year, or a combined total of $3,000, may be borrowed 
for undergraduate or graduate education. The loan is repaid in 36 monthly install- 
ments, beginning the fifth month after the student leaves school. Maximum interest 
rate is 6 percent simple. Applications and additional information are available at 
the Financial Aid Office. 


45 


Financial Aid 


California State Guaranteed Loan Program 

The college cooperates with the State of California and private lending institu- 
tions in making guaranteed loans available to full-time students. A loan recipient 
under this program must meet the following qualifications: 

a. be a legal resident of California 

b. have an adjusted family income of less than $15,000 per year 

c. be a full-time student 

d. be enrolled and in good standing at the college or accepted for enrollment. 
The interest on these loans may not exceed 6 percent per annum on the unpaid 

balance. The United States Office of Education will pay all interest while the 
student is enrolled as a full-time student and 3 percent thereafter. Repayment 
ranges from 5 to 10 years following graduation, according to arrangements made 
with the lender. Applications and further information may be obtained from the 
Financial Aid Office, Room 270, Letters and Science Building. 


46 


ADMISSION AND 
REGISTRATION 


ADMISSION TO THE COLLEGE 

REGISTRATION 
ACADEMIC ADVISEMENT 















ADMISSION TO THE COLLEGE 


Requirements for admission to California State College at Fullerton are in accord- 
ance with Title 5, Chapter 5, Subchapter 2 of the California Administrative Code 
as amended by the Board of Trustees of the California State College on January 
21, 1965. A prospective applicant who is unsure of his status under these require- 
ments is encouraged to consult with a school or college counselor or the college 
admission office. 


ADMISSION AS A FRESHMAN 

An applicant who has had no college work will be considered for admission 
under one of the following provisions. Except as noted, submission of the results 
of the Scholastic Aptitude Test (SAT) or the American College Test (ACT) is 
required. 


California High School Graduates and Residents 

An applicant who is a graduate of a California high school or a legal resident 
for tuition purposes must have a grade point average and total score on the SAT 
or composite score on the ACT which provides an eligibility index placing 
him among the upper one-third of California high school graduates. For 1967-68 
the minimum elgibility index is 3,072 using the SAT (741 with the ACT). It is 
computed by multiplying the grade point average by 800 and adding the result 
of the total SAT score, or by multiplying the grade point average by 200 and 
adding the result to 10 times the composite ACT score. The grade point average 
is based upon the last three years and docs not include physical education or 
military science. The table below does not cover every case, but gives several 
examples of the test score needed with a given grade point average to be eligible 
for admission. 

Grade point average SA T/A CT needed 


3.20 and above 
2.80 
2.40 
2.00 

1.99 and below 


Eligible with any score 
832/19 
1152/27 
1472/35 
Not eligible 


Nonresidents Graduating From High Schools in Other States or Possessions 
An applicant who is a nonresident for tuition purposes and who is a graduate 
of a high school in another state or a U.S. possession must have an eligibility 
index which would place him among the upper one-sixth of California high school 
graduates for 1967-68. The minimum required eligibility index is 3,402 using 
the SAT (826 with the ACT) and is calculated as in the previous section. 


Graduates of High Schools in a Foreign Country 

A graduate of a foreign high school must have preparation equivalent to that 
required of eligible California high school graduates. The college will carefully 
review the previous record of all such applicants and only those with promise 
of academic success equivalent to that of eligible California high school graduates 
will be admitted. Such applicants are not required to take either the SAT or the 
ACT tests. Ordinarily, the college does not accept foreign student applicants 
directly from foreign countries. 


49 


Admission of Undergraduate Transfers 

Non-high-school Graduates 

An applicant who is over 21 years of age, but has not graduated from high 
school, will be considered for admission only when his preparation in all other 
ways is such that the college believes his promise of academic success is equivalent 
to that of eligible California high school graduates. 

High School Students 

A student enrolled in high school as a senior will be considered for enrollment 
in certain special programs if he is recommended by his principal and his prepara- 
tion and ability are such that in the judgment of the college, the probability 
of his academic success is equivalent to that required of eligible California high 
school graduates. Such admission is only for a given program and does not 
constitute the right to continued enrollment. Such applicants are not required 
to take cither the SAT or the ACT test. 

Other Applicants 

An applicant not admissible under one of the above provisions should enroll in 
a junior college or other appropriate institution. Only under the most unusual 
circumstances will such applicants be permitted to enroll in the college. Permis- 
sion is granted only by special action. 

Recommended Preparation 

Overall excellence of performance in high school subjects and evidence of 
academic potential provide the best bases for predicting success at California State 
College at Fullerton. While no course pattern is required, the applicant to be 
prepared properly to undertake a full program of studies and particularly to 
pursue the required program in general education, is strongly encouraged to 
include the following subjects in his preparation for college work at Fullerton: 
college preparatory English; foreign language; college preparatory mathematics; 
college preparatory laboratory science; college preparatory history or social science, 
or both; and study in speech, music, art, and other subjects contributing to a 
general academic background. 


ADMISSION OF UNDERGRADUATE TRANSFERS 

An applicant who meets the requirements for admission with freshman standing 
and who has earned credit in one or more accredited junior colleges, colleges, or 
universities may be admitted if he has a grade-point average of 2.0 (grade C on a 
five-point scale) or better in the total program attempted at such colleges or 
universities and is in good standing at the last degree-granting college or university 
attended. 

An applicant who does not meet the requirements for admission with freshman 
standing must as a condition for admission have earned 60 or more units of college 
credit with a grade-point average of 2.0 (grade C on a five-point scale) or better 
in the total program attempted and must be in good standing as noted above. 

An applicant who does not meet the requirements set forth above is eligible 
for admission on probation with advanced undergraduate standing if, in the opinion 
of the proper college authorities, he is likely to succeed in an academic program. 

Ordinarily, consideration for probationary admission is granted only to the 
mature applicant who, while his total college record does not meet the admission 
requirements, has demonstrated good academic ability through recently com- 
pleted college w'ork elsewhere. 


50 


Readmission of Former Students 


ADMISSION OF GRADUATE STUDENTS 

An applicant who has completed a four-year college course and holds an 
acceptable baccalaureate degree from an accredited institution, or who has 
completed equivalent academic preparation as determined by the college, will be 
admitted as an unclassified graduate student. Such admission docs not constitute 
acceptance to graduate degree curricula. For information about requirements and 
procedures for admission to graduate degree courses of study (classified graduate 
status) see page 70 of this catalog. 


ADMISSION OF FOREIGN STUDENTS 

At the present, the college usually does not accept foreign student applicants 
directly from foreign countries, with certain very rare exceptions. Only two cate- 
gories of foreign students will normally be accepted: 

(1) Those who have completed a two-year transfer program in a junior college 
in the United States with a good academic record. 

(2) Those who have completed a bachelor s degree in an accredited college in 
the United States and wish to enroll as graduate students. 

Application procedures are the same as for other students, except that foreign 
language transcripts must be accompanied by certified English translations. 


THE SUMMER SESSION STUDENT 

Although the quality of the program and most of the course offerings are the 
same as in the regular session, the college does not require an advance application 
or transcripts from students registering for credit courses in the summer session. 
However, students must be high school graduates and are expected to have satisfied 
the prerequisites for the courses in which they register. Admission to summer 
session does not grant admission to the regular session. 


READMISSION OF FORMER STUDENTS 

A student previously enrolled in the college, planning to return after an absence 
l of one or more semesters, must file a new application for admission in accordance 
I with procedures set forth below. The application fee of $5 is required if the 
[student was not enrolled in either of the two semesters prior to the semester to 
■ which he is seeking admission or if he was enrolled in another institution during 
I his absence from California State College at Fullerton. Unless a leave of absence 
was granted, catalog requirements at the time of readmission will apply. 

Former Students in Good Standing 

A student who left the college in good standing will be readmitted provided 
> any academic work attempted elsewhere since the last attendance does not change 
( his scholastic status. Transcripts of the record of any work attempted in the 
j interim are required. 

Former Students Who Were on Probation 

A student on probation at the close of his last enrollment will be readmitted 
on probation provided he is otherwise eligible. The student must furnish tran- 
; scripts of any college work taken during his absence. 


Procedures for Admission 


Former Students Who Were Disqualified 

The readmission of a previously disqualified student is by special action only. 
Ordinarily the college will consider an application for reinstatement only after 
the student has remained absent for a minimum of one semester following dis- 
qualification and has fullfilled all recommended conditions. In every instance, 
rcadmission action is based on evidence, including transcripts of study completed 
elsewhere subsequent to disqualification, which in the judgement of the college war- 
rants such action. If readmitted, the student is placed on scholastic probation. 


PROCEDURES FOR ADMISSION 

All prospective students, whether for part-time or full-time programs of study 
in day or evening classes, must file an application for admission and other required 
documents not later than the announced deadline. Applicants must be formally 
admitted to the college to enroll in classes. Because of probable enrollment limi-' 
tations prospective students are advised to file applications for admission earlier 
than the announced deadline. 

How to apply: 

1. Submit a completed application for admission accompanied by the required 
application fee of $5. 

2. Request transcripts of record of all previous scholastic work from each 
school or college attended to be sent directly to 

Office of Admissions and Records 
California State College at Fullerton 
800 North State College Blvd. 

Fullerton, California 92631. 

The transcripts required arc 
— for lender graduates — 

(a) the high school transcript, and 

(b) a transcript from each college or university attended; 

— for graduates — 

(a) applicants for unclassified graduate standing with no degree or cre- 
dential objective must submit a transcript from the college or uni- 
versity where the baccalaureate was earned; 

(b) applicants for a masters degree or a teaching credential must submit 
two copies of the transcript from the institution where the bacca- 
laureate was earned and one copy from each other college or uni- 
versity attended; 

(c) applicants for both a master’s degree and a teaching credential must 
submit three copies of the transcript from the institution where the 
baccalaureate was earned and two copies from each other college 
or university attended. 

All transcripts must be received directly from the issuing institution to be 
considered official and cannot be returned to the student. 

3. If required, submit the scores from either the Scholastic Aptitude Test or 
the American College Test. Scores are required for all undergradute appli- 
cants with fewer than 60 completed semester units of study (90 quarter 
units). 

4. Submit the required health forms. 

5. Complete a statement of residence. 

52 


Procedures for Admission 


Admission to Credential Programs 

Admission to the college as a student does not constitute admission to the teaching 
credential program. Students who plan to work toward teaching credentials must 
apply to the School of Education during their first semester of attendance. Details 
are available from the School of Education. 

Cancellation of Admission 

A student who is admitted to the college for a given semester but who does not 
register in the specified semester will have his admission canceled. The student must 
file a new application form when he again seeks admission and must follow the 
complete application procedure and meet the then current admission requirements. 

Honors at Entrance 

Honors at entrance arc awarded to both freshmen and transfer students who 
have demonstrated outstanding achievement in past academic work. For first-time 
freshmen with no previous college units earned, a grade-point average of 3.5 on a 
5-point scale must be earned in the coursework considered for admission to the 
college. Students who have completed fewer than 60 college semester units of credit 
must meet the grade-point average criteria for first-time freshmen and must also 
have earned a 3.5 grade-point average on all this past college work attempted. 
Students who have completed 60 or more semester college units are eligible if a 
grade-point average of 3.5 is earned in all college work completed. 

Undergraduate Entrance Testing Requirements 

All undergraduate students, who have completed fewer than 60 semester or 90 
quarter units of college work, are required to submit scores from either one of 
two national testing programs before eligibility for admission to the college can be 
determined. This requirement does not affect undergraduate students who have 
previously attended California State College at Fullerton and who have submitted 
ACT or SAT scores at the time of their first admission. 

Tests will be administered at established test centers. Dates that tests are given 
and location of established test centers may be obtained from high school and 
junior college counseling offices, the Testing Office at this college (Room 264, 
Letters and Science Building), or by writing to the testing services. The addresses 
of the testing services are: 

American College Testing Program, P.O. Box 21-4127, Sacramento 95821 
College Entrance Examination Board, Box 1025, Berkeley 94701 

T o take one of these tests: 

1. Obtain a registration form and a Student Information Bulletin from your high 
school or junior college counselor, from one of the addresses above, or from 
the College Testing Center (Room S-264). Select a test center near your 
home from the list printed in the Bulletin. 

2. Send the completed registration form and the appropriate test fee to the 
proper address. Do not send to the Fullerton campus. 

3. Have your ACT or SAT scores reported to the Testing Center, California 
State College at Fullerton. These scores should be received before the deadline 
for application. Use the appropriate code number for score reports. 

If you have already taken either the ACT or SAT send $1 to the appropriate 
testing agency and request that your scores be reported to the Testing Center. 
Use appropriate code number when requesting such reports, and provide complete 
information concerning testing date, test center, name and address changes, etc. 
These test scores when included on high school or college transcripts are not 
acceptable. 


53 


Evaluations 


Health Requirements for Admission 

Undergraduate and graduate students registering for more than six units of 
credit must, upon admission, submit completed health history and physical exam- 
ination forms. In addition, evidence of a negative chest X-ray taken within 12 
months before their registration must be presented. A tuberculin skin test may be 
obtained in lieu of an X-ray without cost at the Student Health Center. Evidence 
of a smallpox vaccination within the past five years is also required. 

Undergraduate and graduate students registering for six units or less of credit in 
any one semester must comply with the following: 

1. Filing a minimum informational form with the health center. 

2. Presenting evidence of a negative chest X-ray or a negative tuberculin skin 
test, signed by a physician, nurse, or public health department official and 
dated not more than 12 months prior to the date of registration at Cali- 
fornia State College at Fullerton. 

3. Evidence of a smallpox vaccination within the past five years. 

All health requirements must be satisfactorily completed before the student 
will be allowed to pay his fees at registration. It is urged that the health clearance 
be obtained before the date of registration as this will conserve the student’s regis- 
tration time in considerable measure. 


EVALUATIONS 

Evaluation of Transfer Credits 

The Office of Admissions will evaluate previous college work in terms of its 
relationship to the requirements of California State College at Fullerton. All degree 
and credential candidates will be issued a credit summary, usually during the first 
semester of attendance, which serves as a basis for determining specific remaining 
requirements for the student's specific objectives. 

Once issued to a student, the evaluation remains valid as long as the student en- 
rolls at the date specified, pursues the objective specified, and remains in con- 
tinuous attendance. The student will not be held to additional graduation re- 
quirements unless such requirements become mandatory as a result of changes in 
the California Administrative Code or the California Education Code. If the 
student does not remain in continuous attendance and has not applied for and been 
granted a formal leave of absence, the evaluation issued upon readmission will 
specify the remaining requirements for the student’s specific objectives. 

In view of the foregoing regulations, the student should notify the Office of 
Admissions immediately if he changes the objective specified in his evaluation. 
While the evaluation for a student remains valid, the student is held responsible 
for complying with all changes in regulations and procedures which may appear 
in subsequent catalogs. 

Acceptance of Credit 

Credit for work completed at accredited institutions will be accepted toward 
the satisfaction of degree and credential requirements at the college within limi- 
tations of residence requirements, junior college transfer maximums, and course 
applicability. 

General Policy 

Transfer credit is not limited to those courses which precisely parallel the 
courses offered at the college. Credit is normally granted for all courses completed 
at other accredited institutions which reasonably correspond to one of the various 
curricula described in this catalog. Courses which do not appear to correspond 


54 


Evaluations 


with offerings at the college are ordinarily not granted transfer credit. Courses 
in vocational or shop-type courses, and remedial courses are examples of courses 
not accepted for transfer credit. Students who have completed work at professional 
schools in the field of art or music or similar fields may expect a reduction in credit 
if the work completed carries a credit value in excess of that normally allowed for 
corresponding courses or areas at the college. 

Transfer of Credit From a Junior College 

Upper division credit is not allowed for courses taken in a junior college. Cre- 
dential credit is not allowed for courses in professional education taken in a junior 
college. This does not invalidate credit for preprofessional courses taken at a 
junior college, such as introduction to education, art or design, arithmetic, or music 
for classroom teachers. After a student has completed 70 units of college credit, 
whether at a junior college or a four-year institution, or at both, no further 
junior college units will be accepted for unit credit. 

Credit for Military Service 

Students who have been in active military service for at least a year may be 
granted six units of undergraduate credit. Courses taken in service schools may be 
given credit on the basis of an evaluation which determines that they are of 
college level. Any credit for military experience will be given only upon request. 
Records verifying such experience must be filed with the Office of Admissions. 

Credit for Extension and Correspondence Courses 

The maximum amount of credit through correspondence and extension courses 
which may be allowed toward the bachelor’s degree is 24 units, of which not more 
than 12 may be transferred from another college or university. 

Credit by Advanced Placement 

Students who have successfully completed courses in the advanced placement 
program (defined as receiving a score of 3, 4 or 5) shall be granted credit toward 
graduation, advanced placement in the college’s sequence courses, and credit for 
curriculum requirements. 

Credit by Examination 

Students may be granted credit for a course toward graduation and to meet 
curriculum requirements by the satisfactory completion of a challenge examina- 
tion in that course requirement. The examinations arc to be comprehensive and 
administered by the department in which the course is offered. Well in advance 
of the challenge examination the student will secure written approval of his major 
adviser and the chairman of the department in which the course is offered. Upon 
the successful completion of the examination, the notation on the permanent 
record of the student will be made as “CR” for the course. “CR” is to indicate 
credit for the course with a passing grade. Upon failure of the examination, the 
notation on the permanent recoru of the student will be made as “No CR” for 
the course. Credit by examination may not be used to fulfill the minimum resi- 
dence requirements. The challenge examination for any course may be attempted 
only once. A maximum of 30 credits can be earned by challenge examination , 
including those achieved by advanced placement. 


55 


REGISTRATION 


Orientation 

An orientation program for new students is conducted at the beginning of the 
registration period each semester. At this time, information relating to academic 
planning, student services and activities, and other aspects of college life as well 
as opportunities for student questions are provided. 

Registration 

Registration is the final step in enrollment. When a student has been admitted by 
the Office of Admissions, he should obtain a Class Schedule before the beginning 
of each term. The Class Schedule contains details regarding courses offered and 
the registration schedule. Students consult with their advisers during registration. 

At registration, every student is required to file a program card with the Office 
of the Registrar. The filing of a program card by the student and its acceptance 
by the college obligates the student to perform the designated work to the best 
of his ability. All undergraduates arc urged to declare a major at the earliest 
practicable time and not later than at the time they have completed 60 units of col- 
lege work. Registration is not official until fees have been paid, and no student is 
allowed to attend classes until all steps in the registration process have been com- 
pleted. 

Late Registration 

The last day to register late each semester will be announced in the Class 
Schedule. Late registrants will find themselves handicapped in arranging their pro- 
grams and must pay a $5 late registration fee in addition to regular fees. 

Change of Program 

Each student is responsible for the program of courses he selects and lists when 
he registers. Changes may not be made thereafter without the filing of a change 
of program form in the Office of the Registrar. All applications for courses 
dropped or added cost a SI change of program fee. No classes may be dropped 
during the last two weeks of instruction, although complete withdrawal from col- 
lege is still possible. 

Concurrent Enrollment 

A student enrolled at the college may enroll concurrently for additional courses 
at another institution only with advance written approval from the student’s aca- 
demic adviser on official forms filed in the Office of the Registrar. Permission 
will not be granted when the study load in the proposed combined program 
exceeds the units authorized at this college. 

Auditors 

A properly qualified student may enroll in classes as an auditor. The student 
must meet the regular college admission requirements and must pay the same fees 
as other students. An auditor may not change his registration to obtain credit 
after the last date to add courses to the study list. An auditor is not permitted 
to take examinations in the course. 


56 


Fees and Expenses 


VETERANS 

California State College at Fullerton is approved by the Bureau of Readjustment 
Education, State Department of Education, to offer programs to veterans seeking 
benefits under state and federal legislation. All students seeking veterans benefits 
must have a degree or credential objective. 

Applications for benefits should be filed well in advance of the semester in which 
the veteran plans to use these benefits in order to have the authorization at the 
time of registration. 


SELECTIVE SERVICE 

Male students requiring certification of student status for selective service purposes 
may request the Office of Admissions and Records to submit SSS Forms 103, 109, 
or 109A, to their local boards. The college requires that undergraduate students 
register for and complete 12 units a semester to be considered full time for this 
purpose. Graduate students who register for and complete nine units of study 
may be considered full time provided at least three units are 500-level courses. 

All students are advised that by enrolling each consecutive term at the mini- 
mal level to qualify for full-time certification they may not achieve the degree 
and credential programs within the time limit allowed by the Selective Service 
System. 


FEES AND EXPENSES 

Application fee (nonrefundable) $5.00 

Registration Fees 

Regular students (more than 6 units) 

Materials and service fee $45.00 

Associated Students fee 9.00 

College Union fee 6.00 


Total per semester $60.00 

Limited students (1-6 units) 

Materials and service fee... $22.50 

Associated Students fee — 4.00 

College Union fee 3.00 


Total per semester $29.50 

Music studio lesson fee 

Per semester $70.00 

Summer Session fees 

Per unit or fraction of unit $19.75 

Associated Students fee 2.00 

College Union fee 3.00 

Extension fees 

Per unit or fraction of unit $13.00-26.00 


57 


Fees and Expenses 


Other Fees or Charges 

Nonresident tuition fee (in addition to fees required of resident students, 
except for enrollment in extension or summer session) 


15 units or more per semester — vjw.w 

Less than 15 units, per unit or fraction of unit 20.00* 

Nonresident foreign students (in addition to fees required of resident 
students) 

15 units or more per semester — $127.50 

Less than 15 units, per unit or fraction of unit 8.50 

Late registration fee (in addition to other fees listed above) 5.00 

Check returned from bank for any cause 2.00 

Change of program fee - L00 

Transcript fee (no charge for first copy) LOO 

Failure to meet administrative required appointment or time limit 2.00 


Auditors pay the same fees as others 

Fees are subject to change by the Trustees of the California State Colleges 

Refund of fees 

Upon withdrawal from college, the materials and service fee may be refunded 
if written application for refund, on forms provided by the college, is submitted 
to the Registrar not later than 14 days following the day of the term that instruction 
begins; provided that the amount of $2 shall be retained to cover the cost of 
registration. Late registration fees, change of program fees and application fees are 
not refundable. 

The entire fee may be refunded if a student is unable to continue his registration 
because of a college regulation or because of compulsory military service. Applica- 
tion for refund under such circumstances may be made at any time before the 
date when the student receives any academic credit for the courses for which he 
is registered. 

The difference between the applicable materials and service fee, less $2, may be 
refunded if the unit load of the student is reduced to a lower materials and service 
fee category within the 14 days following the day of the term that instruction 
begins. 


Parking fees 

Per semester (nonreserved spaces) : 

Semester pass $13.00 

Coin-operated parking gate — per admission .25 

Summer session 

6-week period 5.00 

4- week period 3.00 


Typical Student Expenses 

Although each student must determine his own budget in keeping with his 
individual needs and resources, the college does provide an estimate for what is 
considered one semester’s minimum expenses for a single student. Not included 
are transportation costs, since distance from home varies with each student. 

* Nonresident tuition fee subject to increase by an amount not yet determined, effective July 1, 
1967. 


58 


Fees and Expenses 


Students living 
in campus Commuting 

residence halls students 


Materials and service fee * $45 $45 

Associated Students fee ~ 9 9 

Parking and health insurance fees — 22 22 

Room and board (17 meals per week) 530 

Books and supplies t 60 60 

Clothing 50 50 

Miscellaneous 100 100 

College Union fee 6 6 


$822 $292 


* Out-of-state students add $300. Music students add $70 for music lesson fee. 
t Art students should budget additional funds for supplies. 


59 


ACADEMIC ADVISEMENT 


All undergraduate students working toward a degree or credential are assigned 
an adviser in the major field. Those seeking a credential will also be assigned a 
professional adviser in the School of Education. 

Graduate students in all instructional areas except education will be assigned a 
major adviser. In education, all will have a professional adviser. Those students 
seeking a credential for teaching secondary schools will be assigned both a pro- 
fessional adviser and a major adviser. 

Advisers are assigned by department chairmen. The adviser is basically a resource 
person who will help the student plan his academic program so that he meets the 
requirements of the major or credential objective in the most desirable manner. 
While the adviser can provide valuable information and suggestions to the student, 
the ultimate responsibility for the program the student plans and the courses he 
chooses lies with the student himself. 


60 


REGULATIONS 


GENERAL REGULATIONS 
GRADUATION REQUIREMENTS FOR 

BACHELOR’S DEGREE 
THE PROGRAM OF MASTER’S DEGREES 













GENERAL REGULATIONS 


ENROLLMENT DEFINITIONS AND REGULATIONS 

Unit of Credit 

Each college semester unit represents three hours of college work per week for 
one semester. Courses arc of three types: 

(1) Lecture — one hour in class plus two hours of study. 

(2) Activity — two hours of class plus one hour of study. 

(3) Laboratory — three hours in class. 

Some courses may combine two or more of these types. 

Classification in College 

Undergraduate students who have completed 0-29 Vi semester units of work are 
classified as freshmen, 30-59 Vi semester units as sophomores, 60-89 Vi semester units 
as juniors, and 90 or more as seniors. 

Study List Limits 

A student is normally permitted to enroll in a maximum of 16 units each semester 
(engineering students are excepted), with 12 units considered the minimum full- 
time load. However, upon written approval of his adviser, the student may carry 
additional units. The foregoing limits apply to students who are attending college 
on a full-time basis. Students with outside responsibilities are strongly advised to 
reduce their program of study. 

Undergraduate Students Taking Graduate Level Courses 

Graduate level (500) courses are organized primarily for graduate students. 
Undergraduate students may be permitted to enroll in a graduate level (500) 
course if: 

(a) They are within 9 units of completion of graduation requirements, or 

(b) They are exceptionally qualified seniors whose undergraduate work in the 
related field or fields has been of 3.5 grade-point average or better, and 
whose cumulative overall grade-point average is at least 3.25. 

Such cases shall require specific approval by the chairman of the department in 
which the course is offered and by the chairman of the student’s major department. 

Graduate level (500) courses taken under (a) above may be applied to a gradu- 
ate program. 

Graduate level (500) courses taken under (b) above may be applied to the under- 
graduate program only. 


GRADING PRACTICES 

Grading System 

Satisfactory grade 
A 
B 

C 

Cr 

Unsatisfactory grade 

D 1 

F 0 


Grade-point value 

4 

3 

2 

None assigned 


63 


Transcripts 


Special grade Grade-point value 

E (Incomplete) 0 

AU (Auditor) (no credit toward degree or credential) None assigned 

W (Passing withdrawal) None assigned 


With the exception of the grades of E, AU, W, and Cr, all units attempted are 
computed in the student’s grade-point average. 

Incomplete Work 

A grade of E may be given only when, in the opinion of the instructor, a stu- 
dent cannot complete a course during the semester of enrollment for reasons be- 
yond bis control. Such reasons are assumed to include: illness of the student, or 
of members of his immediate family, extraordinary financial problems, loss of out- 
side position, and other such exigencies. In assigning a grade of E, the instructor 
will file with his department a statement of the specific requirements for comple- 
tion of coursework. Such requirements will not include or necessitate retaking 
the course. This statement will also include a provisional grade indicating the 
quality of work completed at that time, and the instructor’s designation of the time 
limit allowed for completion of course requirements. Upon later completion of the 
course requirements, or upon expiration of the time limits for completion of course 
requirements, the instructor shall initiate a change to a grade of A, B, C, D, or F. 
Instructional departments will determine procedures for completion of course 
requirements and assigning grades for such completed course work, in those spe- 
cial circumstances where the instructor is no longer available. 

Grade Reports to Students 

A report of the final grades assigned in classes is sent to each student at the end 
of each semester. 

Student Writing 

Students will be required to demonstrate, in all classes where written expression 
is appropriate, their ability to write clearly and correctly about the materials of 
the course. Ability of a student to demonstrate writing proficiency shall be used 
as a part of the final grade determination in any course. 

Examinations 

Final examinations are required in all courses and arc given at times scheduled 
by the college. No examination may be scheduled for a class at another time unless 
approved by the dean of the school. No makeup final examination will be given 
except for reason of illness or other verified emergencies. 

Repetition of Courses 

When a course is repeated, the units and grade points of the repetition are 
included in the grade-point average in addition to the units and grade points of 
the original course. When a course is repeated, where the original grade was 
passing, the repetition will carry no subject or unit credit toward a degree or cre- 
dential. Grade point deficiencies incurred in courses completed at California State 
College at Fullerton may not be made up by courses taken at other colleges. 

TRANSCRIPTS 

Upon request to the Office of the Registrar, each student will be provided with 
one official copy of his college record without charge. A charge of $1 will be made 
for each additional transcript requested by the student. No transcript will be 
supplied for college work taken in other institutions. 


64 


Continuous Residency Regulations 

CONTINUOUS RESIDENCY REGULATIONS 

Good Standing 

“Good standing” indicates that a student is eligible to continue or to return, and 
is free from financial obligation to the college and from disciplinary action. A 
student under academic or disciplinary disqualification is not eligible to receive a 
statement of “good standing” on transcripts issued by the college. 

Election of Regulations 

A student remaining in continuous attendance in regular sessions and continuing 
on the same curriculum in a state college may, for purposes of meeting graduation 
requirements, elect to meet the graduation requirements in effect either at the time 
of his entering the curriculum or at the time of his graduation therefrom, except 
that substitutions for discontinued courses may be authorized or required by the 
proper college authorities. 

Leave of Absence 

A student may petition for a leave of absence and if approved may upon his 
return continue under the catalog requirements that applied to his enrollment 
prior to the absence. Except in the case of required military service a leave of 
absence may be granted for a maximum of one year. Illness and compulsory 
military service arc the only routinely approved reasons for a leave of absence. 

Policy on Grades for Withdrawal 

Withdrawal from, or neglect of, any course entered in the program card, or a 
change of program (including a change of section of the same course) without the 
formal permission of the Office of the Registrar, may result in a grade of F. 

Through the sixth week of instruction in the semester, the grade for formal 
dropping of a class will be an automatic W. Beginning with the seventh week, 
students are expected to complete all courses. However, if the student must drop 
a course, because of ill health or other unforeseen problems beyond his control 
prohibiting his normal attention to the course, he may do so and receive a W if 
(a) he is doing satisfactory work in the course and (b) he has the written approval 
of the instructor in the course, and (c) he formally drops the class in the Office 
of the Registrar. 

No classes may be dropped during the last two weeks of instruction, although 
complete withdrawal from college will still be possible. 

Complete withdrawal from the college follows the above regulations except that 
written approval of the instructor is not required. 

If, because of unusual circumstances, the student does not comply with the above 
regulations, he may receive a grade of W, if he was doing satisfactory work when 
he ceased attending class, by one of the following procedures: 

(a) By the initiation by the instructor of the class of a withdrawal; 

(b) By initiation by the student of a petition for withdrawal with the written 
permission of the instructor. 

Complete Withdrawal From College 

Students who wish to withdraw from the college must complete a withdrawal- 
from-college card. See section on refund of fees for possible refunds. No student 
may withdraw after the date shown on the college calendar as the last day of 
instruction. 


65 


Student Honors 


STUDENT HONORS 

Dean's List 

Academic achievement is recognized with the publication each semester of a list 
of students whose grade-point average for the previous term has been 3.5 or better. 
Students are notified in writing by the dean of students when they have earned 
this distinction. Eligibility is based on a minimum of 12 units of course work. 

Honors at Graduation 

Honors at graduation have been defined by the Faculty Council in three classi- 


fications: 

With honors GPA 3.5 

With high honors.. GPA 3.85 

With highest honors GPA 4.0 


STUDENT DISCIPLINE 

Academic Probation 

Academic probation serves to identify and to bring to the attention of appro- 
priate college authorities a student who is experiencing academic difficulties. 

A student shall be placed upon academic probation if either his cumulative grade- 
point average or his grade-point average at California State College at Fullerton 
falls below 2.0 (grade of C on five-point scale). The student shall be advised of 
probation status promptly and, except in unusual instances, before the end of the 
first week of instruction of the next consecutive enrollment period. 

A student shall be removed from the probation list and restored to good standing 
when he earns a cumulative grade-point average of 2.0 (C) in all academic work 
attempted, and in all such work attempted at California State College at Fullerton. 

Academic Disqualification 

A student on academic probation shall be subject to academic disqualification if: 

1. As a lower division student (fewer than 60 semester hours of college work 
completed) he falls 15 or more grade points below a 2.0 (C) average on all 
college units attempted or in all units attempted at this college. 

2. As a junior (60 to 89/2 semester hours of college work completed) he falls 
9 or more grade points below a 2.0 (C) average on all college units attempted 
or in all units attempted at this college. 

3. As a senior (90 or more semester hours of college work completed) he falls 
6 or more grade points below a 2.0 (C) average on all college units attempted 
or in all units attempted at this college. 

A graduate student (unclassified or classified) shall be disqualified if he falls 
below a 2.0 (C) average in all units attempted at this college as a graduate student. 

Student Conduct 

The college properly assumes that all students are in attendance to secure a sound 
education and that they will conduct themselves as mature citizens of the campus 
community. Compliance with not only the common law but with all regulations 
of the college is therefore expected. If, howxver, on any occasion a student or an 
organization is known to have compromised accepted standards of conduct and 
good taste, appropriate disciplinary action must be taken by authorities of the 
college. Conduct which is prejudicial to the good name of the institution by any 
student or student group will not under any circumstances be tolerated or over- 
looked. Every effort will be made to encourage and support the development of 


66 


Right of Petition 


self-discipline and control by students and student organizations. The dean of 
students, aided by all members of the faculty and advised by the Student Affairs 
Committee of the faculty, is responsible to the President of the College for the 
behavior of students in their relationships to the college. The President in turn 
is responsible to the Chancellor and the Trustees of the California State Colleges 
who themselves are governed by specific laws of the State of California. 

RIGHT OF PETITION 

Students may petition for review of certain college academic regulations when 
unusual circumstances exist. In such instances, students are requested to file a 
petition on a form designated for this purpose in the Office of Admissions and 
Records. All petitions must first be reviewed and signed by the student’s adviser. 
Action will then be taken on the petition and the student will be notified of this 
decision. A copy of the action will also be placed in the student’s folder in the 
Office of the Registrar. 

Students also have the right to appeal certain disciplinary actions taken by 
appropriate college authorities. Regulations governing original hearings and appeal 
rights and procedures have been carefully detailed to provide maximum protection 
to both the individual charged and the college community. Information about the 
operation of the judicial system involving student discipline may be obtained in 
the Office of the Dean of Students. 


67 


GRADUATION REQUIREMENTS FOR 
THE BACHELOR'S DEGREE 


A student is eligible for graduation if he is in good standing and fulfills the 
following requirements: 

7. General Education 

To be eligible for the bachelor’s degree from California State College at Fuller- 
ton, the candidate shall have completed a minimum of 50 semester units of general 
education including at least six units in upper division courses. The courses in 
general education shall be distributed in the following manner: 

Units 

(a) Social sciences 12 

The social sciences shall include required instruction in U.S. history 
(Hist 170A or Hist 170B), U.S. Constitution and California state and 
local government and American ideals (Pol Sci 100 or a combination of 
Pol Sci 101 and Pol Sci 311), and courses in anthropology, economics, 
geography, history, political science, sociology, and similar fields. 
Courses must be selected from three or more of these fields. 

(b) Natural sciences 9 

The natural sciences shall include at least one course selected from the 
physical sciences and at least one from the biological sciences. The 
physical sciences include astronomy, chemistry, geology and physics. 

The biological sciences include biology, botany, physiology and zoology. 

(c) Humanities 12 

The humanities shall include a year of instruction in college-level Eng- 
lish composition and literature. The remaining units may be chosen 
from the following subject fields: comparative literature, communica- 
tions, English, philosophy, and advanced courses in French, German, 
Spanish, or other foreign languages. 

(d) Fine and applied arts 9 

The fine and applied arts shall include a course in oral communication. 
Additional courses shall be chosen from the following subject areas: 
art, drama and music. 

(e) Psychology 3 

This should be the standard introductory course in psychology. 

(f) Economics or mathematics 3 

Either a course in college mathematics which would have as its pre- 
requisite a minimum of two years of high school mathematics or its 
equivalent, or a college-level introductory course in economics will 
meet this requirement. 

(g) Health and physical education 2 

A minimum of two units required by completing four semesters of ac- 
tivity courses which include instruction in health education. Not more 
than one activity course within any one semester may be counted 
toward general education. Credit in intercollegiate athletics courses 
may meet not more than two semesters of the college general educa- 
tion requirement in physical education. Not more than six units of 
credit in physical education activities courses, including intercollegiate 
athletics, may be applied toward credit for graduation. (A student 


68 


Bachelor's Degree 


under 25 years of age at the time of admission to the college is required 
to take all four semesters of the requirement.) 

Units 

Total - — 50 

(The above requirements apply to all students who began college-level work 
in any institution in or after the fall semester of 1963. Students who began college- 
level work before the fall semester of 1963 must complete the general education 
requirements outlined in Title 5 of the California Administrative Code.) 

All baccalaureate degree programs of the college will be expected to meet the 
college general education requirements. However, for certain degree programs, 
other than the bachelor of arts degree, where accreditation or certification may 
require a higher proportion of professional course work, the general education 
requirements as set forth by Title 5, California Administrative Code, may be sub- 
stituted for the college general education requirements, after due consideration 
of the alternative possibility of expanding the required number of units in the 
particular degree program. 

2 . Units 

(a) Total units 

A minimum of 124 semester units is required for graduation with a bachelor 
of arts degree. The Bachelor of Science in Engineering requires a minimum 
of 136 semester units. 

(b) Upper division units 

Completion of a minimum of 40 units of upper division credit is required. 

(c) Resident units 

Completion of a minimum of 24 semester units in residence is required. At 
least one-half of these units must be completed among the last 20 semester 
units counted toward the degree. Extension credit, or credit by examination, 
may not be used to fulfill the minimum residence requirement. 

3 . Scholarship 

(a) A grade-point average of 2.0 or better is required on all units attempted, 
including those accepted by transfer from another institution. 

(b) A grade-point average of 2.0 or better is required on all units in the major. 

(c) A grade-point average of 2.0 or better is required on all units attempted at 
California State College at Fullerton. 

4. Major 

Completion of all requirements for a major as specified by appropriate college 
authority is required. 

5 . Minor 

Completion of a minor field is not required for the baccalaureate degree at this 
time. 

6. Graduation Requirement Check 

A candidate for graduation should file an application for a graduation require- 
ment check in the Office of the Registrar by the end of the fifth week of the 
semester prior to the semester in which he expects to graduate. No graduation 
requirement check should be requested unless and until the senior has completed 
100 semester hours and a substantial portion of his major requirements (including 
the current work in progress). If the candidate does not complete the require- 
ments in the semester indicated, he must request a second graduation check indi- 
cating the new date. 

7 . Approval and Recommendation by the Faculty of the College 


69 


THE PROGRAM OF MASTER'S DEGREES 


Master’s degree programs offered at California State College at Fullerton are 
listed on page 77 and arc described in the appropriate section of this catalog 
under “College Curricula.” The programs also are described in the Graduate 
Bulletin , copies of which are available in the Office of Admissions and the Grad- 
uate Office. 

Master’s degrees in other areas are under consideration and will be announced 
when and if approved. 

General Requirements for the Master's Degree 

General requirements for the master’s degree are 30 semester units of approved 
course work completed with a 3.0 (B) minimum grade-point average and within 
seven years. Of the 30 units of approved course work: 

1. No less than 12 shall be in exclusively graduate (500-series) courses. 

2. No more than a total of six shall be in extension and/or transfer credit. 

3. Nor more than six shall be allowed for a thesis, though a thesis is optional 
in some programs. 

Some type of final evaluation, near the end of the student’s work toward his 
master’s degree, is required. It may be a thesis, a project, a comprehensive exami- 
nation, or any combination of these. 

These requirements, except for that concerning “final evaluation,” are drawn 
from the California Administrative Code and apply to all master’s programs in 
all the California State Colleges. Each master’s degree program has its own 
special requirements. 

Steps in the Master's Degree Program 
J. Admission to the College 

Every student who wishes to begin work at California State College at Fullerton 
or to resume work after an interruption of one semester or more must apply 
for admission to the college. A student who begins graduate work not later than 
the semester succeeding the date of his graduation (baccalaureate) from CSCF 
need not apply for admission; he is a continuing student. The admission procedure 
is described elsewhere in this catalog. 

Once a student who has a bachelor’s degree is admitted to CSCF, he is auto- 
matically an unclassified graduate student. To become a classified student — that is, 
one who has been accepted into a master’s degree program — he must undertake 
certain further steps and satisfy certain further requirements as listed below. 

2. Declaration of Objective 

“Objective” is the particular master’s program the student wishes to enter and 
within that program the particular concentration or emphasis, if any. A student 
may declare his objective by filling in the appropriate space on the application 

form for admission to the college. If he has not done so, or if he is a continuing 

student (or if he has changed his objective), he may declare his objective by 
filling out a change of objective card in the Graduate Office. 

3. Securing Transcripts 

Before a student’s undergraduate preparation for a master’s degree program can 
be evaluated, his adviser must have access to the transcripts of the student’s pre- 
vious academic work. It is the student’s responsibility to write to all of the insti- 
tutions of higher learning in which he has previously registered, requesting that 


70 


Master's Degree 


a transcript of his record at each institution be sent to the CSCF Office of Ad- 
missions and Records. These copies are over and above the transcript from the 
institution conferring the baccalaureate degree, required for admission to the col- 
lege. A continuing student must request the Office of Admissions and Records 
to relay to the department of the degree program a transcript of his CSCF record. 

4. Taking Tests 

Every master’s program requires the student to take certain tests — usually some 
part of the Graduate Record Examination — before he can be considered for classi- 
fied status. (See program descriptions in this catalog for the types of tests re- 
quired.) The GRE tests are nationally administered and are given only a few 
times a year on specified dates. They may be taken at CSCF — through the services 
of the Office of Counseling and Testing — on only certain dates during the year. 
Those dates may be ascertained at the Office of Counseling and Testing or depart- 
mental offices. The student must make written application for the tests on a form 
available at the above offices and he must do so rot less than 15 days before the 
test is to be given. Since test results are measured against those of students who 
normally take the tests in their senior year and since they are required before the 
student can be admitted to a degree program (that is, become a classified student), 
the taking of the tests should not be deferred. 

There is no arbitrary level above which scores on tests are satisfactory. In 
making their decisions on a student’s eligibility for a master’s degree program, 
departmental graduate committees consider a combination of factors including, 
besides test scores, the student’s undergraduate record and his performance in 
such postgraduate courses as he may have taken. 

Steps three and four should be taken as soon as possible and may be taken 
before the student registers for his first postgraduate courses. Unless he takes the 
steps , the student cannot be classified , and he can have no surety that the courses 
he takes before he is classified will be retroactively applied to his program for 
the master's degree. 

5. Informal Advisement 

This step is necessary only for students who wish to enroll in or who have 
enrolled in postgraduate courses before securing transcripts and taking required 
tests. It is accomplished by the student’s making an appointment with a graduate 
adviser at the appropriate departmental office. The kind of counsel an adviser can 
give at this point is necessarily tentative and cannot be construed as establishing a 
contract between department and student. If the student brings his own copies of 
transcripts with him to the conference, his adviser can be more specific in his 
suggestions, but he can make no formal decisions on the basis of “hand-carried” 
transcripts. 

6. Application for Classified Status 

When the student has allowed sufficient time for his transcripts to arrive and 
no sooner than thirty days after taking his required tests, he should fill out an 
application for classified graduate status card in the Graduate Office and make 
an appointment through the appropriate departmental office with a graduate ad- 
viser. In the ensuing conference the first and, if feasible, both of the following 
processes will be accomplished. 

a. Evaluation of the student's prerequisites and assignment of courses 
required, if any, to remove deficiences. 

Generally a student must have the equivalent of a CSCF undergraduate 
major in his intended field before he can be admitted to a master’s degree 
program. Most departments also require a specified undergraduate grade-point 
average in either major or all course work. If the student lacks certain courses 


71 


Master's Degree 


they will be listed on a form, a copy of which will be sent to the student. 
If the student’s undergraduate GPA is below standard, he may be allowed to 
take certain courses, listed on the same form, in which he must cam a B 
average before his entering a master’s program. Coursework undertaken to 
satisfy quantitative or qualitative deficiencies cannot be applied toward a 
master’s degree. Provisions for the student’s fulfilling certain other depart- 
mental requirements, if any, such as foreign language competence, will be 
made. 

b. Drawing up a study plan of coursework and other requirements leading 
to the master's degree. 

The student will work out with his adviser a study plan on which the courses 
or types of courses that he will take are listed. The student will be sent a copy 
of the approved study plan and copies will be filed in the Graduate Office 
and the department office. 

The above processes may be accomplished in one meeting if the student need 
make up no deficiencies or if the amount of prerequisite work is so limited that 
it may be undertaken concurrently, and at the earliest opportunity, with work on 
the master’s program. If his deficiencies arc extensive but remediable he must 
remove them through successful completion of assigned coursework, after which, 
in another meeting, he may work out a study plan with his adviser. If his defi- 
ciencies, in test results as well as in quality of previous coursework, are such that 
he may be ineligible to enter a master’s program, his case will be considered by 
an appropriate departmental committee and he will be notified of their decision. 

After the above processes are completed a departmental committee will act on 
the student’s request for classified status and forward their recommendation to 
the Dean of Graduate Studies, who gives final approval. The student will be 
notified through the Graduate Office of the committee’s decision. In no case will 
a student be recommended for classified status if bis GPA in all the postgraduate 
coursework that he may have undertaken at CSCF is below 3.0. 

7. Advancement to Candidacy 

Upon completion of 12 units of coursework on his master’s degree study plan 
the student should apply for advancement to candidacy by filling out an advance- 
ment to candidacy card in the Graduate Office. A departmental committee will 
review the student’s record and recommend to the Dean of Graduate Studies. 
The student will be notified whether his application has been approved, deferred, 
or denied. Bases for approval are a minimum grade point average of 3.0 in 
coursework on his study plan and satisfactory progress in such other require- 
ments as the department may impose, such as thesis or project. 

8. Successful Fulfillment of Study Plan Requirements 

The student must complete the courses shown on his approved study plan on 
file in the Graduate Office and the department office (as described under No. 6) 
with at least a 3.0 GPA. 

If a student wishes to make a change in his study plan he should file the 
appropriate form in the department of his major prior to registration. The form 
must be signed by his adviser. (Forms may be obtained in the Graduate Office 
and in the department offices.) No course may be removed from a study plan 
after the student has completed it. 

If a student approaches the end of his master’s career with less than a 3.0 average, 
he may request a change in his study plan, as above, to add no more than 6 units 
of coursework to his study plan to extend his chances of attaining a 3.0 average. 


72 


Graduate Policies and Procedures 


If a student’s average at any time falls below such a level that it cannot be raised 
to a 3.0 within the prescribed limits of course work, he has in effect withdrawn 
himself from his master’s program. 

9. Final Steps 

At the beginning of his last semester or session, the student must fill out a request 
for graduation check card at the Graduate Office. He must also have consulted 
with his adviser concerning the fulfillment of thesis and project requirements 
(if any) and make arrangements for taking his comprehensive examination. Upon 
the student’s successful completion of all requirements the departmental committee 
and the Dean of Graduate Studies will recommend the awarding of the degree. 

GRADUATE POLICIES AND PROCEDURES 

Graduate Credit for Seniors 

Students in the last semester of their senior year may petition on a form available 
in the Office of Admissions and Records to receive postgraduate credit for such 
current coursework as is not required for the bachelor’s degree. 

A senior may take a 500-series course if he is within nine units of completion 
of graduation requirements and with the specific approval of the chairman of the 
department in which the course is offered and by the chairman of the student’s 
major department. If he is not within nine units of graduation, he may take a 
500-series course only if in addition to the approval of appropriate chairmen he 
has a minimum overall GPA of 3.25 and of 3.5 in the field or fields of his intended 
graduate program. If he is not within nine units of graduation he may not get 
postgraduate credit for a 500-series course. 

Inapplicable Courses 

Courses numbered 100 to 299 cannot be credited toward a master’s degree. Courses 
numbered 300 to 399 do not give graduate credit unless included on an approved 
graduate study plan. 

Admission From Nonaccredited Schools 

A student who is a graduate of a nonaccredited school must apply for admission 
as an undergraduate to complete requirements for a bachelor’s degree from this 
institution. However, once admitted, a student in this category who gives evidence 
of unusual promise and superior background may petition the department con- 
cerned for reclassification as an unclassified graduate student, and if the petition 
is granted he may then proceed in the graduate program. 

W aiver of Prerequisites 

Graduate students of unusual promise, who have not met the normal master’s 
degree undergraduate prerequisites in the designated major, may, under careful 
review and procedures, be admitted to master’s degree programs, providing they 
demonstrate this unusual promise by substantial evidence that they are superior 
in background to those who normally qualify. Consult the Graduate Office for 
details. 

Courses Over Seven Years Old 

Students who desire to have courses over seven years old included in the 30 units 
of a study plan for the master’s degree may petition to departmental graduate 
studies committees for a comprehensive examination in the relevant course or 
subject field. 


73 


Standards for Graduate Study 

Graduate Assistantships 

There are a limited number of appointments as graduate assistants available to 
outstanding graduate students who are working on graduate degree programs. 
These may pay up to $1,100 per semester. If interested, consult the chairman of 
the department in which degree study is being taken. 

Theses 

When a thesis is required, the approved original copy must be taken to the 
Cashier’s Office (S238) where arrangements will be made first to have the thesis 
sent to University Microfilms for microfilming and for the publication of the 
thesis abstract in Master's Abstracts and later to have the thesis bound. The fee 
for microfilming and publication of the abstract is $18; the fee for binding is 
$7.50. Both the bound copy and the microfilm will be deposited in the College 
Library, the first for circulation and the second for a permanent record. 

Waiver of Nonresident Tuition Fee 

Worthy graduate students who are not residents of California may, under certain 
circumstances, obtain a waiver of the nonresident tuition fee. Inquiries should be 
directed to the Admissions and Records Office or the financial aids officer. 

4 

Minimum Full-Time Load 

Ordinarily, nine units of course work a semester shall constitute a minimum 
full-time program for graduate students, provided at least three units arc in 500- 
level or higher courses. 

Second Master's Degree 

A graduate student desiring to work for a second master's degree from CSCF 
must request the department concerned and the Graduate Council for permission 
to enter a curriculum leading to the second master’s degree. If the request is 
granted the student must as a minimum satisfy all prerequisites and all require- 
ments of the new degree program. Approval of candidacy for the second degree 
w ill be given only after the first degree has been awarded. 

International Study 

The college participates in the California State Colleges’ program of study abroad. 
Under this program, limited studies taken at designated foreign universities, when 
arranged in advance, may be applied toward the requirements of a degree aw arded 
by CSCF. It is important that plans be completed several months before starting 
such a program. For details consult the foreign student adviser. 

Sec general policies stated elsewhere, particularly ‘‘Leave of Absence,” “Election 
of Regulations,” “Concurrent Enrollment,” “Incomplete Work,” and “General 
Course Numbering Code.” 

Policies and procedures are subject to change/ by proper college authority. 
Students should consult class schedules and other official announcements for 
possible revision of procedures stated herein. 

STANDARDS FOR GRADUATE STUDY 

Graduate study deals with more complex ideas and demands more sophisticated 
techniques, searching analysis, and creative thinking than undergraduate study. The 
research required is extensive in both primary and secondary sources and the 
quality of writing expected is high. Reading, writing, and thinking time for a 
graduate course is half again as much as for an undergraduate course. The student 
is advised, therefore, not to undertake more graduate work than he can do full 
justice to. 


74 


COLLEGE 

CURRICULA 















COLLEGE CURRICULA 


California State College at Fullerton offers the following baccalaureate degree 
programs which are described on the pages listed : 


Page 

B.A. Anthropology 81 

B.A. Art 82 

B.A. Biological science 86 

B.A. Business administration 130 

B.A. Chemistry 89 

B.A. Communication 92 

B.A. Comparative literature 94 

B.A. Drama 96 

B.A. Economics 135 

B.S. Engineering 1 159 

B.A. English 98 

B.A. French ; 100 

B.A. Geography 102 



Page 

B.A. German 

100 

B.A. History 

103 

B.A. Linguistics 

105 

B.A. Mathematics 

106 

B.A. Music 

109, 111 
114 

B.A. Philosophy 

B.S. Physical education 

154 

B.A. Physics _ 

115 

B.A. Political science 

117 

B.A. Psychology - _ - 

119 

B.A. Sociology 

122 

B.A. Spanish 

100 

B.A. Speech 

124 


The following master’s degree programs are offered: 


Page 

M.A. Art 84 

M.A. Biology 88 

M.B.A. Business administration 132 

M.A. Drama 97 

M.A. Economics 136 

M.S. Education (with emphasis in 
school administration or 

school counseling) 153 

M.S. Engineering 163 


Page 


M.A. English 99 

M.A. Foreign languages 101 

M.A. History 104 

M.A. Music 113 

M.A. Political science 118 

M.A. Psychology 120 

M.A. Social sciences 121 

M.A. Sociology 123 

M.A. Speech 126 


The college is accredited by the California State Board of Education for pro- 
grams leading to the following credentials: 

1. Standard teaching credential with specialization in elementary school teaching. 

2. Standard teaching credential with specialization in secondary school teaching. 

3. Standard teaching credential with specialization in junior college teaching. 

4. Standard teaching credential with specialization, in lieu of minor, in the 

teaching of exceptional children in the area of mentally retarded children. 

5. Standard teaching credential with specialization, in lieu of minor, in the 

teaching of exceptional children in the area of speech and hearing handicapped 
children. 

6. Standard designated services credential with a specialization in pupil person- 
nel services. 

7. Standard supervision credential. 


77 





















LETTERS, ARTS, 
AND SCIENCE 







SCHOOL OF 
LETTERS, ARTS AND SCIENCE 

Dean: Miles D. McCarthy 


DEPARTMENT OF ANTHROPOLOGY 

Professor: Untereiner (chairman) 

Assistant Professors: Christensen, Joesink-Mandeville, Ledcr, See 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN ANTHROPOLOGY 

The major in anthropology is designed for students desiring a broad generalist 
background, students preparing to become teachers of social sciences, and students 
preparing for graduate work in anthropology and in advanced areal and inter- 
national specializations. 

Unit Requirements 

The required minimum for the major is 45 units, in addition to those taken for 
the general education requirement, distributed as follows: 

Courses in Anthropology 

Thirty-three units must be taken in anthropology, 24 in upper division courses. 
Anthropology 201, 202, 203, 301, 401, 410 and 480 are required. Two courses are 
required from areal offerings in the field: Anthropology 321, 325, 328, 340, 345, 
347, 350, and 360. Two courses are required from thcoretical/institutional courses 
in the field: Anthropology 406, 411, 413, 415, 421, 423, 425, 428, 430, 450, and 460. 
Minimum units 33 

Related Courses 

Twelve upper division units are to be taken in the related social science fields 
of economics, geography, history, political science, sociology, and psychology, to 
be approved by the major adviser. Advanced work in biological science, the fine 
and applied arts, and the humanities may be substituted for these units by stu- 
dents with specialized interests with the approval of their advisers. Students inter- 
ested in specializing in anthropological linguistics are urged to take courses from 
the college’s interdisciplinary program in linguistics. Students interested in special- 
izing in physical anthropology are urged to take some of the following Biological 
Science courses: 161 Principles of Zoology; 312 Genetics; 361 Mammalian Anatomy 
and Physiology; 424 Evolution; 463 Comparative Vertebrate Anatomy; 465 Ani- 
mal Ecology; and 471 Natural History of the Vertebrates. Students interested in 
specializing in primitive art are urged to take many of these Art courses: 411 
Oceanic Art; 412 Art of Non-European Africa; 413 Art of North American In- 
dians; 414 Art of Mesoamerica; 415 Art of Central and South Ame sta. 

Minimum units — 12 

Minimum total units for the major 45 

Students considering advanced professional careers in research, teaching, or 
applications of anthropology are urged to explore and sample widely from course 
offerings in the other social sciences, the biological and natural sciences and the hu- 
manities and arts. Through a judicious selection of these courses it is hoped that 
Anthropology’ majors will broaden their interests and diversify and develop their 
skills in working towards a variety of individualized career objectives. 


81 


Art 


Teaching Minor in Anthropology 

The minor in anthropology is intended as a second field for persons completing 
a major in another discipline in preparation for a teaching credential. Twenty-one 
units must be taken in anthropology; 15 of these in upper division courses. An- 
thropology 201 or 203 and 202 and 301 arc required. Two additional courses 
must be selected from areal offerings in the field. Anthropology" 321, 325, 328, 
340, 345, 347, 350, and 360. Another course must be selected from theoretical/insti- 
tutional courses in the field: Anthropology 406, 410, 411, 413, 415, 421, 423, 425, 428, 
430, 450, and 460. A final course must be cither Anthropology 401 or 480. 

Graduate Work in Anthropology 

The Anthropology Department is offering its first graduate courses this year. 
Anthropology now becomes eligible as one of the fields in the Master of Arts in 
Social Sciences. 


DEPARTMENT OF ART 

Professor: Dietz, Hein, Ivy (Chairman), Olsen, Partin 
Associate Professor: Samuelson, V. Smith 

Assistant Professor: Evjenth, Gleeson, Jeffries, Kerciu, McSherry, Wu 
Instructor: Jordan, Sullivan 

The Department of Art offers a program which includes the several fields of 
art history, theory, and appreciation, the fine arts (drawing, painting, and sculp- 
ture), the applied arts (general and specialized design and crafts), and art educa- 
tion. The broadest objective of the program is to contribute to the intellectual, 
social, and creative development of the learner as he prepares himself for citizen- 
ship in a democratic society. More specifically, the art program provides opportu- 
nities for students: (1) to develop a knowledge and understanding of those general 
principles of visual organization and expression basic to all forms and fields of art; 
(2) to develop a critical appreciation and understanding of historical and con- 
temporary art forms through a study of these principles as they relate to the range 
of artistic production of mankind; (3) to use these general principles as a means 
to express more clearly their ideas, thoughts, and feelings in the creation of visual 
forms; (4) to develop those understandings and skills needed to pursue graduate 
studies in the field, to teach art in the schools, or to qualify for a position in 
business and industry as an art specialist. 

Undergraduate curricula leading to the bachelor of arts degree have been de- 
signed to meet the specialized needs of the following groups: (1) students who 
wish to study art as an essential part of their personal and cultural development; 
(2) students seeking vocational competence in art; (3) students planning to teach 
art at the secondary level who wish either a teaching major or minor in art; and 
(4) students planning to teach in the elementary schools who wish to have art as 
either an academic major or minor. 

To qualify fr- a baccalaureate degree with a major in art, students must have 
a C average in il courses required for the degree. No credit toward the major 
will be allowed for specific major courses in which a grade of D is obtained. As 
is customary, the Art Department reserves the right to hold projects completed by 
a student for class credit for a period of three years. 


82 


Art 


MAJOR IN ART FOR THE BACHELOR OF ARTS DEGREE 

Five course programs have been planned to meet the individual needs and in- 
terests of students working for the bachelor of arts degree with a major in art. 

In the development of specific course offerings which make up these programs, 
it has been the concern of the art faculty to see that each program contains: (1) 
basic courses in art history, theory, appreciation, and studio practice which have 
as their primary focus the study of those general principles of visual organization 
and expression underlying all fields of art; (2) more specialized courses which pro- 
vide for adequate preparation in depth in a single field of art. The teaching of art 
history, theory, and criticism is not confined to courses bearing that title. Rather, 
each studio course involves theory as well as the practice of art, includes as part 
of its content the study and reference to related historical art forms, and has as part 
of its purpose the development of those critical abilities which are necessary to a 
valid evaluation and appreciation of the art expressions of man. 

Plan I provides for an emphasis in the area of art history, theory, and apprecia- 
tion and is particularly recommended for those students who wish to pursue gradu- 
ate studies in art history or museology. 

Plan II is designed for those students who prefer a studio-type program with an 
area of specialization selected from the following: (1) design; (2) crafts; (3) draw- 
ing and painting, or (4) sculpture. 

Plan III is for those students who wish to meet the requirements of the standard 
teaching credential with specialization in secondary teaching. 

Plan IV is for those students who wish to meet the requirements of the standard 
teaching credential with specialization in elementary teaching. 

Plan V is for those students who wish to meet the requirements for teaching 
in junior college. 

All five plans require a minimum of 48 units in art or approved related courses 
with a minimum of 24 units of upper division in art except for Plan IV which re- 
quires a minimum of 36 units of art including a minimum of 24 units of upper 
division in art. 

In addition to the requirements listed below for the major, students must meet 
the other college requirements for a bachelor of arts degree (see page 69). Stu- 
dents following Plans III and IV also must meet any specific requirements for the 
desired teaching credential (see section in catalog for School of Education). 
Graduate students who plan to meet the requirement for a standard teaching cre- 
dential with specialization in secondary school teaching with a major in art must 
complete six units in art as approved by the major adviser on and beyond the 
specific course requirements listed in Plan III before they can be recommended 
by the Art Department for student teaching. 

Students following Plan III divide their student teaching between two semesters 
and register for three units of credit each semester. (See prerequisites and course 
description for Art Education 749.) 

PLAN I: ART HISTORY AND APPRECIATION EMPHASIS 

Units 

Lower Division: Art history and appreciation (9 units); art structure (3 
units); approved electives (12 units) in: art, anthropology, drama, foreign 

languages, history, literature, music or philosophy 24 

Upper Division: Art history and appreciation (24 units), including a minimum 
of 3 units in special studies and coverage of four of the following fields: 
primitive, classical, medieval, renaissance, baroque, modem, Oriental, 

American 24 

Reading knowledge of one modern foreign language 
Comprehensive examination in art history 

83 


Art 


PLAN II: STUDIO EMPHASIS 

Lower Division: Art history and appreciation (9 units); drawing and paint- 
ing including life drawing (9 units); design and crafts (6 units) 24 

Upper Division: Art history and appreciation (6 units) ; area of specialization 
(12 units) ; art electives (6 units) 24 

PLAN III: TEACHING EMPHASIS 
(Secondary) 

Lower Division: Art history and appreciation: Art 201 A, B (6 units); Art 111 
(3 units); drawing and painting: Art 107A, B (6 units); Art 117 A, B, C # 
(3 units); design: Art 103, 104 (6 units); crafts: 106A (3 units); required elec- 
tive: Communications 218A, Introduction to Photography (2 units) 24 

Upper Division: Art History and appreciation: Art 401, 402 or 312 (3 units); 
drawing and painting: Art 307A (3 units); design Art 313A, 323A and 453A 
(8 units); sculpture: Art 316A (3 units); crafts: Art 305A (3 units); upper 
division art electives (4 units) 24 


PLAN IV: Teaching Emphasis 
(Elementary) 

Lower Division: Basic course in art history and appreciation, drawing and 

painting including life drawing (1 unit), design and crafts 12 

Upper Division: Art history and appreciation (6 units); drawing and painting 
(3 units); design (3 units); crafts (3 units); electives (9 units) 24 

PLAN V: TEACHING EMPHASIS 
(Junior College) 

Lower Division: Same as Plan II. 

Upper Division: Same as Plan II. 

See Junior College Teacher Education Program page 146. 

MINOR IN ART FOR THE BACHELOR OF ARTS DEGREE 

A minimum of 24 units is required for a minor in art for the bachelor of arts 
degree of which a minimum of 10 units must be in upper division courses. In- 
cluded in the program must be a basic course in each of the following areas: (1) 
art history and appreciation; (2) design; (3) drawing and painting; and (4) crafts. 
Those students planning to qualify for a standard teaching credential with special- 
ization in elementary or secondary teaching and art for a minor must obtain ap- 
proval from the Art Department for the courses selected to meet the upper divi- 
sion requirements for a minor in art. 

MASTER OF ARTS DEGREE IN ART 

The program of studies leading to the master of arts degree in art provides a 
balance of theory and practice for those who desire to teach art or wish to develop 
a sound basis for continued advanced work in this field. The program offers each 
student the opportunity to expand his intellectual and technical resources and to 
acquire greater richness and depth in terms of creative understanding and achieve- 
ment in one of the following areas of concentration: (1) art history and appreci- 
ation; (2) drawing and painting; (3) crafts; (4) design; and (5) sculpture. 

* Art 319 (3 units) may be substituted for Art 117 A, B, C. 


84 


Art 


Prerequisites for the Program 

Prerequisites to the program include: 

(1) an undergraduate major in art or 24 units of upper division art including at 
least 12 units of upper division study in the elected area of concentration with 
a GPA of 3.0 or better; 

(2) a committee evaluation of the student’s background and record in art, in- 
cluding the presentation of a portfolio of representative work by the student; 

(3) completion not later than the first semester of the aptitude test of the Graduate 
Record Examination 

Program of Studies 

The degree program requires 30 units of graduate study approved by the student’s 
graduate committee of which 15 must be 500 level courses. The 30 units are 
distributed as follows: 

Units 

1. 500 level courses in art 15-21 

A. Core courses in art, history, philosophy, analysis and criticism 9 

(1) Art 500: Graduate Seminar in Art (3 units) 

(2) Art 501: Graduate Seminar in Art History and Apprecia- 
tion (6 units) 

(On the recommendation of the adviser, the student may 
substitute 3 units in Philosophy 311, Philosophy of Art, or 
a 400 number art history course as partial fulfillment of this 
requirement.) 

B. Course work in the area of concentration selected from one of 

the following areas 6 

(1) Art history and appreciation 

(2) Drawing and painting 

(3) Crafts 

(4) Design 

(5) Sculpture 


C. Project or thesis 3-6 

2. Additional courses 9-12 

A. 500- and/or 400-level courses in art to extend the student’s field 

in depth 3-6 

B. 500-, 400- and/or 300-level courses either in courses outside the 


art department related to the student’s special area of interest 
or in courses within the art department outside the area of 
concentration to expand the student’s field in breadth 6 

Total 30 

All courses must be completed with a B average, and all courses in the area of 
concentration must be graded B or better. 

Also see “Steps in the Master’s Degree Program,” page 70. 


85 


Biological Science 

DEPARTMENT OF BIOLOGICAL SCIENCE 

Professors: McCarthy,* McCleary, Sutton (chairman) 

Associate Professors: P. Adams, Barish, Bradshaw, Brattstrom, Rothman 
Assistant Professors: Greenfield, McClanahan, Wagner, Walkington 

The Department of Biology offers a program leading to the bachelor of arts 
degree in biology for students preparing to enter graduate and professional schools, 
for those preparing to teach, and for those preparing for careers in industry and 
government service. 

It is the conviction of the faculty in biology that the purposes of all these stu- 
dents can best be served by building their curricula on a core of courses funda- 
mental to the science of biology. This core curriculum includes biological prin- 
ciples, genetics, microbiology, and physiology. 

In considering the curricula beyond this core of subjects, the faculty in biology 
has agreed that the interests and goals of individual students can best be satisfied 
through individual counseling rather than through prescribed programs. After dis- 
cussion with their advisers, students will elect those upper division courses which 
will satisfy their individual interests and professional goals. Eight units of electives 
must be in one area of interest (e.g., biology, botany, microbiology, or zoology) 
and four units in another area. 

To qualify for a baccalaureate degree in biological sciences, students must have a 
C average in all courses required for the major including those in the related 
sciences. A proficiency in one modern foreign language (Russian, German, French, 
others by petition) is required. A reading comprehension of a second modern 
foreign language is strongly recommended for students planning graduate study 
leading to the Ph.D. degree. This requirement is normally met by completing 
three semesters of a college foreign language with a C grade or better or by taking 
a foreign language for two years in high school and one semester of intermediate 
language in college with a minimum of a C grade in the college course. 

No credit toward the major will be allowed for specific major courses in which 
a grade D is obtained. 

Advanced students will be permitted to enroll in Biological Science 499, Inde- 
pendent Study. All full-time upper division students are expected to attend the 
departmental seminars. 

The Department of Biology also offers a curriculum for students majoring in 
other fields who wish to minor in biology’. 

BACHELOR OF ARTS DEGREE IN BIOLOGICAL SCIENCE 

One hundred twenty-four units including general education § (see page 69), 
foreign language, 37 units in biology courses, and supporting courses in physical 
sciences and mathematics. The supporting courses must include one year of inor- 
ganic college chemistry including qualitative analysis with laboratory, one semester 
of organic chemistry with laboratory, one semester of college mathematics, and 
one year of college physics with laboratory .+ 

* College administrative officer. 

§ Transfer students should have completed as many of the general education courses as possible 
before admission. However, uncompleted units may be satisfied while the upper 
division work is in progress by concurrent enrollment at a junior college or with appropriate 
courses offered at the college. 

t Those students seeking careers in biology at the Ph.D. level and careers in medicine should 
take a full year of organic chemistry, a year of analytical geometry and calculus, and 
quantitative chemistry with laboratory. 


86 


Biological Science 


Minimum Course Requirements for the Major t 

Lower Division 

Biological Science Units 

111 Principles of Biology — 4 

141 Principles of Botany 4 

161 Principles of Zoology 4 


12 


Upper Division 

Biological Science Units 

311 Microbiology 4 

312 Genetics Lecture 3 

315 Molecular Biology 4 

Electives — 14 units, of which 4 must be a course in Ecology 
and 4 must be outside area of emphasis 14 


12 


25 25 


37 

SUGGESTED EIGHT-SEMESTER PROGRAM OF MAJOR IN BIOLOGICAL SCIENCE 


Semester I 

Units 


Engl 101 Comp, and World Lit. 3 
Bio Sci 101 or 111 Prin. Biology 4-5 

Chem 101 A Gen. Chemistry' 5 

Lang 203 or Hist 170A 
U.S. History 3 


15-16 

Semester III 

Physics 221 A or Physics 211 A .— 4-5 

Bio Sci 161 Prin. Zoology 4 

Pol Sci 100 or other General 

Education Course 3 

Math HOB or elective 4 


15-16 

Semester V 

Bio Sci 311 Gen. Microbiology. 4 
Chem 301A, 302A Organic 

Chem. 4 

Bio Sci — upper div. elective 4 

General education _ 3 


15 

Semester VII 

Bio Sci — upper div. electives 8 

For Lang or electives 5 

General education 3 


16 


Semester II 

Units 


Engl 102 World Lit. and Comp. 3 

Bio Sci 141 Prin. Botany 4 

Math 150A, or Math 120 ... 3-4 

Chem 101B Gen. Chemistry 5 


15-16 

Semester IV 

Physics 22 IB or Physics 2 1 IB 4-5 

Bio Sci 315 Molecular Biol. 4 

Bio Sci 312-312L Genetics 4 

General Education 3 


15-16 

Semester VI 

Chem 301B, 302B Organic 

Chem. 4 

For Lang or electives 5 

Psych 101 Introd. Psych 3 

General education 3 


15 

Semester VIII 

Bio Sci — upper div. elective 2 

For Lang or electives 3 

Electives 5 

General education 6 


16 

♦ Substitutions in the program may be made for transfer students and others upon the recommen- 
dation of the adviser and the approval of the department chairman. 


87 


Biological Science 


Four J4 -unit physical education courses are suggested during the first four 
semesters. 

Minimum Requirements for Biological Science Minor t 


Biological science Units 

101, 141, 161 Principles 13 

424 Evolution or 

312 Genetics 3 

311 General Microbiology 4 

361 Mammalian Anatomy and Physiology or 
315 Molecular Biology or 

444 Plant Physiology 4 


24 


MASTER OF ARTS IN BIOLOGY 

General Characteristics 

The program for this degree is based on the assumption that modern science 
necessitates broad preparation through the master’s level of training. It permits 
breadth of preparation and at the same time concentration in an area such as 
botany, microbiology or zoology. In design it offers sufficient breadth and depth 
to strengthen the student’s academic understanding and improve his competence 
for (a) advanced graduate work toward the doctoral degree in biological science, 
(b) teaching at all levels — elementary, secondary, and junior college, (c) techno- 
logical work in the health sciences, (d) participating in research programs, (e) 
entering the field of public health service, and (f) participating in various field 
service and conservation positions with both the state and national governments. 


Prerequisites 

Prerequisite to entering the program is a pertinent undergraduate major in biology 
with a GPA of at least a 3.0. Satisfactory scores on the aptitude test of the 
Graduate Record Examination are also required. Students may be admitted pro- 
visionally with limited subject or grade deficiencies, but such deficiencies must be 
removed by completing additional courses, selected in conference with the adviser, 
with at least a B average. 

Programs of Study— Thesis or Examination 

A student who meets the prerequisites may apply for Classified Graduate status. 
He must file a program of study, either (1) a thesis study plan or (2) an examina- 
tion study plan. 

The thesis study plan must include 30 units of adviser-approved graduate 
work, at least 12 of which must be at the 500 level. The study plan may include 
six units of graduate level medical biology taken in an approved clinical laboratory 
school. All study plans must include Bio Sci 599 (Independent Graduate Research), 
and Bio Sci 598 (Thesis), and at least one departmental seminar. Twelve units must 
be distributed between two of the following areas: biology, botany, microbiology, 
or zoology. An added six units must be outside the two areas chosen. Further 
electives may be possible. Required is a thesis or a published paper, or a paper 
accepted for publication, acceptable to the adviser and committee, covering a field 
or laboratory research problem. A final oral examination on his research is also 
required. 

The examination study plan for the degree must include 30 units of adviser- 
approved graduate work, at least 12 of which must be at the 500 level. All study 
plans must include between 3 and 6 units of Bio Sci 599 (Independent Graduate 
Research), and must include at least two department seminars. Twenty units 

t Substitutions in the program may be made for transfer students and others upon the recommen- 
dation of the adviser and the approval of the department chairman. 


88 


Chemistry 


must include coursework in the four areas of biology, botany, microbiology, and 
zoology. In addition a student must pass a written comprehensive examination, 
and an oral examination of from 1 to 3 hours. 

For more detailed information or advisement, students should consult the chair- 
man of the Biological Science Department, or the graduate coordinator of the 
Biological Science Department. 

Also see “Steps in the Master’s Degree Program,” p. 70. 

DEPARTMENT OF CHEMISTRY 

Professor: Bryden 

Associate Professors: Montana (chairman), Shields 

Assistant Professors: Harris, Hiegel, Huotari, Langworthy, Pan, Prenzlow, Spcnger 

The curriculum is planned to provide thorough instruction in the basic principles 
and concepts of chemistry for students who will (1) advance to graduate work 
in chemistry; (2) teach in the science programs of secondary schools; (3) seek 
employment in industry or government; or (4) pursue a chemistry minor of funda- 
mental courses in chemistry in support of other areas such as physics and biology. 

To qualify for a baccalaureate degree in chemistry, students must have a C 
average in all courses required for the majors including those in the related sci- 
ences. A proficiency in one modern foreign language (Russian, German, French) 
is required. A reading comprehension of a second modem foreign language is 
strongly recommended for students planning graduate study leading to the PhD 
degree. This requirement is normally met by completing four semesters of a col- 
lege foreign language with a C grade or better or by taking a foreign language for 
two years in high school and two semesters of intermediate language in college 
with a minimum of a C grade in the college course. Under unusual circumstances 
the requirement may be met by examination upon approval by the appropriate 
department chairman. Examinations will be given in October and March of each 
academic year. For details of examination procedure, apply at department office. 

No credit toward the major will be allowed for specific major courses in which 
a grade D is obtained. A placement test will be given to students in the Depart- 
ment of Chemistry to determine whether they arc ready to start Chemistry 101 A. 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN CHEMISTRY 

The Bachelor of Arts degree is granted under two plans: Plan A should be 
selected for those students planning a professional career in Chemistry (graduate 
work or chemical industry) and Plan B, for those students who are candidates for 
professional schools as medicine, dentistry, etc., or those planning careers in sec- 


ondary education. 

PLAN A 

Required courses in Chemistry: 

Courses Units 

Gen Chem (101A,B) 10 

Quant Chem (312) 4 

Org Chem (301 A,B,303A,B) 10 

Physical Chem (371A,B) 6 

Phys Chem Lab (441) 3 

Adv Inorg (425) — — 3 

Indep. Study (499) or 

Senior Research (495) 2 

Electives (at least one lecture 
or lecture lab course) 4 


Total units 


42 


89 


Chemistry 


Related areas ( satisfies the general education requirement in physical science , 
vtatheviatics and biology ): 


Phvsics (2 7 lABC) ' 

13 

/VfnrhomTfir^ flSOAB 250A 250R or 291) 

14 

iVIilUlLllldllL.) \ 1 J AmjXJi. v j Lm j i * kjm. a* r * / — 

Rinlncrv , - — 

5 

J ------- — — — _ 

Total Units — 

. 32 


Total units in Science and Mathematics - 74 

General Education units, not including 12 units of physical science, 
mathematics, and biology (sec the general education requirements 

page 68) 

Undesignated units 12 

Total units for the B.A. degree in Chemistry (Plan A) 124 


PLAN B 

Required courses in Chemistry : 

Courses Units 

Gen Ghent (101 A, B) 10 

Quant Chent (312). 4 

OrgChcm (301 A, B; 303 A, B) ... 10 

Phys Chent (371 A, B) 6 

Phys Chent Lab (441) 3 

Adv Inorg (425) 3 

Ind Study (499) 

Senior Rsch (495) 2 


Total units 38 

Related areas (satisfies the general education requirements in physical science , 


mathematics , and biology ) : 

Physics (211A,B) or (22lA,B) 8-10 

Mathematics (150A.B, 250A) 11 

Biology' _5 

Total units ; — — - 24-26 

Total units in Science and iMathematics r 62-64 

General Education units, not including 12 units of physical science, 
mathematics, and biology (see the general education requirements 

page 68) — 38 

Undesignated units 24-22 

Total units for the B.A. degree in Chemistry (Plan B) 124 


MINOR IN CHEMISTRY 

A minimum of 24 acceptable units of chemistry, including organic chemistry 
(8) and physical chemistry (6), are required for a chemistry minor. 


Suggested Eight Semester Program for a Major in Chemistry (Plan A) 


First Semester (Freshman) 

Units 

Chem 101 A Gen. Chem. 5 

Math 150A Anal. Geo. and Calc. 4 
Eng 101 Composition and Lit. 3 
Hist 170 A or 170B U.S. History 3 
PE Phys. ed. activity !4 

T Tvi 


Second Semester (Freshman) 

Units 

Chem 101 B Gen. Chem. 5 

Math 150B Anal. Geo. and Calc. 4 
Phys 221 A Fundamental Physics 4 
Eng 102 Lit. and Composition 3 

PE Phys. ed. activity Yz_ 

1 6 Yi 


90 


Chemistry 


Units 

Third Semester (Sophomore) 

;hem 301A Org. Chem 3 

;hem 303 A Org. Chem. Lab 2 

Math 250A Inter. Calc. 3 

Miysics 22 IB Fundamental 

Physics 5 

*01 Sci 100 Amer. Government 3 
>E Phys. ed. activity !4 

1614 

Fifth Semester (Junior) 

.’hem 371 A Physical Chem. 3 


or Lang Mod. For. Lang 5 

General education courses 3 

^hem 312 Quant. Chem 4 

15 

Seventh Semester (Senior) 

Jhem 441 Phys. Chem. Lab. 3 

:hem (495 or 499) 2-3 

Chem 425 Adv. Inorg 3 

Eor Lang 203 Inter. For. Lang. 3 
General education courses 4 


Units 

Fourth Semester (Sophomore) 


Chem 301 B Org. Chem 3 

Chem 303B Org. Chem. Lab. 2 

Math (250B or 291) 3 

Physics 221C Fundamental 

Physics 3 

PE Phys. cd. activity 14 

Bio Sci 5 

1614 

Sixth Semester (Junior) 

Chem 37 IB Physical Chem. ........ 3 

Elective in chemistry 2-4 

For Lang 102 Mod. For. Lang,.... 5 
General education courses 5 

15-17 

Eighth Semester (Senior) 

Elective in chemistry 2-3 

General education courses 13 


15-16 15-16 

This type of schedule allows the student to elect his last semesters according to 
the branch of chemistry which attracts him the most. 

Below are listed the possible electives which would be available during the stu- 
dents last three semesters in residence. 

Possible electives in the sixth semester: 

Chem 401 Org. Preps. 

Chem 403 Qual. Org. 

Chem 411 Instr. Anal. 

Chem 431 Adv. Org. 

Possible electives during the eighth semester: 

Same as those of the sixth semester plus 

Chem. 421 Inorg. Preps. 

Chem 451 Adv. P. Chem. 

Chem 461 Chem. Thermo. 

Chem 472 Chem. Cryst. 

Chem 475 Theo. Spec. 

Suggested Program for a Major in Chemistry (Plan B) 

This program is essentially the same as under Plan A except the number of 
required chemistry, mathematics and physics courses is reduced. A student planning 
on a career in teaching will, in addition, fulfill requirements of the School of 
Education. 


91 


Communications 


DEPARTMENT OF COMMUNICATIONS 

Professor: Maxwell (chairman) 

Associate Professor: Alexander 

Assistant Professors: Johnson, Smythe, Sommer 

Instructor: Lawrence 

The department offers a major in communication with emphases in advertising 
news communication (journalism), photocommunication, public relations, tech 
nical communication, and telecommunication. 

A master of arts in communication is planned, and the department is providing 
program advisement for those persons interested in beginning their work immedi 
atcly toward the master’s degree. 

The communication major helps to prepare those desiring various careers relatec 
to mass communication — careers that may involve newspapers and magazines, tele 
vision and radio, advertising, public relations, photography, industrial or govern 
mental communications, and teaching. Also, because of the program’s emphasis or 
general principles of communication, it can serve well those with aspirations fo 
administrative work in many areas of business, industry, government and education 
Additionally, communication courses will benefit those who wish a better under 
standing of the functions of the mass media in a democratic society. 


BACHELOR OF ARTS DEGREE IN COMMUNICATION 

Requirements: A combined total of 48 units — 36 within the Communication; 
Department and 12 collateral units* in other departments, as follows: 


Communication Core: (21 units). 

The courses in the core are required of all students majoring in communica- 
tions.t 


Communication 101 
Communication 102 
Communication 333 
Communication 407 
Communication 425 
(3) 

Communication 426 
Communication 427 


Reporting and Writing (3) 

Reporting and Writing (3) 

Mass Communication in Modern Society (3) 
Communication and the Law (3) 

History and Philosophy of American Mass Communicatio i 

World Communication Systems (3) 

Seminar on Current Issues in Mass Communication (3) 


EMPHASIS FOR COMMUNICATION MAJORS 

Every communication major must select an area of emphasis and complete the 
courses in it. 


t Advertising Units 

Comm 353 Advertising Copy and Layout.... 3 

Comm 356 Advertising Production (1,1) 2 

Comm 2 18 A Introduction to Photography 2 

Comm 354 Retail Advertising 3 

Comm 439 Mass Media Internship 2 

Comm 451 National Advertising Campaigns 3 


* Some flexibility may be permitted in collateral units, depending on the student’s preparation in 

these areas. 

t Because of extensive need for mathematics and science in the technical communication emphasis 
some variation will be permitted, through advisement only, to include additional mathematics 
and science in the program. Collateral units in other departments will exceed 12 for thi* 
+ emphasis, but total units required for the major will not exceed 48. 

♦ This emphasis is still in its developmental stage. Other courses are being prepared for inclusion 


92 


Communications 


Collateral Requirements in Other Departments Units 

Art 103 Two-dimensional design 3 

Eng 303 The Structure of Modern English 3 

Mktg 351 Principles of Marketing 3 

Phil 310 Ethics 3 

lews Communication (Journalism) 

Comm 338 Newspaper Production 3 

Comm 332 Copy Editing and Makeup 3 

Comm 335 Reporting of Public Affairs — 3 

Comm 218A Introduction to Photography 2 

Comm 218B Communications Photography 2 

Comm 439 Mass Media Internship 2 

Collateral Requirements in Other Departments 

Econ 403 Comparative Economic Systems ~ — 3 

Eng 462 Modem British and American Novels 3 

Hist 476 United States Since 1933 3 

Psych 351 Social Psychology — 3 

Photocommunication 

Comm 218A Introduction to Photography ... - — 2 

Comm 218B Communications Photography 2 

Comm 375 The Documentary Film 3 

Comm 358 A,B Publications Production (2,2) 4 

Comm 338 Newspaper Production 3 

Comm 439 Mass Media Internship — 2 

Collateral Requirements in Other Departments 

Art 103 Two-dimensional Design 3 

Art 111 Fundamentals of Art 3 

Econ 201 The American Economy 3 

Psych 351 Social Psychology 3 

Public Relations 

Comm 361 Theory and Practice of Public Relations 3 

Comm 463 Public Relations Methods 3 

Comm 465 International Public Relations 3 

Comm 358 Publications Production - 

Comm 218A Introduction to Photography. 2 

Comm 439 Mass Media Internship 2 

Collateral Courses in Other Departments 

Econ 403 Comparative Economic Systems 3 

Eng 303 The Structure of Modern English _ 3 

Mgmt 341 Principles of Management 3 

Psych 351 Social Psychology 3 

* Technical Communication 

Comm 332 Copy Editing 3 

Comm 334 Feature Article Writing 

Comm 401 Reporting and Writing 3 

Comm 403 Technical Writing 3 


* This emphasis is still in its developmental stage. Other courses are being prepared for inclusion 
in it. 


93 


Communications 


Collateral Requirements in Other Departments Units 

Physics 211 A Elementary Physics 4 

Physics 21 IB Elementary Physics 4 

QM 341 Business and Economic Statistics 3 

QM 364 Computer Logic and Programming 3 

* Telecommunication 

Comm 380 Introduction to Radio and Television ... 3 

Comm 371 Radio-television News and Public Affairs 3 

Comm 375 The Documentary Film 3 

Comm 218A Introduction to Photography 2 

Comm 218B Communications Photography 2 

Comm 439 Mass Media Internship 2 

Collateral Courses in Other Departments 

Drama 276A Beginning Stagecraft 2 

Eng 303 The Structure of Modern English 3 

Psych 351 Social Psychology 3 

Spch 333 Business and Professional Speaking— 3 


MINOR IN COMMUNICATION 

This minor offers a basic core of writing and publication courses for teacher 
candidates and others who wish some training in communications. 

Requirements: A combined total of 21 units, as follows: 

Lower division (maximum of 7) 

Communication 101 or 102 (3) 

Communication 2 18 A and 218B (2, 2) 

Upper division (minimum of 14 units) 
t Communication 331 or equivalent (3) 

Communication 333 (3) 

Communication 338A (3) 

Communication 3 58 A or 358B (2) 

Communication 425 (3) 

TEACHER CREDENTIAL REQUIREMENTS 

Communication majors who are teacher candidates should complete the commu 
nication core and the news communication (journalism) emphasis. They mus 
complete Communication 358AB as part of their major requirements. These candi 
dates must have their minor approved by the chairman of the Communications 
Department and must complete the required professional education courses in 
addition to their major and minor requirements. (See “Journalism Education,’’ 
page 211.) 


BACHELOR OF ARTS IN COMPARATIVE LITERATURE 

(An Interdisciplinary Program) 

The degree in comparative literature is an interdisciplinary program administered 
jointly by the Department of English and the Department of Foreign Languages 
and Literatures. The Committee on the Program in Comparative Literature is 
responsible for formulating the policies for the curriculum. The chairman of the 

* This emphasis is still in its developmental stage. Other courses are being prepared for inclusion 
in it. 

t Some variation in these requirements may be permitted on the basis of professional experience 
or interest. 


94 


Drama 


English Department is chairman of the program. The major in comparative litera- 
ture provides professional competence and personal enrichment for students with 
an exceptional concern and appreciation for the study of the interrelationships 
between the languages and literatures of various civilizations from the dawn of 
mankind to the present. The program offers courses in the study of literature with 
special emphasis on the global interrelatedness of literary form and content, theory 
and philosophy, genres and movements, providing an insight into the developments 
and backgrounds of mankind’s worldwide cultures and literatures. The literary 
works are read in English or English translations and the courses conducted in 
English. 

Upper Division Requirements 

(A) 15 units selected from courses listed under comparative literature. 

(B) 3 units of French, German, Italian, Russian, or Spanish selected from course 
numbers 431, 441, 451, 461, or any other 400 course approved by the ad- 
viser. 

(C) 6 units selected from courses listed under English and numbered 300 or 
above 

(D) 3 units of either History 41 5 A or History 110A. 

(E) 9 units selected from any 300 or 400 literature course in comparative litera- 
ture, English, French, German, Italian, Russian, or Spanish. 

Total: 36 units. 

Majors in comparative literature arc strongly advised to include in their pro- 
gram courses in related areas, such as art, anthropology, drama, history, linguistics, 
philosophy. 

Students must consult with an adviser in comparative literature through the 
Department of English or the Department of Foreign Languages and Literatures 
before submitting their individual courses of study for approval by the Committee 
on the Program in Comparative Literature. 


DEPARTMENT OF DRAMA 

Professor: Young (chairman) 

Associate Professors: Brown, Duerr, Zeltzer 
Assistant Professors: Forest, Henry, Keller 
Instructor: McColgan 
Lecturer: Kuni 

The Department of Drama program includes the several fields of playwriting, 
oral interpretation, acting-directing, technical theatre, theatre history and theory, 
radio-television and dance. Specifically, the course work is arranged to provide 
opportunities for students (1) to develop an appreciation for the theatre; (2) to 
become aware, as audience or participants of the shaping force of the theatre in 
society; (3) to improve the understandings and skills necessary for work in the 
theatre as a profession; (4) to prepare for teaching theatre; and (5) to pursue 
graduate studies. 

To qualify for the bachelor of arts degree with a major in drama, students 
must have a C average in all required courses. No credit towards the major will 
be given for such courses in which a grade of D is assigned. In addition to the 
course requirements, all students majoring in drama must participate in the casts 
or crews for a minimum of eight theater, dance, reader’s theatre or television 
productions. The productions chosen for credit will be selected with the aid of 
the departmental adviser. Students are also expected to usher for at least two 
major productions per year. 


95 


Drama 


MAJOR IN DRAMA FOR THE BACHELOR OF ARTS DEGREE 

Four course programs have been planned to meet the individual needs and 
interests of students working for the bachelor of arts degree with a major in 
drama. 

Plan I is for those who wish to study drama as a cultural contribution or 
who wish to pursue graduate degrees in drama with emphasis in theatre history 
and theory. It is strongly recommended that students electing this plan support the 
major with approved electives from art, drama, music, foreign languages, litera- 
ture, philosophy, or speech. 

Plan II is designed to develop the necessary competency for pursuing drama 
as a profession, or for pursuing graduate degrees in drama with an emphasis in 
an area of concentration other than history of the theatre. Areas of concentration 
arc: playwriting; acting-directing; interpretation; radio-television, technical thea- 
tre Vid dance. 

Plan III meets the requirements of the standard teaching credential with speciali- 
zation in elementary teaching. 

Plan IV meets the requirements of the standard teaching credential with speciali- 
zation in secondary or junior college teaching. A minor is required and will be 
selected with the aid of the departmental adviser. 

All four plans require a minimum of 36 units in drama with a minimum of 
24 units of upper division in drama. The lower division requirements are the same 
for all four plans. 

In addition to the requirements listed below for the major, students must meet 
the other college requirements for a bachelor of arts degree. Students following 
Plans III and IV also must meet any specific requirements for the desired teaching 
credential (see section in catalog for School of Education). Graduate students who 
plan to meet the requirements for a standard teaching credential with specialization 
in secondary teaching and a major in drama must complete or be enrolled in 
six units in drama as approved by the major adviser beyond the specific course, 
requirements listed in Plan IV before they can be recommended by the Drama 
Department for student teaching. 

PLAN I: THEATRE HISTORY AND THEORY EMPHASIS 

Lower Division: Prerequisites for the major: Acting or stage movement, tech- 
nical theatre, costume and makeup, oral interpretation. 

Upper Division: Drama 470, Directing (3 units); Drama 473AB, World 
Drama (6 units); Drama 475AB, History of the Theatre (6 units); Drama 
477, Contemporary Critical Techniques (3 units); electives, (6 units) 24 

PLAN II: PROFESSIONAL EMPHASIS IN AN AREA OF CONCENTRATION 

Lower Division: Same as in Plan I. 

Upper Division: In one of the following areas of concentration: 

Playwriting — Drama 364, Seminar in Playwriting, or Drama 383, Radio and 
TV Writing (3 units); Drama 378A or B, Experimental Theatre (3 units); 
Drama 370AB, Fundamentals of Directing (6 units); Drama 475AB, History 
of the Theatre (6 units); Drama 473AB, World Drama (6 units); Drama 

477, Contemporary Critical Techniques (3 units) 27 

Oral Interpretation — Drama 311, Oral Interpretation (3 units); Drama 314AB, 
Reading Theatre (6 units); Drama 473 A, World Drama (3 units); Drama 
475AB, History of the Theatre (6 units); electives (6 units in upper divi- 
sion drama courses.) 24 

Acting-Directing — Drama 373AB, Advanced Acting (6 units); Drama 378AB, 
Experimental Theatre (6 units); Drama 470AB, Directing (6 units); Drama 
475AB, History of the Theatre (6 units); Drama 374A, Dance (2 or 4), or 
Drama 376A, Stagecraft (2 or 4). 

96 


30 


Drama 


Technical Theatre — Drama 376AB, Advanced Stagecraft (4 units), Drama 
377B, Stage Costuming (2 units); Drama 470A, Directing (3 units); Drama 
475AB, History of the Theatre (6 units); Drama 378AB, Experimental 
Theatre (6 units); electives (3 units in upper division drama courses)- 24 
Radio-Television — Drama 380, Introduction to Radio and Television (3 units) ; 
Drama 382, Television Techniques (3 units); Drama 383, Radio and Tele- 
vision Writing (3 units); Drama 470AB, Directing (6 units); Drama 475AB, 
History of the Theatre (6 units); Drama 376A, Stagecraft (2 units); Drama 

Educ. 484, Educational Television Production (3 units)- 26 

Dance — Drama 374AB, Dance Theatre and Production (4 units) ; Drama 
377B, Stage Costuming (2 units); Drama 474, Special Studies in Dance 
(2 units); Drama 475AB, World Drama (6 units); Drama 378A or B, Ex- 
perimental Theatre, or Drama 470A, Directing (3 units); Drama 376A, Stage- 
craft (2 units); Drama 373 A, Advanced Acting (3 units); Drama 473 AB 
World Drama (6 units) 28 

PLAN III: TEACHING EMPHASIS 
(Elementary) 

Lower Division: Same as in Plan I. 

Upper Division: History of the theatre (3 units); oral interpretation (3 units); 
dramatic activities for children (3 units); reading theatre (3 units); dance 
theatre (4 units); electives (8 units) 24 

PLAN IV: TEACHING EMPHASIS 
(Secondary or Junior College) 

Lower Division: Same as in Plan I. 

Upper Division: History of the theatre (6 units); acting-directing (6 units); 
technical theatre (6 units); electives (6 units) 24 

MINOR IN DRAMA 

The minor in drama consists of 24 units, 14 of which must be in upper division. 
Included in the program must be a course in each of the following areas: (1) oral 
nterpretation; (2) stagecraft; (3) acting and/or stage movement; (4) history of 
he theatre, (5) directing. Candidates for the secondary teaching credential who 
vish to minor in drama must obtain approval from the Drama Department for 
the courses selected to meet the upper division requirements. Students minoring 
in drama must participate in the casts or crews for a minimum of four theatre, 
dance, reader’s theatre or television production. 

MASTER OF ARTS IN DRAMA 

The master of arts degree in drama is designed to provide a program of 
coordinated graduate studies built on the framework of the undergraduate prepa- 
ration; to provide added incentive for intellectual growth reflected in improvement 
in teaching and professional recognition; and to provide a sound basis for con- 
tinued graduate study in the field of drama. The student is expected to demon- 
strate a high degree of intellectual and creative competence and to demonstrate 
mastery of his field of concentration in one of the areas of emphasis in drama; 
(1) theatre history, (2) dramatic literature and criticism, (3) acting and directing, 
(4) play writing, (5) technical theatre, (6) oral interpretation, (7) radio and tele- 
vision, (8) dance. 

Prerequisites 

In addition to the college requirements, students admitted to this program must 
have earned 24 units of upper division units in drama. Students will complete 
a n oral interview before being admitted to a program of studies. 


97 


English 


Program of Studies 

The degree study plan with concentration in drama will include at least 30 
units of adviser-approved graduate studies, 15 units of which must be in 500-levcl 
courses. Each program will have at least 15 units in drama; a core of 12 units, 
to include Drama 500 (Introduction to Graduate Study — taken very early in the 
program), Drama 501 (Graduate Seminar: Advanced Theatre Theory and Ap- 
preciation), Drama 511 (Graduate Seminar in Interpretation), and Drama 597 
or 598 (Project or Thesis), and six units of adviser-approved supporting courses 
in related fields in other departments. Before the degree is granted, each student 
will pass an oral and written comprehensive examination. Also see “Steps in the 
Master’s Degree Program,” page 70. 


DEPARTMENT OF ENGLISH 

Professors: Cummings,* Ramsay, Schneider, Watkin 

Associate Professors: Abraham, Haaker, Herring, Jones, McNelly, Obler, Rubin- 
stein, Salz, Wagner (chairman) 

Assistant Professors: Austin, Callahan, Edwards, Epstein, Friend, Gilde, Green- 
wood, Hodges, Petalas, Scott, Scoufos, Seller, Sharma, Spangler, Sullivan, Tumas 
Instructors: Hayden, Heinze, Kilker, Mauch, Oleyar, Shapiro 
Lecturers: Farmer, Lynn 

The study of English emphasizes the nature and development of our language, 
the craft of writing, and the imaginative literature of American and British 
authors — prose fiction, poetry, and drama. Except for the required freshman English 
offerings, courses in world literature in English translation are listed separately, 
under comparative literature. In addition, the Department of English offers some 
specialized professional courses. On the senior and graduate levels, various opportu- 
nities are provided for seminar work and independent study. 

English 101 and 102 or their equivalents or the consent of the instructor is a 
prerequisite to all English and comparative literature courses numbered 200 and 
above. 

BACHELOR OF ARTS DEGREE: ENGLISH MAJOR 

Requirements: A total of 36 units beyond English 101 and 102 or their equiva- 
lents, with the following distribution: 

Lower division (maximum of 9 units) 

May include survey courses in British, American, or World Literature. 
Students offering American Literature in the Lower Division must take at least 
nine units in courses in the periods of English literature preceding the modern. Stu- 
dents offering English or World literature from the lower division must take six 
units of American Literature. 

Basic Course (3 units) 

201 Analysis of Literary Forms 
Upper Division (minimum of 27 units) 

Language and composition (minimum of 3 units), selected from the following: 
301 Advanced Composition 
303 The Structure of Modern English 
490 History of the English Language 
Major Author Courses (9 units) 

333 Chaucer 

334 Shakespeare 

341 Milton and the Seventeenth Century 


* College administrative officer. 

98 


English 

Period courses (minimum of 6 units, at least 3 in a period preceding the mod- 
ern), selected from the following: 

335 Elizabethan Drama 

336 Elizabethan Poetry and Prose 

342 The Age of Reason in English Literature 

343 The Romantic Movement in English Literature 

344 Literature of the Late Nineteenth Century 

345 History and Development of the English Novel 
462 Modem British and American Novels 

464 Modem British and American Drama 
466 Modem British and American Poetry 

Electives to complete a minimum of 36 units selected from additional courses 
n language and composition, period courses, literary criticism, senior seminars, and 
omparative literature. Comparative literature offerings are listed separately, but 
ount toward an English major. 

A program of literary studies gains in perspective through the study of history, 
ociology, philosophy, and psychology. These fields offer vital lifelines which 
lourish and deepen understanding of literature. Students of literature are strongly 
idvised to include such courses in their program, particularly in the areas of 
philosophy and psychology. 

English majors who intend to pursue graduate study are urged to acquire pro- 
iciency in at least one foreign language. Note: Freshmen intending to major in 
English should complete two years of course work in a foreign language, or dem- 
onstrate equivalent accomplishment by transfer or by examination. 

MINOR IN ENGLISH 

Requirements: a total of 21 units. 
i^ower Division (maximum of 9 units) 

201, 211, 212, or any lower division course beyond English 101 and 102 or the 
equivalent. 

Lower Division electives (3 units) 

Upper Division (minimum of 12 units), including: 

Vmerican Literature (minimum of 3 units), selected from the following: 

321 American Literature to Whitman 

322 American Literature from Twain to the Moderns 

Language and composition (minimum of 3 units), selected from the following: 
301 Advanced Composition 
303 The Structure of Modern English 
490 History of the English Language 
Major Author Courses (minimum of 6 units) 

334 Shakespeare 
333 Chaucer or 
341 Milton 

MASTER OF ARTS IN ENGLISH 

The degree of master of arts in English requires completion of a minimum of 30 
semester units beyond the bachelor’s degree. Candidates having fewer than 36 units 
°f undergraduate English normally will be required to take several additional 
courses to build a full undergraduate major. The 30 units in the graduate program 
are distributed as follows: 


99 


Foreign Languages and Literatures 


Minimum units in courses restricted to graduate students (500-series)...- 15 

Maximum units in specialized upper division courses in English 9 

Units in subjects related to English ... 6 

Minimum total .... __ 30 

Up to six units of the graduate course work may be in independent study. Three 


of these units may be devoted to a thesis or other written reports and articles, 
individually supervised by a faculty member. 

All candidates must take a graduate course in the English language, in Shake- 
speare, and in at least one other major literary figure studied in depth. Foreign 
language competency, a study in comparative literature or a foreign culture is 
required. In addition he must take the Graduate Record Examination (aptitude and 
advanced test in literature) before his admission to classified graduate status. 

All M.A. candidates beginning their program after the spring semester of 1966 
must enroll in English 599, Independent Graduate Research, during their last 
semester of work toward the M.A. At the conclusion of this course they will be 
required to take a written comprehensive examination covering the material of 
the entire M.A. program. 

Also see “Steps in the Master’s Degree Program,” p. 70. 


DEPARTMENT OF FOREIGN LANGUAGES 
AND LITERATURES 

Professor: Mathieu, Prange * 

Associate Professors: Arana, Feldman, Kline (chairman), Shapley 
Assistant Professors: Boarino, Cartledge, Claydon, Merrifield, Van Ginneken, Zim- 
mermann 

Instructors: Pena, Tussing 
Lecturer: Cochrum, Siegfried 

The program of the Department of Foreign Languages and Literatures is de 
signed to meet the needs of several types of students, including those who seel< 
a liberal arts education with an emphasis on a foreign language and its literature 
those who intend to teach at the elementary, secondary, or college level; those 
who plan to use foreign languages in professional careers; or those who desire 
to pursue graduate studies. The program emphasizes high standards of achievement 
in the practical use of the language, in the study of its literature and its culture 
in the mastery of applied linguistics, and in methodology of teaching, the lattei 
acquired in part through apprenticeship. 

A student may enroll at any point in the sequence of courses for which his 
previous study has prepared him. 

Two awards are available annually to students majoring in this department. 
(1) a cash award to the winner of the F. F. Beer Annual Essay Contest in French. 
German and Spanish; (2) a cash award, given by the Club Los Amigos of Fullerton, 
to an upper division student who is a prospective teacher of Spanish and whose 
scholarship merits recognition. 

MAJOR IN A FOREIGN LANGUAGE 

Three options arc offered: French, German or Spanish. Requirements: Courses 
101, 102, 203, 204, 213, 214, or their equivalents, completed satisfactorily; plus 24 
units of upper division courses, including 317, 431, 441, 451, 461, except that six of 
these units may be in another foreign language. 


* College administrative officer. 

100 


Foreign Languages and Literatures 


During his senior year, the foreign language major will take a comprehensive 
examination, prepared and administered by the department, in the language and 
literature studied. 

Attention is directed to the courses in foreign literatures in translation listed else- 
where in this catalog under comparative literature. These courses may not be 
counted toward a major in a foreign language. 

MINOR IN A FOREIGN LANGUAGE 

Requirements: Courses 101, 102, 203, 204, 213, 214, or their equivalents, completed 
satisfactorily; plus nine units in upper division courses selected in consultation with 
the adviser. 

MAJOR IN LINGUISTICS 

Requirements for the bachelor of arts degree in linguistics are listed on page 
105 of this catalog. 


CREDENTIAL PROGRAMS 

STANDARD TEACHING CREDENTIAL WITH A SPECIALIZATION 
IN ELEMENTARY TEACHING 

Students who are candidates for the standard teaching credential with a special- 
ization in elementary teaching must also complete the professional requirements, 
including Foreign Languages Education 432. 

STANDARD TEACHING CREDENTIAL WITH A SPECIALIZATION 
IN SECONDARY EDUCATION 

The credential program is the same as for the liberal arts major, with the fol- 
lowing additional requirements: 

Foreign Languages Education 442; 

French or German or Spanish Applied Linguistics 466; 

plus six units in the major language selected with the approval of the adviser and 
taken in the senior year or thereafter at the 400 and 500 level. 

THE LANGUAGE LABORATORY 

Students enrolling in courses 101, 102, 203, 204 are required, in addition to the 
regular class periods, to practice for the minimum of prescribed time in the lan- 
guage laboratory. The 30-station laboratory operates like a library; students may 
use it at a time most convenient to them, preferably every day in sessions of 15 
to 30 minutes. Further details will be announced by each instructor and by the 
supervisor of the language laboratory. 

Students are invited to make use of the collection of literary and cultural record- 
ings in French, German, Portuguese, Russian and Spanish available in the language 
laboratory. 

MASTER OF ARTS IN FOREIGN LANGUAGES 

The degree of master of arts in foreign languages, with concentrations in French, 
German, or Spanish, requires a minimum of 30 semester units beyond the bachelor’s 
degree. A candidate presenting a B.A. which has fewer than 24 upper division units 
in the major, or is otherwise inadequate, normally will be required to take addi- 
tional courses to build a full undergraduate major before beginning the graduate 
program. The 30 units in the graduate program are distributed as follows: 


101 


Geography 


Units 


Language and linguistics courses (minimum of 9 on 500 level) 12 

Literature courses (minimum of 6 on 500 level) 12 

Subjects in an approved related field 6 

Minimum total 30 

A part of the 30 units may be assigned to a thesis. 


The candidate for the master of arts degree must consult a graduate adviser 
before beginning his program. He must take the Graduate Record Examination 
(aptitude and advanced test in the language area) before being admitted to clas- 
sified graduate status. See also the “Steps in the Master’s Degree Program, ”p. 70. 


DEPARTMENT OF GEOGRAPHY 

Professors: Earick (chairman) 

Associate Professors: Helin, Reith 
Assistant Professors: Kettcringham, Sutton 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN GEOGRAPHY 

The major in geography provides knowledge concerning variety and change in 
the earth’s physical foundation and in man’s economic, cultural and political re- 
lationship to that foundation. In doing so, it contributes to a broad, liberal educa- 
tion and furnishes sound preparation for employment in teaching, planning, gov- 
ernment service and business. It serves, also, as a foundation for geographic study 
at the graduate level. 

Unit Requirements 

The major consists of 36 units in geography (of which 24 units must be in upper 
division courses) plus 12 units in related courses. These units are in addition to 
those used in meeting the general education requirements. All students take (A) a 
core of 12 units and (B) one of three required concentrations, consisting of 24 
units in geography plus 12 units in related fields. Students will normally indicate 
their choice of concentration upon completion of the geography core and after 
consultation with their adviser. 

A. Geography core: 200, 300, 310, 343 

B. Concentrations beyond core: 

1. Courses for students electing a liberal arts program or planning a career 


in elementary or secondary teaching. 

24 upper division units in geography: Units 

Physical — ~ 6 

Human 9 

Geography 431 and 2 other regional courses 9 


12 upper division units of a student’s teaching minor may be applied to 
the related course requirements. For liberal arts students 12 units will 
be selected with the advice of the geography faculty. 

2. Courses for students electing an advanced academic program leading to 
graduate training in college and university teaching or research, or to a 
career in business and government service. 


102 


History 


24 upper division units in geography: Units 

Physical — 6 

Techniques 6 

Elective 6 

12 upper division units in related courses would normally comprise an 
areal study or a topical concentration. Students are advised to develop 
a proficiency in one foreign language. 

TEACHING MINOR IN GEOGRAPHY 

The minor in geography is intended as a second field for persons completing a 
major in another discipline in preparation for a teaching credential. It is designed 
to give a basic understanding of earth science and the geographic relationships 
helpful to the classroom teacher. The program provides a balance between the 
physical and social sciences. 

Required Courses 

Geography Core. 

One course from each of the following groups: physical, human and regional. 

CLASSIFICATION OF GEOGRAPHY COURSES 

Core: 200, 300, 310, 343 

Physical: 312, 323 

Human: 333, 450, 453, 471, 481 

Techniques: 475, 478 

Regional: 431 through 439, 445, 463, 464 

Graduate: 501, 513, 523, 599 


DEPARTMENT OF HISTORY 

Professors: Beck, Brown (chairman), Langsdorf,* Povlovich, Untcrberger 
Associate Professors: de Graaf, Sailor, Toy * 

Assistant Professors: Bellot, Breese, Etue, Feldman, Flickema, Giacumakis, Hansen, 
Hardy, Jordan, Onorato, Pivar,. Putnam, Van Deventer, Weleba 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN HISTORY 

The undergraduate major in history is designed to provide an understanding of 
the present through a careful study of the past. This major may be pursued to ful- 
fill various professional and cultural objectives common to a liberal arts program. 
It serves, especially, as a preparation for teaching, law, government, and other pub- 
lic services, and as the foundation for advanced study at the graduate level. 

The major is composed of a minimum of 24 units in the upper division, plus 
the basic courses in world civilizations (History 110A-110B) and United States 
History (History 170A-170B). The basic courses may also be used to meet general 
education requirements. Students majoring in history are encouraged to include in 
their lower division programs some work in such fields as anthropology, eco- 
nomics, geography, literature, philosophy, political science and sociology. 

Students intending to do graduate work in history should acquire a reading 
knowledge of at least one foreign language appropriate to the pursuit of advanced 
research in a field of history. 

* College administrative officer. 


103 


History 


The 24 units of upper division courses required for the major must include: 
History 399 Historiography (3 units) 

Six units in United States history 

Six units in European history (from ancient Greece to modern times) 

Six units in the history of Asia, Africa, and Latin America 

TEACHING MINOR IN HISTORY 

The teaching minor in history is composed of at least 20 units in history exclu- 


sive of the general education requirements: 

Recommended teaching minor: Units 

World civilization (or equivalent).. 6 

Upper division work in history 15 

Total 21 


MASTER OF ARTS IN HISTORY 

The program of studies leading to the master of arts in history is composed of 
30 units approved by the graduate adviser.* Fifteen units of graduate courses (500 
level) must be taken, including: 

History 501 Seminar in the Content and Method of History (3 units); 

History 590 History and Historians (3 units); and 

History 598 Thesis (3 or 6 units) 

Other course requirements include six units in upper division or graduate work 
outside the History Department but related to the study pattern. 

Prerequisite to this master’s degree is an undergraduate major in History with 
a GPA of at least 3.0 in upper division history courses. While students may be 
admitted with limited subject, grade, or breadth deficiencies, such deficiencies 
must be made up by completing courses approved by the graduate coordinator 
in history in addition to those required for the degree, with at least a B average. 

Students entering the program must demonstrate a broad cultural understanding 
of one or more foreign countries of import to the master’s degree study program. 
This requirement may be met by a reading knowledge of an appropriate foreign 
language or an approved selection of comparative studies, but the method must 
be approved by the student’s adviser. In addition, the completion of the aptitude 
test and the advanced test in history of the Graduate Record Examination is re- 
quired. 

An oral examination on the thesis and course work offered for the degree will 
be given. 

Before the appointment of an official graduate adviser, the following steps must 
be completed: 

1. Admission to the college; 

2. Filing in the Office of Admissions of one official set from all colleges 
where previously registered, sent directly to the Office of Admissions and 
Records (in addition to the transcript from the institution conferring the 
baccalaureate degree, required for admission to the college); 

3. Submission of results of the Graduate Record Examination aptitude test 
and the advanced test in history; and 

4. Admission to Classified Graduate Status. 

In consultation with his graduate adviser, the student will develop a proposed 
study plan. When approved by his graduate adviser and pursued satisfactorily 
the programmed work can lead to the master’s degree, subject to the completion 
of all other requirements for the degree. 

See also “Steps in the Master’s Degree Program,” p. 70. 


* Consult the graduate coordinator in history about prerequisites. 

104 


Linguistics 


BACHELOR OF ARTS IN LINGUISTICS 
(An Interdisciplinary Program) 

The degree in linguistics is an interdisciplinary program administered by the 
Department of Foreign Languages and Literatures in collaboration with the 
Departments of Anthropology, English, Mathematics, Philosophy, Quantitative 
Methods and Speech through their representatives on the Linguistics Committee. 

This program is designed for students with an exceptional interest in and apti- 
tude for the study of the systems of human communication. It enables the under- 
graduate student to perceive the function of language in the development of 
civilization; to understand the essential relationships between language and thought 
and language and culture; to gain substantial familiarity with the structure of for- 
eign languages as well as English; to observe several types of linguistic structures; 
and to become conversant with the historical study of language and formal tech- 
niques and theoretical foundations of linguistic analysis. The program will enable 
the student with linguistic and philological interests to grasp the scope of the entire 
field and, in addition, to determine more accurately the most meaningful concen- 
trations in graduate study. 

Lower Division Requirements 
One year of Latin or Greek (6) 

Anthropology 202 Introduction to Cultural Anthropology (3) 

Philosophy 210 Logic (3) 

Upper Division Requirements (minimum of 30 units) 

Linguistics 406 Descriptive Linguistics (3) 

Linguistics 530 Historical Linguistics (3) 

Linguistics 490 Linguistics in Relation to Other Disciplines ( 1-4) 

Linguistics 410 Language and Culture (3) 

English 490 History of the English Language (3) 

317 course in a modem foreign language (3) 

Linguistics 341 Phonetics (3) 

Linguistics 404 General Semantics (2) 

Linguistics 375 The Philosophy of Language (3) 

One elective (or more) from the following: 

Mathematics 305 Elements of Set Theory (3) 

Quantitative Method 364 Computer Logic and Programming (3) 

Psychology 161 Elementary Statistics (3) or 

Mathematics 355 A, B Probability and Mathematical Statistics (3) 

Speech 403 Speech Development (3) 

English 303 Structure of Modern English (3) 

Mathematics 304 Mathematical Logic (3) 

400 course in a modem foreign language (3) 

Philosophy 368 Symbolic Logic (3) 

Linguistics 402 Phonetic Analysis of Speech (3) 

Students must consult with an adviser in linguistics through the Department of 
Foreign Languages and Literatures, before establishing their individual course of 
study. 


105 


Mathematics 


DEPARTMENT OF MATHEMATICS 

Professors: Ames (chairman), Gilbert 
Associate Professors: Benson, O’Toole, Sandberg, Stiel 
Assistant Professors: V. J. Klassen, V. M. Klassen 
Instructor: Qualls 


BACHELOR OF ARTS DEGREE IN MATHEMATICS 

The program of studies in mathematics offers courses stressing the understanding 
of mathematical concepts and the axiomatic approach. A sufficient variety of course^ 
is given to satisfy the needs of: 

( 1 ) The proficient student aiming toward graduate study, 

(2) The student planning to use mathematics in a career in industry and gov 
ernment service, 

(3) Preprofessional students in other science areas, 

(4) The prospective elementary and secondary teacher. (Sec special program' 
of study below.) 


In addition to mathematics, the major candidates will be required to pursu< 
a year of general college physics with a calculus prerequisite. Proficiency in on< 
modem foreign language is required. 

For a major in mathematics this language requirement is met by completing 
with at least a C grade, German 203, French 203, Russian 203, Spanish 203 or an 
equivalent, the latter to be determined by the appropriate language department. 
For those planning to work for an advanced degree, French, German or Russian 
is recommended. 

No credit toward the major will be allowed for specific major courses in which 
a grade of D is obtained. To qualify for a baccalureate degree in mathematics, 
students must have a C average in all courses required for the major including 
those in the related sciences. 

A placement test is given to students in the Department of Mathematics to 
determine their readiness to start the calculus. 


Major Program in Mathematics 

Required Courses 

Analytic geometry and calculus... 

Intermediate calculus __ 

Linear algebra 

Modern algebra 

Advanced calculus 

Topology 

Complex analysis 


Units 

8 

6 

3 

3 

6 

3 


Any three 


Real analysis 
Abstract algebra 
Differential geometry 
Any other 400 level course in mathematics 


Minor Program in Mathematics 

A mathematics minor shall consist of 20 units of coursework selected from the 
courses offered by the Mathematics Department. They must include Mathematics 
291 and at least six upper division units from the Mathematics Department. Each 
course must be completed with a grade C or better. 


106 


Music 


Units 
8 
6 
3 
3 
3 
3 
3 
3 
9 

41 

Grade requirements, and foreign language and physics requirements, are as stated 
above. 

Minor Program in Mathematics for Teacher Education 

A. For elementary education the minor shall consist of 20 units of course work 
selected from the course listings in mathematics and mathematics education. These 
courses must include Mathematics 150B and Mathematics Education 100B. 

B. For secondary education the minor shall consist of 20 units of course work 
selected from the course listings in mathematics and mathematics education. These 
courses must include Mathematics 291 and six units of upper division courses in 
mathematics or mathematics education. 


Option in Mathematics for Teacher Education 
for Elementary or Secondary Education 

Math 150A-B Analytic Geometry and Calculus 

Math 250A-B Intermediate Calculus 

Math 291 Linear Algebra 

Math Ed 300 Fundamental Concepts of Mathematics — Algebra 
Math Ed 301 Fundamental Concepts of Mathematics — Geometry. 

Math 320 Projective Geometry — 

Math 330 Number Theory — 

Math 335A Probability and Mathematical Statistics 

Electives in mathematics, 300 courses or higher 


DEPARTMENT OF MUSIC 

Professors: Gray, Landon (chairman), Thorscn 
Associate Professor: Michalsky 

Assistant Professors: Charlton, Fuszek, Karson, Kincaid, Reims, Remsen, Vaughan 
Instructor: McCarty 

Lecturers in applied music (part time): Barnes (piano), Barstow (violin), Bloch 
(clarinet), Caudill (string bass), Johnson (tuba), Kemclyan (voice), Lustgarten 
(cello), Moritz (flute), Muggcridge (oboe), Nowlin (bassoon), Olsson (voice), 
Patterson (French horn), Paul (voice), Peebles (trombone), Remsen (harp), 
Shaffer (organ), Voorhies (piano), Whitsitt (trombone) 

The Department of Music offers courses in music for both majors and non- 
majors. The fundamental purpose of the music major curriculum leading toward 
the baccalaureate degree is to provide the necessary training in each of the related 
aspects of music such as its history and literature, theoretical studies, and musical 
performance. Such a program of studies is based on the need to provide serious 
students with a core curriculum which will prepare the individual in such areas 
as (a) the knowledge of the history and relationships of music as an art form, (b) 
a comprehensive and analytical understanding of musical literature, (c) a working 
knowledge of music theory and structure, (d) a high degree of competence in a 
performing field, and (e) a specialization within the major. 

The music program is designed to educate: 

1. Students in general, in terms of composite minors, music minors, or broad 
offerings in the humanities or liberal arts. 

2. Students preparing to teach in the elementary and/or secondary schools, with 
a major field concentration in music (special music teachers). 


107 


Music 


3. Students preparing to teach in the elementary schools with a major field con- 
centration in music (classroom teachers). 

4. Students preparing to teach in the junior colleges and four-year colleges with 
a major field concentration in music. 

5. Students other than music majors preparing to teach as classroom teachers in 
the elementary schools. 

6. Students wishing to prepare for various vocations in music, such as: 

a. Church music directors and organists 

b. Teachers of music in private studios 

c. Music librarians 

d. Professional performers of music 

e. Composers and arrangers 

f. Industrial and recreational music directors 

REQUIREMENTS OF THE DEPARTMENT OF MUSIC 

Note: Special requirements are available in detail from the office of the Depart- 
ment of<Music, M262. 

1. Entrance examinations in basic piano, voice, theory', and music history will 
be given all music majors at the time of entrance to the college and to lower 
division students before acceptance in upper division music major sequence. 
These examinations plus auditions in the major performance areas are for 
placement and to satisfy credential requirements in the minor performance 
fields. Students who are deficient in any of these areas will be expected to 
take additional work as suggested by the faculty adviser. 

2. Music majors will be expected to declare a principal area of performance with 
the approval of the department chairman and faculty adviser, no later than the 
beginning of the junior year. It will be expected that each student will pre- 
pare for suitable development within this major area of performance, culmi- 
nating in the successful presentation of a senior recital before he may be ap- 
proved for graduation. The following steps should be taken as a part of this 
preparation: 

a. Declaration of an area of performance concentration (voice, piano, instru- 
ment, or combination solo instrument or voice and conducting) at the 
time of entrance to the college. 

b. Demonstration of performance progress before a faculty jury each se- 
mester. 

c. Appearance in at least one minor recital or an assisting performer at 
least once each semester. 

3. All music majors are required to participate in a major performance group 
(band, orchestra, or chorus) each semester of the regular school year. Students 
who are wind or percussion instrument majors in their applied field must 
register for band (or orchestra if designated by instrumental faculty) every 7 
semester; string majors must register for orchestra every semester; voice majors 
must register for chorus every semester. Music education majors whose per- 
formance area is piano or organ should be assigned to one major performance 
group by academic adviser. Exceptions to this requirement may be made only 
by action of the music faculty 7 . 

4. Instrumental and piano majors are required to take part in small ensembles 
for a minimum of two semesters. 

5. The major area of performance concentration for major in music requires 
work in applied music, as follows: 

a. Piano, voice and instrumental majors — must complete a minimum of 8 
semesters of applied music in the major field of concentration, leading 


108 


Music 


toward the successful presentation of a senior recital in the major per- 
formance field. 

b. Choral or instrumental conducting majors — must complete a minimum of 
eight semesters of applied music in the major field of performance con- 
centration, in addition to a minimum of six units in conducting, leading 
toward the successful presentation of a joint recital in the major per- 
forming field or a conducting recital or both. 

c. A preliminary functional piano examination in piano will be taken at the 
beginning of the junior year. Before the end of the senior year, students 
in the secondaiy credential program must pass a functional piano exam- 
ination. 

d. Composition majors must complete a minimum of eight units, including: 
Mu 322A, B; Mu 370 (2 units); Mu 377 (2-4 units). This course of study 
will culminate in the successful completion of a composition recital, for 
the B.A degree. 

6. Senior transfer students entering California State College at Fullerton with a 
major in music, or graduate students in music entering to complete credential 
requirements are expected to complete a minimum of one semester of suc- 
cessful upper division work in music before they may be approved for di- 
rected teaching. Required courses and competencies expected of all the college 
music majors must be satisfied before endorsement by the faculty committee 
for acceptance in the credential program. 

7. All music majors will be expected to attend a weekly departmental organiza- 
tion class (Mu 400) each semester of enrollment. 

MUSIC DEGREE PROGRAMS 

The Department of Music offers a variety of courses and programs leading 
to baccalaureate and graduate degrees in teaching and the professions. These 
degrees may be earned in three degree patterns. It is possible to elect suitable 
concentration within these specializations in such areas as applied music, composi- 
tion, conducting, music education, and music history and literature. 

OPTION I 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN MUSIC 
(Liberal Arts Emphasis) 

This program prepares students in either (1) music history and literature, or 
(2) music for elementary classroom teachers. 

The music history and literature specialization provides suitable preparation for 
advanced degrees in musicology and for certain preprofessional goals, including 
the fields of musical acoustics, music therapy, ethnomusicology, library science 
in music, and music in industry and recreation. 

The emphasis for classroom teaching is not designed for the music specialist 
in public schools (see Option III) and would require additional course work in 
some areas if used as preparation for most graduate degrees in music. 

The bachelor of arts in music, liberal arts emphasis shall consist of no fewer 
than 50 units, of which at least 26 shall be in the upper division. The following 
minimum requirements are basic to this degree objective: 


109 


Music 


Music Requirements: 

Lower Divison Units 

Theory of Music (MU 111A,B; 211A,B) - 12 

Music History and Literature (151A,B)~ 4 

Applied Techniques (including ensemble, principal instrument or voice, 
basic piano and voice) 8 

Total 24 

Upper Division 

Theory of music 6 

(Note: Majors in musicology must include Mu 312A,B (4), counter- 
point, and MU 321 A, Form and Analysis, or MU 323 A, Orchestra- 
tion) 

Music History and Literature (Mu 351A,B)„_ - 6 

Specialization in the major and general electives in music 14 

Music History and Literature * Classroom T eaching 

Emphasis Emphasis 

Must include three period or Must include MU 333, Music 

specialized music history and and Child Development — 3 units 

literature courses 6 units 

Total — 26 

Total, lower and upper division - - 50 

Allied Requirements: 

Music History and Literature Emphasis 

1. An academic minor - — 20 


(by approval of the academic adviser and the department) 

To provide suitable preparation in academic disciplines outside the field 
of music in such areas as 

(a) liberal arts studies; 

(b) supportive courses for advanced degrees in musicology; and, 

(c) preprofessional goals 

2. Foreign language, to be satisfied by one of the following: 

(a) four years study of foreign language at the secondary school level, 

(b) a pass examination given by the Department of Foreign Languages 
and Literatures, or 

(c) completion of the second semester of the 10-unit beginning course 
in foreign language. 

Emphasis for Classroom T eachers: 

1. Diversified studies in academic areas appropriate for classroom teachers 
such as English, literature, mathematics, science, art, drama, social sci- 
ences, foreign language, and physical education and health by consulta- 
tion with the major and professional advisers. 

2. A course in diction or foreign language. 

(May be satisfied by a minimum of 1 semester of foreign language or 
Mu 390, Diction for Singers) 

* Elementary credential candidates must take a minimum of two units each of piano and voice 
(nonprincipal) and pass satisfactorily the junior level proficiency in each. 


110 


Music 


OPTION II 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN MUSIC 
(Performance Emphasis) 

This degree program is for persons specializing in performance and applied 
nusic techniques. 

The music major, professional degree program shall consist of no fewer than 
.0 semester units, of which at least 36 shall be in the upper division. In addition, 
tudents are required to take Mu 151A,B or the equivalent as partial fulfillment 
>f the general education requirement in fine and applied arts. The following 
mnimum requirements are basic to this degree objective. 

ower Division 

Theory of Music (Mu 111A,B; 211A,B)_ 

Applied techniques: 

principal instrument or voice 8 \ 

major performance ensemble 4 ] 


Total 24 

Jpper Division 

Theory of Music 8 


Music History and Literature (Mu 351AJB) 6 

Applied techniques: 

principal instrument or voice 4 

major performance ensemble 4 

chamber or allied performance ensembles 2 

Specialization in the major (to be selected in consultation with and with 
the approval of the academic adviser from appropriate areas of: 


composition, conducting, and/or performance) 12 

Total 36 

Total, lower and upper division- 60 

OPTION III 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN MUSIC 
(Music Education Emphasis)* 


Five-year program leading toward the Standard Teaching Credential, Secondary 
School Teaching Specialization. For complete professional education requirements, 
see School of Education section. 

This program prepares the student for a teaching career as a music specialist 
m the public elementary or secondary schools and junior colleges of California. 
In addition to requiring competence as a performer (see general requirements 
2 and 5), this option requires students to complete prescribed work in conducting, 
orchestral instruments, basic voice and piano. In their fifth year, students also 
will complete the music education techniques block (Mu 441, 442, 443 and Ed 449) 
before admission to student teaching. The minimum requirements arc 60 semester 
units, of which 36 shall be in the upper division. The following are the require- 
ments for this degree objective: 

* Holders of the standard teaching credential, secondary specialization, may teach music (as a 
music major) in either or both secondary and elementary public schools of California. The 
preparation described above is designed for the ‘‘music specialist" who serves at either level. 



Units 

12 

. 12 


in 


Music 


Lower Division 

Theory of music - 

Applied techniques, to include: 

principal instrument or voice 4 

major performance ensemble 4 

piano 2 

voice 2 

Total 

Upper Division 


Pass Jr. Level Piano Functional Examination 

Theory of music 

History and Literature of Music (Mu 351A,B) — - 

Applied techniques, to include: 

principal instrument or voice 4 

major performance ensemble 4 

Specialization in music education techniques: 

conducting 6 

orchestral instruments classes 8 

Sr. piano functional and senior recital 

Total 

Total, lower and upper division.. 

Postgraduate Year 

Music education techniques block, to include: 


Mu 441 2 ' 

Mu 442 — 2 I fi rst 

semester 

Mu 443 2 

Ed 449 1 

Student teaching: 

Mu Ed 749 6 second semester 


General electives in music and minor area of study 
Total 




Units 

12 

. 12 

. 24 

- 8 
. 6 

. 8 

. 14 

- 1L 
.. 60 

Units 

_ 7 


6 

17 

30 


MINOR IN MUSIC 

The minor in music may be used as an appropriate area of study by persons 
whose majors are in other fields, or may be used to satisfy minor field requirements 
for elementary or secondary teaching credentials. A maximum of 12 units from 
the lower division may be included in work counted toward the music minor. The 
music minor requires a minimum preparation of 20 units. 

Composite of Lower Division and Upper Division Units 

Theory of Music (selected from Alu 101, 111A,B, 21lA,B or any 300- or 

400-level theory classes for which student is qualified) 6 

Music history and literature (Mu 100, 151A,B, 350 or courses at the 300 

or 400 level for which student is qualified) : 

Applied Techniques (including ensemble, conducting, piano or voice, or- 
chestral instruments, and principal instrument or voice) 8-10 

Note: Students expecting to use the minor for teaching must complete 
four units (two courses) of Mu 281 a-d, Orchestral Instruments, and a 
minimum of two units in an ensemble appropriate to their area of speciali- 
zation. 

Total — 20 


112 


Philosophy 


MASTER OF ARTS IN MUSIC 

The program of studies leading to the master of arts in music provides advanced 
studies in breadth as well as in an area of graduate specialization. The program 
is further intended to provide advanced course work with a suitable balance in 
such music studies as theory, composition, history, literature and advanced applied 
techniques. There are suitable graduate specializations in the areas of history and 
literature of music; advanced applied techniques; theory-composition; and music 
education. 

The master of arts in music is especially designed for teachers and supervisors 
of music; persons intending to specialize in applied fields in the pursuit of occu- 
pational goals; individuals preparing for college teaching; and persons intending to 
pursue advanced degrees beyond the master’s level. 

Prerequisites for Admission to the Program 

The student must have a baccalaureate degree with a major in music (or the 
equivalent of a major, i.e., 24 upper division courses in music). Opportunity is 
given the student to remove deficiencies by taking certain prescribed courses. 
Such courses cannot be applied to the master’s degree program. The student must 
also take the aptitude and advanced music tests of the Graduate Record Exam- 
ination and pass the graduate music placement-proficiency examination. 

Requirements for the Degree 

The degree program requires 30 units of graduate study, no more than nine of 
which shall be outside the field of music, and at least 12 of which must be in 
500-level courses in the major. The student will take Mu 500 (Graduate Studies 
in Music, two units) early in his program, and must include at least four units in 
history and literature of music, four in advanced techniques, two in theory com- 
position, and an added six units in one of the above, or in music education, as an 
area of specialization. A thesis or project is required, for which from three to six 
units may be granted. In addition, each program will include at least six units of 
study outside the field of music, but supportive to the program. Each program 
is individually designed in conference with the adviser. 

Also see “Steps in the Master’s Degree Program,” p. 70. 

FEES FOR APPLIED MUSIC 

Applied music (private instruction in voice or major instrument), 

$l-$6. 

Average studio lesson fee, including 14 half-hour lessons (one unit) 
nation, per semester $70-$96. 

DEPARTMENT OF PHILOSOPHY 

Professor: Alamshah (chairman), Becker* 

Associate Professor: Hayner 
Assistant Professor: Overvold, Silvers 
Instructor: Hitchcock 

The aim of the Department of Philosophy is twofold: (1) to present curricular 
offerings in a manner that will awaken an appreciation for philosophical concerns; 
delineate the significant contributions made to the history of ideas by the great 
philosophers; and develop in those who concentrate in the field an appreciable 
degree of precision in communicating the subject matter of philosophy; (2) to 
draw attention to the significance of philosophical analysis in areas of vital concern 
for the life of society. 


per lesson, 
and exami- 


College administrative officer. 


113 


Philosophy 

Coursework in philosophy, therefore, has the following objectives: 

(1) To help students understand their own philosophical concerns; 

(2) To uncover and to delineate sound methodology for the clarification of 
philosophical problems; and 

(3) To prepare students who are seeking higher degrees in philosophy. 

BACHELOR OF ARTS DEGREE: PHILOSOPHY MAJOR 

Requirements : A total of 36 units, beyond general education requirements, with 
the following distribution: 

Lower Division (maximum of 12 units, beyond general education requirements) 
Core requirements (6 units) 

211 A. Classical Schools of Philosophy (3) 

211B. Classical Schools of Philosophy (3) 

Electives (6 units) 

Note: Students who have taken their lower division work elsewhere will be 
given credit for equivalent coursework. Up to 12 units of such coursework may 
be allowed for credit at the discretion of the department. 

Upper Division (minimum of 24 units) 

Core requirements (15 units) 

331 History of Philosophy: Rationalism and Empiricism (3) 

332 History of Philosophy: Kant and the 19th Century (3) 

Plus choice of one of the following: 

417A, 417B Aristotle (3,3) 

427A, 427B Spinoza (3,3) 

437A, 437B James (3,3) 

447 A, 447B Plato (3,3) 

457A, 457B Hume (3,3) 

467A, 467 B Kant (3,3) 

Plus 499 Independent Study (3) 

Electives (minimum of 9 units) 

A program in philosophy profits greatly through the study of literary master- 
pieces, psychology, and the social sciences. Students of philosophy are advised to 
supplement their studies in philosophy with coursework offered in these fields. 
Philosophy majors are urged to acquire proficiency in a foreign language. 

MINOR IN PHILOSOPHY 

Requirements: A total of 21 units (beyond general education requirements) 
Lower Division (maximum of 9 units) 

Core requirements (6 units) 

211 A Classical Schools of Philosophy (3) 

21 IB Classical Schools of Philosophy (3) 

Electives (3) 

Upper Division (minimum of 12 units) 

Core requirements (6 units) 

331 History of Philosophy: Rationalism and Empiricism (3) 

332 History of Philosophy: Kant and the 19th Century (3) 

Electives (6) 


114 


Physics 


DEPARTMENT OF PHYSICS 

Professors: Adams, R. (chairman), Blend 
Associate Professor: Dittman 
Assistant Professor: Crowley 

BACHELOR OF ARTS DEGREE IN PHYSICS 

The program leading to the bachelor of arts in physics provides the funda- 
mental instruction basic to the needs of the student who is preparing (1) to teach 
in elementary or secondary schools, (2) to undertake graduate work in physics 
or related fields, (3) to pursue additional collegiate studies leading to professional 
degrees in dentistry, law, medicine, nursing, and other professional, related areas, 
and (4) to seek employment in technical and applied fields. 

The faculty is concerned that the student of physics shall have adequate educa- 
tion in other liberal arts subjects, including foreign language. Through curriculum 
requirements and through elective subjects, the physics student will be expected 
to have a broad education in traditional liberal arts subjects, the several sciences, 
and mathematics. In particular, the student is urged to make his selections of 
elective courses outside the field of physics. 

To qualify for the bachelor of arts in physics, students must have a C average 
in all courses required for the major, including those in the related sciences. A 
proficiency in one modern foreign language (Russian, German, or French) is 
required. A reading comprehension of a second foreign language is strongly rec- 
ommended for students planning graduate study leading to the Ph.D. degree. This 
requirement is normally met by completing two semesters of fundamental foreign 
language (10 units) plus one semester of scientific foreign language (3 units) 
with a grade of C or better in each course. Under unusual circumstances the 
requirement may be met by examination upon approval of the department 
:hairman. Application must be made in the departmental office by October 15 for 
examination during the fall semester and by February 1 for examination during 
he spring semester. 

No credit toward the major will be allowed for major courses in which a 


grade of D is received. 

MINIMUM DEPARTMENTAL REQUIREMENTS FOR DEGREE * 
ower Division Units 

General chemistry (satisfies general education physical science requirement) 10 
Mathematics: analytic geometry and calculus (satisfies general education 

mathematics requirement) 14 

Fundamental physics 13 

Modem foreign language (Russian, German or French) 

Proficiency in one language required. (For details see paragraph above.) 


Upper Division Physics f 

431 Electricity and Magnetism 3 

441 Analytical Mechanics 3 

411 Theory of Wave Motion 3 

453 Nuclear Physics or 

451 Modern Physics— 3 

416 Thermodynamics 3 

455 Introduction to Quantum Physics 3 

481 A Advanced Physics Laboratory (electrical measurements and elec- 
tronics) 3 


* Substitutions in the program may be made on approval by the department chairman, 
t Theory courses will normally be taken in the order of listing. Laboratory courses will normally 
be taken in numerical order of course number. 

115 


Physics 


Units 

48 IB Advanced Physics Laboratory (mechanics, acoustics, physical optics, 


atomic spectra) 3 

481C Advanced Physics Laboratory (atomic and nuclear physics) 3 

48 ID Advanced Physics Laboratory (selected experiments in classical and 

modem physics) 3 

Total ' 30 

Required Mathematics 

Mathematics courses in addition to analytic geometry and calculus 9 


MINOR IN PHYSICS 

A minimum of 20 units of physics are required for a minor. These shall include 
12 units of lower division physics (or equivalent as determined by the .department 
of physics) , and a minimum of 8 units of upper division physics, including a mini- 
mum of 2 units of advanced physics laboratory. 


Suggested Eight-semester Program for Major in Physics 
Semester 1. Freshman 

Math 150 A Analytic Geometry and Calculus 4 

Engl 101 Composition and World Literature 3 

For Lang 101 Fundamental Russian, German, or French 5 

Any required general education course 3 

Any physical education activity course 1 54 

Total 1554 

Semester 2. Freshman 

Math 150B Analytic Geometry and Calculus 4 

Engl 102 World Literature and Composition 3 

For Lang 102 Fundamental Russian, German, or French 5 

Phys 221 A, 222 A Fundamental Physics 5 

Any physical education activity course — 54 

Total 1754 

Semester 3. Sophomore 

Math 250 A Intermediate Calculus 3 

Phys 22 IB, 222B Fundamental Physics 5 

For Lang 203 Intermediate Russian, German, or French 3 

Chem 101A General Chemistry 5 

Any physical education activity course - 54 

Total 1654 

Semester 4. Sophomore 

Math 250B Intermediate Calculus 3 

Phys 22 1C Fundamental Physics 3 

Any required general education course 3 

Any required general education course 3 

Chem 101B General Chemistry 5 

Any physical education activity course 54 

Total 1754 


116 


Political Science 


Semester 5. Junior Units 

Math 291 Linear Algebra 3 

Phys 431 Electricity and Magnetism 3 

Phys 481 A Advanced Physics Laboratory 1 3 

Any required general education course . — 3 

Bsc 111 Principles of Biology — — , 4 

Total - 16 

Semester 6. Junior 

Math 350A Advanced Calculus 3 

Phys 441 Analytical Mechanics 3 

Phys 48 IB Advanced Physics Laboratory 3 

Phys 411 Theory of Wave Motion 3 

Any required general education course 3 

Any required general education course ... 3 

Total 18 

Semester 7. Senior 

Math 350B Advanced Calculus — - — 3 

Phys 453 Nuclear Physics or 

Phys 451 Modem Physics 3 

Phys 48 1C Advanced Physics Laboratory.. 3 

Any required general education course 3 

Any required general education course 3 

Total ; - - 15 

(Honor students may add Physics 491, Senior Report (1).) 

Semester 8. Senior 

Phys 416 Thermodynamics 3 

Phys 455 Introduction to Quantum Physics 3 

Phys 48 ID Advanced Physics Laboratory 3 

Electives 6 

Total - T5 

(Honor students may add Physics 492, Senior Report (2).) 

DEPARTMENT OF POLITICAL SCIENCE 

Professors: Hyink,* Mason, Richardson (chairman) 

Associate Professors: Ashley, Foster, Kerschner 

Assistant Professors: Bell, Feraru, Lepper, Mayer, Wilcox, Yinger 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN POLITICAL SCIENCE 

The undergraduate major in political science prepares students for teaching, gov- 
ernment employment on the local, state and national level, foreign service, grad- 
uate work in political science, law school, or leadership in civic and political ac- 
tivities. Political science is also of value to prospective special librarians and 
journalists. 

* College administrative officer. 


117 


Political Science 


Unit and Course Requirements 

The major consists of 30 units in political science of which at least 24 units must 
be in the upper division, plus 12 units in related departments taken with the ap- 
proval of the adviser. These units are in addition to those meeting the general edu- 
cation requirements. Prospective majors are encouraged to take courses in anthro- 
pology, economics, geography, history, philosophy, psychology, sociology, and 
statistics. 

All majors are required to take: 

Political Science 100, 231, 306, 341, and any two of the following: 

a. 251 

b. 311 or 320 

c. 373 or 374 

The department has no rigid concentration requirements. 

Each student will be assigned to a member of the department for individual 
guidance and advice designed to prepare the student for his educational and pro- 
fessional objectives. Students planning on a career in the foreign service are en- 
couraged to take their elective units in American culture, geography, and history. 
Proficiency in a foreign language is strongly recommended for students planning 
on graduate work or the foreign service. A course in statistics is advisable for 
others. 

The public administration program is designed to prepare students for public 
service careers with local, state and federal units of government. The program 
also provides the basis for graduate work for those interested in advanced degrees. 
Students, in addition to taking the essential courses, will have numerous oppor- 
tunities to study, observe, and serve as interns in governmental agencies in the area. 

The prelaw student may work out an individual program in consultation with 
his adviser to meet the specific requirements for admission to the law school of his 
choice. Courses in related fields may include work in anthropology, economics, his- 
tory, psychology, and sociology, also in accounting and report writing. 

TEACHING MINOR IN POLITICAL SCIENCE 

The teaching minor is composed of 21 units of political science, in addition 
to those meeting the general education requirements. 

MASTER OF ARTS IN POLITICAL SCIENCE 

This degree is planned for students interested in advanced graduate work toward 
the doctoral degree in political science, for the professional improvement of high 
school and junior college teachers, government employees, personnel in the military 
services, and for individuals interested in civic and political leadership. 

Prerequisites 

A student desiring to enter the M.A. program must have completed a minimum 
of 24 hours of upper division work in political science and/or pertinent related 
fields, as approved by his M.A. committee, with a GPA of 3.0. The aptitude test 
of the Graduate Record Examination is required, and the GRE Adanced Test 
in Government may also be required. A reading knowledge of a foreign language, 
a demonstrated knowledge of appropriate research methods (PS 306 or its equiva- 
lent), of statistics or computer programming or both will be required by the 
M.A. committee as preparation if pertinent to the student’s professional needs. 

Each student’s record and background will be carefully evaluated before ad- 
mission to classified status. Students may be admitted with limited subject de- 
ficiencies which must be removed by taking courses or challenge examinations 
with the approval of their M.A. committee. Grade deficiencies must be removed 
before admission to the program. Committee-approved courses taken to remove 
deficiencies may not be counted toward the requirements for the M.A. degree. 

118 


Psychology 


Program of Study 

A student must design a study plan of 30 units of course work, subject to the 
approval of his M.A. committee (as part of the requirements for admission to 
classified status). At least 18 of these units must be in political science, of which 
15 units, exclusive of thesis or project, must be 500-level courses. A thesis or 
project (3-6 units) may be required. A comprehensive final written examination 
is required; an oral examination may also be required. 

See also “Steps in the Master’s Degree,” p. 70. 


DEPARTMENT OF PSYCHOLOGY 

Professors: Edwards (Chairman), Lindley, Schmidt, Tsai 
Associate Professor: Carlson 

Assistant Professors: Calhoun, Curtis, Dondis, Grayson, Jaffee, Lindner, Morrow 


BACHELOR OF ARTS IN PSYCHOLOGY 

The major in psychology consists of 36 units of lower and upper division work 
designed for students (1) who want a sound background in psychology as a science, 
(2) who want a basic understanding of human behavior as a supplement to some 
other major course of study, and (3) those who wish to acquire a thorough under- 
graduate training in psychology in anticipation of graduate study. 


Requirements for the Major 
Lower Division 


Psychology 101 
Psychology 161 
Psychology 202 


Introductory Psychology 

Elementary Statistics 

Principles of Psychology . 


Units 

3 

3 

3 


Upper Division 

To take upper division work, at least six units of psychology (including Psy- 
chology 101) must have been completed in the lower division. In addition, a mini- 
mum of 27 units of upper division work constitutes a major in psychology. Fifteen 
units arc required as follows: 

Psychology 302 Experimental Psychology: Learning and Motivation 3 

Experimental Psychology: Sensation and Perception 3 


Psychology 303 
or 

Psychology 321 
Psychology 351 

Psychology 331 Psychology of Personality. 

Psychology 461 Group Psychological Testing ..... 
Psychology 408 History of Psychology 


Physiological Psychology 
Social Psychology or.. 


A minimum of 12 additional units in psychology courses will be selected in con- 
sultation with the academic adviser. 


Recommended Related Courses 

Courses from each of the following areas according to the student’s interests: 
(1) social sciences; (2) physical sciences; (3) biological sciences; (4) mathematics; 
(5) humanities. 

Students planning to do graduate work in psychology are advised to plan addi- 
tional work in biological and physical sciences and to include at least a one- 
semester course in college mathematics. Undergraduate work in foreign languages 
is also recommended. 


119 


Psychology 


MASTER OF ARTS IN PSYCHOLOGY 

This degree is planned to extend the body of psychological knowledge developed 
in the undergraduate major and result in the development of greater depth in 
understanding the content of psychology; increased skill in research capabilities; 
the professional reporting of research; potential career skills; and sound preparation 
for students planning to go on to advanced graduate work. On completion of this 
program, students will have a better understanding of the many and complex dis- 
ciplines in psychology as well as an understanding of related behavioral and scien- 
tific areas of study. 

Prerequisites 

Students to be admitted to the program must: (1) meet the general prerequisites 
for graduate work formulated and recommended by the college; (2) have com- 
pleted a bachelor’s degree with a major in psychology or 24 units in upper division 
psychology including a course in statistics, a course in the history of psychol- 
ogy, an upper division laboratory course in psychology, at least two of the follow- 
ing courses: physiological psychology, learning, sensation and perception, motiva- 
tion, and at least one of the following courses: social psychology, personality, 
developmental psychology; psychological testing; (3) have completed or must 
complete within the first year of graduate study a course in college mathematics, 
a course in the biological sciences beyond the college’s general education require- 
ment, and a course in sociology or anthropology beyond the college’s general edu- 
cation requirement; (4) have completed a baccalaureate degree with a 2.5 general 
average and a 3.0 average in psychology; (5) show satisfactory performance on 
the aptitude test and the advanced test in psychology, which are parts of the 
Graduate Record Examination. 


Program of Study 

The Master of Arts in Psychology requires a minimum of 24 units of approved 
graduate work in the major field, including the completion and acceptance by the 
Psychology Department Graduate Study Committee of a written thesis, plus six 
units of approved work for graduate credit from other related areas. 

The student, in consultation with an adviser on the staff of the Psychology De- 
partment, shall develop a program of studies which will be submitted to the 
Graduate Study Committee of the Department of Psychology for approval. 

Course requirements for the M.A. in Psychology: 

Units Totals 


Psychology 500 Advanced General Psychology 3 

Psychology 510 Advanced Experimental Design..— 3 

Psychology 520 Seminar: Experimental Psychology 

Psychology 521 Seminar: Personality and Social Psychology- 
Psychology 598 Thesis 


Related courses outside psychology.. 


3 

3 

3-6 

6 


Elective courses in psychology 6-9 


15-18 

6 

6-9 


Total units for M.A. in psychology 30 

Students will be required to pass a comprehensive examination in psychology in 
addition to satisfactory performance in the above courses. 

Sec also “Steps in the Master’s Degree Program,” p. 70. 


120 


Science and Mathematics Education 


DEPARTMENT OF SCIENCE AND MATHEMATICS 
EDUCATION 

Professor : Lay 

Associate Professors: Lepper, Turner (chairman) 

Assistant Professor: Fletcher 
.ecturer: Woyski 

The department does not offer any degree program at this time. 

The Department of Science and Mathematics Education prepares students to 
each in the areas of science and mathematics at the elementary and secondary 
evels, to provide guidance for experienced teachers in the study and use of edu- 
ational practices developed for the teaching of sciences and mathematics and to 
lelp teachers develop original ideas in their areas of specialization. 

The offerings of this department include basic professional training courses re- 
quired for teacher certification, advanced coursework in science and mathematics 
* ducation, and certain academic content offerings designed especially for teacher 
•reparation. 

Requirements for teaching majors and minors in science and mathematics are 
isted under the respective academic departments. 


REQUIRED COURSEWORK 

The following courses offered by the Department of Science and Mathematics 
'ducation are required for teaching credential candidates. 

iementary School Credential Candidates — Any Major 

Math Ed 100A Fund. Concepts of Math. — Arithmetic 
Sci Ed 310 Elementary Experimental Science 

■ econdary School Credential Candidates— Science 

Sci Ed 442 Teaching Science in the Secondary School 
Sci Ed 749 Student Teaching in Science — Secondary 


Secondary School Credential Candidates — Mathematics 


Math Ed 100B 
Math Ed 300 
Math Ed 301 
Math Ed 442 
Math Ed 749 


Fund. Concepts of Math. — Arithmetic 
Fund. Concepts of Math. — Algebra 
Fund. Concepts of Math — Geometry 
Teaching Mathematics in the Secondary School 
Student Teaching in Mathematics — Secondary 


MASTER OF ARTS IN SOCIAL SCIENCES 

(An Interdepartmental Program) 

The master of arts in social sciences allows a student to pursue advanced work 
in two or three related fields.* Selection may be made from the following: an- 
thropology, economics, geography, history, political science, psychology, and so- 
ciology. The thirty (30) units approved by the graduate adviser, from the depart- 
ment of the student’s first field, are to be arranged in one of the following patterns: 


Pattern A (two fields) 

First field 

18 or 15 

units 


Second field 

12 or 15 

units 



30 30 

units 


* Consult individual departments about prerequisites. 


121 


Sociology 

15 or 12 or 12 unit 

9 or 12 or 9 unit 

6 or 6 or 9 unit> 

30 30 30 unit 

Specific requirements include: 

At least 12 units of graduate courses (500 level); 

An upper division or graduate level course in research methods and bibliograph 
in one of the social sciences; 

Thesis or project (or approved papers prepared for graduate seminars, in lie i 
of a project) 

Oral examination on the thesis or project and on the courses offered for th 
degree; 

Completion of the aptitude test of the Graduate Record Examination; 

The Advanced Test in Social Sciences of the Graduate Record Examination 
may be required. 

There is no foreign language requirement, but certain fields may require wor\ 
in statistics. An undergraduate major in social sciences, or 24 units of upper div; 
sion courses in social sciences (approved by the adviser) with a GPA of at leas 
3.0 is required. The graduate adviser will be selected from the first field. In cas 
of the 15-15 pattern, the adviser is chosen from the department in which the thesi 
or project is written. 

Before the appointment of a graduate adviser, the following steps must be com- 
pleted: 

1. Admission to the college; 

2. Filing in the Office of Admissions of one official set of transcripts from a 1 
colleges where previously registered (sent directly from these institutions t) 
the Office of Admissions and Records). This is in addition to the transcript 
from the institution conferring the baccalaureate degree, required for admis- 
sion to the college; 

3. Submission of results of the Graduate Record Examination (s) ; and 

4. Admission to classified graduate status. 

See also “Steps in the Master’s Degree Program,” p. 70. 


Pattern B (three fields) First field 

Second field 
Third field 


DEPAkTMENT OF SOCIOLOGY 

Professor: Davis (chairman) 

Associate Professors: Hagedorn, J. R. Smith, Works 

Assistant Professors: Copp, Faia, Jacobson, Lackey, Mend, Palisi, Poorkaj, RansforJ 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN SOCIOLOGY 

The major in sociology provides knowledge concerning the structure and func- 
tioning of human society. It may serve as preparation for: (1) graduate study 
in sociology and careers in teaching and research, (2) employment or graduate 
study in social work, corrections and related careers, or (3) careers in business 
and industry, various areas of government service, and the study of law. Sociology 
has applications to a wide range of careers and to participation as a citizen. 

Unit Requirements 

The required minimum for the major is 42 units, in addition to those taken for 
the general education requirement, distributed as follows: 


122 


Sociology 


Courses in Sociology 

Thirty units must be taken in sociology, 24 in upper division courses. So- 
ciology 201 is required, and 3 additional units are acceptable from lower divi- 
sion offerings. The minimum of 24 upper division units must include 331 A, 

33 lB, 341, 481, and at least one of the following: 436, 470, 473, 477. 

Minimum units 30 

Related Courses 

Twelve upper division units are to be taken in the related fields of anthro- 
pology, economics, geography, history, political science, and psychology, to 
be approved by the major adviser. 

Minimum units 12 


Minimum total units for the major 42 


TEACHING MINOR IN SOCIOLOGY 


For teaching credential purposes a minor consists of 21 units in sociology, dis- 
tributed as follows: 


Credits 


201 3 

202 or 411 or 413 or 431 3 

341 or 451 3 

477 or 480 or 481 3 

Electives in sociology 9 


21 


Social Welfare 

Students seeking employment or graduate study in social work may major in 
sociology; but satisfactory preparation is also provided by other majors, such as 
psychology, anthropology, economics, or political science. There is no major in 
social welfare, but three courses — Social Welfare 311, Welfare Institutions; 351 A, 
Social Work Methods; and 35 IB, Social Work Methods — provide a thorough intro- 
duction to the field by professional social workers. The best preparation for a 
welfare position with the B.A. degree, or for graduate study in social work, is a 
broad background in the social sciences. 

MASTER OF ARTS IN SOCIOLOGY 

The program for this degree provides advanced study in general sociology. 
It offers an opportunity to broaden one’s knowledge of society, to strengthen 
skills of sociological analysis, and to do research in depth in an area of particular 
interest. It may be used as preparation for study toward the doctorate in sociology, 
for junior college teaching, participation in research, or for a variety of positions 
in business and industry, corrections, the community, or government. 

Prerequisites 

Admission to the program requires a minimum of 18 upper division units in soci- 
ology, including the following courses or their equivalents: 

331 A Social Research Methods (design, collecting data, etc.) 

33 IB Social Research Methods (elementary statistics) 

341 Social Interaction 

481 Sociological Theory 


123 


Speech 


Also required is a GPA of 3.0 (B) for all work in sociology, a 2.5 average for al 
previous college work, and satisfactory performance on the aptitude test of th( 
Graduate Record Examination. Students with limited grade or course deficiencie 
may be considered for admission to the program on completion of adviser-approvet 
courses with a B average. * 


Program of Study 

The study plan for the degree must include the following: Unit 

1. Sociology 531 Advanced Methods and Measurements in Sociology 3 

2. Sociology 581 Analysis of Sociological Theory 3 

3. Sociology 598 Thesis 6 

4. Any two graduate seminars in sociology (3 units each) 6 

5. Upper division or graduate work in sociology 6 

6. Upper division or graduate work in related fields 6 


30 

To complete the requirements, the candidate must successfully defend the thesi 
in an oral examination by a committee, and pass a comprehensive examination. 

For requirements “5” and “6” above, any adviser-approved 400-level or 300-leve 
course taken as a graduate student may be used. Additional seminars, or Sociolog) 
599, Independent Graduate Research, may be used for requirement “5”, but no 
in lieu of the thesis. Normally the student will register for thesis two different 
times, for three units each semester. 

Also, sec “Steps in the Master’s Degree Program,” page 70. 


DEPARTMENT OF SPEECH 

Professors: Andersen, Fessenden (chairman). Long,* Nelson 
Associate Professors: Granell, Kaplan 
Assistant Professors: Enell, Good, Riley 
Lecturers: Nichols, Schon 

Course work in the Department of Speech is directed toward five goals: (1) tc 
provide an understanding and appreciation of the importance of the role of ora 
communication in our society; (2) to provide professional training in such area,' 
as teaching, business, law, and others where the ability to speak well and tc 
communicate effectively is basic; (3) to prepare specialists in public address and in 
speech pathology and audiology; (4) to provide active intramural and intercollegi- 
ate forensic programs; and (5) to correlate school and community clinic experi- 
ences with the theory, principle, and history of speech pathology and audiology 

A master of arts degree program is offered for students who need this level of 
work in their professional fields and those who plan to continue toward the doc- 
torate in speech. 

MAJOR IN SPEECH FOR THE BACHELOR OF ARTS DEGREE 

The major requires a total of 36 units, 24 of which must be from 300- and 400- 
level courses. 

Course programs are planned (1) to prepare students who seek to fulfill the 
liberal arts objectives of the college with an emphasis in the field of speech, and 
(2) to prepare students who seek a standard teaching credential. 

A. Liberal Arts Major Programs: These programs include the following core re- 
quirements and emphases. 


* College administrative officer 

124 


Speech 


Core requirements 

1. Lower division: 

A minimum of 8 units (excluding Speech 101) 

A basic course in public speaking: Speech 231 

2. Upper division: 

A course in discussion: Speech 324 or Speech 424 

A course in phonetics: Speech 341 

An advanced course in public speaking: Speech 334 

Emphasis in either public address or speech pathology and audiology 

1. Public address: 

A basic course in logic and evidence: Speech 235 
An advanced course in argument: Speech 335 
A course in rhetoric: Speech 436 

Electives in public address, advisor approved, to complete the required 36 
units. 

2. Speech pathology and audiology: 

A course in speech science: Speech 340 

A general course in speech correction: Speech 342 

An advanced course in speech pathology: Speech 441 

A course in audiology: Speech 463 

Electives in speech pathology and audiology, advisor approved, to complete 

the required 36 units. 

B. Standard Teaching Credential Programs: These programs are built on the 

liberal arts major program with a public address emphasis. 

1. For elementary teaching add Speech 202 to lower division requirements and 
301 to upper division requirements. 

2. For secondary teaching add Speech 138 to lower division requirements and 
338 to upper division requirements. 

The fifth year is required for either of the above credential programs and is to 
include a minimum of six units of adviser approved electives in speech. Speech 
Ed 442 must be taken by the student seeking the secondary teaching credential 
before he can be approved for student teaching. 

3. For junior college teaching the student follows the program given for the 
secondary school teaching. In addition, the master of arts degree in speech is 
required. 

MINOR IN SPEECH 

The minor in speech is to follow one of these two patterns: 

1. The minor for the elementary teaching credential is 24 units as follows: 
Speech 101 (not to be included as credit for minor), 211 or 311, 231, 235, 301, 334, 
341, 403 or 441, and 434 or 436. 

2. The minor for secondary teaching or junior college teaching is 23 units as 
follows: Speech 101 (not to be included as credit for minor), 138, 231, 235, 324 or 
424, 334, 341 or 403, 434 or 436, and 442. 

SPECIALIZED PREPARATION FOR THE TEACHING OF EXCEPTIONAL CHILDREN 
IN THE SPEECH AND HEARING AREA 

Specialized preparation for the teaching of exceptional children in the speech and 
hearing area is a five-year program, is offered in lieu of a minor, and requires an 
academic major, which may appropriately be the program set forth above for 
the elementary teaching credential goal. The following are the programs for which 
the college is accredited and which it is authorized to offer in this field: 

Completion of all of the general education requirements for the bachelor’s 

degree: 50 units to include (a) Mathematics Educ 100A; (b) a year of English 

125 


Speech 


and in addition competency in composition; (c) the requirement in United 
States Constitution; and (d) other course work as listed in this catalog. 

This specialized preparation should include the following (courses with an 
asterisk (•) must be included): 

a. Educ 351, *Educ 471, 'Speech 403, 'Educ 431 

b. 'Speech 341, 'Speech 351, 'Speech 441, 'Speech 443, 'Speech 404, 'Psychol- 
ogy 341 

c. Select with adviser from Speech 451, Speech 452, Psychology 342, Speech 
557A-H, Speech 563 

d. 'Speech 461, 'Speech 462, 'Speech 463 

e. 'Speech 458 and/or 558 (minimum of 135 clock hours over a period of three 
semesters), 'Speech Educ 459 (minimum of 90 clock hours) 

f. The department offers the student two options: either of which fulfills thi 
requirements for the credential. Option A will carry the recommendation of 
the School of Education. Option B is not designed to prepare the student 
for regular classroom teaching; therefore, the student following this option 
will not receive the recommendation of the School of Education for the 
standard teaching credential. 

Students following Option A: 

'Educ 301, Educ 311, Educ 331, and 90 clock hours of student teaching in a 
contained classroom. 

Students following Option B: 

'Educ 301 or Educ 406 
'Psychology 311 or Educ 311 
'Speech 451 and 'Speech 452 

MASTER OF ARTS IN SPEECH 

General Characteristics 

This degree, with concentrations in public address and speech pathology and 
audiology, is a coordinated program of graduate studies to provide incentive foi 
intellectual growth, to contribute to improvement in teaching and professional 
recognition, and to provide a sound basis for continued graduate study in speech. 
The student is expected to demonstrate a high degree of intellectual and creative 
competence, to evaluate critically', and to show mastery of his field of concentra 
tion. 

Prerequisites 

In addition to the college requirements, students admitted to this program must 
possess at least 24 semester units of upper division studies in speech and background 
studies supporting the area of emphasis or both. A minimum of 18 semester units 
must be in or directly related to the area of emphasis. Students must also have com- 
pleted the aptitude test of the Graduate Record Examination. To advance in the 
program, students must demonstrate oral proficiency' and their effectiveness in 
graduate studies in the initial courses of the program. 

Program of Studies: 

The degree study plan will include at least 30 units of adviser-approved graduate 
studies, 15 units of which must be in 500-level courses. Each program will have at 
least 15 units in one of the areas of concentration; a core of six units, to include 
Speech 500 (Introduction to Graduate Study’ — taken very early in the program), 
and Speech 597 or 598 (Project or Thesis); and six units of adviser-approved 
supporting courses in related fields. Before the degree is granted, each student 
will pass an oral and written comprehensive examination. 

See also “Steps in the Master’s Degree Program,” p. 70. 


T26 


BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 

AND ECONOMICS 







SCHOOL OF BUSINESS 
ADMINISTRATION AND ECONOMICS 

Dean: Donald S. Tull 


Department of Accounting 
Professors: Hirsch, Wiseman (chairman) 

Associate Professors: Dennison, Woo 
Assistant Professor: Corman 
Lecturers: Hardman, O’Hearn 
Department of Economics 
Professor: Townshend-Zellner (chairman) 

Associate Professors: Graves, Phillips, Pontney, Schick 

Assistant Professors: Joun, Kasun, Lafky, Pickersgill, Thompson, Vinod, Voyadjis 

Department of Finance 
Professor: Kinney 
Associate Professors: Lane, Nichols 
Assistant Professors: Racster, Sharma 
Department of Management 
Professors: Barres (chairman), McCloud 
Associate Professors: Goodell, McKee, Shaul, Trego 
Assistant Professors: Babcock, Baillie, Colgan, Wiley 
Department of Marketing 

Professors: Forrest, Roberts (chairman), Smith, Tull* 

Assistant Professor: Lange 
Lecturer: Lay den 

Department of Quantitative Methods 
Associate Professor: Rutemiller (acting chairman) 

Assistant Professors: Beaton, Sastry, Vertinsky 
Lecturer: Colman 

THE UNDERGRADUATE PROGRAM IN BUSINESS 
ADMINISTRATION AND ECONOMICS 

Through a study of the various theoretical and practical business policies and 
procedures, the School of Business Administration and Economics affords a 
basic education for managerial and professional positions in business, government, 
and education. Although emphasis is given to theory, factual content which is essen- 
tial in specific vocations such as accounting, economics, finance, marketing, manage- 
ment, and business education is provided to enable students to enter apprenticeships 
in these fields with the expectation that their education should expedite their prog- 
ress, either to managerial positions or to staff positions as professional accountants, 
economists, educators, and marketing and business consultants. 

In our ever-expanding, complex society, the managers of tomorrow must be men 
and women with breadth of understanding and vision. Students who concentrate 
in a special area are encouraged to elect courses in other divisions of the college, 
particularly in the areas of the behavioral, social, and political sciences, and foreign 
languages. It is assumed that the first half of their college work toward a bachelor’s 
degree represents a required basic education in communication, mathematics, a 

* College administrative officer. 


129 


Business Administration 

laboratory science, social science, and the humanities. With the broadening of ou 
cultural and business horizons, it is desirable to become increasingly better versed i 
the language of our neighbors, Spanish, and in such languages as French, Germai 
and Russian. Since the understanding of mathematics is becoming increasingl 
important in business and the social sciences, students who contemplate enrollmen 
in cither business administration or economics are encouraged to take four years o 
high school mathematics. College algebra, or three years of high school mathematic 
including a second course in algebra, will be a minimum prerequisite for entrant 
to the program. 

If credits for either or both elementary accounting and principles of economic 
have not been earned, it will be necessary to enroll in these courses the first semes 
ter of the junior year. 

Students enrolled in the school and working toward a college degree are subjec 
to the general requirements of the college as to courses and credit hours require* 
for graduation. 

BACHELOR OF ARTS DEGREE IN BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 

The degree requirements are as follows: 

1. Completion of a minimum of 50 semester credit hours in business administra 
tion and economics courses in the School of Business Administration ani 
Economics, of which 35 semester credit hours must be upper division courses 

2. Completion of at least 15 semester credit hours in the School of Busines 
Administration and Economics at the college. 

3. Completion of the required core courses in the School of Business Adminis 
tration and Economics. Students in business administration are required t< 
take Mathematics 120 (Finite Mathematics) or equivalent as prerequisite t< 
Quantitative Methods 361. 

4. Completion of 12 semester credit hours of required courses in an area o 
concentration to be selected by the student. 

5. Completion of at least 62 semester credit hours in areas other than busines 
administration and economics. 

6. Students must attain at least a 2.0 grade point average (C average) in a! 
college work attempted, in all courses taken in the School of Business Admin 
istration and Economics, and in his area of concentration. 

CORE: The business administration and economics courses listed below are re 


quired of all students majoring in business administration: 

Course Unit 

Economics 100 American Economic History 3 

Economics 200 or 200A-B Principles of Economics 5-6 

Quantitative Methods 264 Computer Programming - 1 

Accounting 201 A-B, or 200 Elementary Accountings ~~ 6-5 

Finance 330 Business Finance ~ 3 

Management 341 Principles of Management .... 3 

Management 346 Business Law 3 

Management 449 Seminar in Business Policies* 3 

Marketing 351 Principles of Marketing — 3 

Quantitative Methods 361 Business and Economic Statistics 3 


32-34 

AREAS OF CONCENTRATION FOR MAJORS IN BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 

A student in business administration should select an area of concentration by the 
second semester of the junior year and take the required courses in the area. 

* Students taking business economics as their area of concentration will take Econ 401 — Govern 
ment and Business — in lieu of Mgmt 449 — Business Policies. 


130 


Business Administration 


Accounting Units 

301A-301B Intermediate Accounting 6 

302 Cost Accounting 3 

Vnd at least one of the following courses: 

303 Governmental Accounting 3 

308 Federal Income Tax 3 

401 Advanced Accounting 3 

402 Auditing 3 

407 Integrated Data Processing Systems .... 3 

conomics 

302 Intermediate Economic Analysis 3 

303 Intermediate Economic Analysis 3 

402 Monetary and Fiscal Policy 3 

Management 446 Managerial Economics 3 

inance 

324 Money and Banking 3 

331 Financial Analysis 3 

Ynd at least two of the following courses: 

335 Investment Principles and Practices 3 

337 Real Estate Finance 3 

431 Capital and Money Markets 3 

433 Problems in Business Finance 3 

Management 

342 Production Management 3 

343 Personnel Management 3 

444 Management of Systems 3 

446 Managerial Economics 3 

Marketing 

353 Marketing Administration. 3 

452 Marketing Research— 3 

459 Marketing Problems 3 

V minimum of one of the following courses: 

307 Distribution Costs 3 

354 Principles of Advertising 3 

355 Credit and Credit Administration 3 

356 Creative Motivation in Marketing ... — ... 3 

357 Industrial Purchasing 3 

358 Physical Distribution 3 

Quantitative Methods 

461 Advanced Statistics 3 

At least three of the following courses: 

362 Introduction to Econometrics 3 

364 Computer Logic and Programming 3 

446 Computer Programming Theory. 3 

464 Computer Applications in Industry 3 

465 Linear and Non-Linear Programming 3 

467 Statistical Quality Control 3 

Mktg. 452 Marketing Research — 3 

Mktg. 462 Advanced Econometrics 3 


131 


Business Education 


BUSINESS EDUCATION 

Students who wish to major in Business Administration in preparation for 
career as a secondary school teacher in business subjects must meet the require 
ments of the School of Business Administration and Economics and the secondar 
school teacher education program including the requirements for the proper ere 
dential as outlined in the catalog. 

The requirements for a major in this area are as follows: 

1. The core requirements as set forth for all business administration major 
page 130. 

2. Twelve hours of advanced work in one of the six areas of concentration: 

a. Accounting 

b. Economics 

c. Finance 

d. Management 

e. Marketing 

f. Quantitative methods 

3. Completion of four to six credit hours of electives which may include secrc 
tarial studies * to meet the School of Business minimum requirement of 5 
credit hours in business administration and economics courses. 

4. A maximum of 12 credit hours in the secretarial field, including those applie* 
as electives, may count toward the degree in business administration an< 
economics.* 

5. Completion of at least 62 credit hours in areas other than business administra 
tion and economics are required for the degree. 

Education courses required for a credential will be detailed by the School o 
Education. 


MASTER OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 

Applicants, as well as continuing students should read carefully the colleg 
requirements for master’s degree programs, page 70. 

Note: The School of Business Administration and Economics requires that 
student include 6 units of 500-level coursework among the 12 units to be completei 
before advancement to candidacy. 

The Programs for the M.B.A. Degree 

The School of Business Administration and Economics offers two plans for th 
M.B.A. degree. 

Plan I is a broad integrated program designed primarily for students with ai 
undergraduate degree in a field other than business administration or economics 
To insure breadth in the program, the student is not permitted to take more thai 
nine units in any one functional area. 

Plan II is an integrated program allowing some concentration in an area of spe 
cialization. Under this plan the student is required to complete 12 units in an arer* 
of concentration. It is designed primarily for students with baccalaureate degree: 
in business administration and economics. 

The degree is earned by completion of 30 units in courses approved for graduate 
work of which not less than 15 units must be at the 500 course level with an 
overall grade-point average of not less than 3.0. 

The M.B.A. degree can be achieved via three combinations: 

a. 30 units of coursework; or 

b. 27 units of coursework and an approved project; or 

c. 24 un its of coursework and an approved thesis. 

* The college does not offer work in secretarial training, typewriting, or business machines. Con- 
sult the dean of the School of Business Administration and Economics to arrange for transfer 
of approved courses to satisfy these requirements. 

132 


Business Administration 


Candidates for the M.B.A. degree must complete the prescribed course work, 
nust satisfactorily pass a comprehensive examination and must receive the endorse- 
nent of the faculty of the School of Business Administration and Economics. 

PLAN I 

Prerequisites 

Acceptance into the program requires the completion of the following pre- 
requisites or equivalent with a grade-point average of not less than 2.5. 

Units 


Math 120 Finite Mathematics or 

Math 250A Calculus 3 

QM 264 Computer Programing — 1 

Acctg 300 Accounting Fundamentals 3 

Econ 300 Basic Economics - _ 3 

Fin 330 Business Finance 3 

Mgmt 341 Principles of Management — 3 

Mgmt 346 Business Law _.. — 3 

Mktg 351 Principles of Marketing 3 

QM 361 Business and Economic Statistics 3 

Total 25 


In addition, the student must take the admission test for graduate study in busi- 
ness before or during the first semester of residence. 

CURRICULUM 

The coursework required of all candidates (24 units) under this option is as 
follows: 


Accounting 

Required 

500 Industrial Accounting 3 

501 Administrative Accounting 3 

Electives 

407 Integrated Data Processing Systems 3 

502 Seminar in Accounting Theory ... 3 

504 Seminar in Contemporary Managerial Accounting Problems 3 

Other 400- and 500-level accounting courses 


Economics 

Required 

403 Comparative Economic Systems 3 

510 Competition, Monopoly, and Public Policy 3 

Electives 

511 Economic Problems and Public Policy — 3 

Other 400- and 500-level economics courses 

Finance 

Required 

532 Corporate Financial Management 3 

Electives 

533 Seminar in Financial Administration 3 

534 Seminar in Financial Markets 3 

Other 400- and 500-level finance courses 


133 


Business Administration 


Management Unit 

Required 

544 Organization Behavior, Theory, and Administration .— 3 

Electives 

541 Seminar in Production Problems 3 

542 Seminar in Labor Relations 3 

543 Seminar in Personnel Administration 3 

548 Seminar in International Management 3 

549 Seminar in Policy Planning and Administration 3 

Other courses at the 400 level that are approved 

Marketing 

Required 

551 Seminar in Marketing Problems 3 

Electives 

452 Marketing Research 3 

552 Seminar in Pricing and Price Policy 3 

553 Seminar in Product Planning 3 


Other 400- and 500-level marketing courses (except Marketing 459) 


Quantitative Methods 

Required 

563 Statistical Decision Theory, or 

560 Operations Research 3 

Electives 

446 Computer Programming Theory 3 

461 Advanced Statistics 3 

464 Computer Applications in Industry 3 

465 Linear and Non-Linear programming 3 

565 Seminar on Computers in Industry 3 

566 Design of Experiments 3 

Other 400- and 500-level courses 


PLAN II 

Prerequisites 

Acceptance into the program requires the completion of the following prerequi 


sites or equivalent with a grade-point average of not less than 2.5. 

Math 120 Finite Mathematics or 

Math 250A Calculus 3 

QM 264 Computer Programming 1 

Acctg 201 AB Accounting Principles , 6 

Econ 200AB Principles of Economics 6 

Fin 330 Business Finance 3 

Mgmt 341 Principles of Management 3 

Mgmt 346 Business Law 3 

Mktg 351 Principles of Marketing 3 

QM 361 Business and Economics Statistics 3 

Total 31 


In addition, the student must take the admission test for graduate study in busi- 
ness before or during the first semester of residence. 


134 


Economies 


CURRICULUM 

In addition to the prerequistes listed above, each student will be held responsible 
to the department of his choice for the specialized background prescribed for that 
area of concentration. The area of concentration shall be selected from account- 
ing, finance, management, marketing and quantitative methods. 

1. The required graduate core program in the Plan II M.B.A. shall be 15 to 18 


units: 

Acctg 500 Industrial Accounting, or Units 

Acctg 501 Administrative Accounting — 3 

Fin 532 Corporate Financial Management 3 

Mgmt 544 Organizational Behavior, Theory, and Administration 3 

Econ 403 Comparative Economic Systems, or 

Econ 510 Competition, Monopoly, and Public Policy 3 

Mktg 551 Seminar in Marketing Problems. 3 

QM 463 Statistical Decision Theory, or 

QM 560 Operations Research ~ 3 

2. In addition to the graduate core, each student shall elect an area of con- 


centration of at least 12 but not more than 15 units to be approved by an 
adviser, the department chairman concerned, and the graduate coordinator. See 
also “Steps in the Master’s Degree Program,” p. 70. 

BACHELOR OF ARTS DEGREE IN ECONOMICS 

The economics major is designed to prepare students for positions in business 
education, and government, and for graduate work in economics and related dis- 
ciplines. 

Required of all students for the degree: 

1. Completion of 37 semester credit hours of courses in business administration 
and economics in the School of Business Administration and Economics, of 
which 24 semester credit hours must be in upper division courses. 

2. Completion of at least 15 semester hours in the School of Business Admin- 
istration and Economics at the college. 

3. Completion of the major course requirements for economics majors, in the 
School of Business Administration and Economics. Students in economics 
are required to take Mathematics 120 (Finite Mathematics) or equivalent as 
prerequisite to Quantitative Methods 361. 

4. Completion of at least 62 semester credit hours in areas other than business 
administration and economics. 

5. Students must attain at least 2.0 grade-point average (C average) in all college 
work attempted, and in all courses in the School of Business Administration and 
Economics. 

Business administration and economics courses required of all students majoring 
in economics are listed below: 


Lower Division 

Course Units 

Econ 100 American Economic History 3 

Econ 200 or 200A-B Principles of Economics 5-6 

Acctg 201 A-B or 200 Elementary Accounting 6-5 


Total 13-15 


135 


Economics 


Upper Division 

Course . Units 

Econ 302 Intermediate Economic Analysis 3 

Econ 303 Intermediate Economic Analysis 3 

Econ 324 Money and Banking 3 

Econ 401 Government and Business 3 

Econ 402 Monetary and Fiscal Policy 3 

QM 361 Business and Economic Statistics 3 

Six hours of electives in the School of Business Administration and 
Economics approved by the student’s major adviser 6 

Total 24 

MINOR IN ECONOMICS 

A minor in economics may be achieved by taking the following courses: 
Economics Units 

100 American Economic History 3 

200 Principles of Economics 5 

302 or 303 Intermediate Economic Analysis 3 

401 Government and Business or 

402 Monetary and Fiscal Policy 3 

403 Comparative Economic Systems 3 

Elective ¥ 3 

Total 20 


MASTER OF ARTS IN ECONOMICS 

The master of arts in economics is a part-time, evening (and late-aftemoon) 
degree program, designed especially for candidates who will be employed full or 
part-time while working for the M.A. degree. 

The procedural steps for admission to, and completion of, the Master of Arts 
in economics degree follow. 

Admission Requirements 

1. Apply for admission to the college in unclassified graduate status and declare 
the objective to be a Master of Arts in economics degree. This must be accom- 
plished at the Office of Admissions before the dates established in the college 
calendar. 

2. Apply for admission to the Master of Arts in economics program. This must 
be accomplished at the Department of Economics and the Graduate Office after 
admission to the college, but before registration. Specific admission requirements 
include: 

a. An overall grade-point average in all undergraduate work of not less than 2.7. 

b. Competency in mathematics through fulfillment of one of the following: 
Courses in college algebra and calculus; completion of California State College 
at Fullerton courses QM 260 and QM 360 (or equivalent); satisfactory com- 
pletion of a mathematics proficiency test developed by the Department of 
Economics, comprising mathematical applications in economics. 

c. Satisfactory level of performance in a written examination in economics. 

d. Satisfactory level of performance on the Graduate Record Examination 
(Verbal and Quantitative), aptitude only. 

e. Interview. 


136 


Economics 


’rerequisites 

Acceptance into the program requires the completion of the following pre- 
requisite courses, or equivalent: 

1. For students 'without an undergraduate major in economics (a grade-point 
average of not less than 3.0 in the following prerequisites is required) : 

Units 


Principles of economics 6 

Intermediate economic theory (micro) 3 

Intermediate economic theory (macro) 3 

Statistics (analytical) : 3 

Money and banking 3 

Government and business 3 

Monetary and fiscal policy 3 


Total 24 


2. For students with an undergraduate major in economics: 24 semester units of 
work in economics or related courses (e.g., statistics), with a minimum grade- 
point average of 3.0. The 24 units must include the following courses or 
their equivalent, with a minimum grade of 3.0 in each course: Intermediate 
economic theory (micro). Intermediate economic theory (macro), Statistics 
(analytic) , Money and banking. 

’rogram 

1. A core of 12 graduate units in economics is required: 

Units 


Economics 502, Advanced Microeconomic Analysis..... 3 

Economics 503, Advanced Macroeconomic Analysis 3 

Economics 505, Methodology in Economic Research 3 

Economics 506, Seminar in Micro- and Macro-Economic 

Applications ( project required) 3 


Total 12 

2. Electives*: 

a. Elect one graduate course in economics (other than the required core 

courses, and outside the quantitative field) 3 

b. Elect one upper-division or graduate-level course in quantitative or 

mathematical economics 3 

c. Elect two upper division or graduate level courses in fields other than 

economics, yet related to economics and approved as part of the 
student’s integrated program 6 

d. Elect two upper division or graduate level courses both in economics 

or both in other related fields, or one in economics and one in 
other related fields 6 


Total 18 

See also “Steps in the Master’s Degree Program,” p. 70. 


* If nine or more units are taken in fields outside economics in elective areas c. and d., then 
three of these units must be at the graduate level. 


137 



EDUCATION 






































SCHOOL OF EDUCATION 

Dean: Kenneth R. Doane 


Professors: Brockmann, Carr, Coppolino, Croy, Denno,* Doane, Ehmann,* Hartsig, 
Imhoff, Johnson, Lake, McComb, # Pastor 

Associate Professors: Barrett, Cusick, Donoghue, Fierman, Holmes, Kravitz, Mc- 
Garry, Omalcv, Preble, Sica, Smith 

Assistant Professors: Albrecht, Bates, Fulton, Gould, Hanauer, Lance, Lemmon, 
McCullough, Schild, Schultz, Stark, Stovall, Yessis 
Instructor: Witchey 

The courses, programs, and services of the school are directed toward the 
following objectives of students: 

1. Master of Science in Education with concentration in school administration, or 
school counseling 

2. Preservice teacher education (elementary school, secondary school, junior 
college, mentally retarded) 

3. In-service teacher education 

4. Professional preparation of administrative and counseling personnel for the 
public schools 

5. Program for the preparation of reading specialists 

6. Major in physical education leading to the bachelor of science degree 

7. The portion of the general education requirements in physical education and 
health 

Instruction concentrates on the central principles of human behavior, human 
development, human learning, individual differences, physical activity, the school 
as a basic institution of our culture, the methods and materials associated with 
effective teaching, school administration, school counseling, and the current and 
persistent problems that confront administrators, teachers, counselors and other 
professional workers in educational institutions. In addition to using published 
source materials and attending class sessions for presentations and discussions, many 
of the school’s courses require field work in schools and other educational agencies. 

TEACHER EDUCATION CURRICULA 

California State College at Fullerton is accredited by the California State Board 
of Education for programs leading to the following credentials: 

L Standard teaching credential with specialization in elementary school teaching 

2. Standard teaching credential with specialization in secondary school teaching 

3. Standard teaching credential with specialization in junior college teaching 

4. Standard teaching credential with specialization, in lieu of minor, in the 
teaching of exceptional children in the area of mentally retarded children 

5. Standard teaching credential with specialization, in lieu of minor, in the teach- 
ing of exceptional children in the area of speech and hearing handicapped 
children 

6. Standard designated services credential with a specialization in pupil personnel 
services 

7. Standard supervision credential. 

* College administrative officer. 


141 


Education 


The School of Education has administrative responsibility for teacher education. 
All curricula provide for completing the requirements for graduation with the 
bachelor of arts degree at the end of the usual four collegiate years and an addi- 
tional year of work to satisfy requirements for a teaching credential. Preparation 
for teaching in a junior college requires the master’s degree. Details of the pro- 
grams are provided in special brochures available from the School of Education or 
the Credentials Office. Information about the professional services authorized by 
the above credentials will be provided by professional advisers or the Credentials 
Office. 


CURRICULUM IN ELEMENTARY SCHOOL TEACHER EDUCATION * 

The program leading to the recommendation for the standard teaching creden- 
tial with specialization in elementary school teaching includes the following: 

1. A bachelor’s degree from an approved institution. 

2. A fifth year of college or university postgraduate education taken at the upper 
division or graduate level. (If the student does not complete all requirements, 
the credential may be awarded on the basis of partial fulfillment at the end 
of four or more years of work if he has a bachelor’s degree from an approved 
institution, has an approved major, and has completed the student teaching re- 
quirement.) 

3. A minimum of 45 semester hours in five of the following six areas: (1) social 
sciences, (2) natural sciences, (3) humanities (excluding foreign languages), 
(4) fine arts, (5) mathematics, and (6) foreign languages. The humanities 
requirement must include a year of English, and, a course in composition. 
Eng 101 and Eng 102 and an additional course in English meet this require- 
ment. (To prepare himself to meet professional responsibilities, an elementary 
school teacher education candidate should include in his program Art 100, 
Music 101, PE 123, PE 149, and Speech 101 or Speech 231.) These 45 semester 
hours of coursework for the credential can be met through the college 
general education requirements for the bachelor’s degree with the proper 
selection of courses. (Not more than six hours of coursework taken to satisfy 
these requirements shall apply toward the fulfillment of the requirements for 
either a major or a minor.) 

4. Three semester hours of coursework in the theory of the structure, arithmetic 
and algebra, of the number system or three semester hours of coursework 
in calculus. (Math Education 100A meets this requirement.) 

5. One of the following: 

a. A major consisting of at least 24 semester hours of upper division or gradu- 
ate level courses in an academic subject matter area commonly taught in the 
public elementary schools. These majors are currently available for this 
specialization at the college: anthropology, art, biological science, chem- 
istry, comparative literature, drama, economics, English, French, geography, 
German, history, linguistics, mathematics, music, philosophy, physics, polit- 
ical science, psychology, sociology', Spanish, speech. (Note: the specifica- 
tions above are state minima, and do not necessarily satisfy requirements 
for a major for graduation from the college.) 

b. A major and a minor, each of which is in a subject matter area commonly 
taught in the public elementary schools, and one of which is in an aca- 
demic subject matter area. The academic major shall consist of at least 
24 semester hours of upper division or graduate coursework. If the major 
is not an academic one, it shall consist of 28 semester hours of upper division 
or graduate coursework. (With a nonacademic major, i.e., business admin- 
istration, physical education, communications with journalism emphasis, 

* Regulations for the credential are subject to change by the State Board of Education; any cur 
ricular changes will be available in later college publications. 

142 


Education 


only the major and minor subjects may be taught in kindergarten and 
grades 1 through 9.) This minor shall consist of a minimum of 20 semester 
hours of coursework. When the major is in an academic subject matter 
area specialized preparation in such areas as mentally retarded or speech 
and hearing handicapped may be substituted, 
c. Two minors in subject matter areas commonly taught in the public elemen- 
tary schools and a major, other than education and educational methodology, 
not commonly taught therein. If the major is not in an academic subject 
matter area, each minor shall be in an academic subject matter area. If the 
major is in an academic subject matter area, one of the minors shall be in 
an academic subject matter area. These minors shall consist of a minimum 
of 12 semester hours of coursework. Specialized preparation in such areas 
as mentally retarded or speech and hearing handicapped may be substituted 
for one of the minors. 

6. Courses selected from the following ones offered by academic departments 
as part of the basic preparation for elementary teachers. A minimum of 
three courses, selected with the approval of a professional adviser, must be 
completed before student teaching. 

Art 380 Art and Child Development (3 units) 

English 433 Children’s Literature (3 units) 

Math Educ 100B Fundamental Concepts of Mathematics (3 units) 

Music 333 Music and Child Development (3 units) 

PE 333 Physical Education and Human Development (3 units) 

Sci Educ 310 Elementary Experimental Science (3 units) 

7. Professional education requirements which are currently met by the following 
prbgram: 

Educ 311 Psychological Foundations of Education (4 units) 

Educ 331 Elementary School Principles, Curricula, and Methods (8 units) 

Educ 339 or 739 Student Teaching in the Elementary School (8 units) 

Educ 401 Social, Historical, and Philosophical Foundations of Education 
(4 units) 

COMPOSITE LOWER DIVISION, UPPER DIVISION, AND FIFTH YEAR WORK 

A student seeking recommendation for the standard teaching credential with 
specialization in elementary school teaching after five years of preservice teacher 
education should complete — 

In the lower and upper division: 

a. Coursework listed in 3,4, and 5 above. 

b. A minimum of three courses from item 6 above. These courses are to be 
selected in consultation with and with the approval of his professional 
adviser. 

c. Courses in professional education 
Junior year, Education 311 (4) 

Senior year, second semester, Education 331 (8) 

d. Additional courses selected in consultation with his professional adviser. 

In the fifth year: 

a. Courses in professional education 
First semester, Education 739 (8) 

Second semester, Education 401 (4) 

b. Additional courses from item 6 above as needed and other courses selected 
in consultation with his professional adviser. 


143 


Education 


(The applicant for the standard teaching credential with specialization in 
elementary school teaching must complete 30 units of upper division and/o: 
graduate work after he has completed all requirements for the bachelor’: 
degree.) 

A student seeking recommendation for the standard teaching credential with 
specialization in elementary school teaching on partial fulfillment of requirement.' 
should complete — 

In the lower and upper division: 

a. Coursework listed in 3, 4, and 5 above. 

b. A minimum of three courses from item 6 above. These courses are tc 
be selected in consultation with and with the approval of his professional 
adviser. 

c. Courses in professional education 
Junior year, Education 311 (4) 

Senior year, first semester, Education 331 (8) 

Senior year, second semester, Education 339 (8) 

d. Additional courses selected in consultation with his professional adviser 

In the fifth year (to be completed during the first seven years of 
teaching) : 

a. Courses in professional eduction 
Education 401 (4) 

b. Additional courses from item 6 above as needed and other courses selected 
in consultation with his professional adviser. 

(The applicant for the standard teaching credential with specialization ir 
elementary school teaching must complete 30 units of upper division and/or 
graduate work after he has completed all requirements for the bachelor’^ 
degree.) 

CURRICULUM IN SECONDARY SCHOOL TEACHER EDUCATION * 

Composite of Requirements in Lower Division , Upper Division , and 
Graduate Work Leading to the Standard Teaching Credential 
With Specialization in Secondary School Teaching 

Credential requirements and the 'program leading to the recommendation for 
the standard teaching credential with specialization in secondary school teaching 
includes the following: 

1. A bachelor’s degree from an approved institution. 

2. A fifth year of college or university postgraduate education taken at the upper 
division or graduate level. (The postgraduate year is defined by California 
State College at Fullerton as 30 semester units of upper division or graduate 
level coursework.) 

3. Forty-five semester hours of coursework, including the English and the com- 
petency described below, and including four of the following six areas: (1) 
humanities (excluding foreign languages), (2) social sciences, (3) natural 
sciences, (4) mathematics requiring as a prerequisite an understanding and 
knowledge of high school algebra and geometry, (5) fine arts, and (6) foreign 
languages. The humanities requirement must include a year of English, and 
in addition, the applicant for the credential shall demonstrate competence in 
composition either by passing a course in composition or by passing an exam- 
ination in lieu thereof. (Note: The English requirement including competence 

* This is the curriculum for the standard teaching credential with specialization in secondary 
school teaching. Credential requirements are subject to regulatory changes. Any such changes 
will be described in later college publications. 


144 


Education 


in composition is met at this college by English 101, Composition and World 
Literature; English 102, World Literature and Composition (or the equivalents 
of these two courses), and an additional course in English. This 45 semester 
hours of coursework for the credential can be met through the college gen- 
eral education requirement for the bachelor’s degree with proper selection of 
courses. Not more than six hours of coursework taken to satisfy these require- 
ments shall apply toward the major or minor for the credential.) 

4. Preparation in subject matter areas commonly taught in the public secondary 
schools for the purpose of credential requirements for majors and minors. 

a. One of the following: 

Option 1. A major in an academic subject matter area commonly taught 
in the public secondary schools. 

Option 2. A major and a minor, each of which is in a subject matter area 
commonly taught in the public high schools, and one of which 
is in an academic subject matter area. 

b. Major requirements for the credential must include at least 24 upper divi- 
sion and graduate level units. At least six units in the major must be taken 
at the graduate level. Six postgraduate units in the minor may be taken in 
lieu of this requirement for the major. See the general course numbering 
code on page 168 for the description of graduate level courses for the cre- 
dential. Also see the appropriate sections of this catalog for descriptions of 
requirements in specific majors. The college will recognize single subject 
areas as satisfying Option 1 provided the student supplies additional upper 
division or graduate units in supporting areas structured by the department 
in which the baccalaureate degree is taken and in consultation with the 
other departments involved. This option should be considered carefully, 
since it may not be practical in terms of job placement. Some departments 
of the college will require that the student must present a minor. Stu- 
dents must consult with academic and professional advisers concerning 
Option 1. 

c. Minor requirements vary, but must include 20 units in a single subject in 
this credential program at CSCF. (Note: A minor is not required for 
graduation from the college but is required for the recommendation of the 
college for Option 2.) 

Each student will complete a major planned with and approved by his 
major adviser. Majors presently available are: art, biology, business admin- 
istration, chemistry, communications with journalism emphasis, drama, 
economics, English, French, geography, German, history, mathematics, 
music, physical education, physics, political science, Spanish, and speech. 

Each student will complete a minor planned with and approved by his 
professional adviser. Minors presently available are: art, biology, communi- 
cations with journalism emphasis, drama, economics, English, French, geog- 
raphy, German, history, mathematics, music, physical education, physics, 
political science, Spanish and speech. Students may also present specialized 
preparation to serve as a teacher of exceptional children in the area of the 
mentally retarded or speech and hearing handicapped in lieu of the minor. 

Students majoring in business administration, communications with a 
journalism emphasis, and physical education must have an academic minor 
with a minimum of 20 units in subjects commonly taught in the public 
secondary schools. Students with these majors must complete 12 units of 
upper division or graduate level work in the minor area. 

5. Credential requirements in courses for preservice professional education are 
met in the following program in professional education: 


145 


Education 


COURSES IN PROFESSIONAL EDUCATION 

Units 


Educ 340 Principles and Curricula of Secondary Education 3 

Educ 401 Sociological, Historical, and Philosophical Foundations of Educa- 
tion 4 

Educ 311 Psychological Foundations of Education 4 

Educ 442 Teaching (art, English, etc.) in the Secondary Schools (also 

listed in respective departments) 3 

Educ 449 Field Work in Methods of Teaching in Secondary Schools 1 

Educ 749 Student Teaching (art, English, etc.) in the Secondary School 
and Seminar (also listed in respective departments) - — 6 


Students normally will begin their work in professional education in the junior 
year, and it is expected that, except for Education 301, the courses above will 
be taken in the indicated sequence. Students who begin their work in professional 
education as seniors or as graduate students will follow a somewhat different 
sequence, and should consult professional advisers when planning their programs. 
Graduate students without professional education backgrounds may be required 
to extend their program beyond a single academic year to complete the college 
secondary school teacher education program. In all cases students are required 
to take Education 340 the first semester they are enrolled in professional education. 

NOTE: Admission to the college does not include admission to the secondary 
school teacher education program. Sec the description on page 149 for the 
procedures for admission to teacher education which does include admission to this 
credential program. It is the responsibility of each student to file his application 
for admission to teacher education by the end of the semester in which he com- 
pletes Education 340. It is also the responsibility of each student to arrange to 
complete his requirements for admission to teacher education early in his work 
in professional education. Students must be admitted to teacher education prior 
to taking Education 442 and Education 449. 

Admission to teacher education does not include admission to student teaching. 
See the description of the procedures for admission to student teaching on page 
150. The student must observe the deadline and must meet other requirements for 
admission to student teaching. 

CURRICULUM IN JUNIOR COLLEGE TEACHER EDUCATION 

The program requirements leading to the college-recommended standard teach- 
ing credential with a specialization in junior college teaching are: 

1. A master’s or higher degree from CSCF or from an accredited institution. 

2. Preparation in subject matter areas commonly taught in public junior colleges 
in either of the following: 

a. An academic major in a single subject commonly taught in public junior 
college. (The subject in which a master’s degree has been granted consti- 
tutes a major in that subject for these purposes.) 

b. If the major is nonacademic (the candidate holds a master’s degree in a 
subject such as business administration, physical education, or journalism), 
the candidate must have an academic minor of a minimum of 20 semester 
hours in a single subject commonly taught in the public junior college. 
Twelve of the units in the minor must be of upper division or graduate 
level. 

3. Professional education requirements in CSCF recommended program: 


Units 

Educ 744 Principles of Junior College Teaching— 3 

Educ 799 Junior College Student Teaching and Seminar 4 


146 


Special Education 


ADMISSION TO JUNIOR COLLEGE TEACHER EDUCATION PROGRAM 

Admission to the college does not constitute admission to junior college teacher 
education. 

The candidate must: 

Have a master’s or higher degree from a fully accredited institution in a field 
in which the college offers a major 

or 

have classified graduate status (master’s degree candidacy) at CSCF and 
possess a baccalaureate degree. 

Admission to junior college teacher education follows in general the procedure 
described on page 143. For exact procedures see Credentials Office. 

The student is responsible for filing his application for admission as early as 
possible and is also responsible for admission to teacher education. 

Application for junior college student teaching and seminar is not included in 
admission to the program. The student is responsible for following the procedures 
listed on page 150 under “Application for Student Teaching.” 

The courses in professional education listed above will be taken in sequence. 
The student must have postgraduate standing before he enrolls in these courses. 
Student teaching may be taken in either the last semester in which the master’s 
degree will be completed or after the degree has been granted. 

N.B.: The above is a description of the program leading to the recommenda- 
tion of the college for the credential. This program includes student teaching 
and work in professional education not required by the state. The college pro- 
gram is designed to meet the job placement needs of candidates for positions 
in junior colleges. 


SPECIAL EDUCATION 

CURRICULUM IN PREPARATION OF TEACHERS OF THE MENTALLY RETARDED 

Students preparing to become teachers of the mentally retarded must complete 
the curriculum in either elementary or secondary school teacher education as 
described on pages 142 and 144. When the major is in an academic area commonly 
taught in the elementary or secondary schools (as appropriate), the 22 units of 
specialized preparation described below (not including student teaching) may be 
substituted for the minor. On successful completion of the program the student 
will be recommended for the standard teaching credential with specialization in 
elementary or secondary teaching with specialized preparation to serve as a teacher 
of exceptional children, area of the mentally retarded. Upon receipt of this creden- 
tial, the student will be authorized to teach in special classes for the mentally 
retarded as well as in regular classes at the appropriate level. 

Students desiring to prepare as teachers of the mentally retarded should proceed 
as follows: 

1. Apply for admission to teacher education as described on page 149. 

2. File the “Application to Enter the Program for Specialization in the Teaching 
of Mentally Retarded Pupils” at the same time as application is made to be 
admitted to teacher education. (Application forms are available from the 
School of Education.) 

3. Arrange for a personal interview with a faculty member involved in the 
program. This faculty member will advise the student about the appropriate 
sequence of courses. 

4. Upon completion of the necessary prerequisite courses, apply for admission 
to student teaching as described on page 150. Students in this specialized 
program will have their student teaching assignment divided between regular 
classes and special 1 classes. 


147 


Special Education 


Students seeking recommendations for this special credential to teach the men- 


tally retarded should complete the courses listed below in lieu of the minor 
required for the Standard Teaching Credential. 

Units 

Educ 471 Exceptional Children 3 

Educ 473 Mental Retardation: Educational Development 3 

Educ 474 Curriculum and Methods for Teaching the 

Mentally Retarded 3 

Educ 475 Observation and Individual Instruction with the 

Mentally Retarded 3 

Educ 779 Student Teaching with Mentally Retarded Pupils 4 

Educ 351 Principles of Guidance 3 

Speech 403 Speech Development 3 

Electives from courses related to teaching the mentally retarded (4 units); 
electives must be approved by the adviser — 

Total number of units in special education not 
including student teaching 22 


RECOMMENDED SEQUENCE OF COURSES IN PROFESSIONAL EDUCATION FOR 
STUDENTS PREPARING AS TEACHERS OF THE MENTALLY RETARDED 


Elementary Secondary 

Junior year, first semester Educ 311 (4) Educ 311 (4) 

Junior year, second semester .. .Educ 471 (3) Educ 471 (3) 

Educ 340 (3) 

Senior year, first semester Educ 331 (8) Educ 442 (3) 

Educ 473 (3) Educ 473 (3) 

Senior year, second semester Educ 474 (3) Educ 474 (3) 

Educ 401 (4) 

Fifth year, first semester Educ 475 (3) Educ 475 (3) 

Speech 403 (3) Speech 403 (3) 

Electives in special Electives in special 

education (4) education (4) 

Educ 401 (4) 

Fifth year, second semester Educ 779 (4) Educ 779 (4) 

Educ 739 (4) Educ 749 (2) 

Educ 351 (3) Educ 351 (3) 


CURRICULUM IN PREPARATION OF READING AND REMEDIAL READING SPECIALISTS 

Teachers who wish to enter the program for the preparation of specialists in 
reading and remedial reading, including both primary and secondary school levels, 
may enroll in the following 18-unit specialty: 

SEQUENCE OF COURSES IN READING 


Units 

Educ 506 Curriculum and Research: Reading 3 

Educ 516 Etiology of Learning Disorders: Reading 3 

Educ 581 Analysis of Reading Difficulties 3 

Educ 582 Analysis of Reading Practices.- 3 

Educ 583 A Remedial Reading: Casework 3 

Educ 583 B Remedial Reading: Casework 3 


Completion of the reading sequence will entitle the student to a statement of 
completion of the reading specialty. 


148 


Admission to Teacher Education 


CURRICULUM IN PREPARATION OF TEACHERS OF SPEECH 
AND HEARING HANDICAPPED 

Details of this teacher education program are found on page 125. The program 
is administered by the Speech Department in consultation with the School of 
Education. 


STATUTORY REQUIREMENTS FOR CREDENTIALS 
FOR TEACHING 

The curricular requirements for credentials for teaching in California elementary 
schools and secondary schools are included in the above curricula. In addition, an 
applicant for a credential for teaching is asked questions about his citizenship, and 
about his ethical and moral character. The applicant must sign an oath of allegiance, 
must present a certificate of health from a qualified physician, and present official 
transcripts of collegiate studies. The applicant must present two sets of personal 
identification cards, including fingerprints. He must present evidence of having 
passed a course or suitable examination on the United States Constitution. Each 
application for a credential costs $10. 

PERSONNEL SERVICES FOR TEACHER 
EDUCATION STUDENTS 

Advisement is available to any student seeking a public school credential and a 
bachelor of arts degree. Before registration, the student should consult an adviser 
in the department in which he expects to major and an adviser in the School of 
Education who will help him select courses and build his program. A student 
from another institution should bring transcripts of previous work and a tentative 
selection of courses. Each student is responsible for meeting all requirements set 
forth in the catalog and supplements. 

During the first semester after enrollment, a student seeking a bachelors degree 
will receive an evaluation of his credits from the college Office of Admissions. If a 
student changes his degree or credential objective, he must have an evaluation 
for each new credential. The evaluation will serve as a guide for the student and 
the advisers in planning a complete program. Any deviation from this evaluation 
must be approved through written petitions submitted to the dean of the School 
of Education. Transferred education courses must be of upper division level and 
taken within the past 15 years to be applicable to upper division credential re- 
quirements.* 

ADMISSION TO TEACHER EDUCATION 

To become a candidate for a teaching credential the student must be enrolled, 
in good standing, and must be admitted to “teacher education” in the Office of 
Admissions and Advisement of the School of Education. Application for admis- 
sion to teacher education should be filed during the first semester of the junior 
year or the first semester of attendance at the college, if the student enters with 
advanced standing. 

Admission to teacher education is required of each student before he files the 
application for student teaching.t 

A faculty committee will review information concerning the applicant’s intel- 
lectual resources and mastery of important concepts in the common curricular 
areas of higher education, command of fundamental skills of communication 

* Selected courses completed in lower division at institutions outside of the State of California 
may be applied to professional education credential requirements, 
t Exceptions wiD be made in the case of new transfer students. 


149 


Application for Student Teaching 

(English language usage, written composition, speech, hearing, reading compre- 
hension, handwriting, mathematical skills), scholarship, personality and character, 
interest in teaching, and health. Data related to these criteria are gathered from 
transcripts and records from other schools and colleges, group and individual 
tests, personality inventories, estimates of the potential of the applicant, and from 
the Student Health Center. Students should normally qualify for admission and 
be advised of their status during the second semester of the junior year or their 
first semester of attendance if they enter with advanced standing with degrees from 
accredited colleges. 

Students who show weaknesses in any of the fundamental skills of communication 
are advised of their standing. If there, are weaknesses in only one or two of the 
areas noted above, the student will be advised of refresher courses and given a 
specified time to meet the standard. 

If the applicant has serious deficiencies in communication skills or does not meet 
the standards of mastery in the common curricular areas, personality and character, 
scholarship, interest in teaching, or health, the faculty committee will deny ad- 
mission to teacher education. 

The student must arrange to take the required battery of group and individual 
tests and inventories necessary to provide information needed by the faculty 
committee. The tests of breadth of understanding, reading, English usage, number 
skills, composition, handwriting, and personality arc given by the School of Educa- 
tion for admission to teacher education; consult the Office of Admissions and 
Advisement of the School of Education for dates. 

The student who comes to CSCF to work toward a credential for teaching in a 
secondary school and who already has a bachelor’s degree must, before he is ad- 
mitted to teacher education, consult with an adviser in the major and must submit 
a statement, signed by the adviser, which indicates the following: 

1. That the student’s undergraduate preparation in his major is considered to be 
adequate for the credential sought, or 

2. Specific courses which the student must complete to have a major adequate 
for the credential sought, and which he must complete before he will be 
admitted to student teaching. These may be in addition to the minimum of the 
six upper division or graduate units required in the major in the postgraduate 
year, or may, in part or in whole, satisfy this six unit minimum requirement. 

Full details on standards and procedures for admission to teacher education are 
described in “Instructions and Standards for Admission to Teacher Education,” 
which is available from the Office of Admissions and Advisement, School of Edu- 
cation. 


APPLICATION FOR STUDENT TEACHING 

Admission to teacher education as described above is the first step in a cumulative 
and continuing evaluation of a candidate’s fitness to teach. The applicant for 
admission to student teaching must have a grade-point average of 2.5 in the major, 
2.5 in the minor, and 2.5 in professional education. Marks of C, or better, are 
required in all professional education courses. Applicants for admission to elemen- 
tary school student teaching must be classified as postgraduate students or be within 
15 units of the baccalaureate degree. Applicants for admission to secondary school 
student teaching or to junior college student teaching must be classified as post- 
graduate students. All applicants must have completed at least 12 units at California 
State College at Fullerton. The applicant must present a favorable report on health 
status and history'. He must present evidence of readiness for student teaching 
responsibility as testified by the major adviser, the professional adviser, and other 


150 


Study Limits of Student Teachers 


college faculty. This evidence relates to scholarship, breadth of understanding, 
command of the subjects to be taught, fundamental skills of communication, person- 
ality and character, interest and potential for teaching, and health. 

Competence is required in all subjects and skills for which the candidate is seeking 
a credential. For the elementary school teacher education student, this includes all 
subjects and skills commonly taught in the first eight grades of the public schools. 
Secondary school and junior college teacher education students must meet the 
requirements for major and minor (s) as specified by the academic divisions. 

All instructors of the college are asked to participate in the continuing evaluation 
of students in relation to those aptitude, personality and character traits which arc 
considered essential to admission to the teaching profession. Dependability in 
fulfilling assignments, class attendance, ability to get along with people, industry, 
and emotional stability are representative criteria. In addition to the evaluations 
by instructors, the applicants may be interviewed by a faculty committee, and 
attention will be directed to general appearance, dress, vitality, poise, temperament, 
integrity, and social attitudes. 

The application for admission to student teaching is submitted to the coordinator 
of elementary education or the coordinator of secondary education. The application 
must be submitted by October 15 or March 1 of the semester preceding the 
semester in which the student teaching assignment is expected. A faculty committee 
will gather the information described above and report to the student in time to do 
planning for the following semester. 

Except for graduate students who are in their first semester of study at CSCF, 
applications will be accepted only from those who have completed all requirements 
for admission to teacher education. 

Full details on standards and procedures are described in “Instructions and 
Standards for Admission to Student Teaching,” available in the Office of Elemen- 
tary and Secondary Education. 


STUDENT TEACHING 

Each candidate for the standard teaching credential with specialization in elemen- 
tary school teaching will do his student teaching in the last semester he is in the 
teacher education curriculum or in his postgraduate year at the college. Each 
candidate for the standard teaching credential with specialization in secondary 
school teaching, or for the standard teaching credential with specialization in junior 
college teaching will do his student teaching during a postgraduate year. Details 
about student teaching in special education classes are available in the Office of 
Elementary and Secondary Education. Student teaching assignments arc made in 
the elementary and secondary schools of districts geographically accessible to the 
college. Junior college student teaching assignments are made in nearby junior col- 
leges. Students will be assigned to work under the supervision of carefully selected 
supervising teachers; a college supervisor makes frequent visits to the student 
teacher and the supervising teacher. Student teachers meet in a weekly seminar 
under the leadership of the college supervisor to discuss performance and problems. 


STUDY LIMITS OF STUDENT TEACHERS 

Students who enroll in Educ 339 or 739, Student Teaching in the Elemen- 
tary School, will be limited to one additional course for that semester. Students 
who enroll in Educ 749, Student Teaching in the Secondary School, will be 
limited to two additional courses for that semester. It is expected that students 


151 


Permission to Substitute Experience 


will not carry out-of-college work responsibilities during the semester of the student 
teaching assignment. 

If a student is under hardship because of these limitations, he may submit a 
petition to the coordinator of elementary education or to the coordinator of 
secondary education, as appropriate, requesting permission to carry not more than 
13 units, including student teaching. The petition must set forth, in full, the 
circumstances necessitating the petition. 

PERMISSION TO SUBSTITUTE TEACHING EXPERIENCE 
FOR STUDENT TEACHING 

A candidate for a teaching credential who has had two years of successful, 
regular teaching experience must petition the School of Education, through his 
professional adviser, for permission to substitute such experience for the student 
teaching requirement. Substitution of teaching experience for student teaching will 
be considered only if the applicant: 

1. Has been admitted to teacher education at the college. 

2. Has submitted an official verification from his former supervisor, principal, 
or superintendent to the School of Education certifying at least two years of 
successful, regular teaching experience at the appropriate level. A form for 
this verification is available in the Office of the School of Education. 

OTHER CREDENTIAL PROGRAMS 

Administration and Supervision 

Students must take Educ 503, Foundations for Educational Leadership, during 
their first registration in these fields. To continue in the program beyond 
this course, the student must be granted a “letter of admission to the program” 
and possess an official CSCF program evaluation. The program is an integrated 
whole. Thus, students who desire only isolated courses from the program arc 
normally denied admission to such courses. Details of this program are contained 
in a brochure available from the School of Education. 

Pupil Personnel Services 

Students must take Educ 550, Counseling Theories and Processes (prerequisite: 
Educ 351, Principles of Guidance) during their first registration in this field. To 
continue in the program beyond this course, the student must be granted a “letter 
of admission to the program” and possess an official CSCF program evaluation. 
Details of this program are contained in a brochure available from the School 
of Education. 

PUBLICATIONS AVAILABLE FROM THE SCHOOL OF EDUCATION 

1. Master of Science in Education with concentration in school administration 
and school counseling. 

2. Principles underlying preservice teacher education at California State College. 

3. Admission to teacher education standards, instructions, application. 

4. Admission to student teaching standards, instructions, application. 

5. Program in elementary' school teacher education. 

6. Program in secondary school teacher education. 

7. Program in junior college teacher education. 

8. Program in teaching mentally retarded '•Hildren. 

9. Program in teaching children with speech and hearing handicaps. 

10. Program in school administration and supervision. 

11. Program in pupil personnel services. 

12. Program for specialists in reading. 

152 


Other Credential Programs 


MASTER OF SCIENCE IN EDUCATION 

General Characteristics 

This degree is reserved for professionally qualified graduate students who desire 
to prepare for or advance their careers in school counseling , school administration , 
or special education. Most students in school counseling and administration can 
meet credential requirements in either Pupil Personnel Services or Administration 
(including supervision) while completing the degree. 

Prerequisites 

Only students who have a teaching credential, successful teaching experience, an 
approved academic major, acceptable scores on the Graduate Record Examination 
(area tests), 30 units of adviser-approved study past the baccalaureate degree, a 
2.5 GPA on previous academic and related work, and who have been screened 
into the program on these and professional leadership criteria, may proceed to 
the last 30 units of study on the program. Credit will be given for previous post- 
baccalaureate studies when possible. While otherwise well-qualified students may 
be admitted with limited subject or grade deficiencies, these may often be removed 
in the first 30 units of postbaccalaureate study. 

Program of Study 

Students concentrating in school counseling will take Educ 550, Counseling 
Theories and Processes (prerequisite: Educ 351, Principles of Guidance), and in 
school administration will take Educ 503, Foundations for Educational Leader- 
ship, as soon as they identify their interest in this M.S. degree. Students in special 
education will take Educ 514, Graduate Seminar: Behavioral Research on Children 
With Learning Disorders, early in their program. Detailed evaluations and M.S. 
study plans will be developed for each student at this time. 

The final adviser-approved 30 units (minimum) of study for the degree will 
include the course of the above paragraph, 6 units of degree “core” studies (in 
survey of educational research, and social, historical or philosophical aspects of 
education), 6 units of adviser-approved supporting courses from other disciplines, 
and an added 16 units in the area of concentration. The latter will include a cul- 
minating project, designed to assure depth of scholarship and integration of ele- 
ments of die program. 

The 16 additional units in the concentration in school administration (referred 
to above) are as follows: Units 

Educ 505 Foundations for Improving Instruction 4 

Educ 561 Organization of School Systems 3 

Educ 563 Principles of School Personnel Administration. — 2 

Educ 567 A, B Field Work and Seminar in School Administration 2,2 

One of the following: 

Educ 566 The Elementary School Principal and Supervisor 3 

Educ 586 The Secondary School Principal and Supervisor 3 

The 16 additional units in the concentration in school counseling (referred to 
above) are as follows: Units 

Educ 551 Educational and Career Orientation 3 

Educ 552 Group Processes in Guidance 3 

Educ 553 Administration and Organization of Pupil Personnel Services 3 

Educ 557 A,B Seminar in School Counseling 1,1 

Educ 559A,B Field Work in Pupil Personnel Services 2-3 


153 


Other Credential Programs 


The additional units in the concentration in special education (referred t< 
above) are to be selected from the following with approval of the adviser. 

Unit 


Educ 570 Graduate Clinic in Exceptional Children: Advanced Devel- 
opmental Psychology 3 

Educ 571 Graduate Clinic in Exceptional Children: Advanced Psy- 
chology of Learning 

Educ 481 Analysis of Reading Difficulties 3 

Educ 555 Individual Diagnosis 3 

Educ 599 Graduate Project or Thesis: Special Eduiation 1-3 

Educ 503 Foundations for Educational Leadership 3 

Educ 552 Group Processes in Guidance 3 

Educ 514 Graduate Seminar: Behavoria! Research on Children with 

Learning Disorders 3 

Educ 519 Supervision of Student Teachers 3 

Also sec “Steps in the Master’s Degree Program,’’ beginning on p. 70. 


BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN PHYSICAL EDUCATION 

The department offers a bachelor of science in physical education for student' 
preparing to teach, for those preparing to pursue graduate work in physical edu 
cation and for those preparing for careers in business, industry and government 
service. 

The major consists of 40 units in health education, physical education and recre 
ation, and six units of electives in upper division in supporting and related fields 
Electives arc to be approved by the students’ departmental adviser. Requirement 
for the major, including proficiency requirements, prerequisite and lower division 
courses, arc indicated below. 

Proficiency Requirements for Major Students 

All physical education majors must demonstrate proficiency in the areas of 
aquatics, rhythms, gymnastics, combatives (men), modem dance (women) and in 
individual and team sports. Intensive skill courses in these areas should be taken 
in the lower division. All major students must attain satisfactory proficiency in all 
categories listed below in any one of the following ways: 

1. Complete course with grade of C or better. 

2. Pass proficiency screening test as administered by the course instructor. 

PROFICIENCY SERIES 

Aquatics: PE 111M, PE 111YV, PE 112, PE 113 (select one) 

Combatives: PE 132M Combatives (M) 

Rhythms: PE 141 or PE 142, PE 143 (W), PE 144 (W) 

Gymnastics: PE 131M or PE 13 1W, PE 151 

Individual sports: PE 130, PE 136, PE 137, PE 139, PE 138 or PE 135, PE 150, 
PE 157 

Team sports # : PE 121M and 122M, PE 121W and 122W 

* Two semesters of team sport competition on an intercollegiate team may be taken in lieu of 
team sports requirement (applies to both men and women). 


154 


Other Credential Programs 


MAJOR IN PHYSICAL EDUCATION 

Prerequisites Units 

Chemistry 100 Introductory Chemistry 5 

Biology 100 Principles of Biology 2 

Biology 160 Principles of Zoology. 3 

Biology 361 Mammalian Anatomy and Physiology 4 

Physics 211 A Elementary Physics 4 

Total 18 

Electives: Interdisciplinary 

Six units of electives in upper division in supporting or related fields. Elec- 
tives will be approved by the student’s departmental adviser _ 6 

Total 6 

Courses in Health, Physical Education and Recreation 
Lower Division (all required) 

HE 101 Personal and Community Health 2 

HE 102 Prevention and First Aid 2 

PE 201 Introduction to Physical Education and Recreation 3 

Rec 203 Recreation Programs and Activities 2 

Total - 9 

Upper Division (all required) 

PE 324 Theory and Principles of Human Motor Learning 3 

PE 325 Case Studies in Human Motor Learning 3 

PE 416 Kinesiology (pre/Bio 361) 3 

PE 417 Physiology of Exercise (pre/Bio 361) ....... 3 

PE 418 Adapted and Corrective Activities (pre/PE 416) 3 

HE 419 Environmental Health (prc/HE 101) 3 

PE 420 Tests and Measurements in Physical Education 3 

Total 21 

Upper Division (any five courses) f 

PE 311 Analysis of Aquatics 2 

PE 312 Analysis of Combatives 2 

PE 313 Analysis of Folk, Square, and Social Dance 2 

PE 314 Analysis of Individual and Dual Sports 2 

PE 315 Analysis of Modem Dance (W) 2 

PE 317A,B Analysis of Team Sports (W) 4 

PE 318 Analysis of Team Sports (M) 2 

PE 319 Analysis of Gymnastics and Tumbling 2 

Total 10 

Total in health, physical education and recreation 40 


to enrollment in any of the courses listed in the series PE 311-319. 


155 


Other Credential Programs 

MINOR IN PHYSICAL EDUCATION 

A minor consists of 22 units of work as listed below: 

Lower Division: HE 102, PE 201, Rec. 203. 

Upper Division: PE 324, PE 416 or PE 417, PE 419 or PE 420 and select any 
three courses (6 units) from the analysis scries: t 
PE 311, 312, 313, 314, 315, 317A, 317B, 318, 319. 

For information about teaching credentials, consult the Credentials Office or the 
chairman of the department. 


156 


ENGINEERING 











SCHOOL OF ENGINEERING 


Dean: Robert G. Valpey 


Professors: El Saden, Hunt, Valpey 
Assistant Professor: Chiang 

COURSES IN ENGINEERING 

The School of Engineering offers programs at the undergraduate and graduate 
level. The individual courses arc described in the section of this catalog on an- 
nouncement of courses. At the undergraduate level, the school prescribes certain 
patterns of courses, combined with those of other academic departments and 
schools of the college, as a program of 136 semester units leading to the bachelor 
of science in engineering. At the graduate level, the school offers a sequence of 
courses as a program of 30 semester units leading to the master of science in engi- 
neering. In both the undergraduate and graduate programs specific options in 
major fields arc offered. 

BACHELOR OF SCIENCE DEGREE IN ENGINEERING 

The heart of the engineering program is a core curriculum somewhat broader 
than that of the traditional engineering program. This core includes courses in 
mathematics, physics, chemistry, basic engineering sciences, and the humanities, 
and provides a firm basis for more specialized knowledge at an advanced level. 
Beyond the basic core, the student may choose topics in one of the major subject 
options listed below. A minimum of 32 hours of study will constitute a major 
option. During his first 2 Vi years, all students in engineering will take the same 
program emphasizing the interrelationship of all engineering subjects to form the 
broad background required of all modem engineers. 

The program of 136 semester units presumes that the entering student brings a 
high school preparation which includes geometry, trigonometry, two years of alge- 
bra, either physics or chemistry, and mechanical drawing. Students deficient in 
any of these areas will be expected to make them up during the summer before 
first registration. Placement examinations are required in mathematics and chem- 
istry. The major options in undergraduate engineering arc: 

Electrical engineering 
Mechanical and aerospace engineering 
Civil engineering 
Engineering science 

MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS FOR THE UNDERGRADUATE DEGREE 


Lower Division, Nonengineering (all required for B.S.): Units 

PE (any activities) 2 

Hist 170 A or 170B U.S. History 3 

Speech 101 Fundamentals of Speech 3 

Eng 101 Composition and Literature 3 

Eng 102 Literature and Composition 3 

Pol Sci 101 Introduction to Politics and Government 3 

Psych 101 Introduction to Psychology 3 

Humanities approved elective 3 

Math 150A * Analytic Geometry and Calculus 4 

Math 150B * Analytic Geometry and Calculus 4 


* Students receiving advanced placement in mathematics will be expected to replace validated 
courses with additional courses in mathematics. 

159 


Engineering 


Umti 

Math 250A Intermediate Calculus - 3 

Math 2S0B Intermediate Calculus ... 3 

Chem 101 A General Chemistry 5 

Chcm 105 Chemistry (for engineers) — 3 

Phys 221 A Fundamental Physics 5 

Phys 22 IB Fundamental Physics 5 

55 

Lower Division, Engineering (all required for B.S.): 

Engr 101 Introduction to Engineering and Computers 1 

Engr 102 Graphical Analysis 2 

Engr 201 Mechanics 3 

Engr 202 Properties of Engineering Materials 3 

Engr 203 Electric Circuits 3 

Engr 203L Electric Circuits Laboratory — 1 

Engr 205 Digital Computation 2 

15 

Upper Division, Nonengineering (all required for B.S.): 

Soc Sci Approved upper division elective — 3 

Econ 301 Fundamentals of Economics 3 

Mgmt 341 Principles of Management 3 

Bio Sci Bio-Engineering 2 

11 

Upper Division, Engineering (all required for B.S.): 

Engr 302 Dynamics 3 

Engr 303 Electronics 3 

Engr 303 Electronics Lab 1 

Engr 304 Thermodynamics - 3 

Engr 305 Transport Processes 3 

Engr 306A Unified Laboratory 1 

Engr 306B Unified Laboratory 1 

Engr 308 Engineering Analysis . - — 3 

Engr 312 Linear Systems Analysis 3 

Engr 417 Engineering Economy 2 


23 


Upper Division Courses for Option (32 units required for B.S.): 

Four options are offered within the bachelor of science in engineering program: 
electrical engineering, mechanical engineering, civil engineering, and engineering 
science. For each option, 32 units arc required for the B.S. The following list may 
not be all-inclusive or restrictive. 


Electrical Engineering Option (32 units required for B.S.): 

Engr 313 Networks and Transmission Lines 4 

Engr 314 Applied Electronics 4 

Engr 315 Electronics and Circuits Laboratory' 1 

Engr 360 Electrical Engineering Design Projects Lab 2 

Engr 370 Seminar in Electrial Engineering 1 

Engr 375A,B Electrical Engineering Lab 2,2 

Engr 402 Elements of Digital Computers 3 


160 


Engineering 


Engr 402 L Digital Techniques Laboratory 1 

Engr 403 Computer Methods in Numerical Analysis 3 

Engr 404 Analog Computation Laboratory 1 

Engr 404 L Analog Computation Laboratory 1 

Engr 416 Feedback Control Systems 3 

Engr 419 Electromagnetic Field Theory . — 3 

Engr 423 Engineering Probability and Statistics 3 

Engr 434 Direct Energy Conversion 3 

Engr 443 Electronic Cmmunication Systems — ~ — 3 

Engr 443L Electronic Communication Systems Lab — 3 

Engr 445 Pulse and Digital Circuits 3 

Mechanical and Aerospace Engineering Option (32 units required for B.S.): 

Engr 301 Strength of Materials 3 

Engr 315 Electronics and Circuits Lab 3 

Engr 316 Applied Thermodynamics 2 

Engr 317 Refrigeration and Air Conditioning 4 

Engr 320 Physical Metallurgy 3 

Engr 335 Mechanical Analysis 3 

Engr 361 Mechanical Engineering Design Projects Lab 2 

Engr 371 Seminar in Mechanical Engineering 1 

Engr 376A,B Mechanical Engineering Lab — 2,2 

Engr 403 Computer Methods in Numerical Analysis 3 

Engr 406 Dynamic Response 3 

Engr 406L Dynamic Response Laboratory 1 

Engr 407 Transfer and Rate Processes— — 3 

Engr 410 Intermediate Dynamics 3 

Engr 412 Theory of Elasticity 3 

Engr 415 Gas Dynamics 3 

Engr 416 Feedback Control Systems 3 

Engr 421 Mechanical Design 3 

Engr 423 Engineering Probability and Statistics 3 

Engr 425 Turbomachinery 3 

Engr 432 Aerospace Vehicle Structures — 3 

Engr 433 Aerodynamics 3 

Engr 434 Direct Energy Conversion — 3 

Engr 437 Propulsion 3 

Engr 441 Stability and Control of Flight Vehicles 3 

Civil Engineering Option (32 units required for B.S.): 

Engr 322 Measurements 2 

Engr 323 Indeterminate Structures 3 

Engr 324 Soil Mechanics 4 

Engr 326 Structural Design 3 

Engr 327 Foundation Design 2 

Engr 328 Transport Systems 2 

Engr 329 Highway Engineering 3 

Engr 330 Water and Waste Water Engineering 4 

Engr 403 Computer Methods in Numerical Analysis 3 

Engr 409 Advanced Structural Design 3 

Engr 410 Intermediate Dynamics 3 

Engr 411 Dynamics of Structure 3 

Engr 412 Theory of Elasticity 3 

Engr 413 Theory of Plates and Shells 3 

Engr 414 Digital Computers in Structural Design- 3 


161 


Engineering 


Engineering Science Option (32 units required for B.S.): 

The program in engineering science is to be selected by the student and his 
adviser and submitted for approval to a committee of the School of Engineering 
(supplemented, if appropriate, by members of the science and mathematics fac- 
ulty). The courses are to be selected from upper division electives in engineering, 
physics, chemistry, mathematics, and biology (additional prerequisites for science 
courses may be required), to meet a special and specific engineering science objec- 
tive of the student, such as engineering physics. 

DETAIL OUTLINE OF TYPICAL EIGHT-SEMESTER PROGRAM 
FOR B.S. IN ENGINEERING 
(136 Units) 

Semester 1 Freshman Units 

PE (any activity) Yi 

Hist 170A or B U.S. History 3 

Math 150 A Calculus 4 

Chem 101 A General Chemistry 5 

Engr 101 Introduction to Engineering and Computers 1 

Engr 102 Graphical Analysis 2 

15 54 

Semester 2 Freshman 

PE (any activity) 54 

Math HOB Calculus 4 

Physics 221 A Fundamentals of Physics „ 5 

Chem 105 Chemistry (for engineers) ... 3 

Engr 205 Digital Computation 2 

Eng 101 Composition and Literature 3 

1754 

Semester 3 Sophomore 

PE (any activity) — *4 

Eng 102 World Literature and Composition 3 

Pol Sci 101 Introduction to Politics and Government 3 

Math 2 50 A Calculus 3 

Physics 22 IB Fundamental Physics 5 

Engr 201 Mechanics 3 

17 54 

Semester 4 Sopohomore 

PE (any activity) *4 

Speech 101 Fundamentals of Speech 3 

Math 250B Calculus 3 

Engr 202 Properties of Engineering Materials 3 

Psych 101 Introduction to Psychology 3 

Engr 203 Electric Circuits : 3 

Engr 203L Electric Circuits Lab 1 

164 


162 


Engineering 


Semester 5 Junior Units 

Engr 303 Electronics - — 3 

Engr 303L Electronics Lab 1 

Engr 304 Thermodynamics — 3 

Engr 305 Transport Processes 3 

Engr 306A Unified Laboratory 1 

Engr 302 Dynamics 3 

Engr 308 Engineering Analysis 3 

17 

Semester 6 Junior 

BSC Bio-engineering 2 

Econ 301 Fundamentals of Economics 3 

Engr 312 Linear Systems Analysis 3 

Engr 306B Unified Laboratory 1 

Engineering Option Courses 9 

18 

Semester 7 Senior 

Soc Sci Elective 3 

Engr 417 Engineering Economy 2 

Engineering Option Courses 12 

17 

Semester 8 Senior 

Humanities Elective 3 

Mgmt 341 Principles of Management 3 

Engineering Option Courses 11 


17 

136 


MASTER OF SCIENCE IN ENGINEERING 

Applicants, as well as continuing students, should read carefully the college re- 
quirements for master’s degree programs, page 70. 

The procedural steps for admission to and the completion of the degree “master 
of science in engineering” arc as follows: 

Admission Procedure 

1. Apply for admission to the college in unclassified graduate status and declare 
the objective to be a master of science in engineering. Proof of a degree from 
an accredited college or university must be supplied. This must be taken care 
of at the Office of Admissions before the dates established in the college calendar. 

2. Apply for advisement at the School of Engineering Office. This must be 
taken care of after admission to the college but before registration. 

Prerequisites 

Admission to the engineering program requires a 2.5 undergraduate grade point 
average; however, students may be admitted with grade deficiencies. Such de- 
ficiencies must be made up by completing 6 to 12 units of adviser-approved 
courses in addition to those required for the degree, with at least a 3.0 average. 
A committee of the engineering faculty will evaluate each student’s record for 


163 


Engineering 

specific course deficiencies in the engineering field. Making suitable allowance 
for actual engineering experience, the committee will require each student, before 
admission to the program, to make up such deficiencies as the committee deter- 
mines. 

Advancement to Classified Graduate Status (admission to the program) 

Achievement of this status requires the following: 

1. Meeting the prerequisites of the previous paragraph. 

2. Completing the Graduate Aptitude Test and the Advanced Graduate Record 
Examination in Engineering. (There is no arbitrary level above which scores 
on tests arc satisfactory. The total record of the student is used for this 
evaluation.) 

3. Submission of one complete set of official transcripts from all colleges where 
previously registered (sent directly from these institutions to the Office of 
Admissions and Records). This is in addition to the transcript from the 
institution conferring the baccalauratc degree, required for admission to the 
college. 

4. Filing an application card for classified status in the Graduate Office and 
making an appointment with the adviser at the Office of the School of Engi- 
neering. 

5. Preparing an approved graduate study plan in consultation with his adviser. 

Advancement to Candidacy 

Achievement of this status requires the following: 

1. Having been granted classified status in the master of science in engineering 
program. 

2. Having completed 12 units of coursework on his master’s degree study plan, 
including six units of 500-lcvel courses with a GPA of not less than 3.0. 

3. Filing an advancement to candidacy card in the Graduate Office and making 
an appointment with his adviser. 

Graduation 

Final achievement of the master of science in engineering requires: 

1. Having been admitted to candidacy status. 

2. Having completed 30 units of approved work with an overall GPA of not 
less than 3.0. 

3. Receiving approval of the faculty of the School of Engineering, the college 
officer of graduate studies, and the Faculty Council. 

The Program for the Master of Science in Engineering 

Qualifications for the master of science in engineering requires the following: 

1. Completion of a minimum of 30 units of approved upper division or graduate- 
level work including: 

(a) a minimum of 6 units of approved upper division or graduate mathe- 
matics (certain engineering courses may fulfill this requirement). 

(b) a minimum of 15 units of approved 500 level courses. 

2. An overall GPA of 3.0. 

A candidate for the master of science in engineering may pursue one of five 
options currently offered by the School of Engineering: 

Civil engineering 

Electrical engineering 

Mechanical and aerospace engineering 

Systems engineering 

Engineering science 


164 


Engineering 


A student is normally required to select a minimum of 15 units within these 
options. These 15 units may be 400-level and 500-level courses. The 400-level 
courses are listed in the undergraduate program (preceding) and the 500-level 
courses are listed below: 


Electrical Engineering Units 

Engr 501 Microwave Techniques 3 

Engr 502 State Space Theory of Control and Systems 3 

Engr 503 Information Theory and Coding 3 

Engr 504 Linear Network Synthesis 3 

Engr 506 Digital Computer Systems 3 

Engr 507 Statistical Communication Theory 3 

Engr 555 Applied Electromagnetic Theory 3 

Engr 557 Sampled -Data Systems 3 

Engr 559 Active Network Synthesis 3 

Mechanical and Aerospace Engineering 

Engr 508 Intermediate Fluid Mechanics 3 

Engr 511 Advanced Dynamics 3 

Engr 512 Gyrodynamics 3 

Engr 518 Advanced Fluid Mechanics 3 

Engr 524 Advanced Thermodynamics 3 

Engr 530 Advanced Strength of Materials 3 

Engr 569 Orbital Mechanics 3 

Engr 573 Aerospace Guidance Systems 3 

Engr 575 Kinetic Theory and Statistical Thermodynamics 3 

Civil Engineering 

Engr 510 Advanced Theory of Elasticity 3 

Engr 517 Theory of Plasticity 3 

Engr 519 Design of Thin Shell Structures 3 

Engr 545 Advanced Structural Design 3 

Engr 547 Dynamics of Structures 3 

Engr 549 Digital Computers in Structural Design 3 

Engr 577 Stress Analysis 3 

Systems Engineering 

Engr 535 Numerical Methods 3 

Engr 581 Systems Engineering Methodology I 1 — 3 

Engr 582 Systems Engineering Methodology II 3 

Engr 585 Systems Engineering Mathematical Tools 3 

Engr 587 Operational Analysis Techniques in Systems Engineering 3 

Engr 591 Analytical Methods in Engineering 1-6 


(Up to 9 units in systems engineering may be selected from approved subjects 
offered in the School of Business Administration and Economics.) 

Engineering Science 

The program in engineering science is to be selected by the student and his 
adviser and submitted for approval to a committee of the School of Engineering 
(supplemented, if appropriate, by members of the science and mathematics fac- 
ulty). The courses selected are to meet a special and specific engineering science 
objective of the student, such as engineering physics. 


165 


Engineering 

In addition to those courses offered in the specific options, the following two 
courses apply to any option, though they are not necessarily required. 

Engr 598 Thesis 1-6 

Engs 597 Project \-6 

See also “Steps in the Master’s Degree Program,” p. 70. 


166 


ANNOUNCEMENT 
OF COURSES 

AND 

FACULTY DIRECTORY 


FOR 1966-67 


GENERAL COURSE NUMBERING CODE 

100-299 Lower division courses of freshman and sophomore level, but open also 
to upper division students. 

300-399 Upper division courses of junior and senior level, which do not give 
graduate credit unless included on an approved graduate study plan (such 
as a credential or graduate degree program) for a specific graduate 
student. 

400-499 Upper division courses of junior and senior level which give graduate 
credit when taken by a graduate student. (Note limitations in specific 
graduate programs.) 

500-599 Graduate courses organized primarily for graduate students.* 

700-799 Graduate professional courses in the postgraduate program, not applicable 
to graduate degrees. 


PREREQUISITES 

Students arc expected to meet stated prerequisites for all courses. However, in 
exceptional cases, and at the discretion of the division in which the course is taught, 
students may be allowed to meet prerequisites by examination. 

INDEPENDENT STUDY 

Under the independent study program, the upper division student can pursue 
topics or problems of special interest beyond the scope of a regular course under 
the supervision of a faculty adviser. The work is of a research or creative nature, 
and normally culminates in a paper, project, comprehensive examination, or per- 
formance. Before registering, the student must get his topic approved by the pro- 
fessor who will be supervising independent study. The catalog number for inde- 
pendent study in all departments is 499. Independent study courses may be repeated, 
but 3 units is the maximum credit that may be earned in one semester. 

Independent study is not limited to honors students, but all those in the honors 
program are especially urged to undertake some of this work in the major field. 
The student who can be expected to profit from independent study has excep- 
tional initiative and persistence, and a desire to delve into some special project on 
his own. 

* Note exceptions on p. 63. 


168 


SCHOOL OF LETTERS, ARTS AND SCIENCE 


ANTHROPOLOGY 

201 Introduction to Physical Anthropology (3) F, S 

Man in biological and evolutionary perspective. Methods, findings, concepts, and 
issues in the study of primates, fossil men, and races. 

202 Introduction to Cultural Anthropology (3) F, S 

Variations, integrations, and change in human cultures, and particularly pre- 
literate ones. Cultural analyses of such institutional forms as the family, economy, 
government, religion and art. A consideration of central problems of cultural 
comparison and interpretation. 

203 Introduction To Archaeology (3) F, S 

Relationship of archaeology, prehistory, and culture history; field methods and 
analysis of archaeological data. A survey of world culture history, from Pleistocene 
beginnings to the threshold of civilization; and introduction to the world’s early 
centers of civilization. 

301 World Ethnography (3) F, S 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 202 or consent of instructor. A general survey of 
the peoples of the world and a study of representative cultures with special 
reference to their situation in the history and geography of the world. 

321 The American Indians (3) F 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 202 or consent of instructor. Physical and cultural 
characteristics of the native peoples of the New World. Prehistory and the 
impact of contacts with the Europeans. Major tribes of all the Americas are 
included in an overview, but emphasis is placed on Indians of North America. 

325 Peoples of South America (3) S 

Prerequisite: Anthropology' 202 or consent of instructor. A cultural survey of 
Central and South America. Description of selected cultures representative of dif- 
ferent cultural areas before and after contacts with Western countries. 

328 Peoples of Africa (3) F 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 202 or consent of instructor. A cultural survey of 
Africa. Description of selected cultures representative of different cultural areas 
before and after contacts with Western and Asian countries. 

340 Peoples of Asia (3) S 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 202 or consent of instructor. Survey of culture- 
areas and societal types of central, southern, and east Asia, with special emphasis 
on India and China. Analysis of Asian civilizations and nonliterate societies, em- 
phasizing sociopolitical organization, economic systems, and religious systems. 

347 Peoples of the Pacific (3) F 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 202 or consent of instructor. A survey of the native 
peoples and cultures of the Pacific Islands, including Australia; the social and 
cultural patterns of representative cultures of various areas; special ethnological 
and theoretical problems. 


169 


Anthropology 


350 Peoples of Europe (3) F 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 202 or consent of instructor. Representative groups 
considered in modern and historical perspective, stressing especially rural-urban 
relationships and the dynamics of change. 

360 Contemporary American Culture (3) F, S 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 202 or consent of instructor. Application of an- 
thropological methods, categories of analysis, and types of interpretation to 
American culture. Survey and critique of selected community studies and other 
kinds of relevant research. 

401 Anthropological Research Methods (3) F 

Prerequisites: Anthropology 202 and 6 additional units of anthropology or 
consent of instructor. The philosophy and methodology of science and history as 
they arc expressed in anthropological research. Research planning, organizing, 
data collection and recording, categorization and interpretation of results, and 
reporting. Recent methodological developments. 

406 Descriptive Linguistics (3) F 

(Same as Linguistics 406.) 

410 Language and Culture (3) F, S 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 202 or consent of instructor. The study of language 
as a factor in culture. Introduction to anthropological linguistics. Trends in the 
study of language and culture. 

411 Folklore (3) S 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 202 or consent of instructor. An introduction to the 
study of folktales, myths, legends, proverbs, riddles and other forms of the verbal 
traditions of peoples. Major concepts and theories and research methods in the 
study of folklore. 

413 Ethnological Music (3) F, S 

Music, musicmaking, and musicians in various nonlitcratc societies. 

415 Culture and Personality (3) F 

Prerequisites: Anthropology 202 and Psychology 331 or 351 or Sociology 341 or 
consent of instructor. Comparative study of the relationship between the individual 
and his culture. Child training in nonwestern cultures. Survey of important con- 
cepts, studies, and research techniques. Changing viewpoints and new directions in 
culture-personality studies. 

421 Primitive Religion (3) S 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 202 or consent of instructor. Beliefs and practices 
in preliteratc religious systems; the forms, symbolism, and social and cultural roles 
of these systems. Includes such topics as magic, animism, art and religion, shamans 
and priests, and cults. 

423 Comparative Aesthetics and Symbolism (3) F, S 

An analysis of the metaphysical and mystical systems underlying the “gram- 
mars" of the art, poetry, languages, myths, music, and rituals of various nonlitcratc 
and literate peoples and their development into creative experiences. 


170 


Anthropology 


425 Primitive Law and Government (3) F 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 202 or consent of instructor. Sources of law- 
government in primitive societies; the cultural background of law; the functions 
and development of law and government in primitive polities; transitions to and 
comparisons with classical and modem legal and political systems. 

428 Primitive Social Organization (3) S 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 202 or consent of instructor. A study of the social 
organization of societies of varying degrees of complexity; kinship systems, mar- 
riage patterns, and corporate groups; religious, political, and economic organi- 
zation; social stratification, nativism, and the effects of cultural change. 

430 Economic Anthropology (3) F 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 202 or consent of instructor. Analysis of anthro- 
pological concepts of economy, ecology, and technology; relationship between 
habitat, economy, and culture. A survey of the different types of economic 
systems found throughout the world; outline of the economic development of 
mankind. 

450 Culture and Education (3) F 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 202 or Education 301 or consent of instructor. The 
transmission of values, implicit cultural assumptions, and the patterning of educa- 
tion in cross-cultural perspective, with special attention to American culture and 
development problems. 

460 Culture Change (3) F 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 202 and 301 or consent of instructor. Interrelations 
between cultural, social and psychological processes in the dynamics of culture 
growth and change. Impact of western technology on tribal and peasant societies. 
Anthropological contributions to the planning of directed sociocultural change in 
selected areas. 

480 History of Anthropology (3) S 

Prerequisite: At least 12 units of anthropology or consent of instructor. His- 
torical antecedents of modem anthropology. A systematic survey of the develop- 
ment of anthropology as a scientific field; an examination of the principal contribu- 
tions of leading anthropologists, past and present. Reinterpretations and emerging 
trends. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) F, S 

Prerequisite: At least 15 units of anthropology and consent of the adviser. Stu- 
dent selection of an individual research project involving either library or field- 
work. There are conferences with the adviser as necessary, and the work results 
in one or more papers. May be repeated for credit. 

504 Seminar: Selected Topics in Cultural Anthropology (3) F, S 

Prerequisites: Completion of undergraduate major in anthropology and/or gradu- 
ate standing or consent of instructor. The topic chosen and a general outline of 
the seminar w'ill be announced by the Department of Anthropology to graduate 
students in Anthropology and circulated to other potentially interested depart- 
ments. May be repeated. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) F , S 

Prerequisite: Consent of department. Individual research on either a field or 
a library study, with conferences with a project adviser as necessary, and resulting 
in one or more papers. May be repeated for credit. 


171 


Art 


ART 

100 Exploratory Course in Art (3) F, S 

Exploration and creative use of a variety of art materials, processes, and concepts. 
Field trips required. Not open to art majors for credit except by permission of the 
Art Department. (6 hours activity) 

101 Introduction to Art (3) F 

A course for the general student designed to develop an understanding of his- 
torical and contemporary art forms. Illustrated with examples of painting, sculp- 
ture, architecture, and design. Field trips required. Not open to art majors for 
credit except by permission of the Art Department. 

103 Two-dimensional Design (3) F, S 

The inventive use of materials, tools, and elements of plastic organization as re- 
lated to a two-dimensional surface. (6 hours activity) 

104 Three-dimensional Design (3) F, 5 

The inventive use of materials, tools, and elements of plastic organization as re- 
lated to three-dimensional surfaces and forms. (6 hours activity) 

106A,B Beginning Ceramics (3/3) F, S 

A basic course in the study of form as related to ceramic materials, tools, 
processes, and concepts. (6 hours activity) 

107A/B Beginning Drawing and Painting (3/3) F , S 

Beginning work in the creative use of the materials of drawing and painting with 
emphasis on visual concepts and use of medium, individual exploration, growth, 
planning and craftsmanship. (9 hours laboratory) 

111 Fundamentals of Art (3) F, S 

A comparative study of the elements of plastic organization in relation to per- 
sonal and cultural aesthetic expression and concepts. Fundamental art ideas, prob- 
lems of organization and structure, and terminology. Field trips required. 

1 17A/B/C/D Life Drawing (1, 1,1/1) F, S 

Drawing from the live model. 117B will include working from the model with 
three-dimensional materials. (3 hours laboratory for each unit) 

201A/B Art and Civilization (3,3) F, S 

A comparative survey of the basic ideas, forms, and styles of the visual arts as 
they developed in various cultures from prehistoric time to the present day. 

205A,B Beginning Crafts (3,3) F, S 

Prerequisite: Art 103 or Art 100. A study of form as related to the concepts, 
materials, and processes involved in the making of both two- and three-dimensional 
art forms from wood, metal, plastics, and paper. (6 hours activity) 

207A/B Drawing and Painting (3,3) F, S 

Prerequisite: Art 117A,B, Art 107 A, B, Art 103, or the equivalents. An intensive 
study of devices and means for representing volume, structure, and character of 
objects. Emphasis in 207A on the use of drawing materials in relation to manmade 
and nature objects and in 207B on the use of painting materials in relation to the 
head and figure. (9 hours laboratory) 

216A/B Beginning Sculpture (3,3) F, S 

Prerequisite: Art 104. An introductory course in sculpture with emphasis on the 
creative use of wood and metal, power equipment and hand tools. (6 hours activity) 


172 


Art 


223A,B Lettering, Typography and Rendering (3,3) F, S 

Prerequisites: Art 103, 107 A, 117A. A study of the history, design, and use of 
letter forms including techniques for rough and comprehensive layouts and the 
use of both hand-lettered forms and handset type. (6 hours activity) 

286 Design for the Theatre (3) S 

(Same as Drama 286.) 

301 Western Art: Ancient to Classic (3) F 

A study of the developments in art from prehistoric time to the classic period in 
Greek art. 

302 Western Art: Classic to Renaissance (3) S 

Provides broad familiarity with the major styles of classic, medieval, and Russian 
art. Lectures, discussions and field trips. 

305A,B Crafts (3,3) F, S 

Prerequisites: Art 103 and 104, or 205A, or 100 and 432 or the equivalent. A 
study and evaluation of basic craft concepts, processes, and materials as they relate 
to the development of utilitarian forms. (6 hours activity) 

306A,B Advanced Ceramics (3,3) F, S 

Prerequisite: Art 106A or 106B. Further experiences in the study and evaluation 
of form as related to the creative use of ceramic concepts and materials including 
design, forming, glazing, and firing. (6 hours activity) 

307A,B Advanced Drawing and Painting (3,3) F, S 

Prerequisites: one semester of drawing and one semester of painting. The study, 
evaluation and creative use of the concepts and materials of drawing and painting 
with emphasis on individual exploration, growth, planning and craftsmanship. (9 
hours laboratory) 

309 Art Techniques (3) F, S 

Prerequisite: Art 100 or the equivalent. Creative use of a variety of drawing 
and painting materials. (6 hours activity) 

311 Western Art: Renaissance and Baroque (3) F 

Basic problems of painting, sculpture and architecture of the Renaissance and 
Baroque periods. Lectures, discussion, and field trips. Also recommended for hu- 
manities and history students. 

312 History of Art Since 1800 (3) S 

Art of the 19th century and its development into contemporary times. 

313A,B Interior Design (3,3) F, S 

Prerequisites: An 103, 104, 107A,B. Development and projection of ideas in re- 
lation to the functional, social, and aesthetic problems involved in the design and 
planning of living spaces for homes and small offices. (6 hours activity) 

316A,B Sculpture (3,3) F, S 

Prerequisites: Art 103, 104 and 117B. (6 hours activity) 

317A,B Advanced Life Drawing (3,3) F, S 

Prerequisite: three units lower division life drawing. Drawing and painting from 
the live model (9 hours laboratory) 


173 


Art 


323A,B Advertising Design (3,3) F, S 

Prerequisites: Art 103, 104, 107A,B. Development and projection of ideas in rela- 
tion to the technical, aesthetic, and psychological aspects of advertising art. (6 
hours activity) 

333A,B Industrial Design (3,3) (Offered in alternate years) 

Prerequisites: Art 103, 104 or 205A, 107A,B. Planning and designing of projects 
in relation to the technological, psychological, and social aspects of contemporary 
society. (6 hours activity) 

338A,B Creative Photography (3,3) F, S 

Prerequisites: Art 103 and Communication 2 18 A, or its equivalent, or consent 
of the instructor. Photography as an art medium with emphasis on the creative 
use of photographic concepts, materials, processes and techniques. Field trips to 
be arranged. (6 hours activity) 

347A,B Printmaking (3,3) F, S 

Prerequisites: Art 107 A, B and Art 117A,B,C. An introduction to concepts and 
materials involved in printmaking including lithography, etching, woodcut, aqua- 
tint, monoprint and serigraphy. (9 hours laboratory) 

350A,B Painting for Non-Art Majors (3,3) F, S 

Opportunities for students with little or no background in art to work creatively 
with various painting media both indoors and outdoors. (9 hours laboratory) 

353A,B Textile Design (3,3) F, S 

Prerequisite: Art 100 or Art 103. The creative exploration and design of fabrics 
relative to the needs of apparel, furniture, architecture, and interiors using both 
printed and woven processes. (6 hours activity) 

380 Art and Child Development (3) F, S 

Prerequisites: Art 100 and Education 311. The study and evaluation of art con- 
cepts, materials, and processes as they relate to and promote child development. 
(6 hours activity) 

401 Contemporary Art (3) F 

Fundamentals of modern painting, graphics, and photography. 

402 Contemporary Art (3) S 

Fundamentals of modern architecture, interior design, sculpture, and industrial 
design. Lectures, discussions, and field trips. 

411 Oceanic Art (3) F 

An introductory survey of the styles of the aboriginal people of the following 
regions: Australia, Melanesia, Micronesia, Polynesia and Indonesia. 

412 Art of Non-European Africa (3) S 

An introduction by region and tribal group to the art forms of West Coastal 
Africa and the Sudan, Niger River kingdoms, Yourba kingdoms, Cameroon chief- 
tainships. Congo tribes. Central Africa and Fast Coastal Africa. 

413 Art of North American Indian (3) F 

An introduction to the an forms and style groupings of the following American 
Indian groups: Eskimo, Pacific Northwest, California, Eastern Woodlands, Mound 
Builders, Southwestern and Northern Mexico. 


174 


Art 


414 Art of Mesoamerica (3) S 

An introduction to the art and architectural forms of Mesoaincrica from the 
early, formative stages to the Spanish Conquest. 

415 Art of Central and South America (3) F 

An introduction to the art styles and cultural regions of Central America and 
South America. 

421 Oriental Art: China (3) F 

A study of the historical development of the arts of China and their relation 
to Chinese philosophy and culture. 

422 Oriental Art: Japan (3) S 

A study of the historical development of the arts of Japan and their relation to 
Japanese philosophy and culture. 

453A,B Display and Exhibition Design (2,2) F, S 

A course in the appropriate and creative use of materials, processes, and design 
concepts as they relate to the special problems involved in the planning and pre- 
paring of displays, exhibits, bulletin boards, wall cases, and art portfolios. (More 
than 6 hours laboratory) 

481 Special Studies in Art History and Appreciation ( 1 — 3) F, S 

Prerequisite: permission of the instructor. Opportunities for intensive study and 
evaluation in one area of art history and appreciation. 

483 Special Studies in Design (1-3) 

Prerequisite: permission of the instructor. Opportunity for intensive study in the 
design areas listed below. Each area listed may be repeated to a maximum of 8 
units, but no more than 3 units of credit may be obtained in any one area in a 
single semester. 

483a Advertising Design F, S (2 hours activity for each unit) 

483b Interior Design F, S (2 hours activity for each unit) 

483c Design and Composition F, S (2 hours activity for each unit) 

483d Display Design F, S (More than 3 hours laboratory for each unit) 

483e Textile Design (2 hours activity for each unit) 

485 Special Studies in Crafts (1—3) 

Prerequisite: permission of the instructor. Opportunity for intensive study in the 
craft areas listed below. Each area listed may be repeated to a maximum of eight 
units, but no more than three units of credit may be obtained in any one area in 
a single semester. (2 hours activity for each unit) 

485a Jewelry S 
485b General Crafts F, S 
485c Ceramics F, S 
485d Weaving S 

486 Special Studies in Sculpture (1-3) F, S 

Prerequisites: Art 316A,B and permission of the instructor. Opportunity for 
intensive study in the following sculptural processes: modeling, carving, fabrication 
and casting. May be repeated to a maximum of eight units but no more than three 
units of credit may be obtained in a single semester. (2 hours activity for each unit) 


175 


Art 


487 Special Studies in Drawing and Painting (1-3) 

Prerequisite: permission of the instructor. Opportunity for intensive study in the 
drawing and painting areas listed below. Each area listed may be repeated to a 
maximum of eight units, but no more than three units of credit may be obtained 
in any one area in a single semester. (3 hours laboratory for each unit) 

487a Painting F, S 

487b Life Drawing F, S 

487c Drawing F 

487d Printmaking F, S 

488A,B Advanced Scene Design (3,3) F, S 

(Same as Drama 488 A, B.) 

500 Graduate Seminar in Art (3) F 

Selected advanced problems in art and art education. Each student will present 
research results in oral or written form. 

501 Graduate Seminar in Art History and Appreciation (3) F, S 

Prerequisite: Art 500. Directed research with emphasis on the relationship between 
historical backgrounds and developments in art and the student’s area of concen- 
tration. May be repeated to a maximum of eight units. 

503 Graduate Problems in Design (1—3) 

Prerequisite: permission of instructor. Intensive study with emphasis on planning, 
development, and evaluation of individual projects in the design areas listed below. 
May be repeated to a maximum of eight units in each area, but no more than three 
units of credit may be obtained in any one area in a single semester. 

503a Advertising Design F, S (2 hours activity for each unit) 

503b Interior Design F, S (2 hours activity for each unit) 

503c Design and Composition F # S (2 hours activity for each unit) 

503d Display Design F, 5 ( More than 3 hours laboratory for each unit) 

503e Textile Design 5 (2 hours activity for each unit) 

505 Graduate Problems in Crafts (1-3) 

Prerequisite: permission of instructor. Intensive study with emphasis on planning, 
development, and evaluation of individual projects in the crafts areas listed below. 
May be repeated to a maximum of eight units but no more than three units of 
credit may be obtained in a single semester. (2 hours activity for each unit) 

505a Jewelry S 

505b General Crafts F, S 

505c Ceramics F, 5 

506 Graduate Problems in Sculpture (1—3) F, 5 

Prerequisite: permission of the instructor. Intensive study with emphasis on 
planning, development, and evaluation of individual projects in sculpture. May be 
repeated to a maximum of eight units but no more than three units of credit may 
be obtained in a single semester. (2 hours activity for each unit) 

507 Graduate Problems in Drawing and Painting (1—3) 

Prerequisite: permission of instructor. Intensive study with emphasis on planning, 
development, and evaluation of individual projects in the drawing and painting areas 
listed below. May be repeated to a maximum of eight units but no more than three 
units of credit may be obtained in a single semester. (3 hours laboratory for each 
unit) 

176 


Art Education 


507a Painting F, S 
507b Life Drawing F, S 
507c Drawing S 
507d Printmaking F, S 

597 Project (3-6) F, S 

Prerequisites: Art 500, Art 501, and recommendation of the student’s graduate 
committee. Art 501 may be taken concurrently with Art 597 on approval of in- 
structor. Development and presentation of a creative project in the area of con- 
centration beyond regularly offered coursework. No more than three units may 
be taken in any one semester. 

598 Thesis (3-6) F, 5 

Prerequisites: Art 500, Art 501, and recommendation of the student’s graduate 
committee. Art 501 may be taken concurrently with Art 598 on approval of 
instructor. Development and presentation of a thesis in the area of concentration 
beyond regularly offered coursework. No more than three units may be taken in 
any one semester. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) F, S 

Open to graduate students in art with the consent of the department chairman. 
May be repeated for credit. 


ART EDUCATION 

332 Industrial Arts for Elementary Teachers (2) (Offered in alternate years) 

Prerequisite: Ed 311 or consent of the instructor. Creative selection, organiza- 
tion and use of materials and tools in construction activities. Includes correlation 
experiences with the social studies, science, and other units of work. (4 hours 
activity) 

360 Elementary School Crafts (2) (Offered in alternate years) 

Studio activities and techniques of crafts appropriate to the elementary school. 
Strongly recommended for elementary teaching credential candidates. (4 hours 
activity) 

370A,B Art Activity (2,2) F, S 

Opportunities to observe, analyze, and evaluate child growth in and through 
creative art experiences. (4 hours activity) 

429A,B Arts and Crafts for Teaching Exceptional Children (2,2) 5 

Methods of using a variety of art materials and processes with emphasis on those 
experiences which meet the needs of retarded or handicapped children. (4 hours 
activity) 

442 Teaching Art in the Secondary School (2) F 

Prerequisites: Education 311, Education 340, Art 380, Art Ed 360, admission to 
teacher education, senior standing or consent of the instructor. See pages 144-145 
under Secondary Education for description of standard teaching credential pro- 
gram. Objectives, methods, and materials including audiovisual instruction for 
teaching are in secondary schools. Required, before student teaching of students 
presenting majors in art for the standard teaching credential. The student who has 
not had teaching experience must register concurrently in Educ 449. 

749 Student Teaching in Art in the Secondary School and Seminar (3) S 

Sec page 144 under Secondary Education for description and prerequisites. 


177 


Biological Science 


BIOLOGICAL SCIENCE 

101 Elements of Biology (5) F, S 

An introduction to basic concepts in the study of living organisms and to the 
characteristics of the natural environment. (3 hours lecture, 6 hours laboratory) 

111 Principles of Biology (4) F 

Prerequisite: Chcm 101 A, or high school chemistry and concurrent enrollment 
in Chem 101 A. An introduction to basic concepts which apply to all living 
organisms with an emphasis on the biochemical basis of structure and function. 
Required of all biology majors. (2 hours lecture, 6 hours laboratory) 

141 Principles of Botany (4) F, S (Formerly 140) 

Prerequisite: Bio Sci 101. Emphasis will be placed on the dynamic aspects of 
botany although the traditional areas of morphology and classification will not be 
neglected. Required of all biology majors. (2 hours lecture, 6 hours laboratory) 

161 Principles of Zoology (4) . (Formerly 160) 

Prerequisite: Bio Sci 101. An introduction to the principles of animal biology 
with special reference to the structure, classification, physiology', behavior and 
ecology of animals. Required of all biology majors. (2 hours lecture, 6 hours labora- 
tory) 

201 Field Biology (3) S 

Prerequisites: one year of biological science and/or permission of instructor. A 
course for nonmajors designed to acquaint the interested student with the plant and 
animal life of this region. Several weekend field trips will be arranged to study 
different biotic communities. (1 hour lecture, 6 hours laboratory ) 

311 General Microbiology (4) F, 5 

Prerequisites: one semester courses in biology and chemistry'. An introduction 
to the study of the morphology, growth and physiology of the bacteria and other 
microorganisms. A consideration of the role of microorganisms as agents of change 
in the natural processes important in health, industry and agriculture. (2 hours 
lecture, 6 hours laboratory') 

312 Genetics Lecture (3) F 

Prerequisite: one year of college biology or permission of the instructor. The 
general principles and modern developments in the study of heredity'. 

312L Genetics Laboratory (1) F 

Prerequisite: Bio Sci 312. The use of a variety of organisms and methods for 
exploring basic principles of genetics. (3 hours laboratory) 

314 Readings in Biological Sciences (1) F 

Prerequisite: Bio Sci 101 or equivalent. Directed readings of classical and con- 
temporary biological literature with periodic group discussions concerning the 
methods and principles studied. This course is designed for the nonmajor and is 
open to seniors only. (3 hours laboratory) 

315 Molecular Biology (4) F 

Prerequisite: a year of general chemistry and two semesters of college biology. 
An introduction to the physical and chemical aspects of biological science, using 
subcellular activities as the primary focus of the course. Topics include studies of 
modem data-gathering methods, subcellular structure and function, bioenergetics, 
biosynthesis and an introduction to heredity at the molecular level. (2 hours lec- 
ture, 6 hours laboratory) 


178 


Biological Science 


342 Plant Anatomy (4) F 

Prerequisite: Bio Sci 141 or one year of college biology or equivalent. The 
origin, development, and maturation of leaves, stems, roots, and flowers of vascular 
plants. (2 hours lecture, 6 hours laboratory) 

344 Plant Morphology (4) S 

Prerequisite: Bio Sci 141 or one year of college biology or equivalent. A study of 
the morphology and classification of the lower plant groups and a general survey 
of the major groups of plants exclusive of angiosperms and gymnosperms. (2 hours 
lecture, 6 hours laboratory) 

361 Mammalian Anatomy and Physiology (4) S 

Prerequisite: one year of college biology or permission of instructor. Study of the 
structure and function of the human organism. (2 hours lecture, 6 hours laboratory) 

362 Histological Technique (3) S 

Prerequisite: one year of college biology or permission of instructor. Theory and 
practice of the preparation of cells and tissues for microscopic study. 1 hour lec- 
ture, 6 hours laboratory) 

363 Wildlife and Conservation (3) S 

Prerequisites: Bio Sci 141 and 161 or equivalents or permission of instructor. A 
study of the relationship of land, water and wildlife with an analysis of manage- 
ment techniques. 

401 Biogeography (3) S 

Prerequisites: Bio Sci 141, 161, and 424 or 465 or permission of instructor. A 
study of the present day distribution of plants and animals based upon classification, 
fossil records, morphology and geography. 

402 Biological Preparations (2) F, S 

Prerequisite: three semesters of college biology, including Bio Sci 311 and 362. 
An introduction to the problems and practices of preparing materials for teaching 
and research in biology. May include preparation of whole organism specimens, 
histological specimens and media for characterization of microorganisms. (6 hours 
laboratory per week) 

412 Cell Physiology (2) S 

Prerequisites: one year of college biology and one semester of organic chemistry 
or permission of the instructor. Characteristics of life at the cellular level; processes 
by which the cell obtains energy and material and forms new cell substances; con- 
trol of these processes by the cell; organization of structures and enzyme systems 
within the cell. 

412L Cell Physiology Laboratory (2) S 

Prerequisite: Bio Sci 412 (maybe taken concurrently). (6 hours laboratory) 

413 Pathogenic Microbiology (4) S 

Prerequisite: one semester of microbiology or bacteriology. Study of the biology 
of infectious disease: mechanisms of microbial pathogenicity; host defenses; mode 
of action of antibiotics and other antimicrobial agents; characteristics of specific 
pathogenic bacteria, fungi and viruses. (2 hours lecture, 6 hours laboratory) 

414 Immunology (4) S 

Prerequisite: Bio Sci 311 and 315, Chem 301 A, or permission of the instructor. 
Study of the nature of antibodies and antigens, their role in immunity, and the 
specificity of their reactions. Laboratory experiments will show the kinetics of 


179 


Biological Science 

antibody formation and the mechanisms of antibody-antigen reactions. Techniques 
in scrodiagnosis will be performed. (2 hours lecture, 6 hours laboratory) 

424 Evolution (3) F 

Prerequisite: one year of college biology or permission of the instructor. A study 
of evolution, including the history of evolutionary thought; origin of universe, 
earth and life; geological and paleontological history of the earth; evidences for 
evolution derived from comparative anatomy, embryology, genetics, zoogeography; 
mechanisms of evolution. V 

424L Evolution Laboratory (1) S 

Prerequisite: Biology 424 (may be taken concurrently). (3 hours laboratory) 

425 Marine Biology (4) F 

Prerequisites: Bio Sci 101 and Physical Science 201 or equivalent, or permission 
of the instructor. Physical and chemical aspects of the ocean as a background for 
the study of marine organisms and habitats, including a study of currents, tides, 
food cycles, productivity, biotic associations, succession, and communities. Habits, 
identification, ecology, methods of collecting, preserving and maintaining alive 
local marine algae, invertebrates, and fish. (3 hours lecture, 3 hours laboratory or 
field work) 

436 Microbial Growth and Physiology (4) S 

Prerequisites: one semester courses in microbiology and organic chemistry. An 
advanced treatment of the growth, physiology and structures of the microorgan- 
isms, with emphasis on study of the free-living bacteria, yeasts and molds. (2 hours 
lecture, 6 hours laboratory) 

439 Microbial Ecology (4) S 

Prerequisite: one semester of microbiology or bacteriology. The interaction of 
microbes and their environment; the influence of physical and chemical factors on 
the distribution and activities of microbial populations; the effects of microbes on 
the living and nonliving environment. Basic principles of microbial enrichment, 
selection and succession. On completion of the basic experiments each student 
will select and perform a field and laboratory study in microbial ecology. (2 hours 
lecture, 6 hours laboratory) 

441 Plant Taxonomy (4) F 

Prerequisite: Bio Sci 141 or one year of college biology or equivalent. An intro- 
duction to the study of classification of conifers and the flowering plants through 
field collecting and laboratory study and identification of representative kinds. (2 
hours lecture, 6 hours laboratory) 

443 Plant Ecology (4) S 

Prerequisite: Plant Taxonomy 441. Relation of plants to their environment with 
emphasis on climatic and soil factors influencing their structure, behavior, and 
distribution. (2 hours lecture, 6 hours laboratory) 

444 Plant Physiology (4) S 

Prerequisite: Bio Sci 141 or equivalent and one semester of organic chemistry or 
permission of the instructor. A study of plant growth, nutrition, food synthesis, and 
metabolism. (2 hours lecture, 6 hours laboratory) 

445 Mycology (4) F 

Prerequisite: Bio Sci 141. A study of the comparative morphology and taxonomy 
of the fungi with an emphasis on morphological, physiological and reproductive 


180 


Biological Science 

characteristics demonstrating evolutionary relationships. (2 hours lecture, 6 hours 
laboratory) 

446 Algology (4) S 

Prerequisite: Bio Sci 141 or equivalent. A study of the comparative morphology 
and taxonomy of the algae including a consideration of the physiological and 
chemical characteristics demonstrating evolutionary relationships. (2 hours lecture, 
6 hours laboratory or field work) 

452 Economic Botany (3) F 

Prerequisites: Bio Sci 141 or permission of the instructor. An examination of 
man’s dependence upon and economic interest in plants throughout the world. 

461 Invertebrate Zoology (4) F 

Prerequisite: Bio Sci 161, or a year of college biology or permission of in- 
structor. Evolution, classification, physiological adaptions, and biology of inverte- 
brate animals. Includes dissection, identification and observation of living animals. 
(2 hours lecture, 6 hours laboratory, or field work) 

463 Comparative Vertebrate Anatomy (4) F 

Prerequisite: a year course in general zoology or biology, or permission of the 
instructor. A comparative study of the chordates, with emphasis on morphology 
and evolution of various organ systems from fish through mammals. Includes thor- 
ough dissection of dogfish, necturus, and cat. (2 hours lecture, 6 hours laboratory) 

464 Embryology (4) S 

Prerequisite: a year course in general zoology or biology or permission of the 
instructor. Study of development from fertilization through organogenesis with 
laboratory work on the frog, chick, and pig. (2 hours lecture, 6 hours laboratory) 

465 Animal Ecology (4) F 

Prerequisite: three semesters of college biology or permission of the instructor. 
A survey of the physical, chemical, and biological factors of the environment as 
they affect the distribution and mode of life of animals. (2 hours lecture, 6 hours 
laboratory) 

467 Entomology (4) 5 

Prerequisite: Bio Sci 161, or a year of college biology or permission of instructor. 
Anatomy, physiology, evolution, and biology of insects and other terrestrial arthro- 
pods. Laboratory includes detailed dissection, collection, identification, and obser- 
vation of living arthropods. (2 hours lecture, and 6 hours laboratory or field work) 

468 Comparative Animal Physiology (4) F 

Prerequisites: principles of zoology, Chem 101A, 101B, and organic chemistry. 
A comparative survey of organ systems and physiological processes among inver- 
tebrate and vertebrate animals. (2 hours lecture, 6 hours laboratory) 

469 Ichthyology (4) F 

Prerequisites: a year of college biology, comparative vertebrate anatomy, and 
natural history^ of the vertebrates, or permission of the instructor. The biology, 
structure, physiology, ecology, evolution and economic importance of fishes. 
Laboratory' and field work in identification, collection, and natural history of 
fishes. (2 hours lecture, 6 hours laboratory or field work per week; one or more 
weekend trips per semester required) 


181 


Biological Science 


471 Natural History of the Vertebrates (4) S 

Prerequisites: one year of college biology; comparative vertebrate anatomy, or 
permission of the instructor. Natural history, behavior, distribution, and ecology of 
the vertebrates. Laboratory and field emphasis on identification, behavior, mainte- 
nance of living and preserved animals. (2 hours lecture, 6 hours laboratory or 
fieldwork) 

472 Parasitology (4) S 

Prerequisite: one year of general biology or permission of instructor. A con- 
sideration of the symbiotic relationships existing at all levels of animal organization. 
Emphasis will be placed on the natural history, biology, physiology, ecology and 
laboratory recognition of symbiotic organisms. (2 hours lecture, 6 hours labo- 
ratory) 

476 Herpetology (4) S 

Prerequisites: a year of college biology, comparative vertebrate anatomy, and 
natural history of the vertebrates; or permission of the instructor. The biology, 
structure, physiology, ecology, distribution, evolution, and behavior of amphibians 
and reptiles. Laboratory and field work in identification, collection, study of 
amphibians and reptiles including studies on reptile and amphibian behavior and 
physiology. (2 hours lecture, 6 hours laboratory or field work per week; one or 
more weekend trips per semester required) 

491 Senior Seminar (1) F, S 

Prerequisites: senior standing in one of the sciences with a GPA of 2.8, or 
permission of the instructor. Topics in the biological sciences and related fields, 
selected by the faculty and students participating in the course. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) F, S (Formerly 400) 

Open to qualified students who wish to pursue independent study in biology 
under general supervision. May be repeated for credit. 

502 Seminar in Biology (3) F, 5 

Open to graduate students only by permission of the instructor. May be repeated 
for credit. 

510 Seminar in Physiology (3) F, S 

Prerequisites: graduate standing in biological science or equivalent level of 
preparation. Selected topics within the area of physiology. Open to graduate 
students by permission of the instructor. May be repeated for credit. 

511 Seminar in Microbiology (3) F, S 

Open to graduate students only by permission of the instructor. May be repeated 
for credit. 

516 Viruses and Virus Infections (4) S 

Prerequisite: a course in microbiology or bacteriology. A study of viruses as 
molecules, as living organisms and as infectious agents. Further consideration of 
virus infections of man, other animals, bacteria and plants; comparison of viruses 
with rickcttsiae and other obligate parasites. (2 hours lecture, 6 hours laboratory) 

540 Seminar in Botany (3) F, S 

Open to graduate students only by permission of the instructor. May be repeated 
for credit. 


182 


Chemistry 


560 Seminar in Zoology (3) F, S 

Open to graduate students only by permission of the instructor. May be repeated 
for credit. 

598 Thesis (1-3) F, S 

May be repeated for a maximum of 6 units of credit. 

599 Independent Groduote Research (1-3) F, S (Formerly 500) 

Open to graduate students only by permission of a staff member. May be re- 
peated for credit. 


CHEMISTRY 

100 Introductory Chemistry (5) F, S 

Prerequisite: one year of high school mathematics. Fundamental principles of 
chemistry with emphasis placed on the chemistry of inorganic compounds. Does 
not apply as credit for majors in the physical or biological sciences or for minors 
in the physical sciences. (4 hours lecture, 3 hours laboratory) 

101A, B General Chemistry (5,5) F, S 

Prerequisites: high school algebra and cither high school chemistry or high 
school physics or Chemistry 100. High school physics and trigonometry strongly 
recommended. Intended for majors and minors in the physical and biological 
sciences. Chemistry placement test required. 

101 A— The fundamental principles of chemistry including stoichiometry, gas 
laws, solid and liquid states, changes of state, modern atom concepts, chemical 
bonding and chemical equilibrium with emphasis on quantitative acid-base chem- 
istry. Laboratory*: experiments applying elementary physical chemistry and volu- 
metric quantitative analysis. (3 hours lecture discussion, 6 hours laboratory) 

1 01 B— Oxidation-reduction chemistry, introduction to chemical thermodynamics 
and chemical kinetics, discussions of the chemistry of representative and transition 
elements, and introductions to biochemistry, organic and nuclear chemistry. Labo- 
ratory: Experiments concerning gravimetric and volumetric quantitative analysis, 
selected topics in qualitative analysis and inorganic preparations. (3 hours lecture 
discussion, 6 hours laboratory) 

105 General Chemistry for Engineers (3) F, S 

Prerequisite: Chemistry 101 A. Description the same as Chemistry 101 B. Open 
only to engineering majors. Not open to students with credit in Chemistry 101 B. 

201 Modern Physical Science (4) F, S. (Sec course description under Physical 
Science) 

205 Glassblowing (1) F, S 

Elementary’ training in the manipulation of glass leading to the construction of 
scientific glass apparatus. Enrollment limited with preference given to junior and 
senior physical science majors. (4 hours laboratory) 

211 Quantitative Analysis (4) F, S 

Prerequisites: two semesters of college chemistry • Stoichiometry and the funda- 
mentals of volumetric and gravimetric quantitative analysis. Students completing 
Chemistry 101B with a grade of C or better will not receive credit. (2 hours lec- 
ture discussion, 6 hours laboratory) 


183 


Chemistry 


251 Elementary Organic Chemistry (4) F, S 

Prerequisite: Chemistry *100 or equivalent. A course for nonchemistry majors 
designed to provide an introduction to the properties, methods of preparation, and 
reactions of the more important classes of organic compounds. (3 hours lecture 
discussion, 3 hours laboratory) 

301 A,B Organic Chemistry (3,3) F, S 

Prerequisites: Chemistry 101B or equivalent and concurrent enrollment in either 
Chemistry 302 A, B or Chemistry 303 A, B. A comprehensive course in organic chem- 
istry with emphasis on the modern theories of structure and reaction mechanism. 

302A,B Organic Chemistry Laboratory (1,1) F, S 

Prerequisite: concurrent enrollment in Chemistry 301 A, B. A course designed to 
give training in the basic techniques of the organic chemistry laboratory, including 
synthesis of typical aliphatic and aromatic compounds. (3 hours laboratory) 

303A,B Organic Chemistry Laboratory (2,2) F, S 

Prerequisite: concurrent enrollment in Chemistry 301A,B. Experiments illustrat- 
ing laboratory techniques, syntheses, and instrumental methods used in the modern 
organic chemistry laboratory. Recommended for chemistry majors. (6 hours lab- 
oratory) 

312 Quantitative Chemistry (4) F, S (Formerly 212) 

Prerequisites: Chemistry 101 A, B, (grade C or better) or Chemistry 211. Physics 
211A,B, or Physics 221 A3 strongly recommended. Modern analytical chemistry 
including contemporary separation methods, nonaqueous quantitative chemistry, 
and introductions to instrumental methods of analysis in electrochemistry, absorp- 
tion spectroscopy, and radiochemistry. (2 hours lecture discussion, 6 hours lab- 
oratory) 

351 Introduction to Biochemistry (4) F, S 

Prerequisites: Chemistry 251 or Chemistry 301B and five units of biology. A 
survey of the chemistry and metabolism or proteins, carbohydrates, lipids, hor- 
mones, in plants, animals, and microorganisms. (3 hours lecture discussion, 3 hours 
laboratory) 

371A,B Physical Chemistry (3,3) F, S 

Prerequisites: Mathematics 2S0A,B, Physics 221 A3, and Chemistry 101 B. Chem- 
istry' 212 recommended. Equivalent courses may be substituted. A study of the 
fundamental laws and theories of chemistry. Thermodynamics, solutions, chemical 
and phase equilibria, electrochemistry', transport phenomena, atomic and molecular 
structure, and kinetics arc the major topics discovered. Discussions with emphasis 
on the use of fundamental principles to solve problems. 

401 Organic Preparations (2-3) S 

Prerequisite: Chemistry' 301 A,B or equivalent. Laboratory' exercises using ad- 
vanced methods and techniques for the preparation of organic compounds. Library’ 
work required. (6 or 9 hours of laboratory) 

403 Characterization of Organic Compounds (4) F 

Prerequisite: Chemistry’ 301 A,B or equivalent. The identification of organic com- 
pounds as pure substances or in mixtures. (2 hours lecture discussion, 6 hours labo- 
ratory) 


184 


Chemistry 


411 Instrumental Analysis (4) F, S 

Prerequisites: Chemistry 212, 301 A, B, Chemistry 371 A (concurrent enrollment 
acceptable), and Physics 221A,B. Advanced topics in absorption and emission spec- 
troscopy, nuclear magnetic resonance, electron spin resonance, mass spectrometry, 
gas chromatography, X-ray methods, electrochemistry and radiochcmistry. (2 hours 
lecture discussion, 6 hours laboratory) 

421 A, B General Biochemistry (3,3) F, S 

Prerequisite: Chemistry 301 B or equivalent. Survey of major areas of biochemis- 
try, including chemistry and functions of compounds of biochemical interest. 

422A,B General Biochemistry Laboratory (2,2) F, S 

Prerequisites: Concurrent or prior enrollment in General Biochemistry 421A,B. 
Laboratory designed to illustrate the chemistry and metabolism of carbohydrates, 
lipids, and proteins, and to introduce the student to research methods. (6 hours 
of laboratory) 

425 Advanced Inorganic Chemistry (3) F, S 

Prerequisites: Chemistry 101 A, B or equivalent and Chemistry 301 A, B and Chem- 
istry 371A,B. A comprehensive inorganic chemistry course with an introduction to 
modern theories of chemical bonding and structure. Theoretical treatments include 
molecular orbital and ligand field theory with their extensions, coordination and 
transition metal chemistry, various aspects of nonmctal chemistry and a discussion 
of hydride properties. 

426 Inorganic Preparations (3) F, S 

Prerequisites: Chemistry 212, 301A,B and 425 or its equivalent. Laboratory exer- 
cises in the preparation and identification of inorganic compounds. There is a mini- 
mum of five required preparations each of which is representative of a different 
class of compounds. Library work required. (1 hour lecture discussion, 6 hours 
laboratory) 

431 Advanced Organic Chemistry (3) S 

Prerequisites: Chemistry 301A3, Chemistry 371A and Chemistry 37 1 B (or con- 
current enrollment). Theoretical aspects of organic chemistry with emphasis on the 
modem concepts of structure and chemical reactivity. 

441 Physical Chemistry Laboratory (3) F, 5 

Prerequisite: Chemistry 371A,B. May be taken concurrently with Chemistry 
37 IB with the permission of the instructor. Laboratory exercises illustrating the 
physical principles of chemistry. (1 hour lecture discussion, 6 hours laboratory) 

451 Advanced Physical Chemistry (3) F 

Prerequisite: Chemistry 371A,B. An introduction to the application of quantum 
mechanics and statistical mechanics in chemistry. 

461 Chemical Thermodynamics (3) 5 

Prerequisite: Chemistry 371A,B or equivalent. A study of thermodynamic prin- 
ciples and their application to chemical processes. 

472 Chemical Crystallography (3) 5 

Prerequisites: Chemistry 101 A,B and Physics 221A,B or equivalent courses. An 
introduction to the fundamentals of morphological crystallography and crystal 
symmetry, the nature of X-rays and X-ray diffraction, the recording and inter- 
pretation of diffraction phenomena, and the analysis of crystal structures with ap- 
plications in chemistry. 


185 


Communication 


475 Theory of Spectroscopy (3) F 

Prerequisite: Chemistry 371A,B or equivalent. An introduction to the theory of 
the structures of the electronic spectra of diatomic and simpler polyatomic mole- 
cules, transition rules, group theory, and UV, 1R, NMR, and Raman spectra. 

491 Chemical Literature (1) F, 5 

Prerequisite: Upper division standing. An introduction to the types and use of 
chemical literature. 

495 Senior Research (1-3) F, S 

Prerequisite: Consent of supervising instructor. Open only to students with a 
3.0 grade point average in chemistry. An introduction to the methods of chemical 
research through a research project carried out under the supervision of one of 
the Chemistry Department faculty. May be repeated for credit. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) F # S 

Study of some special topic in chemistry, selected in consultation with the in- 
structor and carried out under his supervision. May be repeated for credit. 

500 Research in Chemistry (1-0) F, S 

Prerequisites: Admission to graduate standing and prior arrangements with the 
instructor. Research in one of the fields of chemistry on an individual basis under 
the supervision of an appropriate faculty member. 

511 Theory of the Chemical Bond (3) S 

Prerequisite: Graduate Standing and Chemistry 371A,B and Chemistry 425 or 
their equivalents. An introduction to the principles of molecular formation, elec- 
tronic configurations in ground states of molecules, resonance energies, electronega- 
tivity, bond energies, hybrid bonds, three center bonds, calculation of bond lengths, 
and ionization potentials. 


COMMUNICATION 

101 Reporting and Writing (3) F, S 

Introduction to news reporting and writing, with emphasis on news gathering, 
evaluation, and the principles of clarity and conciseness. Typing ability required. 

102 Reporting and Writing (3) F, S 

Prerequisite: Communication 101 or permission of instructor. Concentration on 
writing of more advanced news stories and news features. Typing ability required. 

21&A Introduction to Photography (2) F, S 

An introductory lecture and laboratory course in photographic theory and the 
application of photographic principles. ( 1 hour lecture, 3 hours lab) 

218B Communications Photography (2) F, S 

A lecture and laboratory course applying photographic principles to the require- 
ments of mass communications. (1 hour lecture, 3 hours lab) 

290 History and Aesthetics of Motion Pictures (3) F 

(Same as Drama 290) 

331 News Communication (3) F 

An introduction to the news communication media, with experience in news 
writing. A writing course open to nonmajors and recommended for credential 
candidates. (Not open to students with credit in Communication 101-102.) 


186 


Communication 


332 Copy Editing and Makeup (3) F 

Prerequisite: Communication 101 and 102, or permission of instructor. Practice 
and theory of editing information materials for publication in newspapers and 
magazines. (6 hours activity) 

333 Mass Communication in Modern Society (3) F, S 

The basic structure and the interrelationships of newspapers, magazines, films, 
radio, television, in terms of their significance as social instruments and economic 
entities in modem society. 

334 Feature Article Writing (3) F 

Nonfiction writing for newspapers and magazines, including study of sources, 
methods, and markets. Open to nonmajors. 

335 Reporting of Public Affairs (3) S 

Prerequisites: Communication 101 and 102, or permission of instructor. Coverage 
in depth of significant events pertinent to operations of governmental units and 
related organizations. 

338 Newspaper Production (3) F, S 

Prerequisite: permission of the instructor. A lecture and activity course in which 
members of the class constitute the editorial staff of the college newspaper. The 
group meets four hours per week for critiques in news reporting, writing, editing 
and makeup, followed by production. With consent of instructor, the course may 
be repeated up to a maximum of 9 units credit. (More than 9 hours lab) 

353 Advertising Copy and Layout (3) F 

Writing of copy and layout of advertisements, based on study of sales appeals, 
attention factors, and illustrations. (6 hours activity) 

354 Retail Advertising (3) F 

Principles and procedures of retail advertising; utilization of mass media; super- 
vised field assignments in the analysis of specific advertising needs. 

356 Advertising Production (1) S 

Preparation of advertisements for the college newspaper, magazine and yearbook. 
Advertising accounts assigned to each student. Weekly critique sessions. Individual 
consultation with instructor. (5 hours lab) 

358A,B Publications Production (2,2) F, S 

A workshop for students engaged in the production of the college magazine and 
yearbook and other types of student publications, as scheduled by appropriate 
college authorities. Activities will include writing, editing, photography, art work, 
and layout. Open to nonmajors. (More than 6 hours lab) 

361 Theory and Practice of Public Relations (3) F 

Examination of basic principles of public relations and their application in non- 
commercial as well as commercial fields, including industry, education, government 
and welfare. 

371 Radio-television News and Public Affairs (3) S 

Theory and practice of covering news events and public affairs for radio and 
television. Student material will be prepared for broadcast locally. (6 hours activity) 

375 The Documentary Film (3) F 

Purpose and development of the documentary; current trends; critical analysis; 
production requirements; future of the medium in business, government and edu- 
cation, and television. Students will analyze selected documentary films. 


187 


Communication 


380 Introduction to Radio and Television (3) F, 5 

(Same as Drama 380) 

401 Report Writing (3) F, S 

Planning, organizing and writing of various kinds of reports for business, educa- 
tion and government. Consideration will be given to use of graphic aids and 
preparation of copy for reports that arc to be printed. Recommended for non- 
majors. 

403 Technical Writing (3) F 

The study of uses of technical writing in industry, science and engineering, and 
the completion of written assignments designed to test understanding of, and pro- 
vide experience with various forms. 

407 Communication and the Law (3) S 

Development of Anglo-American concept of freedom of speech and press; 
statutes and administrative regulations affecting freedom of information and of 
publishing, advertising and telecommunications. Problems of libel and slander, 
rights in news and advertising, contempt, copyright, and invasion of privacy. Open 
to nonmajors. 

425 History and Philosophy of American Mass Communication (3) F 

The development of American mass communication beginning with newspapers 
and periodicals and continuing through radio and television. Includes ideological, 
political, social and economic aspects. 

426 World Communication Systems (3) S 

The examination of major mass communication systems, both democratic and 
totalitarian, and the means by which news and propaganda are conveyed inter- 
nationally. 

427 Seminar on Current Issues in Mass Communication (3) S 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Consideration of problems such as the extent 
to which the mass media should be regulated by the government, “objective” 
versus “interpretive” news reporting, and ethical and legal questions of particular 
cases. 

439 Mass Media Internship (2) F, S 

According to his vocational preference, the student serves a supervised intern- 
ship with a newspaper, magazine, radio or television station, press association, adver- 
tising agency, or public relations firm. 

451 National Advertising Compaigns (3) S 

Advanced study of advertising campaigns; utilization of news media — television, 
newspapers, magazines, etc. — in national advertising programs. Design of complete 
campaign from idea to production. 

463 Public Relations Methods (3) S 

Prerequisite: Communication 361 or equivalent, or consent of the instructor. 
Means by which public relations concepts are carried out through the mass media. 

465 International Public Relations (3) S 

Application of public relations principle to the requirements of international 
operation in business, education, religion and philanthropy. 


188 


Comparative Literature 


499 Independent Study (1-3) F, S 

Prerequisite: consent of the department chairman. Individually supervised mass 
media projects and research on and off campus. Research and projects may in- 
volve newspapers, magazines, radio, television, and public relations agencies. May 
be repeated for credit. 

500 Mast Communication Theory (3) S 

Prerequisite: B.A. degree, background in mass communications, or consent of in- 
structor. Theory of mass communication in terms of communicator, media, and 
audience. Consideration of extensive research regarding probable effects of mass 
communications. 

501 Literature of Mass Communications (3) S 

Types, sources, and uses of mass communication literature; application to indi- 
vidual graduate studies. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) F, 5 

Prerequisite: consent of the department chairman. Individually supervised mass 
media projects or research for graduate students. May be repeated for credit. 

COMPARATIVE LITERATURE 

(Offered by the Department of English) 

312 The Bible as Literature (3) F, S 

The evolution of major ideas and attitudes in the Old and New Testaments; the 
influence of the Hebraic-Christian tradition in shaping the values of Western 
civilization. 

315 Classical Mythology in World Literature (3) F 

The origins, elements, forms and functions of classical mythology in works from 
the earliest times to the present. 

324A Advanced World Literature (3) F 

Selected readings in Indian, Chinese, Japanese, Middle Eastern and European 
literature from the beginning to 1650. 

324B Advanced World Literature (3) S 

Selected readings from Oriental and Western literature from 1650 to the present. 

332 Medieval Literature of Western Europe (3) S 

Representative works in translation, from Beowulf to Dante. 

333 Literature of the Renaissance (3) F 

Major phases of the Renaissance as a literary movement, from Erasmus to 
Montaigne and Cervantes. 

373 Masters of Russian Literature (3) S 

Reading, discussion, and interpretation of selected works by Pushkin, Dostoyev- 
sky, Tolstoy, Chekhov, Pasternak, and others, and their relationship to Western 
literature. 

375 Hispanic Literature and Culture (3) S 

A survey of Hispanic contributions to world culture, with emphasis on under- 
standing contemporary Latin American civilization. 

425A Oriental Literature (3) F 

A study of selected translations of Indian and Chinese literature. 


189 


Drama 


425B Oriental Literature (3) S 

A study of selected translations of Japanese literature. 

450 The Naturalists (3) F, S 

A study of naturalism in the works of Turgenev, Balzac, the brothers Goncourt, 
Maupassant, Zola, Huysmans, Ibsen, Verga; and also the works of Gissing, Moore, 
Hardy, Garland, Crane, Norris, Dreiser, London, and O’Neill. 

453 The Novel in France and Germany (3) S 

Reading, discussion, and interpretation of outstanding novels in translation with 
a view toward determining some principles of the narrative arts. Emphasis on 
Goethe, Stendahl, Flaubert, Mann, Kafka, Proust, and others. 

454 Contemporary Movements in European Literature (3) F, S 

A study of modem literary movements, including naturalism, realism, symbol- 
ism, expressionism and surrealism, with reading and discussion of selected exam- 
ples. 

473A,B World Drama (3,3) F, 5 

Reading, discussion and interpretation of great plays of the world in translation, 
emphasizing them as literature for performance. First semester from ancient Greece 
through the mid-19th century; second semester, from Ibsen to the present. (Same 
as Drama 473 A3*) 

481 Senior Seminar: Ethical Problems in Literature (3) F 

A systematic investigation of ethical assumptions displayed in representative 
samples of the greatest Western cultures and literary types. Involves aesthetics, 
ethics, philosophy, and human social behavior. 

491 Senior Seminar: Greek Tragedy (3) 5 

Fifth century Greek tragedy through the extant works of Aeschylus and 
Sophocles, and ten plays of Euripides. (Same as Drama 491.) 

582 Graduate Seminar: Dante (3) S 

DRAMA 

211 Introduction to Oral Interpretation (3) F, S 

Prerequisite: Speech 101, a high school speech course, or consent of instructor. 
A fundamentals course devoted to theory, methods, and practice in the perform- 
ance of oral communication of different types of literature. (Same as Speech 211.) 

245A,B Mime and Pantomime (2,2) F, S 

Theory and practice of mime and pantomime for drama, dance and education 
(expression and gesture). Provide historical and contemporary knowledge and 
techniques with emphasis on individual development of creative skill in mime 
and pantomime. (2 hours — lecture, 2 hours — activity) 

271 Intraduction to Theatre Arts (3) F, S 

A study of the evolution of theatre, motion pictures, radio and television as 
composite arts. Emphasis is placed on the visual and production aspects as influ- 
enced by different cultures, traditions, and technologies. Field trips to certain 
significant productions. 

272 Understanding Theatre (3) F, S 

A nontechnical survey course for the general student leading to an appreciation 
and understanding of the theatre as a medium of communication and entertainment 
and as an art form. Field trips to certain significant productions. 


190 


Drama 


273A,B Acting (3,3) F, S 

Laboratory practice and discussions of the form and content of the art of acting: 
(A) action, motivation and circumstances of behavior on stage; (B) problems in 
characterization. (6 hours — activity) 

276A,B Beginning Stagecraft (2,2) F, S 

Participation in the preparation and execution of the departmental and student 
productions: (A) production organization; scenic forms; construction, tools and 
materials; properties; (B) scene painting, lighting fundamentals, sound. (More 
than 6 hours — production) 

285A,B Theatrical Makeup (1,1) F, S 

Theory and practice in makeup for sta 0 e and television. Emphasis on develop- 
ment of individual skill in techniques of character analysis, application in pig- 
ment, plastic, hair makeup, and selection and use of makeup equipment. (3 hours — 
activity) 

286 Design for the Theatre (3) S 

Prerequisite: Art 103, 104 or Drama 276A or 276B, or consent of instructor. 
Study and practice in the principles of designing for the stage. Practical work in 
the designing and planning of sets for drama productions. (Same as Art 286.) 

290 History and Aesthetics of Motion Pictures (3) F 

History and development of motion pictures as an art form combining lec- 
tures, readings, discussion, and screening of films. (Same as Comm. 290) 

311 Oral Interpretation (3) F, S 

Prerequisite: Drama 211 or Speech 211 or consent of instructor. The principles 
and practice of reading aloud from the printed page. Analysis of selections from 
prose and poetry arc emphasized. The development of voice control and projection 
of idea and motion. (Same as Speech 311.) 

314A,B Reading Theatre (3,3) F, S 

Prerequisite: Drama 211 or Speech 211. Oral reading in which the emphasis is 
placed on group and individual reading of dramatic literature. The first semester 
will emphasize modem and contemporary dramatic literature and the second semes- 
ter will include selections from the Elizabethan, Renaissance and Romantic periods. 

341 Phonetics (3) F 

(Same as Speech 341) 

364 Seminar in Writing (3) F, S 

Prerequisite: Evidence of student’s previous interest in creative writing and con- 
sent of the instructor. Study of superior models, development of style, and group 
criticism and evaluation of each student’s independent work, as it relates to play- 
writing. May be repeated for credit. (Same as English 364) 

370A,B Fundamentals of Directing (3,3) F, S 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. The study of prerehcarsal problems and pro- 
cedures, of the structural analysis of plays, and of composition, picturization, 
pantomimic dramatization, movement, and rhythm onstage. Practice in directing 
scenes. (6 hours activity) 

373A,B Advanced Acting (3,3) F, S 

Prerequisite: Drama 273A,B. A study of historical theories and techniques of 
styles of acting as an art form. The first semester will include Greek through 
Neoclassic periods and the second semester will include the 18th century to con- 
temporary styles. (6 hours — activity) 


191 


Drama 


374A,B Dance Theatre and Production (2,2) F, S 

Prerequisite: Physical Education 143 or the equivalent or consent of instructor. 
Theory and practice of creative and expressive movement in relation to the theatre 
and dance production. (More than 6 hours — production) 

376A,B Advanced Stagecraft (2,2) F, S 

Participation in the supervising of major areas of technical production; stage 
management, lighting design, production management, house management. (More 
than 6 hours — production) 

377A,B Stage Costuming (2,2) F, S 

Prerequisites: Stagecraft 376A or permission of the instructor. Principles and 
theory of costumes for stage and television including both historical and con- 
temporary techniques and application. (More than 6 hours — production) 

378A,B Experimental Theatre (1-3), (1-3) F, S 

Prerequisites: consent of instructor. An activity course in which dramatic prin- 
ciples are applied through production of full length and one-act plays using 
various styles of acting and staging. One section includes mime and pantomime 
for drama, dance and education. (More than 3 hours production per unit) 

380 Introduction to Radio and Television (3) F, S 

The history and development of the broadcasting industry and its impact and 
influence on our society. A study of the basic broadcasting practices, audiences, 
production and programming. (Same as Communication 380) 

382 Television Techniques (3) F, S 

Survey of the development and current trends in television techniques, program- 
ming, and production. 

383 Radio and Television Writing (3) S 

Study of the principles and practices and experience in the writing of scripts 
and other forms of continuity for both radio and television. 

402 Dramatic Activities for Children (3) F, S 

Theory and practice in the use of creative dramatics, storytelling, puppetry, 
assembly programs, role-playing, and other aspects of dramatics as tools for the 
teacher, group worker, recreation major, and others who work with children. 

470 A,B Directing (3,3) F, S 

Theory and practice in directing scenes from plays for their oral and visual 
values as theatre. Second semester students will each direct public performances of 
two one-act plays. (6 hours activity) 

473A,B World Drama (3,3) F, S 

(Same as Comparative Literature 473A,B) 

474 Special Studies in Dance Theatre and Production (1—3) F, S 

Prerequisites: Drama 374A,B or the equivalent and consent of instructor. Oppor- 
tunity for intensive study in theory and practice in dance theater and production. 
May be repeated to a maximum of eight units but no more than three units of 
credit may be obtained in a single semester. (More than 3 hours production per 
unit) 

475A,B History of the Theatre (3,3) F, S 

Examinations of the evolution of all major aspects of world theatre. (A) From 
ancient Greece to the end of the 18th century; (B) 19th and 20th centuries. 


192 


Drama 


477 Senior Seminar in Contemporary Critical Techniques (3) F 

Prerequisite: Drama 473 or equivalent. Introduction to major contemporary 
modes of criticism and their application to selected plays and area of produc- 
tions. 

478A,B Rehearsal and Performance (1-3), (1—3) F, S 

Acting in stage productions. Any upper division or graduate student who de- 
sires to be considered for roles in the major productions should enroll. This 
class cannot be taken concurrently with either 374A,B, 376A,B or 378A,B. (More 
than 3 hours production per unit) 

488A,B Advanced Scene Design (3,3) F, S 

Prerequisites: Drama 286, or equivalent beginning work in design. Lecture in 
scene design with emphasis on 'style, ornamentation and illusion leading to prac- 
tical problems in designing for the stage and television. (Same as Art 488AB.) 

491 Senior Seminar: Greek Tragedy (3) S 

(Same as Comparative Literature 491.) 

499 Independent Study (1-3) F, S 

Open to advanced students in drama with the consent of the department chair- 
man. May be repeated for credit. 

500 Introduction to Graduate Study in Drama (3) F, S 

Introduction to methodological problems in graduate research. Location of source 
materials, including library and original data; research and project design and 
execution; interpretation of researches. 

501 Graduate Seminar: Advanced Theatre Theory and Appreciation (3) F 

Directed research with emphasis on the relationship between historical back- 
grounds and developments in the theatre and the student’s area of concentration. 
May be repeated to a maximum of six units. 

511 Graduate Seminar in Interpretation (3) F, S 

The historical and philosophical backgrounds in the development of interpreta- 
tion and its relationship to contemporary theory and practice. (Same as Speech 
511.) 

571 Graduate Seminar: Major Writers (3) F, S 

Directed research and writing, group discussion, and lectures covering Shake- 
speare. The student should consult his adviser and the schedule of classes for the 
section appropriate to his program. (Same as English 571.) 

572 Production Planning in Theatre Arts (3) F 

History and philosophy of production problems in theatre arts. Organization of 
the college theatre as it relates to the total college program. Planning of the 
production within the limitations of budgets and physical facilities. 

573 Graduate Seminar, Literary Genres (3,3) F, S 

As appropriate to the specialized research and publications of the instructor, this 
course will offer directed research and writing, group discussion and lectures 
covering such major literary types as: tragedy, comedy and historical drama. 
With consent of the adviser, this course may be repeated with different content 
for additional credit. (Same as English 572.) 

597 Project (3) F, S (Formerly 591) 

Development and presentation of a creative project in the area of concentration 
beyond regularly offered coursework. 


193 


Drama Education 


598 Thesis (3) F, S (Formerly 591) 

Development and presentation of a thesis or creative project in the area of con- 
centration beyond regularly offered coursework. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) F, 5 

Open to graduate students in drama with the consent of the department chair- 
man. May be repeated for credit. 

DRAMA EDUCATION 

442 Teaching Drama in the Secondary School (2) F, S 

Prerequisites: Education 340. Education 311, admission to teacher education, 
senior standing or consent of the instructor. The student who has not had 
teaching experience must register concurrently in Education 449. See page 144 
under Secondary Education for description of Standard Teaching Credential pro- 
gram. Objectives, methods, and materials including audio-visual instruction for 
teaching drama in secondary schools. 

484 Educational Television Production (3) F, 5 

Theory and practice in the activities, methods of lesson preparation, and pres- 
entation of educational television productions. 

749 Student Teaching in Drama in the Secondary School and Seminar (6) F, S 

Sec page 144 under Secondary Education for description and prerequisites. 

ENGLISH 

For world literature in English translation sec courses under Comparative Litera- 
ture. English 101 and 102 arc normal prerequisites for all courses numbered 200 
or above. 

101 Composition and World Literature (3) F, S 

Analytical and critical writing based on the study of representative works from 
Classical and Biblical literature to the Renaissance. 

102 World Literature and Composition (3) F, S 

Prerequisite: English 101 or the equivalent. The study of representative works 
from the Renaissance to the modern age, as a basis for continuing practice in 
analytical and critical writing. 

201 Analysis of Literary Forms (3) F, S 

The main literary forms — prose fiction, poetry, and drama — are studied and ana- 
lyzed. Various critical methods are applied to representative works mainly from 
English and American literature. Especially recommended for prospective teachers 
of literature. 

202 The Short Story (3) F, S 

Critical analysis of selected American and European short stories, aimed at an 
understanding of the structure and technique of the short story. 

211 Masters of British Literature (3) F 

Prerequisite: sophomore standing, or consent of instructor. An introduction to 
major periods and movements, major authors, and major forms through 1760. 

212 Masters of British Literature (3) S 

Prerequisite: sophomore standing, or consent of instructor. An introduction to 
major periods and movements, major authors, and major forms from 1760 through 
modem times. 

194 


English 


301 Advanced Composition (3) F, S 

Exercises in creativity, analysis, and rhetoric as applied in expository writing. 
Required of English majors seeking the secondary credential. 

303 The Structure of Modern English (3) F, S 

Prerequisite: junior standing. The grammar of contemporary English applied 
to problems in writing. Modern English usage. Required of English majors seeking 
the secondary credential. 

321 American Literature to Whitman (3) F, S 

Emphasis on major writers: Hawthorne, Poe, Melville, Emerson, Thoreau, Whit- 
man, and others. 

322 American Literature from Twain to the Moderns (3) F, S 

Emphasis on Twain, James, Crane, Hemingway, Faulkner, O’Neill, Frost, Eliot. 

333 Chaucer (3) F, S 

Emphasis on The Canterbury Tales , read in Middle English. Close attention to 
the vocabulary, structure, and pronunciation of Chaucer’s language, as indispensable 
to literary appreciation. 

334 Shakespeare (3) F, S 

Intensive study of selected major plays illustrating Shakespeare’s development, 
dramatic art, and insight into human nature. 

335 Elizabethan and Jacobean Drama (3) S 

Prerequisite: English 334 or consent of the instructor. Studies of representative 
English dramatists of the late 16th and early 17th centuries. Emphasis on the 
development of the dramatic tradition in the plays of Marlowe, Jonson, Webster, 
Beaumont and Fletcher, and others. 

336 Elizabethan Poetry and Prose (3) F 

The poetry of Wyatt and Surrey, Jonson, Marlowe, Sidney, Spenser, and others; 
and the prose of Bacon, Greene, Lodge, Lyly, Nashc, and pthers. 

341 Milton (3) F, S 

An intensive study of the poetry and prose in the light of Milton’s intellectual 
development. 

342 The Age of Reason in English Literature (3) F 

Swift, Pope, Johnson, Boswell, Addison, and Steele. The Restoration, the Age of 
Reason, and foreshadowings of Romanticism. 

343 The Romantic Movement in English Literature (3) S 

Bums, Blake; Wordsworth, Coleridge; Byron, Shelley, and Keats. The reaction 
against rationalism, the rise of revolutionary and liberal thought, humanitarianism, 
and emphasis on individual creativity. 

344 English Literature of the late Nineteenth Century (3) F 

Roots and development of social and aesthetic problems in essayists and poets 
of the late and middle 19th century, including Carlyle, Ruskin, Newman, Mill, 
Pater, Huxley, Tennyson, Browning, Rossetti and Hopkins. 

345A,B History and Development of the English Novel (3,3) F, S 

A study of the English novel from the Renaissance to the modems, with em- 
phasis on the 18th and 19th centuries. 


195 


English 


346 The Age of Dryden (3) F 

Representative poets, prose writers and dramatists of the Restoration period. 
Emphasis on the ideas which inform the work of Dryden, Hobbes, Rochester, 
Etherege, Wycherley, Congreve, Temple and others. 

351 Science Fiction (3) F 

Prerequisite: English 101. The study of science fiction as a genre, including fu- 
ture-scene fiction, the utopian novel, the superman novel, and short fantasy 
stories. 

364 Seminar in Writing (3) F, 5 

Prerequisite: Evidence of student’s previous interest in creative writing and con- 
sent of the instructor. Study of superior models, development of style, and group 
criticism and evaluation of each student’s independent work. Depending on the 
specialized writing field of the instructor, the various sections will concentrate on 
fiction, plays, or poetry'. May be repeated for credit. 

433 Children's Literature (3) F, 5 

A study of masterpieces of the world’s literature for children. Illustrates literary 
qualities appealing to children and demonstrates the ways in which children’s 
literature reflects the particular cultural differences of the various Oriental, classi- 
cal and modem cultures. 

435 Advanced Shakespeare (3) S 

Prerequisite: English 334. Advanced study of selected plays. 

451 Philosophical Backgrounds of Modern Literature (3) F, S 

The connection between representative writers and such thinkers and philoso- 
phers as Freud, Spengler, Schopenhauer, Nietzsche, and Kierkegaard. (Same as 
Philosophy 451.) 

462 Modern British and American Novels (3) F, S 

Prerequisites: survey of English, American, or world literature; an upper divi- 
sion literature course; or consent of the instructor. The development of modern 
British and American novels from 1900 to 1950. 

463 Contemporary British and American Novels (3) S 

The novel in English since World War II. 

464 Modern British and American Drama (3) F, S 

Prerequisites: survey of English, American, or world literature; an upper divi- 
sion literature course; or consent of the instructor. The development of British 
and American drama from 1900 to the present. 

466 Modern British and American Poetry (3) F, S 

Prerequisite: survey of English, American or world literature, an upper divi- 
sion literature course; or consent of the instructor. The development of British 
and American poetry from 1900 to the present. 

490 History of the English Language (3) S 

Prerequisite: senior or graduate standing. The historical development of English 
vocabulary', phonology, morphology, and syntax from Indo-European to modem 
American English. 


196 


English 


491 Senior Seminar (3) S 

Prerequisite: an undergraduate course in the area to be studied, a B average or 
better in subsequent English courses, or consent of the instructor. 

Directed research and writing, group discussion, and lectures covering selected 
topics from language studies, intensive studies of major writers, criticism, and 
literary types, periods, and ideological trends. 

499 Independent Study (3) F, S 

Open to advanced students in English with the consent of the department chair- 
man. May be repeated for credit. 

570 Graduate Seminar: Language Studies (3) F, S 

Directed research and writing, group discussion, and lectures covering philology, 
historical development, and structure of English. Individual offerings under this 
course number may deal with only one aspect of language studies. The student 
should consult his advisor and the schedule of classes for the sections appropriate 
to his graduate program. This course number may be repeated with different con- 
tent for additional credit. 

571 Graduate Seminar: Major Writers (3) F, S 

As appropriate to the specialized research and publication of the instructor, this 
course will offer directed research and writing, group discussion, and lectures cov- 
ering major figures such as: Shakespeare, Milton, Chaucer, Melville, Twain, Haw- 
thorne, Joyce, and Coleridge. The student should consult his adviser and the sched- 
ule of classes for the sections appropriate to his graduate program. This course 
number may be repeated with different content for additional credit. 

572 Graduate Seminar: Literary Genres (3) F, S 

As appropriate to the specialized research and publication of the instructor, this 
course will offer directed research and writing, group discussion and lectures, 
covering such major literary types as: the epic, the novel, the short story, lyric 
poetry, tragedy, comedy, and historical drama. The student should consult his 
adviser and the schedule of classes for sections appropriate to his graduate pro- 
gram. This course number may be repeated u'ith different content for additional 
credit. (Same as Drama 573.) 

573 Graduate Seminar: Cultural Periods (3) F, S 

As appropriate to the specialized research and publication of the instructor, this 
course will offer directed research and writing, group discussion, and lectures 
covering the literature of a particular cultural period from the Anglo-Saxon to 
modem times. The student shoqld consult his adviser and his schedule of classes 
for the sections appropriate to his graduate program. This course number may 
be repeated with different content for additional credit. 

574 Graduate Seminar: Special Problems in Literature (3) F. S 

As appropriate to the specialized research and publication of the instructor, this 
course will offer directed research and writing, group discussion, and lectures 
covering special problems such as: the detailed critical study of varying in- 
fluences on literature, including philosophical, religious, scientific, geographic, 
and other ecological viewpoints. The student should consult his adviser and his 
schedule of classes for the sections appropriate to his graduate program. This 
course number may be repeated with different content for additional credit. 

579 Graduate Seminar: Problems in Criticism (3) F, S 

Directed research and writing, group discussion, and lectures covering historical 
development and schools of criticism. Individual offerings within this course 


197 


English Education 

number may deal with only one aspect of critical problems. The student should 
consult his adviser and the schedule of classes for the sections appropriate to his 
graduate program. This course number may be repeated with different content for 
additional credit. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (3) F, S (Formerly 580) 

Research projects in areas of specialization beyond regularly offered course work. 
Oral and written reports. This course number may be repeated with different 
content for additional credit. 


ENGLISH EDUCATION 

432 Teaching Language Arts in the Elementary School (2) F, S 

Prerequisite: Education 311, admission to teacher education. The importance 
of the language arts to satisfactory personal, social, and professional life. Methods to 
help develop in children the skills needed for listening, speaking, reading, and 
writing arc studied and their effectiveness evaluated. 

442 Teaching English in the Secondary School (2) F, S 

Prerequisites: Education 311, Admission to Teacher Education. Principles, 
methods, and materials of teaching English in the secondary school. The student 
who has not had teaching experience must register concurrently in Educ 449. 

749 Student Teaching in English in the Secondary School and Seminar (6) F, S 

See page 144 under Secondary Education for description and prerequisites. 

FOREIGN LANGUAGES EDUCATION 

(Offered by the Department of Foreign Languages and Literatures) 

432 Teaching Foreign Languages in the Elementary School (2) F, S 

Methods of teaching FLES: foreign languages in elementary schools. Critical 
review of materials, audio-lingual-visual aids, and current research. Conducted in 
English, with practice by students in the language they plan to teach. 

442 Teaching Foreign Languages in the Secondary School (2) F. S 

Prerequisites: Education 340, Education 311, admission to teacher education, senior 
standing or consent of insructor. The student who has not had teaching experience 
must register concurrently in Education 449. Sec pages 144 under Secondary' Educa- 
tion for description of Standard Teaching Credential program. 

The theory and practice of language learning and language teaching with special 
emphasis on the audiolingual method in combination with electromechanical aids. 
Conducted in English, with practice by students in the language they plan to teach. 
Required, before student teaching, of students presenting majors in foreign lan- 
guages for the standard teaching credential with a specialization in secondary' edu- 
cation. 

749 Student Teaching in Foreign Languages in the Secondary 
School and Seminar (6) F, S 

Sec page 144 under Secondary' Education for description and prerequisites. 


198 


French 


FRENCH 

(Offered by the Department of Foreign Languages and Literatures) 

101 Fundamental French (5) F, S 

Intensive practice in listening comprehension speaking, reading and writing to 
develop control of the sounds and the basic forms and structure of French. Audio- 
lingual assignments arc an integral part of the course and arc to be prepared in 
the language laboratory. 

102 Fundamental French (5) F, 5 

Prerequisite: French 101 (or equivalent). Intensive practice in listening compre- 
hension, speaking, reading and writing to develop control of the sounds and the 
basic forms and structure of French. Audiolingual assignments arc an integral pan 
of the course and are to be prepared in the language laboratory. 

203 Intermediate French (3) F, 5 

Prerequisite: French 102 (or equivalent). Intensive practice in speaking, under- 
standing, reading, and writing based on cultural and literary materials. Linguistic 
analysis from sound to sentence. 

204 Intermediate French (3) F, S 

Prerequisite: French 203 (or equivalent). Intensive practice in speaking, under- 
standing, reading and writing based on cultural and literary materials. Linguistic 
analysis from sound to sentence. 

213 Intermediate Composition (2) F, S 

Practice in written expression based on cultural and literary materials. May be 
taken concurrently with French 2Q3. Required of all majors and minors at the 
intermediate level; optional to others. 

214 Intermediate Composition (2) F, S 

Practice in written expression based on cultural and literary materials. May be 
taken concurrently with French 204. Required of all majors and minors at the 
intermediate level; optional to others. 

315 Introduction to French Civilization (3) F 

Prerequisite: French 204 or equivalent. Reading and discussions to develop a 
view of the French tradition (its social, intellectual and literary evolution) while 
at the same time strengthening facility with the language. Open to lower division 
students with the consent of the instructor. Conducted in French. 

317 Advanced Conversation and Composition (3) F 

Prerequisite: French 204 or equivalent. Open to lower division students with the 
consent of the instructor. Designed to give the student special competence in 
the control of French as an instrument for free oral and written expression. Con- 
ducted in French. 

325 Contemporary French Civilization (3) S 

Prerequisite: French 204 or equivalent. Reading and discussion to develop under- 
standing of the social and intellectual problems, trends, and contributions of pres- 
ent-day France, while at the same time strengthening facility with the language. 
Open to lower division students with the consent of the instructor. Conducted in 
French. 


199 


French 


400 French for Advanced Students and Teachers (3) S 

Prerequisite: French 317 or consent of instructor. Intensive review of spoken 
French, while developing tjie student’s powers of self-expression in the spoken and 
written language. Modern writings in various fields, as well as developments in 
methodology and texts, serve as the basis for intensive practice. Conducted in 
French. 

431 French Literature in the Middle Ages and Renaissance (3) F 

Prerequisite: French 315 or consent of instructor. The development of French 
literature from the 12th through the 16th centuries, through analysis of representa- 
tive works. Conducted in French. 

441 French Literature in the Century of Revolution (3) S 

Prerequisite: French 315 or consent of instructor. The principal authors and 
movements (romanticism, realism, naturalism, symbolism) of the 19th century* 
Conducted in French. 

451 French: Literature in the Baroque and Classic Age (3) F 

Prerequisite: French 315 or consent of instructor. The essence and evolution of 
17th-century classicism, studied principally in the major authors (Corneille, 
Molicrc, Racine, La Fayette) and in the dominant genre (the theater). Conducted 
in French. 

461 French Literature in the Age of Enlightenment (3) S 

Prerequisite: French 315 or consent of instructor. Two complementary aspects 
of the 18th century: reason and feeling, the philosophes and the current of sensibil- 
ity. Emphasis on major authors (Marivaux, Voltaire, Diderot, Rousseau, Laclos). 
Conducted in French. 

466 Introduction to French Linguistics (3) F 

The analytical procedures of general linguistics as applied to French, with spe- 
cial attention to structural contrasts between French and English. Emphasis on 
the application of linguistic analysis to the teaching of modern foreign languages. 

471 Senior Seminar: Contemporary French Literature (3) S 

Prerequisite: French 315 or consent of instructor. The major figures of the 20th 
century, including the generations of Proust, Apollinaire, Malraux, Sartre and 
Robbe-Grillct. Conducted in French. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) F, S 

Supervised projects in French language or literature to be taken with the consent 
of the instructor and department chairman. May be repeated for credit. 

500 Graduate Seminar: Advanced Structure and Style (3) S 

Prerequisite: Consent of instructor. Conducted in French. 

510 Graduate Seminar: Phonology (3) F 

Prerequisite: French 466 or consent of instructor. Conducted in French. 

530 Graduate Seminar: Historical Linguistics (3) S 

Prerequisite: French 466 or consent of the instructor. 

557 Graduate Seminar: French Poetry (3) F 

Prerequisite: Consent of instructor. Conducted in French. 

571 Graduate Seminar: French Prose (3) S 

Prerequisite: Consent of instructor. Conducted in French. 


200 


Geography 


575 Graduate Seminar: French Drama (3) F 

Prerequisite: Cortsent of instructor. Conducted in French. 

576 Graduate Seminar: Major Writers (3) S 

Prerequisite: Consent of instructor. May be repeated for credit. Conducted in 
French. 

598 Thesis (3-6) F, 5 (Formerly 580) 

Prerequisite: Recommendation of the student’s graduate committee. 

GEOGRAPHY 

200 Geography of Man (3) F, 5 

Man’s distribution and activities within the framework of world geographic 
regions, with emphasis on the differing uses of natural environments. 

300 Physical Geography (3) F, 5 

Prerequisite: Geography 200 or equivalent. A study of the basic elements of 
the physical environment (e.g., climate, land forms, vegetation and soils) with par- 
ticular emphasis on the world patterns and interrelationships. 

310 Human Geography (3) F, S 

Prerequisite: Geography 200 or equivalent. An examination of the concepts re- 
lating to the areal distribution and diversity of man, his settlements, his economies 
and his patterns of movements. 

312 Geomorphology (3) F 

Prerequisite: Geography 300. A study of the development of land forms and 
the processes which alter them, with emphasis on present landscapes in the United 
States and the interpretation of topographic maps. 

323 Climatology (3) S 

Prerequisite: Geography 300 or consent of the instructor. A study of the clima- 
tological elements and processes, climatic types and the importance of climate in 
the natural and cultural landscape. 

333 Economic Geography (3) F, S 

A study of the production and distribution of the world’s agricultural, mineral 
and industrial commodities, and analysis of the related economic, political and 
physical factors. 

343 Maps and Map Interpretation (3) F 

Sources, evaluation, uses, and planning of various types of maps and graphic aids 
for teaching and research, with empha is on the principle of effective cartographic 
representation. 

431 Geography of California (3) F, S (Formerly 363) 

Prerequisite: Geography 200 or consent of instructor. Analysis of the geographic 
regions of California — their environmental diversity, settlement patterns, economic 
development, and current problems. 

432 Geography of Anglo-America (3) F, S 

Prerequisite: Geography 200, or consent of instructor. A regional study of the 
United States and Canada emphasizing the interrelated physical and cultural fea- 
tures, that give geographic personality, both to the individual regions as well as the 
individual countries. 


201 


Geography 


433 Geography of Europe (3) F, S 

Prerequisite: Geography 200, or consent of instructor. Description and analysis 
of physical environments and human occupance patterns in Europe west of the 
Soviet Union. 

434 Geography of Latin America (3) F 

Prerequisite: Geography 200 or consent of instructor. A systematic and regional 
survey of Middle and South America with particular emphasis on the interrela- 
tionships of the physical and social factors of the area. 

435 Geography of Asia (3) F 

Prerequisite: Geography 200 or consent of instructor. A regional study of Asiatic 
nations, exclusive of the Soviet Union and Southwest Asia, showing the interrela- 
tionships of physical and cultural characteristics with special emphasis on the grow- 
ing significance, in economic, social, and political terms, of such countries as China, 

India and Japan. 

436 Geography of Africa (3) S 

Prerequisite: Geography 200 or equivalent. The physical and human geography 
of Africa as a continent, with discussions of selective Sub-Saharan regions. 

438 Geography of the Soviet Union (3) S 

Prerequisite: Geography 200 or consent of instructor. Character of and bases 
for the regional diversity of man and land in the Soviet Union. 

439 Geography of the Middle East (3) F 

Prerequisite: Geography 200 or consent of instructor. The physical foun- 
dations and cultural landscapes of civilization in the Middle East, with emphasis 
on contemporary political, socioeconomic, and cultural changes. 

445 Australia and the Pacific Islands (3) S 

Prerequisite: Geography 200 or consent of the instructor. The physical, cultural, 
and regional geography of Australia, New Zealand, Melanesia, Micronesia, and 
Polynesia. 

450 Conservation of Natural Resources (3) F, S (Formerly 383) 

Prerequisite: Geography 200 or consent of the instructor. The principles of con- 
servation and their application as they relate to soil, water, forests, minerals, and 
air, especially in the United States. The principles of conservation and their ap- 
plication as they relate to soil, water, forests, minerals, and air, especially in the 
United States. 

453 The Cultural Basis of Occupance Problems (3) F 

Prerequisite: Geography 310 or equivalent, or consent of the instructor. A prob- 
lem-oriented study of the interaction of institutions and occupance, emphasizing 
man’s societal relationships to the environment (e.g., religion, land tenure), his 
changing associations with natural resources (e.g., nutrition, health, and popula- 
tion). and his modifications of the habitat (e.g., plant domestication, technology). 

463 Problems of California Geography (3) S 

Prerequisite: Geography 363 or consent of instructor. Special studies of specific 
geographic problems in such areas as land use, water, urbanization, population, 
transportation and air pollution. Field observation of problems. 

464 Geography of Selected Regions of Latin America (3) S 

Prerequisite: Geography 434 or consent of instructor. An intensive study of the 
physical, cultural and social factors of Mexico, Venezuela, Argentina and Brazil. 

202 


Geology 


471 Urban Geography (3) F 

Prerequisite: Geography 200 or consent of instructor. The city as a geographic 
upit; urban settlements as regional centers; city-region relationships; the structure 
of villages, towns and cities, and their historical development; case studies. 

475 Land Use Analysis and Classification (3) S 

Prerequisite: senior or graduate standing and completion of the Geography 
core. Consent of the instructor is required. Analysis and interpretation of urban 
and rural land use and settlement with specific references to geographic field 
problems. The course involves application of geographic techniques and tools 
to local field studies. ( 1 hour lecture, 6 hours laboratory) 

478 Cartography (3) F, S (Formerly 353) 

Prerequisite: Geography 343 or consent of instructor. The compilation and con- 
struction of maps, charts, and graphs as geographic tools. (1 hour lecture, 6 hours 
laboratory) 

481 Political Geography (3) 5 

Prerequisite: Geography 200 or consent of the instructor. The political map of 
the world with special reference to the geopolitical structure of states, colonies, 
and other politically organized areas. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) F, S 

Open to advanced students. Student must have permission of instructor under 
whom study will be undertaken before enrolling. May be repeated once for credit. 

501 Seminar in Geographic Literature and Research (3) F (Formerly 490) 

Prerequisite: graduate standing and consent of the instructor. Discussion of 
major geographic research themes and methods, including an appraisal of perti- 
nent scholars and relevant literature. Students prepare several papers, one of which 
is a research design. Normally taken in the first year of graduate study. 

513 Seminar in Regional Geography (3) F 

Prerequisite: Graduate standing or consent of instructor. A seminar on selected 
regions of the world. May be repeated once for credit. 

523 Seminar in Cultural Geography (3) S 

Prerequisite: Graduate standing or consent of instructor. A seminar on selected 
topics pertaining to the political, economic and social relationships in the geog- 
raphy of man. May be repeated once for credit. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) F, 5 

Open to graduate students by permission of graduate adviser. May be repeated 
once for credit. 


GEOLOGY 


100A Physical Gealogy (4) F, S 

The origin, composition and distribution of earth materials will be studied. 
Special emphasis will be given to the modification of earth materials through 
mechanical and chemical processes. (3 hours lecture, 3 hours laboratory) 

10OB Historical Geology (4) S 

Prerequisite: Geology 100A. Studies of evolutionary history of the earth includ- 
ing the theories of the earth’s origin. Paleontological evidences for earth’s evolu- 
tion will be examined. (3 hours lecture, 3 hours laboratory) 


203 


German 


GERMAN 

(Offered by the Department of Foreign Languages and Literatures) 


101 Fundamental German (S) F, 5 

Intensive practice in listening comprehension, speaking, reading and writing to 
develop control of the sounds and the basic forms and structures of German. 
Audiolingual assignments are an integral part of the course and are to be prepared 
in the language laboratory. 

102 Fundamental German (5) F, S 

Prerequisite: German 101 or equivalent. Intensive practice in listening compre- 
hension, speaking, reading, and writing to develop control of the sounds and the 
basic forms and structure of German. Audiolingual assignments are an integral 
part of the course and are to be prepared in the language laboratory. 

203 Intermediate German (3) F, S 

Intensive practice in speaking, understanding, reading, and writing based on 
cultural and literary materials. Linguistic analysis from sound to sentence. 

204 Intermediate German (3) F, S 

Prerequisite: German 203 (or equivalent). Intensive practice in speaking, under- 
standing, reading and writing based on cultural and literary materials. Linguistic 
analysis from sound to sentence. 

213 Intermediate Composition (2) F, S 

Practice in written expression based on cultural and literary materials. May be 
taken concurrently with German 203. Required of all majors and minors at the 
intermediate level; optional to others. 

214 Intermediate Composition (2) F, S 

Practice in written expression based on cultural and literary materials. May be 
taken concurrently with German 204. Required of all majors and minors at the 
intermediate level; optional to others. 

315 Introduction to German Civilization (3) F 

Prerequisite: German 204 or equivalent. Readings and discussions in German 
literature, arts and institutions to develop insights into German culture, while 
strengthening facility with the language. Open to lower division students with 
the consent of the instructor. Conducted in German. 

317 Advanced Conversation and Composition (3) F 

Prerequisite: German 204 or equivalent. Open to lower division students with 
the consent of the instructor. Designed to give the student special competence in 
the control of German as an instrument of free oral and written expression. Con- 
ducted in German. 

325 Modern German Thought in Science and Culture (3) 5 

Prerequisite: German 204 or equivalent. Readings and discussion of modem 
German thought in science, literature, philosophy and art, designed to acquaint 
the student with a broad range of German contributions to present-day civilization 
while strengthening facility with German language. Open to lower division stu- 
dents with consent of instructor. Conducted in German. 

400 Gorman for Advanced Students and Teachers (3) S 

Prerequisite: German 317 or consent of instructor. Intensive review of spoken 
German, while developing the student’s powers of self-expression in the spoken and 
written language. Modem writings in various fields, as well as developments in 
methodology and texts, serve as the basis for intensive practice. Conducted in 
German. 


204 


German 


431 The Works of Lessing and Schiller (3) F 

The major works of Lessing and Schiller illustrating their thought and art. Con- 
ducted in German. 

441 The Works of Goethe (3) S 

Selected works of Goethe illustrating his thought and art. Conducted in German 

451 German Literature to the Baroque (3) F 

Important works from the Hildebrandslied to Snnplicissnmis in the setting of 
their intellectual and historical climate. Conducted in German. 

461 German Literature Since Goethe (3) S 

Important works illustrating the development from romanticism to expressionism 
in the setting of their intellectual and historical climate. Conducted in German. 

466 Introduction to German Linguistics (3) F 

The analytical procedures of general linguistics as applied to German, with 
special attention to structural contrasts between German and English. Emphasis 
on the application of linguistic analysis to the teaching of modem foreign lan- 
guages. 

48S Senior Seminar in German Literature (3) F, S 

Prerequisite: senior standing in German and consent of instructor. Research 
and discussion in depth of a literary movement, a genre or an author. Subject 
will vary and will be announced in the class schedule. May be repeated for 
credit. Conducted in German. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) F, S 

Supervised research projects in German language or literature to be taken with 
the consent of the instructor and the department chairman. May be repeated for 
credit. 

500 Graduate Seminar: Advanced Structure and Style (3) S 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Conducted in German. 

510 Graduate Seminar: Phonology (3) F 

Prerequisite: German 466 or consent of instructor. Conducted in German. 

530 Graduate Seminar: Historical Linguistics (3) 5 

Prerequisite: German 466 or consent of instructor. 

557 Graduate Seminar: German Poetry (3) S 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Conducted in German. 

571 Graduate Seminar: German Prose (3) S 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Conducted in German. 

575 Graduate Seminar: German Drama (3) F 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Conducted in German. 

576 Graduate Seminar: Major Writers (3) F 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. May be repeated for credit. Conducted in 
German. 

598 Thesis (3-6) F, 5 (Formerly 580) 

Prerequisite: recommendation of the student’s graduate committee. 


205 


History 


HISTORY 

110A World Civilizations to the 17th Century (3) F 

The story of man from the beginning of civilizations and historical records until 
the middle of the 17th century. 

1 10B World Civilizations from 1648 (3) S 

The story of man from the end of the religious wars to the present. Deals with 
the rise of science, the Enlightenment, the Industrial Revolution, and the rise of 
the ideologies of the 20th century. 

170A United States to 1877 (3) F 

A survey of the political, social, economic, and cultural development of the 
United States from the discovery to 1877. Attention is given to the Old World 
background, the rise of the new nation, sectional problems, and the Civil War 
and Reconstruction. 

1708 United States Since 1877 (3) S 

A survey of United States history from the late 19th century to the present. 
Attention is given to economic transformation, political reform movements, social, 
cultural, and intellectual changes, and the role of the United States in world 
wars and the Cold War. 

300 Africa and the Middle East Since 1945 (3) F 

A survey of the Middle East and Africa since 1945, concentrating on the de- 
velopment of their present civilizations, political and economic problems, and 
their place in world affairs. 

301 Far last and Latin America Since 1945 (3) S 

A survey of present governments and civilizations in the Far East and Latin 
America, summarizing the background of present developments and problems in 
these areas. 

340A History of England and Great Britain (3) F 

A study of the political, economic, and social history of England and her affiliated 
nations and territories from the earliest times to the later Stuarts. Particular stress 
is placed upon the grow'th of the parliamentary' sysem of government and upon 
English overseas activities. 

340B History of England and Great Britain (3) S 

A study of the political, economic, and social history of Great Britain from the 
later Stuarts to the present. Particular stress is placed upon the modification of the 
parliamentary system and the grow'th of economic and social democracy" within 
Britain and upon the development of responsible political systems in the dependent 
territories. 

350A Colonial Latin America (3) F 

A survey of the pre-Columbian cultures; the conquests by Spain and Portugal 
and the European background of these countries; the development of the socio- 
economic, cultural, and governmental institutions in colonial life; the background of 
revolutions and the wars for independence. 

\ 

350B Republican Latin America (3) S 

A survey of the Latin American republics from 1826 to 1945 emphasizing the 
struggle for responsible government, socioeconomic, and cultural changes, and the 
role of United States foreign policy. 


206 


History 


381 Westward Movement in the United States (3) S 

Prerequisite: History 170A-B or equivalent. A survey of the expansion of the 
United States population and sovereignty from the eastern seaboard to the Pacific, 
colonial times to 1900, and a history of regional development during the frontier 
period. 

383 History of California (3) F 

A survey of the political, economic, and social history of California from the 
aboriginal inhabitants to the present, tracing the development of contemporary 
institutions and the historical background of current issues. 

399 Historiography (3) F, S 

Introduction to nature and discipline of history. A study of methods of historical 
research and writing, of bibliography, and of major problems of historical in- 
terpretation. Required of history majors. 

401 European Intellectual History from 1648 to the Present (3) F 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. The history of the competing ideas in 
European history from 1648 to the present which have entered into the formation 
of modem European institutions. 

41 2A Ancient Near East— Mesopotamia (3) F 

Prerequisite: History 110A. A study of the political, socioeconomic, religious, 
and literary history of Mespotamian culture from the rise of the Sumerian city- 
states to Alexander the Great, a period of over three millenia. This will include 
discussion of the Sumerians, Assyrians, Babylonians, Hurrians, and Persians. 

412B Ancient Near East— East Mediterranean (3) $ 

Prerequisite: History 110A. A study of ancient Egypt from early dynastic times 
in the third millennium B.C. to the conquest of Alexander the Great. The history 
of the Syro-Palestinian region will be studied in light of its migrations and inter- 
national culture. A careful study of the Hebrews and their contributions to modem 
civilization will be included. 

415A Classical Greece (3) F 

Prerequisite: History 110A or consent of instructor. A study of the civilization 
of ancient Greece. This course traces the rise and flourishing of the classical city- 
states; considerable attention is devoted to the literary and philosophic contribu- 
tions to our modem civilization. 

415B Hellenistic Civilization (3) S 

Prerequisite: History 110A or consent of instructor. A study of the Hellenistic 
synthesis and the new patterns in government, the arts and sciences, philosophy 
and literature that appeared between the Macedonian conquest and the interven- 
tion of Rome. 

417A Roman Republic (3) F (Planned for 1968-69) 

Prerequisite: History 110A or consent of instructor. A study of the development 
of Roman social and political institutions under the republic. 

417B Roman Empire (3) S (Planned for 1968—69) 

Prerequisite: History 110A or consent of instructor. A study of Roman imperial 
institutions and culture. Attention is also given to the rise of Christianity. 

423A Medieval Europe, 300-1050 (3) F 

Prerequisite: History 110A. The genesis of European society and culture from 
the decline of Rome to the mid- 11th century: the medieval church, the Barbarian 

207 


History 


migrations, the Byzantine and Islamic cultures and the establishment of feudalism 
in western Europe. 

423B Medieval Europe, 1050-1400 (3) S 

Prerequisite: History 110A. A continuation of History 423 A. The struggle be- 
tween church and state, the rise of feudal monarchies and the intellectual, scientific 
and artistic expressions of European civilization in the later Middle Ages. 

425A The Renaissance (3) F 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. The history of Europe from 1400 to 1525 
with emphasis upoh the beginnings of capitalism, the beginnings of the modem 
state, humanism, the pre-Reformation and the church on the eve of the Reforma- 
tion. 

425B The Reformation (3) S 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. The history of Europe from 1525 to 1648; 
deals with the Protestant and Catholic Reformations; the religious wars; the price 
rise; royal absolutism; the rise of science. 

426 Rise of Modern Europe, 1648-1763 (3) F 

Prerequisite: History 110B. European diplomatic history and the balance of 
power from 1648 to 1763. Attention is given to the social and philosophical devel- 
opments of the period. 

427 Europe in the Era of the French Revolution and Napoleon (3) S 

A survey of European history from 1763 to 1815. Emphasis is placed on the 
politics, society, and culture of the Old Regime, the influence of the Enlighten- 
ment, the impact of the French Revolution on Europe, and the establishment of 
French hegemony by Napoleon. 

428 19th Century Europe (3) F 

Europe from 1815 to 1914. An examination of the political, economic, social, and 
cultural trends in European history from the Congress of Vienna to the outbreak 
of World War I. Special attention is given to the emerging forces of nationalism, 
liberalism, socialism, and secularism. 

429 Europe Since 1914 (3) F 

Prerequisite: History 110B. Survey of events from the beginning of World War 
I to the present. Special emphasis given to the economic, political, social, diplo- 
matic, and intellectual trends of 20th Century Europe. 

432 Germany Since 1648 (3) S 

Prerequisite: History 110A-B. The evolution of Germany from the Peace of 
Westphalia to the present. Emphasis is placed on political, social, economic, diplo- 
matic and cultural trends in the 19th and 20th centuries. 

434A Russia to 1890 (3) F 

Prerequisite: History HOB. An analysis of the historical developments from the 
establishment of the Russian state at Kiev through the great reforms and reaction 
of the 19th century. Emphasis is placed upon the shaping of contemporary Russia. 

434B The Russian Revolutions and the Soviet Regime (3) S 

An evaluation of the 1905 and 1917 revolutions and the subsequent consolidation 
of power under the Communist regime. Chief emphasis is placed upon the con- 
tinuity and change in Russian social, political, cultural institutions and foreign 
policy effected by the impact of Marxist-Leninist-Stalinist ideology. 


208 


History 


439 History of Spain (3) F 

Development of Hispanic civilization from the earliest times to the present. 

453 History of Mexico (3) S (Planned for 1968-69) 

Mexico’s political, social, economic, and intellectual development with emphasis 
upon the changes in the 20th century. 

454 Argentina, Brazil, Chile (3) S 

A history of Argentina, Brazil, and Chile; special attention to their role in 
western hemispheric and international affairs. 

456A Sub-Saharan Africa to 1900 (3) F 

The history of Africa from earliest times to partition by the European colonial 
powers. 

456B Sub-Saharan Africa Since 1900 (3) S 

A comparative analysis of colonial policy and the problems of political, economic 
and social change. 

461 A The Far East (3) F 

A study of the western impact upon China, Japan, India, and Southeast Asia 
prior to World War I. 

461B The Far last (3) S 

A study of the developments in China and Japan that led to the Sino-Japancsc 
conflict, Japan’s decision to fight the United States, and the establishment of the 
independent states of South and Southeast Asia. 

464 Southeast Asia in the Modern World (3) S 

A study of the social, political and economic developments in Southeast Asia 
since 1800. 

466A Middle East to the Crusades (3) F 

Prerequisite: History 110A. The study of the events transpiring in the Middle 
East from the Roman world to the period of the Crusades. This will include the 
impact of the Islamic civilization upon the Middle East society. 

466B Middle East Since the Crusades (3) S 

Prerequisite: History 110B. The development of the countries of the Middle East 
following the Crusades to the present. This will include the Ottoman Empire, Eu- 
ropean colonialism in the Middle East, and the modern Middle East. 

471 American Colonial Civilization (3) F 

Prerequisite: History 170A or consent of instructor. This course studies the 
settlement of North America and the growth of Anglo-American civilization to 
the mid-eighteenth century stressing the creation of political, economic, and 
social institutions and a distinctive American culture. 

472 United States from Colony to Nation (3) S 

Prerequisite: History 170A or consent of instructor. This course studies the 
political, economic, and intellectual developments of eighteenth-century America 
with special emphasis upon Anglo-American imperial problems leading to the 
Revolution, the origins of American nationalism, the creation of a constitutional 
republic, and the rise of a party system. 

473 Sectionalism and Civil War (3) F 

Slavery, sectionalism, and Civil War, and the impact of these forces upon na- 
tional life and thought from 1815 to 1865. 


209 


History 


474 The Growth of Modern United States (3) S 

Prerequisite: History 170B or consent of instructor. A study of the “great 
transformation” in the United States with particular focus upon the problems of 
an emerging modern urban society and reactions to the process. Special attention 
is given to the origins of progressivism. 

475 United States from 1900 to 1932 (3) F 

Prerequisite: History 170B or equivalent. A study of the political, economic, 
social, diplomatic, and intellectual trends and problems from 1900 to the election 
of 1932. Course will stress the reconsideration of traditional national policies toward 
the government, economy, and role of the United States in world affairs. 

476 United States Since 1933 (3) S 

A study of select aspects of United States history from 1930’s to the present. 
Offered in two sections, one emphasizing political, economic, and diplomatic 
developments, the other stressing cultural, constitutional, and educational trends. 

482A Socioeconomic History of the United States (3) F 

Prerequisite: History 170A or consent of the instructor. The course explores the 
interaction of social and economic factors upon each other in the development of 
American society. Special attention is given to the role of business and labor in 
economic change. The first semester covers the development of a colonial economy 
and the early national economy. 

482B Socioeconomic History of the United States (3) S 

Prerequisite: History 170B or consent of the instructor. The course continues to 
explore the interaction of social and economic factors upon each other in the devel- 
opment of American society. Special attention is given to the role of business and 
labor in economic change. The second semester begins with the “takeoff stage of 
economic development” and ends with contemporary America. 

484A American Constitutional History to 1865 (3) F 

Prerequisite: History 170A. English and colonial origins, the growth of democ- 
racy, the slavery controversy, and the sectional war as they reflect constitutional 
development. 

4848 American Constitutional History from 1865 (3) S 

Prerequisite: History 170B. Constitutional problems involved in the post-Civil 
War era, the expansion of business. World War I, the New Deal, World War II, 
and civil rights in the postwar era. 

485A United States Foreign Relations to 1900 (3) F 

A comprehensive survey of the foreign relations of the United States from the 
beginning of the nation until 1900. Particular attention is given to bases of policy, 
critical evaluation of major policies and relationships between domestic affairs and 
foreign policy. 

4858 United States Foreign Relations from 1900 (3) S 

Relations from 1900 to the present. An analysis of the rise of the United States 
as a world power in the 20th century with special emphasis on the search for world 
order and the diplomacy of the atomic age. 

486A Social and Intellectual History of the United States (3) F 

A study of the social and intellectual development of the United States from the 
Puritans to the Civil War. 


210 


Journalism Education 


486B Social and Intellectual History of the United States (3) S 

A study of the social and intellectual development of the United States from the 
Civil War to the present. 

487A History of Politics in American Society (3) F 

Prerequisite: History 170A-B or consent of instructor. The first semester of 
this course traces political developments from the Colonial Period to the end of 
the Civil War. Its primary focus is upon political patterns of behavior, institutional 
development and the response of the American political system to changing societal 
demands and needs. 

487B History of Politics in American Society (3) S 

Prerequisite: History 170A-B or consent of instructor. The second semester of 
the course traces political developments from Reconstruction to Lyndon Baines 
Johnson. Its primary focus is upon political patterns of behavior, institutional 
development and the response of the political system to changing societal demands 
and needs. 

491 Proseminar in Special Historical Topics (3) (offered in alternate years) 

Intensive study of phases or periods of history involving occasional lecture, 
discussions, directed reading, and written reports. 

499 Independent Study (3) F, S 

Open to advanced students in history with the consent of the department chair- 
man. May be repeated for credit. 

501 Seminar in the Content and Method of History (3) F 

Prerequisite: consent of the instructor. 

505 Seminar in Analysis of Recent Interpretations in History (3) S 

Prerequisite: consent of the instructor. 

520 Seminar in European History (3) S 

Prerequisite: consent of the instructor. 

570 Seminar in American History (3) F 

Prerequisite: consent of the instructor. 

585 Seminar in the History of United States Foreign Relations (3) F 

Prerequisite: consent of the instructor. 

590 History and Historians (3) F 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. A study of the writings, personalities, and 
philosophies of representative historians from Herodotus to the present. 

598 Thesis (3) F, 5 (formerly 591) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. May be repeated for credit. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (3) F, S 

Open to graduate students in history with the consent of the department chair- 
man. May be repeated for credit. 

JOURNALISM EDUCATION 

(Offered by the Department of Communications) 

442 Teaching Journalism in the Secondary School (2) S 

Prerequisite: Education 311, Education 340, admission to teacher education, or 
consent of the instructor. The student who has not had teaching experience must 

211 


Latin 


register concurrently in Education 449. See page 144 under Secondary Education 
for description of Standard Teaching Credential program. Theory and technique 
of advising school newspaper and yearbook staffs and teaching journalism. Relation 
of classroom instruction to staff assignments. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) F, S 

Prerequisite: consent of department chairman. Individually supervised projects 
relating to journalism education. 

749 Student Teaching in Journalism in the Secondary School and Seminar 
(6) F, 5 

Sec page 144 under Secondary Education for description and prerequisites. 

LATIN 

(Offered by the Department of Foreign Languages and Literatures) 

101 Fundamental Latin (3) F 

Intensive practice to develop a comprehensive reading knowledge and a funda- 
mental writing ability in Latin. Modern techniques of language instruction will be 
applied. 

102 Fundamental Latin (3) S 

Prerequisite: Latin 101 or equivalent. Intensive practice to develop a compre- 
hensive reading knowledge and a fundamental writing ability’ in Latin. Modem 
techniques of language instruction will be applied. 

203 Intermediate Latin (3) F 

Prerequisite: Latin 102 or equivalent (2 years of high school Latin). Intensive 
reading and writing. Selected prose and poetry from the Golden Age. Audio- 
lingual techniques of language learning arc used when applicable. 

204 Intermediate Latin (3) S 

Prerequisite: Latin 203 or equivalent (3 years of high school Latin). Intensive 
reading and writing. Selected prose from the Silver and Middle Ages. Audio- 
lingual techniques of language learning are used when applicable. 

LINGUISTICS 


341 Phonetics (3) F 

(Same as Speech 34L Drama 341.) 

375 Philosophy of Language (3) F 

(Same as Philosophy 375.) 

402 Phonetic Analysis of Speech (3) S 

(Same as Speech 402.) 

404 General Semantics (3) S 

(Same as Speech 404.) 

406 Descriptive Linguistics (3) F 

Introduction to the nature of human linguistic behavior. Phonological, morpho- 
logical, and syntactic structures of languages are examined through the use of 
techniques developed for the description of such structures. 

410 Language and Culture (3) S 

(Same as Anthropology 410.) 


212 


Mathematics 


490 Linguistics in Relation to Other Disciplines (1-4) F, S 

The mutually contributing relationships between linguistics and the social and 
natural sciences, literature, music, psychology, philosophy, mathematics, and lan- 
guage pedagogy. To be taken for one unit of credit for four semesters by majors 
in linguistics. Open to all upper division students. 

505 Seminar: Phonetics and Phonemics (3) F 

Prerequisites: Anthropology' or linguistics 406 or consent of instructor. Study 
of various kinds of phonological systems that occur in languages. Emphasis on 
practical problems in the phonetic and phonemic analysis of selected language 
data. 

507 Seminar: Morpho-syntax (3) 5 

Prerequisites: Anthropology' or linguistics 406 or consent of instructor. The 
study of word formation and sentence construction in a variety of languages. 
Application of immediate constituent, tagmemic, and tranformational analysis to 
selected linguistic data. 

530 Historical Linguistics (3) S 

(Same as French, German, Spanish 530.) 

MATHEMATICS * 

110 Methods and Concepts of Mathematics (3) F, S 

Prerequisites: 2 X A years of high school mathematics, including one year of algebra 
and one year of geometry’. Selected topics in algebra, number theory’, geometry’, 
set theory, probability and analysis with special emphasis on the ideas and methods 
involved. Not open for credit to mathematics majors. 

120 Finite Mathematics (3) F, S 

Prerequisites: three years of high school mathematics or its equivalent. T his is a 
course comprising introductions to the following topics: logic, set theory, matrices, 
and probability. It is particularly suited to students of economics, the biological and 
social sciences. 

150A,B Analytic Geometry and Calculus (4,4) F, 5 

Prerequisites: four years of high school mathematics inclusive of trigonometry 
and a passing score in the placement test. An introduction to analysis including 
analytic geometry, functions, continuity', differentiation, the definite integral, in- 
tegration, applications. 

250A,B Intermediate Calculus (3,3) F, S 

Prerequisites: .Math 150A-B or equivalent. A continuation of Math 150. Topics 
include Taylor’s theorem, infinite scries, functions of several variables, partial dif- 
ferentiation, multiple integrals, linear differential equations. 

291 Linear Algebra (3) F, S 

Prerequisite: Math HOB. The study of matrices, determinants, vector spaces, 
linear transformations. 

302 Modern Algebra (3) 5 

Prerequisite: Math 291. The integers, rational numbers, real and complex num- 
bers, polynomial domains, introduction to groups, rings, integral domains and 
fields. 

* Prerequisites may be waived in any mathematics course by the consent of the instructor. 


213 


Mathematics 


304 Mathematical Logic (3) F, S 

Prerequisite: Math 150B. An introductory course in the elements of mathematical 
logic. 

305 Elements of Set Theory (3) F 

Prerequisite: Math 250B or Math 291. Operations on sets; functions; cardinals 
and ordinals; ordering, well ordering; axiom of choice; transfinite numbers. 

310 Ordinary Differential Equations (3) F, S 

Prerequisite: Math 250B and Math 291. An introduction to existence theorems 
and the theory of ordinary differential equations. 

314 Elementary Topology (3) S 

Prerequisite: Math 250B. An introductory course in point set and algebraic topol- 
ogy. 

315 Euclidean Geometry (3) F 

Prerequisite: Math 250B. Selected topics in advanced Euclidean geometry such as 
convexity, transformation theory and w-dimensional Euclidean space. 

320 Projective Geometry (3) F, S 

Prerequisite: Math 291. Homogeneous coordinates, projective group, cross-ratio, 
duality, point and line conics. 

330 Number Theory (3) S 

Prerequisite: Math 250B or Math 291. Divisibility, congruences, prime number 
theory, Diophantinc problems. 

335A,B Probability and Mathematical Statistics (3,3) F, S 

Prerequisite: Math 250B. An introductory course in probability theory in and its 
applications, based on use of the calculus. 

340 Numerical Analysis (3) T, S 

Prerequisites: Math 250B and 291. Interpolation and approximation. Numerical 
differential and integration. Solution of linear and nonlinear equations. Numerical 
solutions of ordinary and differential equations. 

350A,B Advanced Calculus (3,3) F, S 

Prerequisite: Math 250B, Math 291. Designed to introduce the student to rigorous 
proofs in analysis. Topics include the real number system, continuity, differentia- 
tion and integration of functions of several variables, infinite integrals and series. 

407 A,B Abstract Algebra (3,3) F, S 

Prerequisite: Math 302. Sets, mappi/igs, groups, rings, modules, fields, homo- 
morphisms, advanced topics in vector spaces and theory of linear transformations, 
matrices, algebras, ideals, field theory, Galois theory. 

412A,B Complex Analysis (3,3) F, S 

Prerequisite: Math 350A. Complex differentiation and integration, Cauchy’s 
theorem and integral formulas, maximum modulus theorem, harmonic functions, 
Laurent series, analytic continuation, entire and meromorphic functions, conformal 
transformations and special functions. 

425A,B Differential Geometry (3,3) F, S 

Prerequisite: Math 350A. Manifolds, curves and surfaces in Euclidean three-space, 
hypersurfaces of R n , tensors and forms, Riemannian manifolds and submanifolds, 
topics in Riemannian geometry. 


214 


Mathematics Education 


430 Partial Differential Equations (3) F, S 

Prerequisite: Math 350B. Cauchy-Kowalcwsky and other existence theorems, 
theory of first order equations, classification of equations of higher order, detailed 
study of elliptic, hyperbolic and parabolic equations, applications of functional 
analysis to partial differential equations. 

450A,B Real Analysis (3,3) F, S 

Prerequisite: Math 350A. An introductory 7 course in modern functional analysis. 
Measure theory, differentiations and theories of integration. Hilbert and Banach 
spaces, linear transformations and spectral theories. 

499 Independent Study (1—3) F, S 

Prerequisite: consent of the instructor. Study of some special topic in mathe- 
matics, selected in consultation with the instructor and carried out under his super- 
visions. 


MATHEMATICS EDUCATION 

(Offered by the Department of Science and Mathematics Education) 

100A,B Fundamental Concepts of Mathematics— Arithmetic (3,3) F, S 

Prerequisites: one year of algebra and one year of geometry. The structure of 
the real number system and its subsystems. Numeration systems. Elementary num- 
ber theory. Equations and inequalities. Elementary set theory and logic. 

300 Fundamental Concepts of Mathematics-Algebra (3) F 

Prerequisite: Math 150B. Selected topics in modem algebra. Axiomatic construc- 
tion of algebraic structure. Linear systems of equalities and inequalities. Combina- 
torial analysis. Truth-functional logic. 

301 Fundamental Concepts of Mathematics-Geometry (3) F 

Prerequisite: Math 150B. Selected topics in elementary geometry 7 . The study of 
various axiom systems for Euclidean geometry 7 ; non-Euclidean geometry; pro- 
jective, metric, and affine geometry 7 . 

432 Teaching Mathematics in the Elementary School (2) F, S 

Prerequisite: Math Educ 100B. Objectives, content, materials, pupil experiences, 
methods of instruction, and evaluation in arithmetic. The nature and scope of 
arithmetic in the elementary school. 

442 Teaching Mathematics in the Secondary School (2) S 

Prerequisites: Education 311, Education 340, Admission to Teacher Education, 
senior standing, or consent of the instructor. Objectives, methods, and materials 
for teaching mathematics in secondary schools. Required, before student teaching, 
of students presenting majors in mathematics for the general secondary credential. 
The student who has not had teaching experience must register concurrently in 
Educ 449. The requirements for the major must include Math Educ 100B, 300, 
and 301. (1 hour lecture, 2 hours activity) 

749 Student Teaching in Mathematics in the Secondary School and Seminar 
(6) F, S 

See page 144 under Secondary 7 Education for description and prerequisites. 

750 Seminar in Mathematics Education (2) F, S 

Prerequisites: Graduate standing and consent of the instructor. Study of selected 
problems in elementary 7 or secondary education. May be repeated for credit. 


215 


Music 


MUSIC 


100 Introducfion to Music (3) F, S 

A basic approach to listening to music with understanding and pleasure through 
a general survey of musical literature representative of various styles and perform- 
ance media. Music will be related to other arts through lectures, recordings, and 
concerts. Closed to music majors. 

101 Music Theory for Nonmusic Majors (3) F, S 

Basic theory and practical applications to further understanding of basic music 
principles and to improve music performance and listening skills. Includes sight- 
singing and relationship to keyboard and simple melodic instruments. Closed to 
music majors. 

1 1 1 A,B Music Theory (3,3) F, S 

A year course covering diatonic harmony and musicianship. Includes scales and 
intervals, triads and their inversions, harmonizations, nonharmonic tones, modula- 
tion and dominant seventh chords. Practical applications, to include sight singing, 
dictation and keyboard harmonizations. (2 hours lecture, 2 hours activity) 

151 A,B Survey of Musical Literafure (2,2) F, S 

Open to music majors and minors and qualified students by consent of instruc- 
tor. Two hours lecture, one hour listening. An introductory course for majors in 
the study of the history and literature of music in Western civilization. Students 
must be able to read music as a part of the analysis of form, design and style. 

161o,361o Symphony Orchestra (1) F, S (1,1, 1,1) (1,1, 1,1) 

Open by audition to college students and qualified adults in the community. Per- 
formance of standard representative symphonic works. (More than 3 hours major 
production) 

161b, 361b College Choir (1) F, S (1,1, 1,1) (1,1,1, 1) 

Open to all college students. Study and performance of standard representative 
choral literature works. (More than 3 hours major production) 

161c, 361c Symphonic Band (1) F, S (1,1, 1,1) (1,1, 1,1) 

Open by audition to college students and qualified adults in the community. 
Performance of standard representative symphonic band literature. (More than 
3 hours major production) 

161d, 361d Opera Theatre (1) F, S (1, 1,1,1) (1,1, 1,1) 

Study of roles and representative excerpts from standard and contemporary' 
operas and the basic musical, dramatic and language techniques of the musical 
theatre. Performance of operatic excerpts and complete operas. (More than 3 
hours major production) 

161e, 361e College Singers (1) F, S (1,1, 1,1) (1,1, 1,1) 

Membership restricted to advanced voice students or those passing voice test. 
Performs finest representative choral literature. (More than 3 hours major produc- 
tion) 

162b, 362b Wind Ensemble (1) F, S (1,1, 1,1) (1,1,1, 1) 

Open to qualified wind students by audition or consent of the instructor. Per- 
forms representative wind ensemble literature. (2 hours activity) 


216 


Music 


162c, 362c Vocal Ensemble (1) F, 5 (1,1, 1,1) (1,1, 1,1) 

Study and performance of choral literature of the Renaissance and Baroque 
periods. Open only to students by audition. Public performance required. (2 hrs. 
activity) 

163, 363 Chamber Music Ensembles (1) F, S (1,1, 1,1) (1,1, 1,1) 

Open to all qualified wind, string, or keyboard students. Various ensembles will 
be formed to study, read, and to perform representative chamber literature of all 
periods. (2 hrs. activity) 

170, 370 Individual Instruction, Principal Instrument or Voice (1) F, S (1,1, 1,1) 

( 1 , 1 , 1 , 1 ) 

Prerequisite: 2 semesters MU 171-177 or MU 371-378 or recommendation of 
the faculty jury in performance. Individual instruction in the principal per- 
formance field for intermediate and advanced students. 

171-178, 371-378, 571-577 Studio (Private Instruction) Principal Instrument 
or Voice (1) F, 5 (1,1,1,1) (1,1,1,1) (1,1) 

Individual on-campus lessons with approved instructors. One unit per semester 
required of all music majors in the principal performing field. 500-lcvel courses 
provide advanced training in the technique and repertoire at the graduate level in 
the student’s principal performance medium. Required of graduate students whose 
terminal project is the graduate recital. Special fee. 

171, 371, 571 Voice, Intermediate and Advanced 

172a, 372a, 572a Violin, Intermediate and Advanced 

172b, 372b, 572b Viola, Intermediate and Advanced 

172c, 372c, 572c Cello, Intermediate and Advanced 

172d, 372d, 572d String Bass, Intermediate and Advanced 

172e, 372e, 572e Harp, Intermediate and Advanced 

172f, 372f, 572f Guitar and/or Lute, Intermediate and Advanced 

173a, 373a, 573a Oboe, Intermediate and Advanced 

173b, 373b, 573b Flute, Intermediate and Advanced 

173c, 373c, 573c Clarinet, Intermediate and Advanced 

173d, 373d, 573d Bassoon, Intermediate and Advanced 

174a, 374a, 574a Trumpet, Intermediate and Advanced 

174b, 374b, 574b Trombone and Baritone, Intermediate and Advanced 

174c, 374c, 574c French Horn, Intermediate and Advanced 

174d, 374d, 574d Tuba, Intermediate and Advanced 

175, 375, 575 Percussion, Intermediate oik Advanced 

176a, 376a, 576 a Piano, Intermediate and Advanced 

176b, 376b, 576b Organ, Intermediate and Advanced 

377, 577 Composition, Advanced 

378 Conducting, Advanced 

184A,B Piano Class for Teachers (1,1) F, 5 

Prerequisite: MU 101. Elementary and intermediate instruction in basic piano 
techniques, with special emphasis on application to appropriate song materials 
and simple accompaniments used in the elementary school. Required of candi- 
dates for general elementary credential who specialize in music and those preparing 
to teach in kindergarten and first grades. (2 hours activity) 


217 


Music 


211A,B Music Theory (3/3) F, S 

Prerequisite: Mu 111B, or equivalent. A year course covering secondary domi- 
nants, diminished 7th, 9th, 11th, and 13th chords, sequence and chromatic chords. 
Practical applications to include sight singing, melodic and harmonic dictation, and 
keyboard harmonizations. (2 hours lecture, 2 hours activity) 

281 Orchestral Instruments (2) 

Required of all music degree candidates and for music teaching credentials. May 
be repeated for a maximum of 8 units. (4 hours activity) 

281a String Instruments (2) F 

Specialization on violin, with related work on standard instruments of the string 
family. (4 hours activity) 

281b Woodwind Instruments (2) F 

Specialization on clarinet, with related work on standard instruments of the 
woodwind family. (4 hours activity) 

281c Brass Instruments (2) S 

Specialization on trumpet, with related work on standard instruments of the 
brass family. (4 hours activity) 

281 d Percussion Instruments (2) S 

Specialization on snare drum, with related work on standard instruments of the 
percussion family. (4 hours activity) 

281 e Survey of Orchestral Instruments (2) F, S 

A general survey of orchestral instrument practices for elementary credential 
candidates. (4 hours activity) 

282A/B Piano Class for Music Majors (1/1) F, S 

Prerequisite: declaration of the music major and consent of instructor. Designed 
to meet music major piano requirements for degree and teaching credentials. Funda- 
mentals of keyboard technique for students whose major performance field is not 
piano. Not required for piano majors. (2 hours activity) 

283A/B Voice Class for Music Majors (1/1) F, S 

Prerequisite: declaration of the music major and consent of instructor. Designed 
to meet voice requirement for instrumental and piano majors and to prepare candi- 
dates for proficiency requirement for teaching credential. Not required for voice 
majors. (2 hours activity) 

312A/B Counterpoint (2/2) F, S 

Prerequisites: Music 111A,B and 211A,B. Basic 18th century counterpoint in 
two, three and four parts, double counterpoint, canon, and fugue forms. 

321A,B Form and Analysis (2,2) F, S 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Analysis of structural elements of music such 
as motive, phrase, and period; binary, ternary, rondo, sonato-allegro and larger mu- 
sical forms in representative musical works. 

322A,B Composition (2/2) F, S 

A — Prerequisite: elementary counterpoint. Mu 21 IB or consent of instructor. 
Ear training, analysis of smaller forms, simple composition of two three-part song 
form styles. B — Analysis and writing of more complex musical forms. 


218 


Music 


323A,B Orchestration (2) S 

Prerequisite: Mu 21 IB and consent of instructor. Writing and analysis of orches- 
tral music. 

333 Music and Child Development (3) F, S 

Prerequisite: Mu 101 or equivalent or successful completion of proficiency test. 
Study of the relationship of music to child growth and development, with em- 
phasis on the child from 5 to 12. 

350 Music in Our Society (3) F, S 

Prerequisite: Mu 100 or consent of instructor. Designed to increase interest and 
an understanding of music in its relation to our general culture. Emphasis on struc- 
ture, analysis and aesthetic principles through the study of masterpieces of musical 
literature of various historical periods. 

351A/B History and Literature of Music (3,3) f, S 

Prerequisites: Mu 351 A, History and Literature of Music. A — A study of the 
history and literature of music from early Greek beginnings through the Renais- 
sance. B — A study of the history and literature of music covering the Baroque, 
Classic, Romantic period and the 20th century. (Required of all music majors.) 

382A/B Piano Class for Music Majors (1/1) F, S 

Prerequisite: Mu 282B. Continuation of piano requirement for qualified upper 
division students. Specific preparation for piano functional examination. (2 hours 
activity) 

385A,B Voice Class for Elementary Teachers (1/1) F, S 

Basic techniques of singing, adaptation of the adult voice for singing with chil- 
dren. Emphasis on singing materials from children’s music books used in the ele- 
mentary school. Primarily intended for candidates for elementary credential. (2 
hours activity) 

386 Piano Accompanying (1) F, 5 

The study and application of playing accompaniments for instrumentalists, vocal- 
ists, and ensembles. Participation in rehearsals, recitals, and concerts required. (2 
hours activity) 

390 Diction for Singers (1) F, S 

This course is designed to teach proper singing diction in English, Italian, French 
and German, but may not be considered a substitute for formal language study. 
Examples from standard vocal literature explained through use of International 
Phonetic Alphabet. 

391A/B Choral Conducting (2/2) F, S 

Principles, techniques, and methods of conducting choral groups. Laboratory 
work with class and vocal ensembles, using standard choral repertoire. Required 
of all music education majors. (4 hours activity) 

392A,B Instrumental Conducting (2,2) F, S 

Prerequisite: MU 391 A. Principles, techniques, and methods of conducting or- 
chestral and band groups. Laboratory experience in conducting instrumental groups, 
using standard instrumental literature. (4 hours activity; 

♦36 Survey of Song Literature and Repertoire (2) S 

Study and performance of representative styles and schools of vocal music litera- 
ture. Emphasis on performing and listening. Building concert repertoire. Materials 
include 18th-, 19th-, 20th-century music. 


219 


Music 


451 Music of fhe Baroque Period (2) F 

Prerequisite: Mu 351A,B or consent of instructor. Musical forms, styles, and 
performance practices of the Baroque period. Detailed analysis of significant repre- 
sentative works. (2 hours lecture and discussion, 1 hour weekly listening) 

452 Music of the Classic and Romantic Period (2) S 

Prerequisite: Mu 351 A3 or consent of instructor. A study of the history and 
literature of music from approximately 1750 to 1900. Detailed analysis of important 
representative works. (2 hours weekly lecture and discussions, 1 hour per week) 
listening. 

453 20th Century Music (2) S 

Prerequisite: Mu 351 A3 or consent of instructor. Developments in the music of 
western Europe and the western hemisphere since 1890. Intensive study of con- 
temporary music and its structure. 

456 Opera History and Literature (2) (Planned for 1966-69) 

The course will cover opera history, including its predecessors to the present 
day, with representative examples of literature from all periods. 

457 Song Literature (2) (Planned for 1968—69) 

Course will provide a basic knowledge of art song literature in terms of period 
style and nationality. 

458 Collegium Musicum Practicum (2) S 

The study and performance of rare and old music, both instrumental and vocal. 
Techniques of musical research will be applied. Students should be competent 
performers. 

498 Senior Recital (1) F, S 

Advanced individual instruction in the principal performance field leading to 
the successful presentation of a public senior recital. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) F, S (Formerly Mus Ed 430) 

Study of a special topic in Music selected in consultation with the instructor and 
carried out under his supervision. May be repeated for credit. 

500 Introduction to Graduate Study in Music (2) F, S 

Required of all graduate music majors. Study of basic bibliography, literature, 
and research techniques and materials useful in graduate music study. 

522 Contemporary Techniques of Composition (2) S 

Advanced techniques of composition, as applied to the student’s area of graduate 
specialization. 

523 Advanced Orchestration (2) S 

Prerequisite: Mu 323B. Analysis and practice of traditional and contemporary 
orchestration techniques. Scoring of music for large ensembles such as orchestra, 
band, chorus and orchestra, or band and orchestra. 

550 Seminar in Music History (2) F 

Prerequisites: At least two from the following: Mu 451, 452, and/or 453, and con- 
sent of instructor. Detailed investigation and analysis of specific developments in 
musicology including exercises in transcriptions from old notations and historical 
investigations prepared by members of the seminar. 


220 


Music Education 


358 Collegium Musicum (2) S 

Prerequisite: Permission of instructor. Advanced studies in the performance of 
rare and old music, (see MU 458 for general description). May be repeated for 
credit. 

591 Advanced Choral Conducting and Interpretation (2) F 

Prerequisite: Mu 391B, conducting experience, or consent of instructor. Advanced 
problems in choral conducting techniques, with emphasis on laboratory work with 
student groups and in concert conducting. (4 hours activity) 

592 Advanced Instrumental Conducting and Interpretation (2) S 

Prerequisite: Mu 392B, conducting experience, or consent of instructor. Ad- 
vanced study of baton technique with emphasis on interpretive and stylistic prob- 
lems in the conducting of major works. (4 hours activity) 

597 Project (3-6) F, S (formerly 598) 

Systematic study and report of a significant undertaking in the area of musical 
composition, musical performance, or other related creative activity. A written 
critical evaluation of the work or activity will be required. 

598 Thesis (3-6) F, S 

Individual investigations of specific problems in the area of concentration by 
candidates for the M.A. degree. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1—3) F, S 

Prerequisite: graduate standing in music and permission of instructor. Research 
and study projects in areas of specialization beyond regularly offered course work. 
Oral and written reports required. 

MUSIC EDUCATION 

435 Children's Literature in Music (2) F, S 

Prerequisite: Mu 333 or consent of instructor. A survey of books and listening 
materials for preschool and elementary age children, with techniques of presenta- 
tion. Designed for the classroom teacher or general student. 

Mvsic Education Techniques Block: * 

* 441 Teaching Music Theory and Appreciation in the Public Schools (2) F 

Prerequisite: 20 units in music, Educ Found 311, or consent of instructor. 
Required of all music majors working for the standard teaching credential, sec- 
ondary specialization. The history and organization of the teaching of music theory 
and appreciation in the public schools. Interrelation of general and specialized 
classes and their place in the total school program. Music literature, materials, and 
techniques for producing effective musical growth. (2 hours lecture) 

* 442 Teaching Vocal Music in the Public Schools (2) S 

Prerequisites: 20 units in music to include Mu 391 A (for those doing student 
aide), Educ Sec 340, Educ Found 311, Admission to Teacher Education, senior 
standing or consent of the instructor. See page 144 under Secondary Education 
for description of standard teaching credential program. Objectives, methods, and 

* MU 441, 442 and 443 are scheduled as an integrated course in music education techniques. 

Students must take in the semester immediately preceding student teaching (ordinarily the 
first semester of the postgraduate year) and must allow two hours daily in their schedules 
to take the class and to complete fieldwork assignments. Students without teaching experience 
must take Educ 449 Teacher Aide Assignment (1) concurrently and must allow sufficient 
time in their schedules at the same hour each day so that they can serve as teacher aides 
in public schools. 


221 


Philosophy 


materials including audiovisual instruction for teaching music in the secondary 
schools. The history and organization of the teaching of vocal and choral music 
in public education. Planning sequential vocal training and performance organiza- 
tions for the total school program. Study of choral literature and techniques of 
instruction. (2 hours lecture) 

* 443 Teaching Instrumental Music in the Public Schools (2) S 

Prerequisite: 20 units in music, Educ Found 311, senior standing or consent 
of instructor. Required of all music majors working for the standard teaching 
credential, secondary specialization. The history and organization of the teaching 
of instrumental music in public education. Study of music literature and appropriate 
curricula for the development of concert bands, symphony orchestras, and cham- 
ber music ensembles for the total school program. (2 hours lecture) 

532 Seminar in Music Education (2) S 

Studies in the trends and application of educational theory in relation to the 
teaching of music in the public schools. 

544 Curriculum Planning and Construction in Music (2) S 

Principles and practices of curriculum planning in music education, with special 
reference to the public elementary, junior and senior high school. Required of 
majors who intend to complete supervision credential. 

545 Supervision and Administration of Music in the Public Schools (2) S 

Open to music education majors with teaching experience. Philosophy, prin- 
ciples and practices of supervision of music in the public elementary and secondary 
schools. Emphasis on modern principles of leadership, types of services, organiza- 
tion, management and evaluation of programs of instruction. Required of candi- 
dates for supervisory credential. 

749 Student Teaching in Music in the Secondary School and Seminar (6) F, S 

Prerequisite: MU 441, 442, 443 and Educ. 449. 

Sec page 144 for description. 

PHILOSOPHY 

100 Introduction to Philosophy (3) F, S 

An introduction to the nature, methods and some of the main problems of 
philosophy. 

110 Comparative Study of the World's Great Religions (3) F, S 

A study of man’s religious impulse as viewed from the philosophical standpoint. 
An attempt will be made to analyze and to compare religious experience as ex- 
pressed in Christianity, Islam, Buddhism, Hinduism, etc. 

210 Logic (3) F, S 

Analysis of the various forms given to propositions and the basic requirements 
necessary for valid inference. 

211 A Classical Schools of Philosophy (3) F 

Classical emphases concerning metaphysics, knowledge and related inquiries. 

* MU 331, 442 and 443 arc scheduled as an integrated course in music education techniques. 

Students must take in the semester immediately preceding student teaching (ordinarily the 
first semester of the postgraduate year) and must allow two hours daily in their schedules 
to take the class and to complete fieldwork assignments. Students without teaching experience 
must take Educ 449 Teacher Aide Assignment ( 1 ) concurrently and must allow sufficient 
time in their schedules at the same hour each day so that they can serve as teacher aides 
in public schools. 


222 


Philosophy 


21 IB Classical Schools of Philosophy (3) S 

Classical emphases concerning man’s social relations and human values. 

250 Philosophy of Ideas (3) F, S 

Analysis of basic ideas which have shaped modern thought. 

310 Ethics (3) F, S 

An analysis of the problems of human conduct: motivation, valuing, norms, so- 
cial demands, and personal commitments. 

311 Philosophy of Art (3) F, S 

An investigation into the conditions and the aims of aesthetic experience. 

323 Contemporary Existentialism (3) F 

An analysis of the meaning of the existentialism in modern philosophy. 

331 History of Philosophy: Rationalism and Empiricism (3) F 

The rationalism of Descartes, Spinoza, and Leibniz, and the empiricism of Locke, 
Berkeley, and Hume. 

332 History of Philosophy: Kant and the 19th Century (3) S 

The empiricistic and rationalistic influences on Kant, followed by a study of the 
major trends in 19th-century philosophy. 

340 Theory of Knowledge (3) F 

An investigation of the concepts of knowledge, belief and certainty, and a study 
of representative theories concerning man’s knowledge of the external world, the 
past, and other minds. 

347 Selected Problems in Philosophy (3) F 

An investigation into the significant contributions made to human culture through 
philosophic analysis. 

368 Symbolic Logic (3) F 

The recognition and construction of correct deductions in the sentential logic 
and the first-order predicate calculus with identity. 

37S Introduction to Philosophy of Language (3) F 

An introduction to the major issues in semantical theory: truth, meaning, ana- 
lytic-synthetic, semiotics. 

380 Introduction to Phenomenology (3) F 

An investigation into the historical background and basic viewpoints which have 
provided a framework for philosophical research and study in the writings of 
Husserl, Heidegger, Sartre, and Merleau-Ponty. 

382 Contemporary Philosophy (3) F 

A survey and analysis of the main trends of 20th century philosophy. Emphasis 
will be placed on such trends as pragmatism, linguistic analysis, and existen- 
tialism. 

407 Seminar in Basic Concepts of Philosophy and Psychology (3) F, S 

Prerequisites: three units in both philosophy and psychology. An interdisciplinary 
study of significant interrelationships which obtain between basic concepts common 
to both philosophy and psychology. 


223 


Philosophy 


412 Metaphysics (3) S 

An examination of the philosophical problems of freedom and determinism, 
mind and body, time and becoming, causation, deity, substratum, personal identity. 

417A Seminar in Aristotle's Scientific and Speculative Views (3) F 

An intensive study of the great philosopher’* views concerning the nature and 
function of science, logical reasoning, and the status of universals. 

417B Seminar in Aristotle's Social and Aesthetic Views (3) S 

A study of the problems of human conduct, government and art. 

427A Seminar in Spinoza's Ethics and Metaphysics (3) F 

A detailed and critical study of Spinoza’s views concerning the nature of man 
and the problems of conduct as developed in the Ethics. 

427B Seminar in Spinoza's Political Theory (3) S 

A detailed and critical study of the Tractatus Politicus and the Tractatus Theo- 
l ogico-Politicus. 

437A Seminar in the Philosophy of William James (3) F 

A detailed study of James’ psychological and epistemological views. 

437B Seminar in the Philosophy of William James (3) S 

A detailed study of James’ social, ethical, and religious views. 

447A Seminar in the Development of Plato's Philosophy (3) F 

A critical and detailed study of the early and middle Dialogues, terminating with 
The Republic. 

447B Seminar in Plato's Later Dialogues (3) S 

A critical and detailed study of the later Dialogues which follow The Republic , 
terminating with The Laws. 

450 Philosophy of Science (3) S 

An investigation into the methodologies of the deductive and inductive sciences. 

451 Philosophical Backgrounds of Modern Literature (3) F, S 

(Same as English 451.) 

457A Seminar in Hume's Philosophy of Science (3) F 

A detailed study of Book I of the Treatise on Human Narure and the Enquiry 
Concerning Human Understanding. 

457B Seminar in Hume's Ethical Views (3) S 

A detailed study of the Dialogues Concerning Natural Religion and the Enquiry 
Concerning the Principles of Morals. 

460 Philosophy of History (3) S 

A study of the metaphysical and the logical problems of history. 

467A Kant's Theory of Knowledge (3) F 

A critical and detailed study of The Critique of Pure Reason. 

467B Kant's Theory of Ethics and Aesthetics (3) S 

A critical and detailed study of The Critique of Practical Reason and The Cri- 
tique of Judgment. 


224 


Physics 


470A Seminar in Analytic Philosophy (3) F 

Prerequisite: six units in philosophy. A detailed investigation of the works of 
some of the many figures of the 20th century movement in analytic philosophy. 
The works of Russell, Moore, Wittgenstein, Strawson, Ryle will be read. 

470B Seminar in Contemporary Philosophy (3) $ 

Prerequisite: six units in philosophy. Emphasis will be on the analytic movement 
in philosophy as it developed in the United States during the 20th century. The 
works of philosophers such as C. I. Lewis, Quine, Goodman, White, Pap will be 
read. 

490 Seminar in Philosophy of Language (3) S 

Prerequisite: Philosophy 375. A detailed examination of the problems in the 
theory of meaning and formal semantics. 

499 Independent Study (1—3) F, S 

Prerequisites: minimum of 12 units in philosophy and approval of the depart- 
ment. Such study is designed to develop greater competency in research. May be 
repeated for credit. 

502 Philosophy of Mind (3) F 

Prerequisite: Philosophy 331, 332, or 412; consent of instructor. Basic problems 
relating to the analysis of the concept of mind and such related issues as be- 
havior, consciousness, and voluntary action. 

507 Seminar in Theory of Valuing (3) S 

Prerequisite: Philosophy 310, or consent of the instructor. An investigation into 
the conditions, modes, levels, and criteria relevant to any systematic view of 
valuing. 


PHYSICAL SCIENCE 

(Offered by the Departments of Chemistry and Physics) 

201 Modern Physical Science (4) F, S 

Prerequisite: one year of high school algebra or equivalent, or permission of the 
instructor. Taught jointly by the departments of chemistry and physics, this 
course presents the essential unifying features of the basic physical sciences, chem- 
istry, chemistry and physics; the modern concepts of the physical and chemical 
theory of atomic and molecular structure form the unifying course material. 
Selected physical and chemical theory (from the fields of mechanics, electricity 
and magnetism, light, kinetic theory, thermodynamics, quantum theory, and inor- 
ganic and organic chemistry) are included to provide the necessary background 
material. Credit will not be given to students who have had a college course in 
chemistry or physics. 


PHYSICS * 


101 Freshman Seminar (1) F 

Introduction to physics: a series of seminars, in lecture and discussion form, con- 
cerning careers in physics and the applied sciences, professional activities of 
today’s scientists, and special topics of current interest in physics research and 
development. Field trips to academic and industrial establishments are included. 
(1 hour seminar or one field trip per week) 


For all courses, prerequisites not requiring consent of the department chairman may be waived 
by the instructor of the course if he is satisfied that the student is qualified to undertake 
the course. A grade of C or better is required for all prerequisite courses. 


225 


Physics 


201 Modern Physical Science (4) F, S (See course description under 
Physical Science 201) 

21 1 A,B Elementary Physics (3) F, S 

Prerequisites: high school algebra, V/i years; trigonometry, Vi year. Elementary 
physics taught without the use of calculus. Covers principally the fields of 
mechanics, theromodynamics and electricity and magnetism in the first semester, 
and principally the fields of waves, relativity, quantum mechanics and the search 
for the ultimate constituents of matter in the second semester. 

Concurrent enrollment in 212A,B laboratory required. 

212A,B Elementary Physics (1) F, S 

Laboratory for 211A,B. Concurrent enrollment in 211A,B lecture required. (3 
hours laboratory per week) 

221A Fundamental Physics (4) F, S 

Prerequisite: Math 150A; corequisite: Math 150B. Fundamental classical physics 
including mechanics, heat and thermodynamics, acoustics, and wave motion. 
Concurrent enrollment in 222A laboratory required. 

222A Fundamental Physics (1) F, S 

Laboratory for 221 A. Concurrent enrollment in 221 A lecture required. (3 hours 
laboratory per week) 

221B Fundamental Physics (4) F, S 

Prerequisite: Physics 221A. Fundamental classical and modem physics, including 
physical optics, electricity and magnetism, and an introduction to modem physics. 
Concurrent enrollment in 222B laboratory required. 

222B Fundamental Physics (1) F, 5 

Laboratory for 22 IB. Concurrent enrollment in 22 IB lecture required. (3 hours 
laboratory per week) 

221C Fundamental Physics (3) F, S 

Prerequisite: Physics 22 IB. Fundamental physical concepts arc presented in a 
unifying framework, using the postulational approach. The five major theories — 
classical mechanics, relativity, electricity, quantum mechanics, and statistical 
mechanics — form the principal material for this course, which is designated for the 
student who has just completed the 10-unit sequence, Physics 221 A and 22 IB. 

411 Theory of Wave Motion (3) S 

Prerequisites: Physics 22 IB, Mathematics 150B. The properties of wave motion — 
production, propagation, refraction, diffraction, interference, and transmission 
through surfaces of waves — as applied to mechanics, electromagnetism and quantum 
mechanics. 

416 Thermodynamics (3) S 

Prerequisites: Physics 22 IB, Mathematics 250B. A postulational study of thermo- 
dynamics with emphasis on thermodynamic states rather than on thermodynamic 
processes. An introductory' course in the basic concepts and postulates, conditions 
of equilibrium, formal relationships, processes and thermodymamic engines, stability 
of thermodynamic systems, first- and second-order phase transitions, the Nemst 
postulate, and representative applications. 

431 Electricity and Magnetism (3) F 

Prerequisites: Physics 22 IB, Mathematics 250B. Theories of electrostatics, electro- 
dynamics, and electromagnetic waves. Introduction to magnetohydrodynamics. 


226 


Physics 


441 Analytical Mechanics (3) S 

Prerequisites: Physics 22 IB, Mathematics 250B. Principles of Newtonian me- 
chanics applied to the statics and dynamics of particles and rigid bodies. Introduc- 
tion to Lagrangian and Hamiltonian equations. 

451 Modern Physics (3) S 

Prerequisites: Physics 22 IB, Mathematics 250B. Discussion of experiments and 
introduction to theory for selected topics in atomic, nuclear, and solid state physics. 

452 Introductory Radiology (3) S 

Prerequisite: one year college physics. X-rays, radioactivity, interaction of radia- 
tion with matter, detection of radiation, applications to health physics. Especially 
suitable for biology, chemistry, and premedical students who expect to work in 
radiation biology, radiation chemistry, or medical radiology. 

453 Nuclear Physics (3) F 

Prerequisites: Physics 22 IB, Mathematics 250B. Properties of nuclei, radioactivity, 
elementary particles, nuclear reactions. Introductory discussion of theories of 
nuclear structure and nuclear processes. 

454 Introduction to the Solid State of Matter (3) F 

Prerequisite: one course in atomic or nuclear physics, differential equations. An 
introduction to the physical properties of matter in the solid state, as explained by 
atomic theory. Crystal structure, thermal, electric, and magnetic properties of 
metals, semiconductors, band theory, and solid state devices. 

455 Introduction to Quantum Physics (3) S 

Prerequisites: Physics 431, Physics 441, differential equations. An introduction to 
the concepts and theory of quantum physics. 

471 Electronic Circuit Theory (3) F 

Prerequisites: Physics 22 IB, Mathematics 250B. Operating characteristics of 
vacuum tubes, transistors, and semiconductor diodes. Linear circuit theory for 
alternating currents and for transient currents. Introduction to switching and pulse 
circuits. 

481A Experimental Physics (3) F 

Prerequisite: Physics 221B; corequisite: Physics 431. Selected experiments in elec- 
trical measurements and electronics, with emphasis on precision of measurement 
and standardization of instruments. (1 hour lecture, 6 hours laboratory per week.) 

4818 Experimental Physics (3) S 

Prerequisite: Physics 481 A; corequisite: Physics 441. Selected experiments in 
mechanics, acoustics, physical optics, and atomic spectra. (1 hour lecture, 6 hours 
laboratory per week.) 

481C Experimental Physics (3) F 

Prerequisite or corequisite: one course in nuclear or modem physics. Selected 
experiments in atomic and nuclear physics. (1 hour lecture, 6 hours laboratory per 
week.) 

481 D Experimental Physics (3) S 

Prerequisites: Physics 481AJB,C or consent of department chairman. Selected 
experiments in classical and modern physics. (1 hour lecture, 6 hours laboratory per 
week) 


227 


Political Science 


491 Senior Report (1) F, 5 

Prerequisite: Consent of department chairman. Selection and design for indi 
vidual project, oral and written reports. 

492 Senior Report (2) S 

Prerequisite: Physics 491 and consent of department chairman. Laboratory work 
on individual project, oral and written progress reports, oral and written final 
report. (1 hour lecture-recitation and 6 hours laboratory per week) 

499 Independent Study (1-3) F, S 

Prerequisite: approval of istudy plan by department chairman and by instructor 
Study of some selected topic in physics, selected in consultation with the in- 
structor and carried out under his supervision. May be repeated for credit to a 
maximum of 6 units. 

531 Electricity and Magnetism (3) F 

Prerequisite: mathematics through partial differential equations. An advanced 
course in electromagnetic field theory beginning with Maxwell’s equations. Treated 
are: vector and scalar potentials, boundary value problems, electrostatics, mag- 
netostatics, wave propagation, and related topics. 

541 Analytical Mechanics (3) S 

Prerequisite: mathematics through partial differential equations. A thorough 
theoretical treatment of classical mechanics including the important motions of a 
point, general principles of work and energy, the principle of least action, Lagrange 
and Hamiltonian equations, the dynamics of rigid bodies, and related topics. 

555 Quantum Physics (3) S 

Prerequisite: mathematics through partial differential equations. A course in the 
theory of quantum physics including the physical bases of quantum physics, oper- 
ator formulations, matrix mechanics, commutator bracket formulation, perturbation 
theory, quantum statistics. 


POLITICAL SCIENCE * 

Political Science 100 or its equivalent is the prerequisite for all upper division 
political science courses. 

100 American Government (3) F, S 

Structure and functions of the United States government; the federal system; 
the organization, powers and functions of the executive, legislative, and judicial 
branches; the relationship between federal, state and local units of government, 
the structure and functions of state and local government with special attention 
to California. This course satisfies the state requirements in U.S. Constitution and 
California state and local government. 

101 Introduction to Politics and Government (3) F, S 

An examination of political movements, their aims, strengths and ideologies. 
Contemporary issues at all levels of government; resultant patterns, with emphasis 
on their form in the United States and in California. This course satisfies the state 
requirement in U.S. Constitution. 

231 Comparative Study of Political Systems (3) F, 5 

An introduction to the techniques and methods of comparative study, and exam- 
ination of selected political systems. 


* Prerequisites may be waived only with the consent of the instructor. 

228 


Political Science 


'51 International Relations (3) F, S (Formerly 351) 

A study of the diplomatic, political, economic, and cultural relations of nations; 
the modem systems of nation states; basic factors of power; sovereignty, nation- 
alism; imperialism; colonialism, the rise to influence of the developing nations; the 
peaceful settlement of disputes. 

306 Research Proseminar in Political Science (3) F, S 

Basic research concepts, techniques, and design formats. Their relationship to 
data materials and analysis; and a presentation and examination of descriptive and 
inferential statistics and computer techniques and applications in political science. 

311 State and Local Government (3) F, S 

Development and role of state constitutions; the political, administrative and 
judicial systems of state, county, and city governments; relations of local govern- 
ments to the state government, with special reference to California. This course 
satisfies the state requirement in California state and local government. 

312 Political Parties in the U.S. (3) F, S 

The American two-party system; party organization and conflicts, problems of 
party responsibility and party leadership, nominating procedures, campaign methods 
and finances; the role of parties in congressional and executive policies. 

313 Pressure Groups and Public Opinion (3) F 

The power and growth of farm, labor, business, and noneconomic pressure 
groups; interest group activity in Congress; administration and courts; public 
opinion and propaganda; voting behavior. 

320 Introduction to Public Administration (3) F, S 

The nature and scope of public administration and its role in a democratic 
society. 

340 Democracy and Communism (3) F 

Recommended for nonmajors. The democratic tradition, especially in the United 
States and Great Britain; the theory and practice of communism in Soviet Russia, 
Yugoslavia, and Red China, authoritarian political thought in Italy, Germany, and 
Spain. 

341 Fundamental Principles of Political Theory (3) F, S 

Problems of evidence and validation in political studies. The distinctions between 
empirical statements, value judgments and tautologies. The relationship of fact 
and value. The need for operational definitions. Systematic approaches to political 
philosophy, including those of Plato, Aristotle, St. Thomas, Hobbes, Locke, Rous- 
seau, Bentham and Marx. The dilemma posed by positivism and relativism for the 
study of political values. 

342 Specific Problems of Political Philosophy (3) S 

Problems of making value judgments in politics: liberty v. security, the extent 
of obligations to the state, variations in forms of government, the role of govern- 
ment in the economy. 

373 Constitutional Law and Civil Liberties (3) S (Formerly 473) 

Case studies involving first amendment freedoms; equal protection of the laws; 
and procedural rights stemming from due process. 

374 Constitutional Law and Governmental Power (3) F (Formerly 474) 

Case studies involving the balance of power among courts, Congress, and the 
President; between national and state governments; and the extent of judicial re- 
view of laws involving social and economic problems. 


229 


Political Science 


406 Scope and Theory of Political Science (3) S 

The nature of the discipline, approaches, tools, concepts and theories. Highly 
recommended for all graduate students and senior political science majors. 

412 The Art of Politics (3) F 

Prerequisite: consent of the instructor. An examination of politics as it is prac- 
ticed and understood by practitioners of the art. A seminar which features guest 
lecturers. 

414 The Legislative Process (3) S 

Prerequisite: Political Science 312. The nature of the legislative process in the 
United States including the organization and procedures of legislative bodies, direct 
legislation and the relationships of the legislative branch to other branches of gov- 
ernment. Legislative systems will be analyzed comparatively. 

415 Political Behavior (3) F 

Prerequisites: Political Science 306, 312. The application of behavioral methodol- 
ogy to the understanding of individual political behavior within various U.S. gov- 
ernmental and social situations. The formation of attitudes and opinions, their 
measurement and relationship to political behavior. 

416 The American Presidency (3) F, S 

A study of the growth of the office and power of the President, of his rela- 
tionship to his advisers apd the executive departments. Congress and the courts, 
state governments and the public. The role of the President as chief policy- 
maker and administrator, party and public opinion leader, with particular atten- 
tion to developments during international and domestic crises. 

420 Local Government and Administration (3) F 

Legal and historical framework of local government with emphasis on municipal 
government and the functional fields of management in the United States. 

421 Government Finance Administration (3) S 

Prerequisite: Political Science 320. The role of finance administration and budg- 
eting in the determination of public policy, and in the administrative planning 
and management of governmental operations in the United States. Examines the 
relationship of assessment administration to governmental revenues and expendi- 
tures, the principles and practices of cost accounting, treasury management, and 
capital budgeting. 

422 Public Personnel Administration (3) F, S 

Prerequisite: Political Science 320. The growth and development of the civil 
service and the merit system; an evaluation of recruitment procedures and exam- 
inations; an ^analysis of such topics as position classification, salary structures, re- 
tirement plans, in-service training, employees organizations, and personnel super- 
vision. 

423 Regional Planning and Development (3) S 

Prerequisite: Political Science 320. A study of governmental policies, proce- 
dures, and agencies involved in the planning and development of regions. The 
concept of regions, survey of regional problems, and objectives, developmental 
prospects of regions, emerging views of regional planning, and intra- and inter- 
regional investment allocation during the development process. 

424 Urban Planning and Development (3) F 

Prerequisite: Political Science 320. The origins and development of city planning; 
the legal bases and fundamental concepts of planning are defined; and the or- 

230 


Political Science 


ganization and administration of the planning activity are examined. The major 
elements of the general plan, zoning laws and administration, urban renewal, and 
capital programming are considered. 

425 Comparative Public Administration (3) S 

Prerequisite: Political Science 320. 

A cross cultural comparison of the U. S. administrative system with those of 
selected nations; the development process; the role and functions of public 
administration in different cultural settings. 

426 Government Organization and Management (3) F, S 

Prerequisite: Political Science 320. An analytical examination of public admin- 
istration organization, and the techniques and processes of public management; 
the growth and development of bureaucratic administration; the functions of ad- 
ministrative authority; and the importance of communication, coordination, and 
leadership to organizational action. 

429 Government Internship (3) F, S 

Prerequisites: Public Administration concentration and consent of the instructor. 
Students work 15-20 hours per week as supervised interns in a public agency. 
Supervision is provided by the faculty and cooperating agency. In addition to the 
job experience, interns meet in a weekly three-hour seminar. 

431 Government and Politics of Democratic Systems (3) F, S 

Prerequisite: Political Science 231. A comparative analysis of the structures and 
functions of the political systems of democratic states; for example. United King- 
dom, Italy, Sweden, and Japan. 

433 Government and Politics of Authoritarian Systems (3) F, 5 

Prerequisite: Political Science 231. A comparative analysis of the structures and 
functions of the political systems of communist and fascist states. 

435 Government and Politics of Developing Systems— Africa (3) F 

Prerequisite: Political Science 231. A comparative analysis of the structures and 
functions of the political systems of developing societies in Africa. 

436 Government and Politics of Developing Systems— South and Southeast Asia 
(3) S 

Prerequisite: Political Science 231. A comparative analysis of the structures and 
functions of the political systems of developing societies in South and Southeast 
Asia. 

437 Government and Politics of Developing Systems— Latin America (3) F 

Prerequisite: Political Science 231. A comparative analysis of the structures and 
functions of the political systems of developing societies in Latin America. 

438 Latin American Interest Groups (3) S 

Prerequisite: Political Science 231. Consideration of the role of church, military, 
business, peasant and bureacratic groups in Latin American society with particular 
interest in their impact on the quest for governmental stability and economic de- 
velopment. 

440 Political Ideologies and Attitudes (3) S 

Prerequisite: Political Science 341. J~hc content and appeals of contemporary 
ideologies. The social, economic and psychological bases of political attitudes and 
preferences. 


231 


Political Science 


442 Problems of Democratic Political Thought (3) F 

Prerequisite: Political Science 341. Problems relevant to philosophies and theo- 
ries of democratic political systems, with emphasis on American political thought. 

443 The Theory and Philosophy of Marxism (3) S 

Prerequisites: Political Science 341 and 342. An analytical study of Marxist the- 
ory and philosophy from its pre-Hegelian roots to the present. 

450 Current Problems in American Foreign Policy (3) S 

An examination of the impact of the United Nations, alliances, propaganda, 
military strategy and economics on U.S. foreign policy. Particular emphasis will 
be given such problems as Viet Nam, the Caribbean, the Sino-Soviet split, and the 
aspirations of developing nations. 

451 Problems in International Relations (3) F, S 

Prerequsite: Political Science 251. Examination of selected problems in various 
countries and geographic areas with a definite impact on International Relations, 
such as nationalism, colonialism, anticolonialism, neutralism, racism, ethnic and lin- 
guistic minorities, border disputes, governmental instability, economic poverty", dis- 
ease, illiteracy and overpopulation. 

452 Conduct of American Foreign Relations (3) F, S 

Formulation and execution of foreign policy. The roles and powers of the 
President, Senate, and House of Representatives. The functions of the Department 
of State and Foreign Service, United States Information Agency, Agency for In- 
ternational Development (AID); the role of the Pentagon; public opinion and 
pressure groups. Separation of powers, checks and balances, and cooperation in 
the conduct of American foreign policy. 

453 Contemporary Approaches to International Relations (3) F 

Prerequisite: Political Science 251. Consideration of theories applicable to the 
study of the actions and interactions of states; systems analysis, models, decision- 
making, communications, the concept of power; examination of such research 
tools as gaming, simulation, content analysis. 

454 The Soviet Union in World Affairs (3) S 

Prerequisite: Political Science 251, 433. Theory and practice of Soviet Russia’s 
foreign policies; the international relations theories of Marx, Lenin, Stalin, and 
Khrushchev; practices of the Kremlin; world strategy and tactics of the Soviet 
Communist movement. 

460 International Law (3) S 

Prerequisite: Political Science 251. The sources and nature of international law; 
its role in a world of soverign states; the law of war and peace; the rights and 
duties of nations in their international relationships. The World Court; purpose, 
problems, and prospects. 

461 The United Nations and Other Public International Organizations (3) F 

Prerequisite: Political Science 251. The nature, scope, and role of public interna- 
tional organizations; evaluation of the League of Nations; analysis of the United 
Nations; its functions, purposes and problems; role of the World Court; Inter- 
national Labor Organization. Functions of UNESCO, UNICEF, and similar or- 
ganizations. 


232 


Political Science 


?3 The International Relations and Problems of Latin America (3) S 

Prerequisite: Political Science 251. A study of the foreign policies of the indi- 
vidual Latin American states, problems presented by the cold war and U.S. pok- 
es, the O.A.S., current efforts for economic cooperation, and Latin America’s 
»le in the U.N. 

y\ The Judicial Process (3) S (Formerly 371) 

Prerequisite: Political Science 373 or 374. The nature and functions of law in 
e Anglo-American legal system, the federal and state courts, legal procedures 
id their relationship to the American political process. Approaches to the study 
f the judicial process. 

99 Independent Study (1—3) F, S 

Open to advanced students in political science by permission of the department 
hairman. May be repeated for credit. 

(The prerequisite for each graduate course is consent of the instructor.) 

06 Seminar in the Scope and Theory of Political Science (3) S 

The nature of the discipline, approaches, tools, concepts and theories. 

11 Advanced Studies in American Politics (3) F 

A comprehensive examination of the political process in the United States. 

21 Seminar in Administrative Theory (3) F 

An intensive study and analysis of the historical and theoretical foundations of 
iblic administration. 

26 Seminar in Administrative Behavior (3) S 

Concepts, functions and techniques of administrative leadership; group dynamics; 
ecision-making; the organization and the individual. 

C 31 Seminar in Comparative Politics (3) S 

A comparative study of selected aspects of political systems. 

41 Advanced Studies in Political Theory (3) F 

A comprehensive examination of ideologies, concepts, methods and trends in 
Political theory. 

551 Advanced International Relations (3) F, S 

Study of selected problems in international relations with emphasis on individual 
csearch and contributions within the framework of a seminar. May be repeated 
for credit. 

571 Advanced Studies in Public Law (3) S 

Selected studies of the relationship of the judicial process to legislative decision 
waking; executive power; local government; the initiation process; and public 
opinion. 

598 Thesis (3-6) F, S (Formerly 591) 

Prerequisite: consent of the instructor. 

Independent Graduate Research (1-3) F, S 

Open only by permission of the chairman of the department. May be repeated 
for credit. 


233 


Portuguese 


PORTUGUESE 

(Offered by the Department of Foreign Languages and Literatures) 

101 Fundamental Portuguese (4) F 

Listening comprehension, speaking, reading comprehension, and writing to de 
velop control of the sounds and the basic forms and structures of Portuguese 
Enrollment restricted to students with previous study of a Romance language. 

102 Fundamental Portuguese (4) F 

Prerequisite: Portuguese 101 or equivalent. Listening comprehension, speaking 
reading comprehension, and writing to develop control of the sounds and th* 
basic forms and structures of Portuguese. Enrollment restricted to students witl 
previous study of a Romance language. 

315 Introduction to Brazilian Culture and Civilization (3) F 

Prerequisite: Portuguese 102 or equivalent, reading knowledge of Portuguese oi 
consent of instructor. Readings and discussions to develop insights into the litera 
turc of Brazil and intellectual expression of the leading ideas in Brazilian civiliza 
tion, while at the same time strengthening facility with the language. Conductet 
in Portuguese. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) F, S 

Supervised projects in Portuguese language or literature to be taken with tht 
consent of the instructor and the department chairman. May be repeated for credit 

PSYCHOLOGY 

101 Introductory Psychology (3) F, S 

General introduction to basic concepts and problems in psychology as a behav 
ioral discipline. Emphasis upon the human organism as an adapting system, with 
attention to genetic origins; normal development and capacities; problem-solving 
and adjustment to stress. 

161 Elementary Statistics (3) F, S 

An introductory course in descriptive statistics with an introduction to inferen 
rive methods. 

202 Principles of Psychology (3) F, S 

Prerequisite: Psych 101. A course for psychology majors covering selected basic 
areas of psychology in depth. Special emphasis on the methods of studying physio- 
logical factors, adaptive behavior, perception, cognition and motivation. (2 hours 
lecture and 3 hours laboratory) 

231 Psychology of Personal Adjustment (3) S 

Prerequisite: Psych 101. Dynamics of personal adjustment and interpersonal 
relations. Nature of conflict and frustration; demands of changing social roles; and 
attitudes, opinions and prejudices as they affect the individual and his relationships 
to others. 

Note: All Upper Division courses require a minimum of six lower division units 
in psychology. 

302 Experimental Psychology: Learning and Motivation (3) F, S 

Prerequisites: Psych 101, 202, 161 or permission of instructor. Selected experi- 
mental investigations in human and animal learning, memory, thinking, problem 
solving, and motivation with appropriate lecture and discussion. (2 hours lecture 
and 3 hours laboratory) 

234 


Psychology 


03 Experimental Psychology: Sensation and Perception (3) S 

Prerequisites: Psych 101; 202; 161 or permission of instructor. Selected experi- 
ental investigation with appropriate lecture and discussion. (2 hours lecture and 
hours laboratory) 

04 Experimental Psychology: Comparative (3) F, S 

Prerequisites: Psych 101; 202; 161 or permission of instructor. 

Behavioral similarities and differences between species as related to their position 
-n the phylogenetic scale; the relation of changes in activity, motivation, emo- 
onality, complexity, plasticity and adaptiveness of behavior to changes in sensory, 
uotor, endocrine and neural structures as well as genetic and environmental factors. 
2 hours lecture and 3 hours laboratory) 

311 Educational Psychology (3) F, S 

Application of psychological research and theory to the educative process. Major 
mention given to the problems of learning, individual differences, child capacities, 
and behavior. (Not open to students who have taken Educ 311.) 

321 Physiological Psychology (3) F, S 

Survey of relations between behavior and biological processes. Anatomy and 
physiology of the nervous system, role of neural and humoral agents in perception 
nd complex behavior (emotion, etc.), behavioral effects of brain lesions, the effects 
^ drugs on behavior, psychosomatic disorders and motivation. 

31 Psychology of Personality (3) F 

Concepts of personality development, structure, and dynamics, with emphasis 
pon problems, methods, and findings in the study of personality. 

>41 Abnormal Psychology (3) F, S 

Dynamics, symptoms, causes, treatment, and prevention of neuroses, psychoses, 
‘lcohol and drug addiction, psychosomatic illnesses, and character disorders. 

342 Mental Health (3) S 

Social and emotional dynamics of the adjustment processes, including an analysis 
of the concepts of mental health. Emphasis upon positive factors in the individual, 
T roup, and community conducive to improving mental health. (Credit not given 
is part of psychology major.) 

351 Social Psychology (3) F, S 

Study of phenomena of social interaction and the nature of group processes and 
nfluences. Attention paid to the intra psychic effects of group influences on the 
individual’s behavior. 

361 Developmental Psychology (3) F 

Prerequisite: Psych. 101. Concepts and processes involved in the understanding 
of the psychological development of the person from infancy through adulthood. 
Attention is given to stages in the development of cognition, emotion, percep- 
f ion, motivation, and to the interaction of these processes. 

391 Industrial Psychology (3) F 

Study of psychological principles and techniques in industrial and business set- 
tings. Includes selection, placement, training, human factors, environmental influ- 
ences, problems of people at work, and consumer behavior. 

4 08 History of Psychology (3) F, S 

Prerequisites: 12 upper division units in psychology or permission of instructor. 
Survey of the development of psychology from early times to the present. 


235 


Psychology 


412 Psychology of Learning (3) S 

Prerequisite: Psych 302 or permission of instructor. Principles of learning ac 
cording to the major theoretical systems. Critical evaluation of the theories and 
systems. 

413 Perception (3) S 

Prerequisite: Psych 303 or permission of instructor. Psychological problems in 
perception. 

415 Cognitive Processes (3) S 

Prerequisite: Psych 302, Psych 303 or Psych 304. Consideration of theory and 
research with respect to problem solving, thinking, concept learning, language, 
decision making and judgment, cognitive structure, cognitive development. 

431 Theories of Personality (3) S 

Prerequisite: Psych 331 or permission of instructor. Personality structure, devel- 
opment, and dynamics according to major theories. Research methods as they apply 
to personality theory. 

451 Experimental Social Psychology (3) S 

Prerequisites: Psych 161 or equivalent; Psych 202; and Psych 351. Study in depth 
of selected phenomena of social interaction and the nature of group processes 
and influences. Laboratory experience in experimental investigation of attitude for- 
mation and change; group processes such as communication, and problem-solv- 
ing and formation of norms; interpersonal processes of influence and perception. 

461 Group Psychological Testing (3) F, 5 

Prerequisite: Psych 161 or equivalent. Intelligence, aptitude, interest, and per- 
sonality testing. Theory, construction, evaluation, interpretation, and uses of psy- 
chological tests. 

465 Advanced Psychological Statistics (3) 5 

Prerequisite: Psych 161 or permission of instructor. Quantitative methods in psy- 
chology with particular emphasis on correlation, small sample theory, nonpara- 
metrics and some complex analysis of variance procedures. 

471 Behavior Modification (3) F 

Prerequisite: Psych 302 and senior standing. An exposition and evaluation of 
the theory, research, and techniques for modifying human behavior. Emphasis on 
operant conditioning as applied to retarded and psychotic behavior. 

481 Survey of Clinical Psychology (3) F 

Prerequisites: Psych 331, 341, and 461. Development and contemporary aspects 
of the field. Methods, diagnosis, therapeutic techniques, research, and problems. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) F, 5 

Prerequisites: Senior standing and permission of instructor. Individual library 
study or experimental investigation under direction of a staff member. May be 
repeated for credit. 

500 Advanced General Psychology (3) F, 5 

An integration of key concepts in learning, motivation, perception, personality 
and social psychology. 

510 Experimental Design (3) F, S 

Prerequisites: Psych 161 and 465. Principles and methods of planning and carry- 
ing out systematic investigations on the behavior of complex organisms, interde- 

236 


Russian 


>endence of experimental design and statistical evaluation of results, and the oppor- 
unity for practice in formulation of testable hypotheses. 

511 Seminar in Psychological Measurement (3) S 

Logic and methodology of measurement in the areas of intelligence, personality, 
judgment, and attitudes: problems of test construction and validation. May be re- 
peated for credit. 

520 Seminar: Experimental Psychology (3) F 

Prerequisites: graduate standing; Psych 465 and Psych 500. Study in depth of the 
data, methods, problems and current developments in sensation-perception; animal 
learning; human motor and verbal learning; thinking and problem solving; and 
motivation. May be repeated for credit. 

521 Seminar: Personality and Social Psychology (3) S 

Prerequisites: graduate standing; Psych 500. An intensive study of central prob- 
lems in personality and social psychology. Intensive study current problems and 
theories in these areas. May be repeated for credit. 

S31 Individual Mental Testing (3) F 

Prerequisite: Psych 461. Study of the major tests of intelligence. Emphasis upon 
practical experience in administration, scoring, and interpretation of these instru- 
ments. 


598 Thesis (3-6) F, S (Formerly 591) 

Prerequisites: formal admission to candidacy; permission of instructor. I he 
writing of a thesis based on a major study or experiment in psychology. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1—3) F, S 

Prerequisites: graduate standing and permission of instructor. Individual library 
study or experimental investigation under direction of a staff member. May be 
repeated for credit. 


RUSSIAN 

(Offered by the Department of Foreign Languages and Literatures) 

101 Fundamental Russian (5) F, S 

Intensive practice in listening comprehension, speaking, reading and writing to 
develop control of the sounds and the basic forms and structure of Russian. Audio- 
lingual assignments are an integral part of the course and arc to be prepared in the 
language laboratory. 

102 Fundamental Russian (5) F, $ 

Prerequisite: Russian 101 (or equivalent;. Intensive practice in listening compre- 
hension, speaking, reading and writing to develop control of the sounds and the 
basic forms and structures of Russian. Audiolingual assignments are an integral 
Part of the course and arc to be prepared in the language laboratory. 

303 Intermediate Russian (3) F 

Prerequisite: Russian 102 (or equivalent). Intensive practice in speaking, under- 
standing, reading, and writing based on cultural and literary materials. Linguistic 
analysis from sound to sentence. 

304 Intermediate Russian (3) 5 

Prerequisite: Russian 203 (or equivalent). Intensive practice in speaking, under- 
standing, reading and writing based on cultural and literary materials. Linguistic 
analysis from sound to sentence. 


237 


Science Education 


315 Introduction to Russian Civilization (3) F 

Prerequisite: Russian 204 or equivalent. Reading and discussion to develop a view 
of the Russian tradition (its social, intellectual and literary evolution) while at the 
same time strengthening facility with the language. Open to lower division 
students with consent of instructor. Conducted in Russian. 

317 Advanced Conversation and Composition (3) F 

Prerequisite: Russian 204 (or equivalent). Open to lower division students with 
the consent of the instructor. Designed to give the student special competence in the 
control of Russian as an instrument for free oral and written expression. Conducted 
in Russian. 

400 Russian for Advanced Students and Teachers (3) S 

Prerequisite: Russian 317 or consent of instructor. Intensive review of spoken 
Russian, while developing the student’s powers of self-expression in the spoken 
and written language. Modem writings in various fields, as well as developments 
in methodology and texts, serve as the basis for intensive practice. Conducted in 

Russian. 

441 The Works of Tolstoy and Dostoyevsky (3) F 

Prerequisite: Russian 315 or equivalent, or consent of instructor. Major works 
of Tolstoy and Dostoyevsky in their intellectual and historical setting and their 
impact on Russian and world literature. Conducted in Russian. 

451 The Golden Age of Russian Literature (3) S 

Prerequisite: Consent of instructor. A study of major literary works of the first 
half of the 19th century w*hich exemplify cultural and intellectual movements in 
Russia. Conducted in Russian. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) F, S 

Supervised projects in Russian language or literature to be taken with the con- 
sent of the instructor and department chairman. May be repeated for credit. 

SCIENCE EDUCATION 

(Offered by the Department of Science and Mathematics Kducation) 

310 Elementary Experimental Science (3) F, S 

Prerequisite: Completion of general education natural science requirements or 
consent of instructor. A laboratory' centered course in the physical sciences appro- 
priate for prospective elementary’ schoolteachers and other youth workers. The 
course covers, by both lectures and laboratory* investigations, selected content 
areas from the fields of chemistry*, physics, geology, oceanography; astronomy*, and 
meteorology* that arc commonly found in elementary* school science programs. 
Heavy emphasis is placed on laboratory* and field investigations of a kind adaptable 
for children. This course may not be used to fulfill General Education require- 
ments nor is it appropriate for science majors. (2 hours lecture, 2 hours activity) 

434 Elementary School Science— New Curricula (3) F (Offered alternate years) 

Prerequisites. Sci Educ 310 (or equivalent) or consent of instructor. The content, 
philosophy and techniques of the new curricula for elementary* science courses 
are studied. At present the course is designed to prepare teachers for the A A AS 
process approach to elementary science. (2 hours lecture, 2 hours activity) 

442 Teaching Science in the Secondary School (2) F, S 

Prerequisites: Education 340, Education 311, admission to teacher education, 
senior standing or consent of the instructor. The student w*ho has not had teaching 
experience must register concurrently in Education 449. See pages under Secondary* 

238 


Science Education 


Education for description of Standard Teaching Credential program. Objectives, 
methods, and materials including audiovisual instruction for teaching science will 
he studied. Developing and using lesson plans, discussions, laboratory activities, 
etc., will be experienced during the course. (1 hour lecture, 2 hours activity) 

443 Secondary Science Education— Biology (3) F 

Prerequisites: Sci Educ 442 (or equivalent) or consent of the instructor. Educa- 
tional practices particular to the teaching of biology are studied. Special emphasis 
is placed on recent curricular developments in this area. Presently the course is 
designed to instruct teachers in the theory, content and methodology developed 
by the Biological Sciences Curriculum Study (BSCS). (2 hours lecture, 2 hours 
activity) 

444 Secondary Science Education— Chemistry (3) S 

Prerequisites: Sci Educ 442 (or equivalent) or consent of the instructor. Similar 
to Sci Educ 443 with the emphasis on chemistry. Presently the course is oriented 
around the programs developed by the Chemical Educational Materials Study 
(CHEMS) and the Chemical Bond Approach (CBA) to teaching chemistry. Needs 
of participating teachers will determine which program will be emphasized. (2 
hours lecture, 2 hours activity) 

445 Secondary Science Education— Physics (3) F 

Prerequisites: Sci Educ 442 (or equivalent) or consent of the instructor. Similar 
to Sci Educ 443 with the emphasis on physics. Presently the course is oriented 
around the Physical Science Study Committee program (PSSC) and the Harvard 
Project Physics (HPP) physics courses. Needs of the participants will determine 
which program will be emphasized. (2 hours lecture, 2 hours activity) 

446 Secondary Science Education— Earth Science (3) F, 5 

Prerequisites: Sci Educ 442 (or equivalent) or consent of the instructor. The 
content, philosophy, and techniques of teaching earth science on the secondary 
level are studied. This course is designed to prepare teachers in the theory, content 
and methodology in the earth science course developed by the Earth Science 
Curriculum Project (ESCP). (2 hours lecture, 2 hours activity) 

499 Independent Study (1-3) F, S 

Study of some special topic in science education, selected in consultation with the 
instructor and carried out under his supervision. May be repeated for credit. 

710 Seminar in Science Education (2) S 

Prerequisites: an A.B. degree, teaching credential, or consent of instructor. 
Designed for postgraduate science students who wish to investigate recent develop- 
ments in teaching the sciences. New courses and materials for the various subject 
matter fields will be researched and demonstrated. Areas of concentration will 
depend on interests and training of the seminar participants. May be repeated for 
credit. 

749 Student Teaching in Science in the Secondary School and Seminar (6) F, S 

See page 144 under Secondary Education for description and prerequisites. 

770 Advanced Topics Institute-Biology (3) F, S 

Prerequisites: BA degree, experience with BSCS biology materials, at least two 
years teaching experience, presently teaching biology, consent of the instructor. 
This is an NSF supported institute. The themes and levels of biology identified 
by the BSCS are explored, in depth, by a team of college-university professors. 
Laboratory explorations are included. 


239 


Social Welfare 


SOCIAL WELFARE 

(Offered by the Department of Sociology) 


311 Welfare Institutions (3) F 

Prerequisite: consent of the instructor. An introduction to the field, taught by 
an experienced social worker. Consideration of the philosophy, structure, function- 
ing, and coordination of welfare agencies. Designed for students interested in social 
work and such related professions as teaching, counseling, public administration, 
law, medicine, and religious vocations. 

351 A Social Work Methods (3) F 

Prerequisite: Social Welfare 311, Psychology 331 or Sociology 341 or consent 
of the instructor. An introduction to case work, group work, and community 
organization, using case work materials, group work experiences, workshops in 
community activities and interviewing techniques. Designed for candidates for 
graduate study and for preprofessional employment in agencies. 

35 IB Social Work Methods (3) S 

Prerequisite: Social Welfare 351A. An extension of 351A with more intensive 
emphasis on practical experiences in case work, group work, and community 
organization, to enable the student to formulate a basic frame of reference for 
relating to troubled people seeking help. 

SOCIOLOGY 

201 Introduction to Sociology (3) F, 5 

A general introduction to the basic concepts of sociology, and the scientific study 
of human society. Among topics included are social interaction, culture, personality, 
social processes, population, social class, the community’, social institutions, and 
sociocultural change. 

202 Social Problems (3) F, S 

Prerequisite: Sociology 201. Study of the extent, causes and consequences of a 
number of social problems, with emphasis on twentieth-century America. Prob- 
lems are viewed in the context of the changing society. 

271 Education for Marriage (3) S 

A sociopsychological study of marital adjustment. Dating and mate selection; 
factors associated with successful marriages; principal areas of adjustment; parent- 
child relationships; causes and results of divorce. 

331A Social Research Methods (3) F, 5 

Prerequisite: Sociology 201 or consent of the department. Research design and 
methods of gathering data, especially by interview and questionnaire, are empha- 
sized. Among other topics are the role of theory in research, and sampling methods 
and problems. (2 hours lecture, 2 hours activity) 

33 IB Social Research Methods (3) F, S 

Prerequisites. Sociology’ 201, 331 A, or consent of the department. Elementary’ 
statistical analysis of social data is emphasized, with some consideration of prob- 
lems of measurement and of the writing of research reports. (2 hours lecture, 2 
hours activity) 


240 


Sociology 


341 Social Interaction (3) F, S 

Prerequisites: Sociology 201 and 3 units of psychology. Inquiry into the social 
and sociopsychological dimensions of group behavior and the socialization of the 
individual. Social interaction and its impact on the individual and personality 
formation. 

34S Collective Behavior (3) S 

Prerequisite: Sociology 201. Characteristics of crowds, mobs, publics. Analysis of 
social movements and revolutions, their relation to social unrest and their role in 
developing and changing social organization. 

361 Population Problems (3) F 

Prerequisite: Sociology 201. Population composition, growth and movement. 
Social factors affecting birth rates, death rates, and migration. Attention is given 
to the population of the United States and to selected areas of the world. 

371 Urban Sociology (3) S 

Prerequisite: Sociology 201. The population and ecology, patterns of growth, 
institutions, characteristic social interaction, values, and problems rrff the urban 
community. / 

411 Criminology (3) S 

Prerequisite: Sociology 201. The extent, causes and control of criminal behavior. 
Includes study of the criminal law, causal factors and theories, correctional insti- 
tutions, probation and parole, and preventive efforts. 

413 Juvenile Delinquency (3) F 

Prerequisite: Sociology 201. Juvenile delinquency as a social problem. Sociological 
study of the causes of delinquent behavior, and programs of control, treatment and 
prevention. 

425 Comparative Social Change (3) S 

Prerequisite: Sociology 201. Comparative analysis of changing community, insti- 
tutional, technological, and social class patterns in selected societies, with emphasis 
on differences between “developed” and developing areas. 

431 Minority Group Relations (3) F, S 

Prerequisite: Sociology 201. Study of racial, national and religious minorities, 
especially in the United States. Includes study of discrimination, prejudice, different 
patterns of intergroup adjustment, and attempts to change group status. 

436 Social Stratification (3) S 

Prerequisite: Sociology' 201. Social class structures and their functions. Different 
styles of life; determinants of class status; vertical social mobility; change in class 
systems. 


451 Sociology of the Family (3) F, S 

Prerequisite: Sociology 201. The family as a social institution. Historical and 
cross-cultural perspectives; social change affecting marriage and the family; anal- 
ysis of American courtship and marriage patterns; the psychodymamics of fam- 
ily life. 

458 Sociology of Religion (3) S 

Prerequisite: Sociology 201. Theoretical analysis of religion as a social institu- 
tion in complex societies. The structure and functioning of religious organizations; 
roles and role relationships; types of religious organizations and leadership; the 
relationships of religion to other social institutions, religion and social change. 


241 


Sociology 


460 Comparative Institutions: Latin America (3) F 

Prerequisites: Sociology 201. Comparative study of Latin American institutions 
(familial, economic, religious, political, military). Analytic emphasis on institutional 
structures and processes; relationship of institutions to each other and the larger 
society. 

465 Law and Society (3) F 

Prerequisite: Sociology 201. The law and lawyers in the context of human so- 
ciety. Law as formal social control, variations in legal systems, social change and 
selected areas of law, the legal profession. 

470 Sociology of Occupations (3) F 

Prerequisite: Sociology 201. Sociological analysis of work roles in technologically 
advanced societies. Career patterns, occupational recruitment, job mobility, organ- 
izational demands. The nature and development of the professions, their ideologies 
and images. 

473 Complex Organizations (3) S 

Prerequisite: Sociology 201. Sociological analysis of formal organizations (indus- 
trial, governruetaral, welfare, military, medical, educational, correctional, etc.) as 
systems of social interaction. Includes such topics as blueprinted vs. informal struc- 
ture, authority, decision-making, role conflicts, communication and morale. 

477 Social Organization (3) F 

Prerequisites: Sociology 201; six upper division sociology units, or consent. 
Theories of social organization and the structure of various social groups are 
anaylzed, with a comparative analysis of social structures and systems. The various 
levels of groups arc discussed and interrelated. 

480 Development of Social Thought (3) F 

Prerequisite: Sociology 201. Social thought and civilization since early times; 
comparative study of the orientations of earlier writers towards the nature of man 
and society. 

481 Sociological Theory (3) F, 5 

Prerequisite: Sociology 201 and consent of the department. A comprehensive 
survey of the main schools of sociological thought, both European and American, 
with emphasis on systems of theory', methodology of theorists, cultural change, and 
social institutions. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) F, S 

Prerequisites: At least 12 hours of sociology' and consent of the adviser. Student 
selects an individual research project, either library’ or field. There are conferences 
with the adviser as necessary, and the work culminates in one or more papers. May 
be repeated for credit. 

511 Seminar in Crime and Delinquency (3) S 

Prerequisites: cither Sociology 411 or 413, or consent of the department. Analysis 
of selected problems in the field of crime and delinquency with major emphasis 
upon independent investigation into the theoretical and research contributions on 
the causes, prevention and treatment of criminal and delinquent behavior. 

531 Methods and Measurements in Sociology (3) S 

Prerequisites: Sociology 331 A, 33 IB, or their equivalents, or consent of the de- 
partment. A critical analysis of basic problems of social research. Casual inferences, 
value bias, and measurement, especially the construction of scales. 


242 


Spanish 


33 Seminar in Intergroup Relations (3) S 

Prerequisite: Sociology 431 or consent of the department. Analysis of relations 
tmong ethnic, racial and religious groups throughout the world. Analysis of 
•rocesses leading to, sustaining, and associated with changes in relations among 
uch groups. 

536 Seminar in Social Stratification (3) F 

Prerequisite: Sociology 436 or consent of the department. Analysis of stratifica- 
ion in industrial societies. Emphasis on theory and methods, and on international 
comparisons. Analysis of factors leading to social class, the persistence of class 
divisions, class conflict and social change, and the effects of class on behavior. 

541 Seminar in Social Interaction (3) S 

Prerequisites: Sociology 341 or consent of the department. Advanced social- 
psychological study of social interaction, including sociological factors in pcrson- 
ility development and analysis of primary group behavior. 

573 Seminar in Large Organizations (3) F 

Prerequisite: Sociology 473 or consent of the department. The analysis of 
large organizations, their structural and operating characteristics and the rela- 
tionships between the organization and its members. 

577 Seminar in Social Organization (3) S 

Prerequisites: Sociology 477 or its equivalent and consent of the department. 
A critical treatment of various theoretical approaches to the analysis of social 
organization. Specific areas of social organization. 

581 Analysis of Sociological Theory (3) F 

Prerequisites: Sociology 481 or equivalent and consent of the department. Exam- 
ination of the basic elements and key problems in constructing a systematic socio- 
logical theory. A detailed, comprehensive and critical analysis of selected theo- 
retical works. 

598 Thesis (3) F, S (Formerly 591) 

Prerequisites: acceptance as a candidate for the M.A. in sociology, and approval 
of the topic. Individual research under supervision, reported in a thesis, and de- 
fended in an oral examination conducted by a faculty committee. Must be taken 
2 semesters for a total of six units. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1 — 3) F, S 

Prerequisite: consent of the graduate adviser, and the department. Individual 
research on either a library or empirical project, with conferences with the adviser 
as necessary', culminating in one or more papers. May be repeated for credit. 

SPANISH 

(Offered by the Department of Foreign Languages and Literatures) 

101 Fundamental Spanish (S) F, S 

Intensive practice in listening comprehension, speaking, reading and writing to 
develop control of the sounds and the basic forms and structure of Spanish. Audio- 
lingual assignments are an integral part of the course and are to be prepared in 
the language laboratory. 

102 Fundamental Spanish (5) F, S 

Prerequisite: Spanish 101 (or equivalent). Intensive practice in listening compre- 
hension, speaking, reading and writing to develop control of the sounds and the 


243 


Spanish 


basic forms and structure of Spanish. Audiolingual assignments are an integra 
part of the course and arc to be prepared in the language laboratory. 

203 Intermediate Spanish (3) F, S 

Prerequisite: Spanish 102 (or equivalent). Intensive practice in speaking, under 
standing, reading and writing based on cultural and literary materials. Linguistic 
analysis from sound to sentence. 

204 Intermediate Spanish (3) F, S 

Prerequisite: Spanish 203 (or equivalent). Intensive practice in speaking, under 
standing, reading, and writing based on cultural and literary materials. Linguistic 
analysis from sound to sentence. 

213 Intermediate Composition (2) F, S 

Practice in written expression based on cultural and literary materials. May be 
taken concurrently with Spanish 203. Required of all majors and minors at the 
intermediate level; optional to others. 

214 Intermediate Composition (2) F, S 

Practice in written expression based on cultural and literary materials. May be 
taken concurrently with Spanish 204. Required of all majors and minors at the 
intermediate level; optional to others. 

315 Introduction to Spanish Civilization (3) F 

Prerequisite: Spanish 204 or equivalent. Readings and discussions in Spanish lit- 
erature, arts and institutions to develop insights into Spanish culture, while strength- 
ening facility with the language. Open to lower division students with the consent 
of the instructor. Conducted in Spanish. 

316 Introduction to Spanish-American Civilization (3) $ 

Prerequisite: Spanish 204 or equivalent. Reading and discussion in Spanish- Amer- 
ican literature, arts and institutions to develop insights into Spanish- American 
literature and culture while strengthening facility with the language. Open to 
lower division students with the consent of the instructor. Conducted in Spanish. 

317 Advanced Conversation and Composition (3) F 

Prerequisite. Spanish 204 or equivalent. Open to lower division students with the 
consent of the instructor. Designed to give the student special competence in the 
control of Spanish as an instrument for free oral and w r ritten expression. Conducted 
in Spanish. 

400 Spanish for Advanced Students and Teachers (3) S 

Prerequisite: Spanish 317 or consent of instructor. Intensive review of spoken 
Spanish, while developing the student’s powers of self-expression in the spoken 
and written language. Modem writings in various fields, as well as developments 
in methodology and texts, serve as the basis for intensive practice. Conducted in 
Spanish. 

431 The Golden Age (3) S 

Prerequisite: Spanish 315 or consent of instructor. Major works including Mys- 
ticism, the Picaresque and Pastoral Novels, the theater of Lope de Vega and his 
contemporaries. Conducted in Spanish. 

441 Sponish-Amorican Literature (3) F 

Prerequisite: Spanish 316 or consent of instructor. The chronicle, short story, 
prose and poetry from colonial times to the present. Conducted in Spanish. 


244 


Spanish 


SI Spanish Literature to the Golden Age (3) F 

Prerequisite: Spanish 315 or consent of instructor. Cantar de Mio Cid and other 
pic poetry, the early ballads and lyric literature, the prose of Juan Manuel, the 
enaissance lyrics of Garcilaso de la Vega, El libro de buen amor and La Celes- 
na. Conducted in Spanish. 

61 Spanish Literature Since Neoclassicism (3) S 

Representative works of the 19th and 20th centuries. Analysis of romanticism, 
clecticism, naturalism, realism, and Tremendismo. Conducted in Spanish. 

166 Introduction to Spanish Linguistics (3) F 

The analytical procedures of general linguistics as applied to Spanish, with 
pecial attention to structural contrasts between Spanish and English. Emphasis 
on the application of linguistic analysis to the teaching of modem foreign lan- 
guages. 

473 Senior Seminar: Cervantes and the Age of Humanism (3) S 

Prerequisite: Spanish 431 or consent of instructor. Cervantes’ artistic creation and 
its relation to the culture of the 16th century. Special emphasis on Don Quixote and 
the Novelas ejemplares. 

47S Senior Seminar: Contemporary Literature of Spain (3) F 

The Generation of ’98 and 20th-century theater, poetry and novel. Conducted 
in Spanish. 

499 Independent Study (1—3) F, S 

Supervised research projects in Spanish language or literature to be taken with 
the consent of the instructor and department chairman. May be repeated for 
credit. 

500 Graduate Seminar: Advanced Structure and Style (3) S 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Conducted in Spanish. 

S10 Graduate Seminar: Phonology (3) F 

Prerequisite: Spanish 466 or consent of instructor. Conducted in Spanish. 

530 Graduate Seminar: Historical Linguistics (3) S 

Prerequisite: Spanish 466 or consent of instructor. 

556 Graduate Seminar: Spanish Poetry (3) F 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Conducted in Spanish. 

557 Graduate Seminar: Spanish-American Poetry (3) S 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Conducted in Spanish. 

S67 Graduate Seminar: Spanish-American Novel (3) F 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Conducted in Spanish. 

S71 Graduate Seminar: Spanish Prose (3) S 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Conducted in Spanish. 

575 Graduate Seminar: Spanish Drama (3) F 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Conducted in Spanish. 

576 Graduate Seminar: Major Writers (3) S 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Conducted in Spanish. May be repeated for 
credit. 

593 Thesis (3-6) F, S (Formerly 5S0) 

Prerequisite: recommendation of student’s graduate committee. 


245 


Speech 


SPEECH 


101 Fundamentals of Speech (3) F, S 

Provides the student with a basic understanding of the principles of rhetoric and 
oral communication, including listening, as well as with experiences in such activi 
ties as discussion, oral reading, and public speaking. 

138 Forensics (2) F, S 

Prerequisite: Speech 101. Investigation and practice in the background, format 
procedures, and evaluation criteria of the various forensic events. Students must 
participate in at least two intercollegiate tournaments. May be repeated for credit. 
(1 hour lecture, 3 hours laboratory) 

202 Voice and Diction (3) F, S 

Prerequisite: Speech 101. The study of principles and practice of correct sound 
formation, voice production, and manner of speaking (2 hours lecture, 2 hours 
laboratory') 

211 Introduction to Oral Interpretation (3) F, S 

(Same as Drama 211.) 

231 Essentials of Public Speaking (3) F, S 

Prerequisites: Speech 101, a high school course in speech, or consent of in- 
structor. The composition and delivery of talks to inform and to persuade. Logical 
organization and substantive development are stressed. 

235 Essentials of Argumentation and Debate (3) F, S 

Prerequisite: Speech 101 or 231. Investigation of the forms and skills of debate 
in our society. Use of evidence and case construction are emphasized. Parlia- 
mentary', symposium, and academic debate are considered. 

301 Speech for Teachers (3) F, S 

Prerequisite: Speech 101 or graduate standing. This course is designed to help 
teachers to use speech and dramatized activities effectively in the classroom. The 
normal speech development of children is examined, and consideration is given 
to the identification and handling of speech, hearing, and listening problems. 

311 Oral Interpretation (3) F, S 

(Same as Drama 311.) 

324 Dynamics of Small Group Discussion (3) F 

Prerequisite: Speech 101. Study and practice of the principles of group dynamics, 
interpersonal communication, and the process by which individuals work effec- 
tively in the solution of problems, share ideas, and become sensitive to the en- 
vironment in which they work with others. 

333 Business and Professional Speaking (3) F, S 

Prerequisite: Speech 231 or graduate standing. Particular attention is given to 
the interview, speeches for special occasions, information giving, and business con- 
ferences. Not open to speech majors for major credit. 

334 Advanced Public Speaking (3) F, S 

Prerequisite: 231 or equivalent. Investigation of the problems and techniques 
of a series of speeches directed toward a predetermined goal: emphasis on pro- 
gressive use of persuasive materials. 

335 Advanced Argumentation (3) F 

Prerequisite: 235. Argument as applied to advocacy; special attention is given 
to logic and evidence as related to analysis of significant issues. 

246 


Speech 


33S Intercollegiate Forensics (2) F, S 

Directed activity in debate and other forensic events. Participation in intercol- 
legiate competition is required for credit. May be repeated for credit. (1 hour 
lecture, 3 hours laboratory) 

340 Speech Science (3) S (Formerly 351) 

Prerequisite: Speech 101. Anatomy and physiology of the speech mechanism 
with emphasis on respiration, phonation, resonance, articulation, and hearing; the 
physical and acoustical aspects of the speech process. 

341 Phonetics (3) F, S 

Prerequisite: Speech 101 or graduate standing. The study of the history and 
theory of speech sounds including the morphological aspect of linguistics; the 
use of the International Phonetic Alphabet; the various factors influencing articu- 
lation and pronunciation. (Same as Drama 341.) 

342 Survey of Problems in Communication (3) F, S 

To acquaint the undergraduate student with the subject matter and vocational 
opportunities, and principles of speech pathology and audiology. Covered will be 
the role of school personnel, classes of speech and hearing disorders, incidence, 
speech development and barriers to the normal acquisition of speech. Observation, 
lecture, films and demonstrations will be extensively utilized. 

402 Phonetic Analysis of Speech (3) S 

Prerequisite: 341. Intermediate level course in phonetics which introduces 
student to narrow transcriptions, the electromechanical analysis of speech, and 
laboratory techniques in physiological phonetics. Special selected problems in the 
anatomy and physiology of speech as related to problems of physiological and 
acoustic analysis. (Same as Linguistics 402.) 

403 Speech Development (3) F, S 

Prerequisite: Speech 101 or graduate standing. Study of linguistic development 
and the psychological aspects of oral communication. Meets the language and 
speech development and disorders requirement for specialized preparation to serve 
as teachers of exceptional children. 

404 General Semantics (3) F 

Prerequisite: Speech 101 or graduate standing. An examination of the basic 
principles underlying the influence of language on human action and interaction. 

424 Discussion and Group Leadership (3) F, 5 

Prerequisite: Speech 324 is recommended. The principles and practices of leader- 
ship of groups in discussion. Survey of classical and modem backgrounds and uses 
of discussion. The logic and ethics of problem-solving discussion. The use of 
discussion as a means of public presentation. 

433 British Public Address (3) F 

Prerequisite: six units of upper division speech. A rhetorical study of the times, 
issues, proofs, structure, and style of selected speeches on British political, social, 
and religious topics. 

434 American Public Address (3) S 

Prerequisite: six units of upper division speech. A rhetorical history of the United 
States from the colonial period to the present. The influence of selected speeches 
and speakers on the development of American culture. 


247 


Speech 


436 Survey of Khetoric (3) F 

Prerequisite: six units of upper division speech. A survey of ancient, medieval 
and modem rhetoric. 

441 Speech Pathology: Nonorganic Disorders (3) F 

Prerequisites: Speech 101 or graduate standing; Speech 341 and Speech 342. Speech 
pathology with special emphasis on the identification of the most commonly 
experienced speech problems of a nonorganic nature, such as, articulation, stutter- 
ing, voice-delayed development, areas of mental retardation, and emotional prob- 
lems of children; basic principles of therapy in the clinic and in the classroom; 
parent conferences and referrals. 

443 Speech Pathology: Organic Disorders (3) S 

Prerequisite: Speech 441 or equivalent. Etiologies, evaluation, and treatment of 
speech defects of an organic nature (cleft palate, cerebral palsy, aphasia, voice, 
hearing, dental abnormalties and laryngectomy). 

444 Persuasion (3) S 

Prerequisite: six units of upper division speech. The study and application of 
psychological principles used by writers and speakers to effect social control: 
audience analysis and the use of persuasive techniques to influence the thought and 
behavior; the function of ethos. 

451 Diagnostic Methods in Speech and Hearing (3) F 

Prerequisite: Speech 443 or concurrent registration in Speech 443 or consent of 
instructor. Provides the student with information about various diagnostic pro- 
cedures that can be used by him and in consultation with members of related 
disciplines: psychologist, pediatrician, otologist, orthodontist, neurologist. 

452 Therapeutic Procedures in Speech and Hearing (3) 5 

Prerequisite: Speech 443 or concurrent registration in Speech 443 or consent of 
instructor. Observation and supervised experience in recommended procedures and 
use of instructional aids with speech-handicapped children, including the prepara- 
tion and utilization of speech correction and speech improvement materials. (2 
hours lecture, 2 hours activity) 

458 Clinical Practice (2) F, S 

Prerequisite: Speech 451 or 452 or concurrent registration in one of the courses, 
and approved application for clinical practice. Practice in the correction of speech 
in children and adults under supervision. May be repeated for a total of 6 units. (1 
hour lecture, 3 hours laboratory) 

463 Audiology (3) F 

Prerequisites: Speech 351, 441, or consent of instructor. The nature of auditory 
functioning, physical and psychological. A detailed consideration of the anatomy 
of the auditory mechanism, pathological changes and medical treatment. A survey 
of the rehabilitation facilities for the aurally handicapped; e.g. agencies, hearing 
aids, auditory training, speech reading, etc. 

464 Audiometry (3) F (Formerly 461) 

Prerequisites: Speech 351, 441, or consent of instructor. Equipment, principles, 
methods and procedures used in conducting school and industrial hearing conser- 
vation programs. Attention is given to techniques of audiometric testing and the 
use of audiograms. Care and use of audiometers, both air-conduction and bone- 
conduction. Partially fulfills the state requirements for public school audiometrist. 


248 


Speech 


165 Speech Reading and Auditory Training (3) S (Formerly 462) 

Prerequisite: Speech 341 or consent of instructor. Historical backgrounds of lip- 
reading, methods used in visual reading of speech, and the techniques commonly 
used in the teaching of speech reading to the aurally handicapped. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) F, S 

Open to advanced students in speech with the consent of the department chair- 
man. May be repeated for credit. 

500 Introduction to Graduate Study in Speech (3) F, S 

Introduction to methodological problems in graduate study. Location of source 
materials, including library and original data; research and project design. 

503 Communication Theory (3) S 

Critical analysis of the background, theory, research, and applications of the 
process of communication. 

S11 Graduate Seminar in Interpretation (3) F, S 

(Same as Drama 511.) 

S24 Seminar in Discussion (3) F 

Analysis of significant literature, major trends, and theories of argumentation, 
discussion, and debate, and an intensive study of the relationship of these areas 
to each other. 

535 Seminar in Argumentation (3) S 

Prerequisites: Speech 335; Speech 436 and Speech 444 recommended. Issues in 
development of argumentation theory: an examination of periodical literature 
and prominent texts. 

536 Seminar in Rhetorical Theory (3) S 

Analysis of major rhetorical treatises, 400 B.C. to A.D. 1800. 

543 Major Problems in Speech Pathology and Audiology (3) F 

Selected problems in speech pathology and audiology approached through an 
investigation of the literature and clinical research. 

557 A— H Seminar in Speech Problems (2) F, S 

Prerequisite: Consent of instructor. May be repeated for a total of 16 units, but 
no individual seminar may be repeated for credit: A, cleft palate; B, stuttering; 
C, aphasia; D, cerebral palsy; E, aphasoid child; F, voice disorders; G, articulation 
problems, H, mentally retarded. 

558 Advanced Clinical Practice (2) F, S 

Prerequisite: 6 units of Speech 458 or equivalent. Advanced clinical practice 
with children and adults, having communication problems encountered in pro- 
fessional setting such as the college clinic, public schools, hospitals, crippled 
children clinics, etc. Students will work with clients with disorders of voice, 
deafness, aphasia, dysarthria, stuttering. May be repeated for credit. 

563 Seminar in Audiology (3) S 

Investigation into a particular area or areas of audiology with selected problems. 
Emphasis is upon research and contributions within the framework of the seminar. 

597 Project (3) F, S (Formerly 591) 

The conduct and reporting of an approved project. 


249 


Speech Education 


598 Thesis (3) F, S (Formerly 591) 

Prerequisite: Speech 500. The selection, investigation, and written presentation 
of a selected problem in the field of speech. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (3) F, S 

Prerequisites: graduate standing and consent of chairman. Open to graduate 
students with permission of chairman of department. May be repeated for credit. 

SPEECH EDUCATION 

442 Teaching Speech in the Secondary School (2) F 

Prerequisites: Education 311, Education 340, Admission to Teacher Education, 
senior standing or consent of the instructor. The student who has not had teaching 
experience must register concurrently in Educ 449. See page 144 under Secondary 
Education for description of standard teaching credential program. Objectives, 
methods, and materials for teaching speech in secondary schools. Required, 
before student teaching, of students presenting majors in speech for the standard 
teaching credential. 

459 Clinical Practice and Student Teaching in Speech Correction and Lip 
Reading (4) F, $ 

Prerequisites: Education Found 311 and 24 units in the area of speech and hear- 
ing handicapped children in the public schools. Experiences include working in 
small groups and in individual therapy sessions with speech and hearing handi- 
capped children enrolled in regular school classes, participation in parent coun- 
seling conferences and conferences with school personnel including administrators, 
classroom teachers, and nurses. Planning of curriculum materials to integrate 
speech and hearing therapy with regular classroom instruction will be stressed. 
This meets the directed teaching requirements for the credential to teach speech 
and hearing handicapped in remedial classes. 

749 Student Teaching in Speech in the Secondary School and Seminar (6) F, S 

Sec page 144 under Secondary Education for description and prerequisites. 


250 


SCHOOL OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 
AND ECONOMICS 


ACCOUNTING 

200 Elementary Accounting (5) (Offered in alternate years) 

Duplicates Accounting 201 A and 201 B. Accounting concepts and techniques 
essential to the administration of a business enterprise; analyzing and recording 
financial transactions; preparation of financial statements; analysis and interpre- 
tation of financial statements; introduction to manufacturing accounts and reports. 

201A,B Elementary Accounting (3,3) F, S (Formerly 101A,B) 

Prerequisite: Accounting 201 A must be taken before taking Accounting 201B. 
Accounting concepts and techniques essential to the administration of a business 
enterprise; analyzing and recording financial transactions; preparation of financial 
statements; analysis and interpretation of financial statements; introduction to man- 
ufacturing accounts and reports. 

300 Accounting Fundamentals (3) F, S (Open only to graduate students) 

The basic fundamentals of accounting as they apply to the accumulation, organ- 
ization, and interpretation of financial and quantitative data relevant to the activi- 
ties of the corporate business enterprise. 

3Q1A,B Intermediate Accounting (3,3) F, S 

Prerequisite: Accounting 201B or 200. The quantification, recording, and pre- 
sentation of balance sheet and income statement items with particular emphasis 
on the corporate type of organization; statement of application of funds; cash 
flow statement; basic concepts of accounting theory; interpretation of financial 
statements. 

302 Cost Accounting (3) F, S 

Prerequisite: Accounting 201 B or 200. The development of accounting informa- 
tion for management of manufacturing enterprises; cost records; cost behavior and 
allocation; standard costs; and an introduction to cost control. 

303 Governmental Accounting (3) F 

Prerequisite: one course in accounting. A consideration of the accounts and 
reports of nonprofit institutions, municipalities, state and federal governments; 
organization, procedures, budgets. 

304 Managerial Accounting (3) F, S 

Prerequisite: Accounting 201 B or 200. This course is intended for students whose 
area of concentration is not accounting. Analysis, interpretation, and application 
of accounting information for managerial decision making; budgets and budgetary 
control; special-purpose reports; differential cost analyses. 

307 Distribution Costs (3) 5 

Prerequisites: Accounting 201B or 200, and Marketing 351. The development of 
quantitative measures for marketing activity; costs of distributing through dif- 
ferent channels of distribution, advertising vs. personal selling, and movement 
activities; development of sales budgets, standard costs, and the analysis of actual 
performance in the light of budgets and standards. (Same as Marketing 307.) 


251 


Accounting 

308 Federal Income Tax (3) F, S 

Prerequisite: Accounting 201B or 200. Basic consideration of the history, theory, 
and accounting aspects of federal income taxation. 

401 Advanced Accounting (3) F, S 

Prerequisite: Accounting 301B. A study of partnerships, statements for special 
purposes, receiverships, consolidated financial statements, branch accounting and 
foreign exchange. 

402 Auditing (3) F, S 

Prerequisites: Accounting 30 IB and 302. Nature of an audit, auditing standards 
and procedures, audit reports; professional ethics and responsibilities of the inde- 
pendent public accountant; introduction to internal auditing. 

406 Cost Control (3) S 

Prerequisite: Accounting 302. A study of current and persistent problems in cost 
accounting; theories of cost allocation and absorption; flexible budgeting; responsi- 
bility accounting; and distribution cost control. 

407 Integrated Data Processing Systems (3) F, S 

Prerequisites: Accounting 20 IB or 300 and Quant Meth 264. Integrated systems 
for the collection, processing, and transmission of information; management aspects 
of the information service function; feasibility studies; case studies of operating 
systems. 

408 Problems in Taxation (3) S 

Prerequisite: Accounting 308. Research in problems of taxation with emphasis 
on income taxes as they relate to corporations, partnerships and fiduciaries. 

409 C.P.A. Problems and Theory (3) S 

Prerequisite: Accounting 401, or consent of the instructor. Selected problems and 
questions as found in the uniform C.P.A. examination; preparation, analysis and 
revision of financial statements; assets, liabilities and ownership equities; income 
determination; cost accounting; governmental and institutional accounting; ac- 
counting theory. 

499 Independent Study (3) F, S 

Prerequisites: senior standing and approval by the department chairman. Open 
to qualified undergraduate students desiring to pursue directed independent in- 
quiry. May be repeated for credit. 

500 Industrial Accounting (3) F, S 

Prerequisites: Accounting 20 IB, or 200, or 300, graduate standing and consent 
of the instructor. Accounting information for industrial management; elements of 
manufacturing cost; cost systems; standard costs; cost reports; distribution cost 
analysis. 

501 Seminar in Administrative Accounting (3) F, 5 

Prerequisites: Accounting 302, or 304, or 500, graduate standing and consent 
of the instructor. Accounting, financial, and other quantitative data for managerial 
decision-making; long-term and short-term profit planning; budgetary control; 
cost analysis and special reports; financial analysis and planning; the financial and 
taxation aspects of business decisions. 


252 


Economics 


507 Seminar in Accounting Theory (3) F, S 

Prerequisites: Accounting 301 B, graduate standing and consent of the instructor. 
The concepts and theory of accounting; the effects of professional, governmental, 
business, and social forces on the evolution of accounting theory. 

503 Seminar in Contemporary Financial Accounting Problems (3) S 

Prerequisite: Accounting 502. A critical examination of the current problems 
and areas of controversy in financial accounting. 

504 Seminar in Contemporary Managerial Accounting Problems (3) F 

Prerequisites: Accounting 500 or Accounting 302, graduate standing and consent 
of the instructor. A critical examination of the current problems and areas of 
controversy in managerial accounting. 

505 Seminar in Auditing (3) F 

Prerequisites: Accounting 402 and graduate standing. Auditing theory and prac- 
tices; professional ethics; auditing standards; SEC and stock exchange regulations; 
auditor’s legal liability; statement trends and techniques. 

597 Project (3) F, S 

Open to qualified graduate students. Directed independent inquiry. 

598 Thesis (3-6) F, S 

Open to qualified graduate students. Directed independent inquiry. Student will 
select and have approved a thesis topic, show evidence of original research, and 
must present himself for a defense of the thesis before a faculty committee. 

BUSINESS EDUCATION 
(Offered by the School of Education) 

442 Teaching Business in the Secondary School (2) F 

Prerequisites: Educ 311, Education 340, Admission to Teacher Education, senior 
standing or consent of the instructor. The student who has not had teaching ex- 
perience must register concurrently in Educ 449. See pages 144-146 under Secondary 
Education for description of Standard Teaching Credential program. Objectives, 
methods, and materials including audiovisual instruction for teaching business 
in secondary schools. 

749 Student Teaching in Business in the Secondary School and Seminar (6) F, S 

See page 144 under Secondary Education for description and prerequisites. 

ECONOMICS 

TOO American Economic History (3) F, S 

The evolution of American economic institutions and their relation to the devel- 
opment of industry, commerce, transportation and finance. 

200 Principles of Economics (5) F, S 

Prerequisite: open only to junior transfers. (Duplicates 200A-B) 

An introduction to the principles of economic analysis and policy including the 
central problem of scarcity, basic economic institutions of the United States, re- 
source allocation and income distribution, economic stability and growth, and the 
role of public policy. 

20OA Principles of Economics (3) F, S 

The first half of a two-semester sequence. An introduction to the principles of 
analysis and policy including the central problem of scarcity, basic economic insti- 

253 


Economics 


moons of the United States. Emphasizes resource allocation and income distribu- 
tion, international economics, comparative economic systems, and the role of 
public policy. 

200B Principles of Economics (3) F, S 

Prerequisite: Economics 200A, or equivalent. The second half of a two-semester 
sequence. Continuation of an introduction to the principles of economic analysis 
and policy. Emphasizes economic stability and growth and the role of public 
policy. 

201 The American Economy (3) F, S 

A survey of the basic economic concepts and processes of a private enterprise 
economy. Included is a consideration of such topics as resource allocation, income 
distribution, problems of economic stability and growth and the appropriate role 
of government in a private enterprise society. Not open to students majoring in 
business administration and economics. 

300 Basic Economics (3) F, S, (Open only to graduate students) 

A concentrated study of the principles of economic analysis and policy and the 
basic economic institutions of the United States. 

302 Intermediate Economic Analysis (3) F, S 

Prerequisite: Economics 200, or 200A,B, or 201, or 300, or equivalent. A theo- 
retical formulation of the principles of the determination of prices and output of 
goods and productive services in a market system. 

303 Intermediate Economic Analysis (3) F, S 

Prerequisite: Economics 200, or 200A,B, or 201, or 300, or equivalent. A theo- 
retical formulation of the principles of the determination of the level and fluctua- 
tions in real and money income, and the forces underlying economic growth. 

322 European Economic History (3) F 

Prerequisite: consent of the instructor. The evolution of European economic 
institutions and their relation to the development of industry, commerce, trans- 
portation, and finance in the principal European countries. 

324 Money and Banking (3) F, S 

Prerequisite: Economics 200, or 200 A, B, or 201. A study of the structure and 
operation of commercial banks and financial institutions including a consideration 
of the impact of money and capital market developments on economic activity. 
(Same as Finance 324.) 

326 Labor Economics (3) F 

Prerequisite: Economics 200, or 200 A,B, or 201. An analysis of the basic eco- 
nomic and institutional influences operating in labor markets. Considers relevant 
aspects of resource allocation, income distribution, economic stability, and growth. 

362 Introduction to Econometrics (3) F, S 

Prerequisites: Quantitative Methods 361 (to have been taken or being taken con- 
currently) and Economics 200A,B. An introduction to basic mathematical tools 
and their application in economic analysis. The measurement and verification of 
economic relationships by statistical methods. Consideration of some econometric 
models. (Same as Quantitative Methods 362.) 

401 Government and Business (3) F, S 

Prerequisite: Economics 200, or 200 A3» and 302. An economic study of busi- 
ness organization, conduct and performance followed by an analysis of the ra- 

254 


Economies 


tionale and impact of public policy on various segments of business and business 
activities, including the regulated industries, sick industries, and antitrust policy. 

402 Monetary and Fiscal Policy (3) F, S 

Prerequisites: Economics 200 or 200A,B, and 303. A study of the techniques of 
monetary and fiscal policy and an appraisal of their relative roles in promoting 
economic stability and growth. 

403 Comparative Economic Systems (3) F, S 

Prerequisite: Economics 200, or 200A3 or 300. An analytical comparison of un- 
planned and planned systems of economic organization as to their theoretical 
foundations, existing economic institutions, and achievements and failures; capital- 
ism, socialism, communism, and fascism will be examined as exemplified by the 
United States, England, Russia and prewar Germany. 

404 The Soviet Economy (3) S 

Prerequisite: Economics 200, or 200A,B, or 201. An analytical evaluation of 
Soviet economic development including the structure and performance of the 
Soviet economy and problems of planning and control. 

405 History of Economic Thought (3) S 

Prerequisites: Economics 302, 303. A study of the development of economic 
thought as reflected in the evolution of major schools of thought and of leading 
individual economists as they influenced economic thought and policy. 

421 International Trade (3) F 

Prerequisite: Economics 200, or 200A3* or 201. An examination of the theory 
or international trade and the means and significance of balance of payments ad- 
justments, with an analysis of past and present developments in international com- 
merical and monetary policy. (Same as Marketing 421) 

431 Economic Development: Analyses and Case Studies (3) S 

Prerequisites: Economics 200, or 200A3, or 201, and consent of instructor, or 
equivalent. An examination of the processes of economic growth with special 
references to developing areas. Considers capital formation, resource allocation, 
relation to the world economy, economic planning, and institutional factors, with 
appropriate case studies. 

451 Economics of Taxation (3) S 

Prerequisite: Economics 200, or 200A,B, or 201. A study of government finance 
at the federal, state, and local levels with particular reference to administrative 
problems of public finance, the ethical aspects of taxation, afid the impact of tax- 
ation and spending on resource allocation and income distribution. 

452 .Economics of Location (3) S 

Prerequisite: Economics 200, or 200A3, or 201. The theory and principles un- 
derlying the location of economic activity. 

462 Advanced Econometrics (3) S 

Prerequisite: Economics 200, or 200A-B; QM 361 and 362. Development of ad- 
vanced statistical methods and their application in economic research. Advanced 
concepts in model building; development of different types of economic models. 
The use and effect of economic models in public policy. 

499 Independent Study (3) F, 5 

Prerequisites: Economics major or concentration, senior standing^ and approval 
by the department chairman. Open to qualified undergraduate students desiring 
to pursue directed independent inquiry. May be repeated for credit. 


255 


Economics 


502 Advanced Microeconomic Analysis (3) F 

Prerequisites: Economics 200 or 200A,B, and 302. An advanced theoretical for- 
mulation of the principles of the determination of prices and outputs of goods 
and productive services in a market system. Topics include: consumer choice, de- 
mand, production, cost, the equilibrium of the firm and the market, and distribu- 
tion. 

503 Advanced Macroeconomic Analysis (3) S 

Prerequisites: Economics 200 or 200A,B, and 303. Advanced theory of the de- 
termination of the level and fluctuations of real and money income, and the 
forces underlying economic growth. 

505 Methodology in Economic Research (3) S 

Prerequisites: Economics 502 or 503 and concurrent enrollment in Economics 
503 or 502. A systematic examination of the philosophy and methodology of eco- 
nomic analysis and research. Topics include theory construction, verification and 
measurement, and the problems associated with policy formulation. 

506 Seminar in Micro- and Macro-Economic Applications (3) F 

Prerequisites: Economics 502, 503, and 505. Complements the study of methodol- 
ogy in economic research. Students select approved topics and via independent 
investigation and seminar presentation and critique develop their analytical and 
research abilities, culminating with an acceptable paper. 

510 Competition, Monopoly, and Public Policy (3) F, S 

Prerequisite: Economics 200, or 300, or 302. An examination of the economic im- 
plications of various forms of market structure and business conduct and con- 
siders the application of public policy to various segments of business and business 
activities, including antitrust policy and regulation of business. 

511 Economic Problems and Public Policy (3) S 

Prerequisite: Economics 200, or 300, or 303. An examination of the nature and 
implication of the major economic problems facing the economy and an evaluation 
of current and alternative policies for their solution. Problems considered will 
include price level stabilization, balance of payments equilibrium, economic growth, 
and cyclical and technological unemployment. 

596 Selected Topics in Economic Analysis and Policy (3) F, 5 

Prerequisites: Economics 200 or 200A,B, 302 and 303. Selected topics in eco- 
nomic analysis and policy will be covered in depth, with special emphasis on 
contemporary research and materials. 

597 Project (3) F, S 

Open to qualified graduate students. Directed independent inquiry. 

598 Thesis (3-6) F, S 

Open to qualified graduate students. Directed independent inquiry. Student will 
select and have approved a thesis topic, show evidence of original research, and 
must present himself for a defense of the thesis before a faculty committee. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (3) F, S 

Prerequisites: graduate standing, the consent of the instructor, and approval by 
the department chairman. Open to qualified graduate students desiring to pursue 
independent inquiry. May be repeated for credit. 


256 


Finance 


FINANCE 


324 Money and Banking (3) F, S 

Prerequisite: Economics 200, or 200A,B, or 201. A study of the structure and 
operation of commercial banks and financial institutions including a consideration 
of the impact of money and capital market developments on economic activity 
(same as Econ. 324). 

330 Business Finance (3) F, S 

Prerequisites: Accounting 201B, or 200, and Economics 200, or 200B. Sources 
and uses of long-term and short-term capital in business firms, and analysis of 
business finance. 

331 Financial Analysis (3) F, S 

Prerequisite: Finance 330. The techniques of financial analysis and their appli- 
cation to business situations. 

333 Personal Finance (3) F, S 

Prerequisite: None. (This course may not be taken for credit by students electing 
the finance area of concentration.) Financial problems of the household in allo- 
cating resources and planning expenditures. Consideration of housing, insurance, 
installment buying, medical care, savings and investments. 

334 Principles of Insurance (3) S 

Prerequisites: Economics 200, or 200B, and Quant Meth 361. Principles of life, 
casualty and liability insurance; individual and group insurance programs; methods 
of establishing risks and rates. 

335 Investment Principles and Practices (3) F, S 

Prerequisite: Finance 330. Principles underlying the selection and management 
of portfolios, analysis of different types of securities; the role of mutual funds, 
investment trusts and other investment institutions. 

336 Principles of Real Estate (3) F, S 

Prerequisite: Economics 200, or 200B. Survey of urban real estate principles 
and practices; structure and growth of cities; basis of real property values; real 
estate development and financing. 

337 Real Estate Finance (3) S 

Prerequisite: Finance 336. Instruments of real estate finance; factors affecting 
the supply and cost of real estate credit; primary and secondary mortgage markets; 
real estate as an investment medium. 

431 Capital and Money Markets (3) F 

Prerequisites: Finance 330 and either Finance 324 or Economics 324, or consent 
of instructor. Role of capital and money markets in the American economy; mar- 
kets for new corporate and government issues; secondary markets; interrelation of 
financial institutions; factors influencing yields and security prices. 

433 Problems in Business Finance (3) S 

Prerequisite: Finance 331. Comprehensive case studies including problems of 
estimating funds requirements, long-term financial planning, controlling and eval- 
uating cash flows, and financing acquisitions and mergers. 

439 Social Insurance (3) F 

Prerequisite: Finance 330. Financial problems and policies in old age pensions, 
health insurance, unemployment insurance, workman’s compensation, and private 
pension plans. 


257 


Management 

499 Independent Study (3) F, S 

Prerequisites: senior standing and approval by the department chairman. Open 
to qualified undergraduate students desiring to pursue directed independent in- 
quiry. May be repeated for credit. 

532 Seminar in Corporate Financial Management (3) f, S 

Prerequisite: Finance 330, and graduate standing. Financial policies and structure 
of corporations; acquisition and administration of funds; financial control. 

533 Seminar in Financial Administration (3) S 

Prerequisite: Finance 532. Optimal financing and asset administration; advanced 
techniques of capital budgeting; application of analytical methods to the admini- 
stration of the finance function of the business firm. 

534 Seminar in Financial Markets (3) F 

Prerequisites: Finance 431 or Finance 324 and consent of the instructor. Structure 
and operations of major financial institutions; portfolio composition, price-cost 
problems, and market behavior; analysis of financial intermediation and interrela- 
tion of financial institutions and markets. 

535 Seminar in Investment Management (3) F 

Prerequisites: Finance 335 and graduate standing. Problems of investment and 
portfolio managment; concepts of risk evaluation and investment criteria; analysis 
of interest rate movements; investment timing; valuation of securities; regulation 
of securities markets. 

536 Seminar in Risk Management (3) 5 

Prerequisites: Finance 334 and graduate standing. Techniques of risk manage- 
ment, structure of risk management, insurance planning and control, risk man- 
agement programs. 

597 Project (3) F, 5 

Open to qualified graduate students. Directed independent inquiry. 

598 Thesis (3-6) F, S, 

Open to qualified graduate students. Directed independent inquiry. Student will 
select and have approved a thesis topic, show evidence of original research, and 
must present himself for a defense of the thesis before a faculty committee. 

MANAGEMENT 

341 Principles of Management (3) F, S 

Prerequisite: Economics 200 or 200 A,B. The fundamentals of management uni- 
versal to all organizations; covers such studies as planning, organizing, activating, 
and controlling. 

342 Production Management (3) F, S 

Prerequisite: Management 341. The study of modern manufacturing and its 
methods of operation; the efficient use of management, labor, and productive 
equipment; and demonstrations of techniques. 

343 Personnel Management (3) F, S 

Prerequisite: Management 341 or consent of the instructor. A study of the per- 
sonnel function, its activities, and its problems. Emphasis upon management’s re- 
sponsibilities for selection, development, and effective utilization of personnel. 


258 


Management 


344 Human Relations in Management (3) F 

Prerequisite: Management 341 or consent of the instructor. The human rela- 
tions problems of work situations pertaining to concepts such as motivation, leader- 
ship, organizational health, and adapting to change. Special emphasis is placed upon 
the contributions of authorities, case studies, and audiovisual presentations. 

346 Business Law (3) F, 5 

The philosophy, institutions and role of the law in business and society, with 
emphasis upon the functions of courts and attorneys, and upon case studies in the 
areas of contracts and corporation law. 

347 Business Law (3) F 

Prerequisite: Management 346. The philosophy, institutions and role of the law 
in commercial transactions, with emphasis upon the uniform commercial code and 
case studies in the areas of sales, security devices, personal property, bailment and 
negotiable instruments. 

441 Labor-Management Relations (3) F 

Prerequisite: Management 341 or consent of the instructor. The course provides 
an understanding of the impact of labor-management relations upon labor, manage- 
ment, and the public. Proper grievance procedure, collective bargaining, and the 
settlement of disputes are among the subjects that are examined. 

442 Labor Law (3) S 

Prerequisites: Management 341, 346 or consent of the instructor. The study of 
labor law and its effects upon American society. Federal and state legislation, and 
actions of regulatory bodies are explored by means of case studies. 

444 Management of Systems (3) F, S 

Prerequisite: Management 342. The theory and management of systems and pro- 
cedures applied to the control and coordination of the whole complex of operations 
in modem institutions. The course explores work such as charting, design of sys- 
tems and procedures, work measurement, and general systems theory. (2 hours lec- 
ture; 2 hours activity) 

445 Production Control Analysis (3) F 

Prerequisites: Management 342, introductory calculus, statistics, and principles of 
economics or consent of the instructor. The quantitative analysis of production 
and quality control, involving group problems related to such areas as mathe- 
matical programming, statistical analysis, and economic analysis. 

446 Managerial Economics (3) F, S 

Prerequisites: Quantitative Methods 361, Management 341, and consent of the 
instructor. The use of applied economics, analyses, and statistical methods in the 
decision making process, by means of group problems; the character of the firm’s 
demand, costs, prices, and profits; short- and long-run planning for a business 
enterprise; and the relationship between the firm and the economy. 

447 Management Decision Games (3) F 

Prerequisites: The business administration core or consent of the instructor. A 
simulation of an oligopolistic industry to provide the student with an opportunity, 
through group problems, to use statistics and other analytical tools to make man- 
agerial decisions in the functional areas of management. (2 hours lecture; 2 hours 
activity) 

449 Seminar in Business Policies (3) F, S 

Prerequisites: Accounting 201 A,B, or 200, Finance 330, Management 341, Mar- 
keting 351, and senior standing. The seminar is limited to seniors and graduate 


259 


Management 


students. Through an analysis of integrative cases and problems the student is 
encouraged to use his business and liberal arts training. Individual and team efforts 
resolve decision-making policies and actions. 

499 Independent Study (3) F, S 

Prerequisites: management concentration, senior standing, and approval by the 
department chairman. Open to qualified undergraduate students desiring to pursue 
directed independent inquiry. May be repeated for credit. 

541 Seminar in Production Problems (3) F 

Prerequisites: graduate standing and the consent of the instructor. A seminar 
designed to focus attention on current production problems, trends, and applica- 
tion of dynamic techniques. Current literature review, case study analysis, and 
special projects arc basic elements. 

542 Seminar in Labor Relations (3) S 

Prerequisites: graduate standing and consent of the instructor. Theories and 
philosophies of union-management relations in modem industrial society with at- 
tention to trends in nonindustrial organizations. Issues in collective bargaining 
contract administration, labor law, and government regulation. Discussion and anal- 
ysis of literature. 

543 Seminar in Personnel Administration (3) F 

Prerequisites: graduate standing and the consent of the instructor. The seminar 
provides the graduate student with an opportunity to study cases, problems, and 
significant literature in the field in order to develop a comprehensive understanding 
of personnel administration and human relations. 

544 Organizational Behavior, Theory, and Administration (3) S 

Prerequisites: graduate standing and consent of the instructor. The analysis of 
human behavior in organization, studies in organizational theories, and administra- 
tive action. 

548 Seminar in International Management (3) 5 

Prerequisites: graduate standing and consent of the instructor. Problems in man- 
agerial qualifications and training, political structure within and without the opera- 
tions, foreign receptivity to United States business, organizing and controlling the 
international firm. Management in selected countires is examined. 

549 Seminar in Policy Planning and Administration (3) F 

Prerequisites: graduate standing and consent of the instructor. Planning, im- 
plementing, and controlling policy strategics to achieve objectives are considered. 
The executive’s role in the overall operations of the enterprise and its resources are 
examined, and supported by cases, literature and training techniques in practice. 

597 Project (3) F, 5 

Open to qualified graduate students. Directed independent inquiry. 

598 Thesis (3-6) F, 5 

Open to qualified graduate students. Directed independent inquiry. Student will 
select and have approved a thesis topic, show evidence of original research, and 
must present himself for a defense of the thesis before a faculty’ committee. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (3) F, 5 

Prerequisites: graduate standing, the consent of the instructor, and approval 
by the department chairman. Open to qualified graduate students desiring to pur- 
sue independent inquiry. May be repeated for credit. 

260 


Marketing 


MARKETING 


307 Distribution Costs (3) S 

Prerequisites: Accounting 201B and Marketing 351. The development of quanta- 
tive measures for marketing activity; costs of distributing through different 
channels of distribution, advertising versus personal selling, and movement activi- 
ties; development of sales budgets, standard costs, and the analysis of actual per- 
formance in the light of budgets and standards. (Same as Accounting 307) 

351 Principles of Marketing (3) F, 5 

Prerequisite: Economics 200. Marketing organization and methods for the indi- 
vidual business with serious consideration of the social and economic aspects of 
the distribution task. Topics include the consumer, his place and his problems in 
the marketing area; marketing functions, institutions, and policies; legal and 
political environment for marketing activity; and an evaluation of the present 
marketing system. 

352 Principles of Retailing (3) F 

Prerequisite: Marketing 351. Retail problems of location; organization; buying; 
selling media and methods; pricing; and merchandising. Emphasis will be placed 
upon operating procedures and control, planning, budgeting, and costs. 

353 Marketing Administration (3) F, 5 

Prerequisite: Marketing 351. Survey of the major problems facing the marketing 
executive, including product planning, pricing, market and analysis, sales potentials, 
marketing organization, and administration of the sales force. 

354 Principles of Advertising (3) S 

Prerequisite: Marketing 351. The management of the advertising function, in- 
cluding the role of advertising in marketing strategy, budgetary considerations, 
allocation among media, measurement of effectiveness, administration and control, 
and its economic and social implications. Case method of instruction is emphasized. 

355 Credit and Credit Administration (3) F 

Prerequisite: Marketing 351. The general nature and functions of credit, credit 
instruments; the operation of the credit department; sources of credit information; 
acceptance of credit risk; establishment of credit limits; and the problem of col- 
lections. 

356 Creative Motivation in Marketing (3) S 

Prerequisite: Marketing 351. Personal salesmanship and the application of the 
findings of the behavioral sciences to selling and group dynamics as they relate to 
the creative and promotional aspects of the business. 

357 Industrial Purchasing (3) S 

Prerequisite: Marketing 351. The principles and practices of purchasing for 
industrial organizations. Major buying policies, sources of materials, quantity and 
quality considerations, and the relation to production cost. 

358 Physical Distribution (3) F 

Prerequisite: Marketing 351. Consideration of the logistics problems of physically 
distributing products and the principles and practices of solving them. An evalua- 
tion of the transportation and storage of products based on considerations of cost, 
time, and service. 

421 International Trade (3) F 

Prerequisite: Economics 200. (Same as Economics 421) 

261 


Marketing 


452 . Marketing Research (3) F, S 

Prerequisites: Marketing 351, and Quantitative Methods 361. The application of 
scientific methodology as an aid in solving problems of product planning, pricing, 
promotion, and distribution. Practical application is emphasized through class proj- 
ects and case problems. (Two hours lecture; two hours activity) 

453 Marketing to the Government (3) S 

Prerequisite: Marketing 351. The marketing of defense and nondefense products 
to the government. The nature and administration of contractual agreements with 
government agencies. 

454 Advertising Problems (3) F 

Prerequisites: Marketing 354 or consent of the instructor, plus senior standing. 
Management of the advertising function in the marketing program. A study of the 
formulation of advertising policies, involving primarily an analysis of cases dealing 
with the role of advertising in marketing, the definition and choice of advertising 
objectives, strategy, appropriation policy, media selection, evaluation of advertising 
results, and the organization and implementation of the advertising program. Cases, 
simulations, and readings. 

459 Marketing Problems (3) F, S 

Prerequisite: Marketing 351. It is recommended that the student have completed 
at least two advanced marketing courses or have equivalent business experience. 
Case studies of problems facing the marketing executive; identification and analysis 
of the problems, selection and evaluation of alternative solutions; and implementa- 
tion of recommended solutions. 

499 Independent Study (3) F, S 

Prerequisites: Marketing concentration, senior standing, and approval by the 
department chairman. Open to qualified undergraduate students desiring to pursue 
directed independent inquiry- May be repeated for credit. 

551 Seminar in Marketing Problems (3) F, S 

Prerequisites: Marketing 351 and graduate standing. A managerial approach to 
the major marketing problems faced by industry: e.g., definition of and organiza- 
tion for the marketing task; demand analysis; decisions concerning product, price, 
promotion, and trade channels. A firm’s adjustment to its marketing environment 
with emphasis on competitive strategy. The case approach supplemented with 
simulations and topical readings. (Credit not given for master’s degree candidates 
who have previously taken Mktg 459.) 

552 Seminar in Pricing and Price Policy (3) S 

Prerequisite: Marketing 551. A critical analysis of the pricing problems of a firm 
with alternative choices and diverse objectives. The pricing function will be 
examined from the standpoints of economic theory, management science, business 
practices, legal constraints, and ethical considerations. Relationship of pricing objec- 
tives, policies, strategies, and methods to market behavior and the goals of the firm. 
Pricing policies among businesses and their economic and social implications. 

553 Seminar in Product Planning (3) F 

Prerequisite: Marketing 551. A course designed to assist marketing management 
in the formulation and execution of marketing plans for new and existing products. 
An examination of the management decision areas and procedures required for 
search, preliminary evaluation, development and testing, and commercialization of 
products. Particular emphasis on solving problems arising from product programs 
developed to assure corporate growth. 


262 


Quantitative Methods 


554 Seminar in Promotion (3) S 

Prerequisites: Marketing 551 or instructor’s approval. A critical analysis of the 
promotion mix as employed by small, medium and large business organizations 
in their efforts to maximize profitable operations. Particular emphasis will be given 
to: determination of promotional goals, planning, budgeting, and controlling pro- 
motional programs; and measuring the effectiveness of the promotional effort. 

597 Project (3) F, 5 

Open to qualified graduate students. Directed independent inquiry. 

598 Thesis (3-6) F, S 

Open to qualified graduate students. Directed independent inquiry. Student will 
select and have approved a thesis topic, show evidence of original research, and 
must present himself for a defense of the thesis before a faculty committee. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (3) F, S 

Prerequisites: graduate standing, the consent of the instructor, and approval by 
the department chairman. Open to qualified graduate students desiring to pursue 
independent inquiry. May be repeated for credit. 

QUANTITATIVE METHODS 

264 Computer Programming (1) F, S 

Introduction to problem-oriented languages of computers. The solving of prob- 
lems using computer programming methods and techniques. 

361 Business and Economic Statistics (3) F, S 

Prerequisite: Math 120 or equivalent. The collection, analysis and presentation of 
statistical data; theory of probability, sampling, experimental method, correlation, 
time series and index numbers, and their application to business and economic 
problems. 

362 Introduction to Econometrics (3) F , 5 

Prerequisites: Quant Meth 361 (may be taken concurrently), and Economics 
200A,B. An introduction to basic mathematical tools and their application in eco- 
nomic analysis. The measurement and verification of economic relationships by 
statistical methods. Consideration of some econometric models. (Same as Econ. 
362) 

364 Computer Logic and Programming (3) F 

Prerequisite: College algebra, Quant Meth 264, or equivalent. An introduction 
to computer systems; elements of symbolic logic and number systems; program- 
ming methods, techniques, and applications. 

446 Computer Programming Theory (3) S 

Prerequisite: Mathematics 150A or equivalent. Selected topics from the tech- 
nology of computation with applications in business. 

461 Advanced Statistics (3) F 

Prerequisites: Math HOB or equivalent, Quant Meth 361. An advanced treatment 
of the theory and application of the topics covered in Quant Meth 361, using the 
methods of the calculus where appropriate. 

462 Mathematical Models in Business and Economics (3) 5 

Prerequisites: Math 120, Quant Meth 361, and Math 150A, or Quant Meth 362, 
or equivalent. The construction and application of mathematical models to business 
decision and economic analysis. 


263 


Quantitative Methods 


464 Computer Applications in Industry (3) S 

Prerequisites: Quant Meth 264 or consent of instructor. An examination of the 
role of computers in industrial processes and automation, its effects on economic 
efficiency, control, feedback communication, consideration of real time on-line 
systems, and functional applications of computers in business and industry. 

465 Linear and Nonlinear Programming (3) F 

Prerequisites: Quant Meth 264, Math 120 or equivalent, Quant Meth 361. The 
study of the decomposition principle. Problems of data collection, problem speci- 
fication, computation. Applications of quantitative programming to industrial and 
management problems. 

467 Statistical Quality Control (3) S 

Prerequisites: Quantitative Methods 361. Shewhart Control Chans for variables, 
percent defective, and defects. Tolerances, process capacility, specialized control 
chans, and batch processing problems. Bayesian aspects of process control. 

499 Independent Study (3) F, S 

Prerequisites: quantitative concentration, senior standing, and approval by the 
department chairman. Open to qualified undergraduate students desiring to pursue 
directed independent inquiry. May be repeated for credit. 

560 Operations Research (3) F, S 

Prerequisites: Math 150B, or equivalent, and Quant Meth 361, or consent of the 
instructor. An examination of the nature and scope of operations research, its 
methodology, and applications. Emphasis will be placed on model construction and 
models on inventory control, queuing, sequencing, scheduling, replacement, and 
mathematical programming. 

563 Statistical Decision Theory (3) S (Formerly 463) 

Prerequisites: Mathematics 120 and Quantitative Methods 361. The analysis and 
application of advanced statistical techniques to the problems of management deci- 
sion-making under conditions of uncertainty. 

565 Seminar on Computers in Industry (3) S 

Prerequisites: Quant Meth 364, Quant Meth 464 or consent of instructor. An 
examination of developments and innovations concerning computers in industry. 
Artificial intelligence, information retrieval, and time sharing. 

566 Design of Experiments (3) S 

Prerequisites: Quantitative Methods 361 and graduate standing. A survey of the 
fundamentals of experimental design, including analysis of variance, factorial 
experiments, nested designs, confounding, and fractional replication. 

597 Project (3) F, S 

Open to qualified graduate students. Directed independent inquiry. 

598 Thesis (3-6) F, S 

Open to qualified graduate students. Directed independent inquiry. Student will 
select and have approved a thesis topic, show evidence of original research, and 
must present himself for a defense of the thesis before a faculty committee. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (3) F, S 

Prerequisites: graduate standing, the consent of the instructor, and approval by 
the department chairman. Open to qualified graduate students desiring to pursue 
independent inquiry. May be repeated for credit. 


264 


SCHOOL OF EDUCATION 

EDUCATION, ELEMENTARY 


331 Elementary School Principles, Curricula, and Methods (8) F, S 

Prerequisites: Educ 311, and admission to teacher education. Principles, curri- 
cula, methods, and materials of elementary school instruction with major em- 
phasis on reading, language arts, arithmetic, social studies, and science. Includes 
audiovisual instruction, methods, and techniques. Required field work. Required of 
all candidates for the standard teaching credential with specialization in elemen- 
tary school teaching. (6 hours lecture, 2 hours activity, and 3 hours laboratory) 

339 Student Teaching in the Elementary School and Student Teaching Seminar 
(8) F, S 

Prerequisites: Educ 331 and admission to student teaching. Participation in a 
regular elementary school teaching program for the greater part of every school 
day. Includes a two-hour seminar each week in problems and procedures of ele- 
mentary school teaching. Concurrent enrollment in other courses is discouraged. 
(Minimum of 30 hours a week in an elementary schobl, 2 hours per week seminar.) 

431 Principles and Curricula of the Elementary School (2) F, S 

Prerequisite: Educ 311 or consent of the instructor. An introductory course 
in elementary education. Stress on major principles and basic curricular considera- 
tions. Importance of the elementary school system to society. 

432 Teaching— in the Elementary School 

Prerequisites: Educ 311 or consent of the instructor. A series of courses, 
listed dually in the School of Education and in the other appropriate divisions, 
dealing with objectives, methods, and materials of teaching the various subjects and 
areas in the elementary schools. The courses are professional education courses and 
applicable toward credential requirements. Detailed descriptions of the courses are 
to be found in the materials of other departments and divisions within this catalog. 
For Lang Ed 432 Teaching Foreign Languages in the Elementary Schools 
(2) F, S 

The following courses have been designed specifically for students who are 
part-time students: 

Eng Ed 432 Teaching Language Arts in the Elementary School (2) F, S 
Math Ed 432 Teaching Mathematics in the Elementary School (2) F, S 
Sci Ed 432 Teaching Science in the Elementary School (2) F, S 

436 Child Study Techniques for Teachers (3) S 

Prerequisite: Educ 331 or permission of the instructor. This course deals 
with the techniques the classroom teacher may use in understanding individual 
children within his classroom who do not respond to the teacher and his peers 
in typical ways. 

437 Problems in Early Elementary Education (3) S 

Prerequisites: Educ 339 and consent of instructor. Study of current litera- 
ture and recent research in the area of education of young children through 
individual and group study. Emphasis will be placed on problems centered in 
cognitive processes, content, structure, and instruction at the early elementary 
education level. 


265 


Education , Junior College 

506 Curriculum and Research in Elementary Education: Reading (3) F, S 

Prerequisite: Educ 339 or consent of instructor. Study of curriculum and 
research in reading, including materials, organization, and methods of instruction. 

507 Curriculum and Research in Elementary Education: Social Studies (3) S 

Prerequisite: Educ 339 or consent of instructor. Study of significant research 
developments and materials, criteria for planning and improving social studies 
programs, and current techniques of teaching. 

508 Curriculum and Research in Elementary Education: Foreign Languages (3) S 

Prerequisite: Educ 339 or permission of instructor. Study of pertinent investiga- 
tions and their application in the classroom toghether with significant curriculum 
developments and organization in the newest area facing the elementary school 
educator. Criteria for appraising programs, personnel, and materials also will be 
discussed. 

537 Seminar for Elementary Education (3) S 

Prerequisite: Educ 339 or 739 or consent of the instructor. A study of problems 
and issues in elementary education, their causes and possible solutions. 

709 Supervision of Student Teaching (3) F 

Prerequisite: Possession of a teaching credential and one year of teaching ex- 
perience. Designed for teachers who supervise student teachers. Emphasis on prin- 
ciples and procedures of effective supervision and research. 

739 Student Teaching in the Elementary School and Student Teaching Seminar 
(8 or 4) F, S 

Prerequisites: Educ 331, admission to student teaching, and postgraduate status. 
Participation in a regular elementary school teaching program for the greater part 
of every' school day. Includes a two-hour seminar each week in problems and pro- 
cedures of elementary school teaching. Concurrent enrollment in other courses is 
discouraged. (Minimum of 30 hours a week in an elementary school, 2 hours per 
week seminar.) 

EDUCATION, JUNIOR COLLEGE 

721 Philosophy and Objectives of Junior College Education (2) F 

Prerequisite: postgraduate standing or consent of instructor. Origins of the 
junior college movement in higher education in the United States; economic, tech- 
nological, and social forces creating needs for new and different post-high school 
education; objectives of junior college education; relationships to secondary and 
higher education; functions of the junior college; curriculum development and 
organization. 

744 Principles of Junior College Teaching (3) S 

Prerequisite: postgraduate standing or consent of instructor. Psychological foun- 
dations of junior college teaching, measurement and evaluation of learning. Edu- 
cational and philosophical bases for instructional procedures in the junior college. 
Instructional procedures including audiovisual materials, junior college class 
observations. (2 hours seminar, 2 hours fieldwork) 

799 Junior College Student Teaching and Seminar (4) F, S 

Prerequisites: Educ 744. Student teaching in the students major field in a 
cooperating junior college for one semester. Weekly seminar on curriculum devel- 
opment and organization in the junior college, instructional procedures and ma- 
terials, and instructional problems of the junior college student teacher. (Minimum 
of 9 hours a week in a junior college; 2 hours per week in seminar) 


266 


Education , Pupil Personnel Services 


EDUCATION, PSYCHOLOGICAL FOUNDATION, MEASUREMENTS 
AND STATISTICS 

311 Psychological Foundations of Education (4) F, $ 

Prerequisite: Psych 101. Prerequisite to other courses in the professional edu- 
cation sequence. Learning theory, thinking processes, and human growth and de- 
velopment. (3 hours lecture; 2 hours activity) 

312 Human Growth and Development (3) F, S 

Prerequisite: Psych 101. A comprehensive study of human growth and develop- 
ment with emphasis on childhood, adolescence, and middle and old age. Includes 
mental, social, emotional, and physical development. 

451 Principles of Educational Measurement (3) F, S 

Prerequisite: Education 311 or Psychology 311. Introduction to basic concepts, 
theory, and procedures for construction of informal and standardized tests. Ap- 
plication of measurement theory and statistical techniques toward problems of 
analysis, scaling, norming, and interpretation of test results. Practice in item 
writing for short classroom tests and intensive analysis of selected commercial 
standardized tests. 

510 Research Design and Analysis (3) F, S 

Prerequisite: bachelor’s degree, intent to complete program leading to MS in 
Education. Educ 451 will be a prerequisite in 1969. Hypothesis formation, in- 
strumentation, elements of design, treatment of data, hypothesis testing and in- 
ference, and analysis of educational data. Develop a research proposal. 

511 Survey of Educational Research (3) F, S 

Prerequisites: Educ 451 or equivalent; teaching experience. Review of descrip- 
tive statistics and statistical inference as applied to educational problems. Analysis 
of representative research papers. Principles of research design. Prepare a research 
proposal. 


EDUCATION, PUPIL PERSONNEL SERVICES 

351 Principles of Guidance (3) F, S 

Prerequisite: Psych 311 or Educ 312. Guidance related to educational objectives 
and needs of youth. Emphasis on special needs created by individual exceptionality, 
size and complexity of the modem educational system and modem society; general 
requirements, services, organization, and structure of a successful guidance pro- 
gram. Students seeking the special education credentials will emphasize the counsel- 
ing and guidance of the exceptional student. 

550 Counseling Theories and Processes (3) F, S (Formerly 452) 

Prerequisite: Educ 351. Seminar in the dynamics of counselor and client relation- 
ships, techniques and processes of various levels, and relation to personality 
theory. Major project and supervised clinical practice required. 

551 Educational and Career Orientation (3) F, S 

Prerequisite: Educ 550 or permission of instructor. Seminar in the principles 
of evaluating, classifying, and disseminating occupational and educational informa- 
tion in the guidance program; sources of occupational literature, occupational 
research, vocational surveys, and methods of studying the individual as a unique 
whole to help him develop his greatest career potential. Emphasis on the psycho- 
logical, sociological, economic, and clinical implications of career and educa- 
tional choice. A major project in career information is developed under super- 
vision. 


267 


Education, Reading 


552 Group Processes in Guidance (3) F, S 

Prerequisite: Educ 550 or permission of instructor. Intensive study of the dy- 
namics of group processes including the function of leadership, effective member- 
ship and techniques of group problem solving. Special emphasis on clinical group 
counseling including a semester project in a school setting. 

553 Administration and Organization of Pupil Personnel Programs (3) S 

Prerequisites: Educ 551 or permission of instructor. Development, organization, 
and administration of the pupil-personnel services. Seminar on analysis and evalu- 
ation of pupil personnel services by the case study method, curriculum, counselor 
competencies, staffing. 

555 Individual Diagnosis (3) F, S 

Prerequisites: Educ 451, 550, or consent of instructor. Clinical study of the tech- 
niques of individual diagnosis including the synthesis and interpretation of in- 
formation. Use of the life or developmental record, self-ratings, behavior ratings 
and tests as they relate to counseling with the normal and abnormal pupil. Identi- 
fication and remedation of learning difficulties emphasized. 

557A,B Seminar in School Counseling (1/1) F, 5 

Prerequisite: Educ 559A or concurrent enrollment in Educ 559B and consent 
of instructor. Final two-semester terminal sequence for the master of science in 
education with a concentration in school counseling. Supervised individual proj- 
ect or thesis required for the degree. 

559A,B Fieldwork in Pupil Personnel Services (2—6) F, S 

Prerequisite: Educ 551, 552, 555, admission to the CSCF pupil personnel 
credential program and permission of instructor. Guidance and counseling in the 
school setting under the supervision of local coordinator and college staff. Work 
assignments vary for school counselors, psychometrists, and child welfare workers. 
Work in a counseling relationship, parent conferences, and follow-up studies. 
May be repeated for credit up to a maximum of 12 units. (6 hours weekly field- 
work; 2 hours weekly conference) 

EDUCATION, READING 

516 Etiology of Reading Difficulties (3) F (Formerly 416) 

Prerequisite: teaching experience, Educ 506, and consent of instructor. Studies 
of the factors underlying learning disabilities in reading in children, adolescents 
and young adults. 

581 Analysis of Reading Difficulties (3) F, S (Formerly 481) 

Prerequisite: bachelor’s degree, teaching experience, Standard Teaching Creden- 
tial, Educ 506, and consent of the instructor. Analysis and diagnosis of reading 
difficulties. Techniques and methods or prevention and treatment. Individual re- 
mediation of student. Primary through secondary. (2 hours lecture and 3 hours 
laboratory) 

582 Analysis of Corrective Reading Practices (3) F, S (Formerly 482) 

Prerequisite: Educ 506, 511, 516, 581, and consent of the instructor. Critical eval- 
uation of reading and remedial reading practices. Short-term project in a school 
situation. (2 hours seminar and 2 hours activity) 

583A,B Remedial Reading: Casework (3) F, S 

Prerequisite: Educ 506, 511, 516, 581, 582, and consent of instructor. Diagnosis 
and remediation in reading through casework technique. Conferences with teach- 
ers, parents, consultants, and administrators. Fieldwork. (2 hours seminar, 2 hours 
fieldwork) 


268 


Education, School Administration 


EDUCATION, SCHOOL ADMINISTRATION 

503 Foundations for Administrative Leadership (3) F, S 

Prerequisite: consent of the instructor. Seminar on cultures and values to which 
schools must contribute: introduction to community sociology, tax systems and 
public administration; the literature of leadership. Screening for admission to pro- 
gram. Occasional special meetings. Required of all students during first registra- 
tion in school administration and supervision at this college. 

505 The Supervision of Curriculum (4) F, S 

Prerequisite: Educ 503. Seminar on development of a quality program of in- 
struction in both elementary and secondary schools; appraisal of programs of 
instruction; advanced principles of curricular review and modification. 

Evaluation of subject matter competence in area of supervisory specialization. 
Meets credential requirements in principles of curriculum construction and evalua- 
tion; supervision of instruction and curriculum in both elementary and secondary 
schools. 

561 Organization of School Systems (3) F, S 

Prerequisite: Educ 503. Seminar on structure, functions, trends, fiscal responsi- 
bilities and issues in respect to the government of education at federal, state, 
county, and local school district levels. Basic principles in school organization 
and administration. Special emphasis on intergovernmental relations and impact 
at local level. 

563 Principles of School Personnel Administration (2) F, S 

Prerequisite: Educ 503. Seminar on principles of organizational behavior, social 
processes inherent in effective leadership, and techniques of school personnel man- 
agement. 

564 Seminar in School Law (2) F 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. School law as a reflection of public policy; 
the California Education Code and the California Administrative Code, Title 5, 
and county counsel opinions as they affect administration, instruction, and finan- 
cial management of public schools. Court attorney general decisions in interpreting 
school law. Legal basis for public education in California. An elective course in 
school administration. 

565 Seminar in School Finance, Business Administration, and Buildings (3) S 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Emphasis on school finance, business admin- 
istration, and buildings as they implement an effective educational program. A 
study of financial principles. School revenues and expenditures, budgetary pro- 
cedures and processes, cost analysis; business management, and salary policies. An 
elective course in school administration. 

566 The Elementary School Principal and Supervisor (3) F, S 

Prerequisites: Educ 503, 505, 511, 561, 563. May be taken concurrently with 
Educ 769. Seminar on leadership roles of elementary school principal and super- 
visor, pupil personnel and instructional program in elementary school; working 
relations and morale among staff, community and pupils; parent education; rela- 
tions with central district staff; management and recordkeeping functions; teacher 
evaluation. 

567A4 Fieldwork and Seminar in School Administration (2,2) F, S 

Prerequisites: Educ 566 or 586 or concurrent registration, and consent of in- 
structor. Two-semester terminal sequence required for the M.S. in Education with 


269 


Education , Secondary 

a concentration in school administration. Includes directed field work in selected 
public schools and district offices. Supervised project or thesis required for degree. 
(4 hours weekly fieldwork, 2 hours weekly conference) 

586 The Secondary School Principal and Supervisor (3) F, S 

Prerequisites: Educ 503, 505, 511, 561, 563. May be taken concurrently with 
Educ 789. Seminar on leadership roles of secondary school principal and super- 
visor, pupil personnel and instructional program in the secondary school; the 
development and administration of vocational and adult education; working rela- 
tions and morale among staff, community and pupils; relations with central 
district staff, the management and recordkeeping functions; teacher evaluation. 

769 Directed Fieldwork in Elementary School Administration and Supervision (2) 
F/ S 

Prerequisite: Educ 566 or concurrent registration. Work in selected elementary 
schools and district offices. Further details in special publications. (8 hours weekly 
fieldwork, 1 hour weekly conference) 

789 Directed Fieldwork in Secondary School Administration and Supervision (2) 
F, S 

Prerequisite: Educ 586 or concurrent registration. Work in selected secondary 
schools and district offices. Further details in special publication. (8 hours weekly 
fieldwork, 1 hour weekly conference) 

EDUCATION, SECONDARY 

340 Principles and Curricula of Secondary Education (3) F, 5 

Required first course in the professional sequence for the standard teaching 
credential with specialization in secondary teaching. Principles of secondary edu- 
cation in the United States: organization, curriculum, and teaching practices. Cor- 
related with methods and materials courses in the major. Two hours of observa- 
tion per week in selected junior and senior high school classes. Application for 
admission to teacher education is included. (2 hours lecture, 2 hours fieldwork) 

442 Teaching— in the Secondary School 

Prerequisites: 20 units in the major. Education 311, Education 340, admission 
to teacher education, and senior standing; or consent of the instructor. A series 
of courses, listed dually in the School of Education and in the other appropriate 
departments, dealing with objectives, methods, and materials of teaching, including 
audiovisual instruction, the various subjects and areas in secondary schools. Re- 
quired, before student teaching, of students presenting majors in these areas or 
subjects for the general secondary credential or the standard teaching credential 
with specialization in secondary school teaching. Students without teaching expe- 
rience must register concurrently in Educ 449 to complete a teacher aide assign- 
ment in high schools. 

Art Ed 442 Teaching Art in the Secondary School (2) F 

Bus Ed 442 Teaching Business in the Secondary School (2) S 

Drama Ed 442 Teaching Drama in the Secondary School (2) S 

Engl Ed 442 Teaching English in the Secondary School (2) F, S 

For Lang Ed 442 Teaching Foreign Languages in the Secondary School (2) S 

Journ Ed 442 Teaching Journalism in the Secondary School (2) S 

Math Ed 442 Teaching Mathematics in the Secondary School (2) S 

270 


Education, Secondary 


Mus Ed 442 Teaching Vocal Music in the Public Schools (2) S 

Mus Ed 443 Teaching Instrumental Music in the Public Schools (2) S 

PE 442 Teaching Physical Education in the Secondary School (2) F 

Sci Ed 442 Teaching Science in the Secondary School (2) F 

Soc Sci Ed 442 Teaching Social Sciences in the Secondary School (2) F, S 

Speech Ed 442 Teaching Speech in th^ Secondary School (2) F 

443 Principles of Core Curriculum (2) S 

Prerequisite: teaching experience or consent of the instructor. Unity and inter- 
relationships of human learning and behavior and the curricular processes and 
arrangements by which this may be achieved. Seminar on development, principles, 
and application of core curricula; guidance functions; evaluation; and roles of the 
teacher. 

445 Junior High School Education (3) F 

Prerequisite: Educ 442 or Educ 331 or consent of instructor. Seminar on prin- 
ciples and procedures for developing the junior high school program. Purposes, 
curriculum, and organization of the junior high school are stressed including 
examination of recent innovations and proposals. Designed for students with ele- 
mentary or secondary backgrounds who plan to teach in the junior high school. 

446 Secondary School Curriculum (3) F, S 

Prerequisite: student teaching or teaching experience or consent of instructor. 
Fundamentals of curriculum development. Seminar on current issues within sec- 
ondary education. Curricular organization and current practices. Survey and evalu- 
ation of newer curricular programs. Paper or project of creative, analytic or review 
of literature type is required. Designed for experienced teachers interested in cur- 
riculum development and/or instructional supervision. 

449 Field Work in Methods of Teaching in Secondary Schools (1) F, S 

Prerequisite: Educ 340, Educ 311, admission to teacher education or consent of 
instructor. Participation in the instruction of a secondary school class as a teacher 
aide. Integrated with coursework in the teaching of the major. Must be taken 
concurrently with Educ 442 and students must allow sufficient time in their 
schedules, at the same hour each day, to serv e as a teacher aide. 

547 Seminar for Secondary Education (3) F 

Prerequisite: ' luc 749 or consent of the instructor. Persistent problems in sec- 
ondary education and survey of related literature; causes of and solutions for these 
problems. Application of scientific method to educational problems, sources of 
educational research, and to techniques of cooperative thinking. 

749 Student Teaching In— in the Secondary School and Seminar (6 or 2) F, S 

A series of courses in student teaching and seminars listed dually in the School 
of Education and in the other appropriate departments. 

Prerequisites: Educ 442, Educ 449, and admission to student teaching. Student 
teaching for the general secondary credential or the standard teaching credential 
with specialization in secondary school teaching. Participation in a regular sec- 
ondary school teaching program for half-days for a full semester. Includes a 
seminar each w r eek in problems and procedures of secondary school teaching, 
under the direction of the respective college supervisor. (Minimum of 15 hours 
a week in a secondary school; 2 hours per week in seminar) 


271 


Education , Service Courses 

Art Ed 749 Student Teaching in Art in the Secondary School and Seminar 
(6) F, S 

But Ed 749 Student Teaching in Business in the Secondary School and Semi- 
nar (6) F, S 

Drama Ed 749 Student Teaching in Drama in the Secondary School and 
Seminar (6) F, S 

Engl Ed 749 Student Teaching in English in the Secondary School and 
Seminar (6) F, S 

For Lang Ed 749 Student Teaching in Foreign Languages in the Secondary 
School and Seminar (6) F, S 

Journ Ed 749 Student Teaching in Journalism in the Secondary School and 
Seminar (6) F, S 

Math Ed 749 Student Teaching in Mathematics in the Secondary School and 
Seminar (6) F, S 

Mus Ed 749 Student Teaching in Music in the Secondary School and Seminar 
(6) F, S 

PE 749 Student Teaching in Physical Education in the Secondary School and 
Seminar (6) F, S 

Sci Ed 749 Student Teaching in Science in the Secondary School and Seminar 
(6) F, S 

Soc Sci Ed 749 Student Teaching in Social Science in the Secondary School and 
Seminar (6) F, S 

Speech Ed 749 Student Teaching in Speech in the Secondary School and 
Seminar (6) F, S 


EDUCATION, SERVICE COURSES 

491 Audiovisual Education (2) F, S 

Prerequisites: Educ Found 311, Educ Sec 442, or consent of the instructor. 
Media in communication, psychological bases, development, curricular function, 
evaluation. Survey of equipment and materials available, preparation of instructional 
materials for classroom use. (1 hour lecture, 2 hours activity) 

499 Independent Study (1-3) F, S 

Prerequisite: senior or graduate standing, approval of instructor and department 
prior to registration. Conduct of an individual investigation under supervision of 
a faculty member; investigation might be an experiment, a library study, or a 
creative project; only students of demonstrated capacity and maturity will be 
approved; adequate prerequisite study necessary. May be repeated for credit. 

EDUCATION, SOCIAL FOUNDATIONS 

401 Sociological, Historical, Philosophical Foundations of Education (4) F, S 

(Formerly 301) 

Prerequisites: Educ 311, admission to teacher education or consent of the in- 
structor. Survey of social, historical, and philosophical foundations of education 
from ancient times to the present, discussed in the light of their effect upon 
modem educational theory and practice. 

402 Comparative Education (3) F, S 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Acceptable as approved option for MS pro- 
gram and/or elective in senior year. Seminar on international educational pro- 
grams; study of philosophies and practices in administration, control, financing, 
and operation of educational systems of selected areas and countries. 


272 


Special Education 


403 History of Education (3) F 

Prerequisites: history of world civilization and Educ 331 or Educ 442 or consent 
of the instructor. The main streams of educational history in Europe and Amer- 
ica, with particular emphasis on the ways these main streams have affected the 
current scene in the United States. 

406 Educational Sociology (3) S 

Prerequisite: Educ 331 or Educ 442, or consent of the instructor. The school 
in the social order; analysis of cultural factors affecting school, and the special 
culture of the school; consideration of research in selected areas of the school- 
culture relationship. 

501 Philosophy of Education (3) S 

Prerequisites: postgraduate standing and Educ 339 or 739 or Educ 749, or con- 
sent of the instructor. Uses of theories of knowledge, value and reality in dealing 
with educational problems; application of contemporary systems of thought to 
education. 

SPECIAL EDUCATION 

471 Exceptional Children (3) F, S 

Prerequisite: Educ 311. Seminar on the study of children who deviate from the 
average in the elementary and the secondary schools; physically handicapped, men- 
tally retarded, gifted, socially maladjusted, emotionally disturbed, and delinquent. 
Special educational services, curriculum, procedures, and materials necessary to 
promote their maximum development. 

472 Gifted Children (2) F 

Prerequisites: Educ 311 and Educ 331, or Educ 431, or Educ 442. Identification, 
principles of instruction, grouping, individualized instruction, classroom enrich- 
ment. Problem solving and research experiences in science, social studies, and math- 
ematics, reading programs and literature, creative writing, oral language. 

473 Mental Retardation and Brain Injury (3) F 

Prerequisite: Educ 471. Organic and cultural basis of mental retardation and 
brain injury, including social, psychological, and vocational problems. Child 
growth, sensory development, learning characteristics of mentally retarded and 
brain injured children, and techniques of working with parents will be consid- 
ered. 

474 Curriculum and Methods for Teaching the Mentally Retarded (3) S 

Prerequisite: Educ 473 and Educ 331 or Educ 442. Curriculum development, 
methods, and materials for teaching the educablc and trainable mentally retarded 
at the elementary and secondary levels. 

475 Observation and Individual Instruction with the Mentally Retarded (3) F 

Prerequisite: Educ 474. Supervised observation and participation with the educa- 
ble and the trainable mentally retarded at both the elementary and secondary 
levels of education. (Three hours of observation and participawon per week plus 
two hours of lecture and discussion.) 

477 The Educationally Handicapped Child (3) F 

Prerequisite: Educ 471 and consent of instructor. Behavioral characteristics of 
the educationally handicapped child, the child with a neurological handicap or 
a behavioral disorder as defined by the California Education Code. Educational 
procedures, perceptual and motor training, evaluation, parent guidance. 


273 


Health Education 


514 Graduate Seminar: Behavorial Research on Children with Learning Disorders 
(3) F 

Prerequisites: Educ 511, consent of instructor, and teaching experience with ex- 
ceptional children. Critical analysis of behavioral research on children with learn- 
ing disorders. Resources, criteria for evaluation of studies with exceptional chil- 
dren, historical view of research in special education. Research relating to learn- 
ing and handicapping conditions, and efficacy of special methods and materials 
will be reviewed. 

570 Graduate Clinic in Exceptional Children: Advanced Developmental Psychology 

(3) F 

Prerequisite: Educ 555. Clinical work with children focusing on diagnosis, pre- 
scription and remediation of developmental deficiencies: language, motor, percep- 
tion. Students will spend three hours a week in direct work with children and 
two hours in seminar. 

571 Graduate Clinic in Exceptional Children: Advanced Psychology of Learning 

(3) 5 

Prerequisite: Educ 570. Clinical work with children focusing on diagnosing, 
prescriptions and remediations of educational and behavioral deficiencies. Students 
will spend three hours a week in direct work with children and two hours 
in seminar. 

597 Graduate Project: Special Education (3) S 

Prerequisites: Educ 514 and consent of instructor. Individual research on an em- 
pirical project, with conferences with the adviser, culminating in a project. 

598 Thesis: Special Education (3) S 

Prerequisite: Educ 514 and consent of instructor. Individual research on an em- 
pirical problem, with conferences with advisers, culminating in a thesis. 

779 Student Teaching With Mentally Retarded Pupils (4) S 

Prerequisites: Educ 475 and concurrent enrollment in Educ 339 or 739 (for four 
units) or Educ 749 (for two units). Student teaching in a special class program for 
the educable or trainable mentally retarded at cither the elementary or secondary 
level. (Elementary level: minimum of 30 hours a week in an elementary school; 
2 hours per week in seminar. Secondary level: minimum of 15 hours a week in 
a secondary school; 2 hours per week in seminar.) 

HEALTH EDUCATION 

(Offered by the Department of Health Education, Physical Education, 
and Recreation) 

HE 101 Personal and Community Health (2) F, S 

Meaning and significance of physical, mental and social health as related to the 
individual and to society; alcohol and narcotics education; fire prevention; public 
safety and accident prevention. 

HE 102 Prevention and First Aid (2) F, 5 

Study of the hazards in man’s environment and the common accidents related 
thereto. Emphasis is placed upon both the care and prevention of accidents. Stu- 
dents will be certified in standard and advanced American Red Cross first aid 
procedures. (1 hour lecture, 2 hours activity) 

HE 419 Environmental Health (3) F 

Prerequisite: HE 101 or equivalent. The theoretical considerations of the complex 
relationship of the physical environment to preventive medicine and public health. 

274 


Physical Education 


PHYSICAL EDUCATION 

(Offered by the Department of Health Education, 

Physical Education and Recreation) 

GENERAL EDUCATION REQUIREMENT IN PHYSICAL EDUCATION 

All students must succesfully complete four semesters of physical education 
activity courses of one-half unit each to fulfill the general education requirement 
for the baccalaureate degree. Students on a normal schedule will be expected to 
complete this requirement during the freshman and sophomore year. Not more than 
six units of credit in physical education activities, including intercollegiate athletics 
courses, may be applied toward credit for graduation. Credit in intercollegiate 
athletics courses may not meet more than two semesters of the college general 
education requirement. Physical education activities courses may not be repeated 
for credit. Upper division students who have completed the general education 
requirement in physical education may elect additional activities. 

EXEMPTIONS OR POSTPONEMENTS 

Students 25 or older are exempted from the physical education requirement.* 

The college physician may postpone the enrollment of a student in a physical 
education activity course. 

Students unable to participate in the regular physical education program will 
be assigned to an adapted physical education class. 

• FOR MEN 


AQUATIC 

GROUP AND 

INDIVIDUAL 

DANCE 

ACTIVITIES: 

TEAM ACTIVITIES: 

ACTIVITIES: 

ACTIVITIES: 

(PE 110 Series) 

(PE 120 Series) 

(PE 130 Series) 

(PE 140 Series) 


121m Team 

Sports F 

122m Team 

132m Combatives F, S 
133m Physical 

Conditioning F, S 



Sports S 



• FOR WOMEN 


121w Team 


133w Physical 

Sports 

122w Team 

F 

Conditioning F, S 

Sports 

S 



COEDUCATIONAL 


111 Swimming F, S 

123 Group Games 

112 Intermediate 

(Open only to 

Swimming F, S 

prospective 

113 Lifesaving & 

elementary 

Water Safety F. S 

school 


teachers) F, 


130 Badminton 

F. S 

141 

Social Dance F. S 

131 Gymnastics & 

142 

Folk & Square 


Tumbling 

F. S 


Dance F, 

S 

134 Adaptive Physical 

143 

Modern 


Education 

F, S 


Dance F, 

S 

135 Intermediate 


144 

Intermediate 


Tennis 

F. S 


Modern 


136 Archery 

F. S 


Dance F, 

s 

137 Golf 

F, S 

149 

Creative 


138 Tennis 

F. S 


Movement 


139 Handball 

F, S 


& Dance F, 

s 

150 Intermediate 





Badminton 

F, S 




151 Intermediate 





Gymnastics 

F, S 




157 Intermediate 





Golf 

F, S 





* Interpretation: A student under 25 years of age at the time of admission to the college is required to take 
all four semesters of the requirement. 


275 


Physical Education 

To assure a balanced program for each student, physical education activities are 
classified into four categories: (1) aquatic activities, (2) group and team activities, 
(3) dual and individual activities, and (4) dance activities. Students are counseled 
to complete no more than two courses from any given category. 

COURSES IN INTERCOLLEGIATE ATHLETICS 

Consent of the coach of the sport is required for enrollment. Each semester of 
enrollment carries one unit of credit. Credit in intercollegiate athletics courses 
may not meet more than two semesters of the college general education require- 
ment in physical education. Not more than six units of credit in physical education 
activities, including intercollegiate athletics courses, may be applied toward credit 
for graduation. May be repeated for a maximum of six units. 


PE 

170A 

Intercollegiate Sports for Women (Basketball 

(D 

S 

PE 

170B 

Intercollegiate Sports for Women (Volleyball) 

(1) 

F 

PE 

181 

Baseball (1) S 



PE 

182 

Basketball (1) F 



PE 

183 

Cross Country (1) F 



PE 

186 

Golf (1) S 



PE 

187 

Gymnastics (1) F 



PE 

192 

Soccer (1) F 



PE 

193 

Swimming (1) S 



PE 

194 

Tennis (1) S 



PE 

195 

Track and Field (1) S 



PE 

196 

Water Polo (1) F 



PE 

197 

Wrestling (1) S 





PROFESSIONAL THEORY COURSES 



PE 201 Introduction to Physical Education and Recreation 

(3) 

F 


Introduction to physical education programs in public and private agencies, per- 
sonal, social and professional requirements of the physical education teacher and 
recreation leader, includes the origin and development of the professions of health 
education, physical education and recreation with emphasis upon their signficance 
and function in contemporary American culture. 

PE 210 Water Safety Instructor (2) F 

Prerequisite: PE 113 or equivalent and consent of the instructor. This course 
prepares the student to teach swimming and life saving and to supervise aquatic 
programs. Successful completion of this course will qualify the student for cer- 
tification as an ARC Water Safety Instructor. Course cannot be used to satisfy 
a semester of the general education physical education requirement (1 hour lec- 
ture, 2 hours activity). 

PE 214 Skin and SCUBA Diving (2) S 

Prercquisiste : PE 113 or equivalent and the consent of the instructor. The 
techniques of skin and SCUBA diving. Theory of diving, safety procedures, and 
applications of diving will be covered. (1 hour of lecture, 2 hours of activity). 
May be used to satisfy the fourth semester of the general education physical 
education activity requirement. 

PE 311 Analysis of Aquatics (2) F 

Prerequisites: PE 113 or equivalent and permission of the instructor. Analysis of 
diving, swimming, lifesaving including water safety procedures (1 hour lecture, 
2 hours activity) 


276 


Physical Education 


PE 312 Analysis of Combatives (2) S 

Prerequisite: PE 132M Combatives or equivalent. Analysis of judo (jujitsu), 
wrestling and self-defense. (1 hour lecture, 2 hours activity) 

PE 313 Analysis of Folk, Square and Social Dance (2) S 

Prerequisite: PE 141, PE 142 or equivalent. Analysis of basic dance skills, inter- 
national folk, square, round and social dancing. (1 hour lecture, 2 hours activity) 

PE 314 Analysis of Individual and Dual Sports (2) F 

Prerequisites: proficiency in skills covered and permission of the instructor. 
Analysis of archery, badminton, golf and tennis. (1 hour lecture, 2 hours activity) 

PE 315 Analysis of Modern Dance (2) F 

Prerequisites: PE 143, PE 144 or equivalent and permission of instructor. Analysis 
of modem dance including choreography, program planning and dance accompa- 
niment. (1 hour lecture, 2 hours activity) 

PE 317A Analysis of Team Sports (W) (2) F 

Prerequisites: proficiency in the skills covered and permission of the instructor. 
Analysis of basketball, field hockey and soccer. (1 hour lecture, 2 hours activity) 

PE 317B Analysis of Team Sports (W) (2) S 

Prerequisites: proficiency in the skills of the sports covered and permission of the 
instructor. Analysis of speedball and specd-a-way, softball and volleyball. (1 hour 
lecture, 2 hours activity) 

PE 318 Analysis of Team Sports (M) (2) F 

Prerequisites: PE 12 1M, PE 122M or equivalent and permission of the instructor. 
Analysis of soccer, softball, speedball, and volleyball. (1 hour lecture, 2 hours 
activity) 

PE 319 Analysis of Gymnastics and Tumbling (2) F 

Prerequisites: PE 131M, PE 13 1W or equivalent and permission of the instructor. 
Analysis of apparatus gymnastics and tumbling. (1 hour lecture, 2 hours activity) 

PE 320 Theory of Coaching Basketball (2) S 

Prerequisites: proficiency in basketball and permission of the instructor. Analysis 
of skills, instructional procedures and coaching techniques necessary in coaching 
competitive basketball. (1 hour lecture, 2 hours activity) 

PE 321 Theory of Coaching Baseball (2) S 

Prerequisites: consent of the instructor and upper division standing. This course 
is designed to help prepare the student as a coach of baseball. Emphasis is on 
offensive and defensive coaching techniques as well as conditioning, budget prepa- 
ration, purchase and care of equipment, scheduling, officiating, and design and care 
of facilities. (1 hour lecture, 2 hours activity) 

PE 322 Theory of Coaching Track and Field (2) S 

This course is designed to prepare students in the fundamental techniques of 
coaching track and field activities. (1 hour lecture, 2 hours activity). 

PE 324 Theory and Principles of Human Motor Learning (3) F 

Prerequisites: PE 201 and permission of the instructor. An analysis of current 
theories of motor learning as related to human performance. Philosophical bases 
are developed from which basic principles arc evolved. 


277 


Recreation 


PE 325 Case Studies in Human Motor Learning (3) S 

Prerequisite: PE 324. Case studies involving human physical performance. Se- 
quence of activities, individual needs, institutional patterns of organization and pro- 
gramming. 

PE 333 Physical Education and Human Development (3) F, S 

Prerequisite: Educ Found 311. Emphasis is placed upon characteristics of the 
child, particularly as these relate to physical growth and development; basic 
mechanical principles underlying efficient movement; and programs for physical 
needs of children in the elementary school. 

PE 416 Kinesiology (3) F 

Prerequisite: Bio 361 or equivalent. The study of human motion. 

PE 417 Physiology of Exercise (3) F 

Prerequisite: Bio 361 or equivalent. The study of physiological processes in 
physical activities and the effects of training upon performance. 

PE 418 Adapted and Corrective Activities (3) S 

Prerequisite: PE 416. The study and selection of activities and programs for 
students physically unable to participate in the regular physical education program. 

PE 420 Tests and Measurements in Physical Education (3) S 

A study of the development and use of tests and measurements in physical 
education in the evaluation of objectives, programs, and student achievement. 

PE 442 Teaching Physical Education in the Secondary School (2) F 

Prerequisite: Education 340, Education 311, admission to teacher education, 
senior standing or consent of the instructor. The student who has not had teaching 
experience must register concurrently in Education 449. Sec pages under Secondary 
Education for description of Standard Teaching Credential Program. Objectives, 
methods, and materials including audio-visual instruction for teaching physical 
education in secondary schools. 

PE 552 Human Bio-Kinetics (3) F 

Prerequisite: PE 416 or equivalent background in kinesiology and physiology. 
A study of advanced theories and a detailed analysis of human movement. 

PE 749 Student Teaching in Physical Education in the Secondary School and 
Seminar (6) F, S 

RECREATION 

(Offered by the Department of Health Education, 

Physical Education and Recreation) 

Rec 203 Recreation Programs and Activities (2) S 

Prerequisite: consent of the instructor. Theory and activity course, leadership 
in recreation programs, activities in recreation agencies. Laboratory experiences 
and practice included. (4 hours activity) 


278 


SCHOOL OF ENGINEERING 


101 Introduction to Engineering and Computers (1) F 

An introduction designed to familiarize the student with the nature, respon- 
sibilities and opportunities of the profession coupled with an introduction to 
computer programming. 

102 Graphical Analysis (2) F 

Prerequisite: one semester of high school graphics. Emphasizes graphical com- 
putation, vectors, nomography, representations and analysis of empirical data. (6 
hours laboratory) 

201 Mechanics (3) F 

Prerequisites: Math 150B, Physics 221 A. An introductory development of the 
fundamentals of statics with emphasis on application to strength of materials. 

202 Properties of Engineering Materials (3) S 

Prerequisites: Chem 101, Math 150A, Physics 221 A. Applications of basic prin- 
ciples of physics and chemistry to the selection and use of engineering materials, 
with specific emphasis on mechanical behavior of metals and upon the electrical 
properties of semiconducting materials. 

203 Electric Circuits (3) S 

Prerequisites: Physics 22 IB, Math 250A. Analysis of electric and magnetic cir- 
cuits, network theorems, polyphase circuits, introduction to electrical machinery. 

203L Electric Circuits Lab (1) S 

Prerequisite: Egr. 203 (may be taken concurrently. Laboratory applications of 
Egr. 203. (3 hours laboratory) 

205 Digital Computation (2) S 

Prerequisites: Egr. 101 or QM 264 and Math. 150A. Applications of the digital 
computer to elementary engineering problems. 

402 Elements of Digital Computers (3) S (Offered in alternate years) 

Prerequisite: Egr. 314. Introduction to digital computers, Boolean algebra, switch- 
ing networks, input-output devices, analog-digital conversion, arithmetic and 
control units. 

402L Digital Techniques Laboratory (1) S (Offered in alternate years) 

Corequisite: Egr. 402. Experimental study of digital logic and switching cir- 
cuits. (3 hours laboratory) 

403 Computer Methods in Numerical Analysis (3) F, S 

Prerequisite: Egr. 312. The use of digital computers in the solution of algebraic, 
transcendental, simultaneous, ordinary' and partial differential equations. 

404 Analog Computation (2) S (Offered in alternate years) 

Prerequisite: Egr. 303, 312. Basic analog computer elements, programming, the 
solution of linear and nonlinear problems, transfer function generation, simulation. 

404L Analog Computation Laboratory (1) S (Offered in alternate years) 

Corequisite: Egr. 404. Experimental study of linear and nonlinear problems using 
an analog computer. Simulation studies of physical systems. (3 hours laboratory) 


279 


Engineering 


410 Intermediate Dynamics (3) F (Offered in alternate years) 

Prerequisite: Egr. 312. Kinematics and dynamics of particles and rigid bodies, 
motion in potential fields, Lagrange’s equations. 

412 Theory of Elasticity (3) S (Offered in alternate years) 

Prerequisite: Egr. 301, 308. The differential equations which govern the behavior 
of an elastic solid, and their applications to a variety of problems in two and three 
dimensions using various coordinate systems. 

416 Feedback Control Systems (3) F (Offered in alternate years) 

Prerequisite: Egr. 312. Formulation of transfer functions, block diagrams and 
signal flow graphs, open-loop and closed-loop frequency response, root locus 
methods, consideration of stability and steady-state errors. 

423 Engineering Probability and Statistics (3) S (Offered in alternate years) 

Prerequisite: Egr. 308. Engineering problems involving discrete and continuous 
random variables, distribution and density functions, Bayes theorem, parameter 
estimation, statistical inference. 

434 Direct Energy Conversion (3) S (Offered in alternate years) 

Prerequisite: Egr. 203, 304, 305. The direct conversion of heat to electrical 
energy, thermoelectric, thermionic and magnctohydrodynamic devices, solar and 
fuel cells. 

455 Solid-state Electronics (3) F 

Prerequisite: Egr. 314. Semiconductor properties and the physical principles and 
theory underlying the operation of semiconductor devices; characteristics and 
approximate models for circuit analysis. 

501 Microwave Techniques (3) F (Offered alternate years) 

Prerequisite: Egr. 419. Application of network theory to behavior of microwave 
waveguiding structures, passive microwave devices, masers and parametric am- 
plifiers. 

502 State-space Theory of Control and Systems (3) S 

Prerequisite: Egr. 416. State-space theory' of control and systems, stability anal- 
ysis and control system design using state-variable theory', introduction to optimal 
control problems and Pontryagin's maximum principle. 

503 Information Theory and Coding (3) S 

Prerequisite: Math. 335A or Egr. 423. Information measures, probabilistic studies 
of the transmission and encoding of information. Shannon’s fundamental therorems, 
coding for noisy channels. 

504 Linear Network Synthesis (3) F 

Prerequisite: Egr. 313. Generalized analysis methods of passive networks, modern 
synthesis procedures for realizing driving-point and transfer-functions, approxima- 
tion methods in filter design. 

506 Digital Computer Systems (3) S (Offered alternate years) 

Prerequisite: Egr. 402. The organization and logical design of digital data proc- 
essing systems for computation, information processing, and control. 

507 Statistical Communication Theory (3) S 

Prerequisite: Egr. 503. Characterization of random signals and processes, trans- 
mission of random signals through linear systems, noise considerations, detec- 
tion theory', optimum receivers. 


280 


Engineering 


508 Intermediate Fluid Mechanics (3) F (Offered alternate years) 

Prerequisite: Egr. 415. Basic equations of fluid dynamics, Navicr-Stokes equa- 
tions, similarity parameters, inviscid fluids, potential flow. 

511 Advanced Dynamics (3) S (Offered alternate years) 

Prerequisite: Egr. 410. The dynamics of particles and rigid bodies by the use of 
the formulations of the laws of mechanics due to Newton, Euler, Lagrange and 
Hamilton; applications. 

512 Gyrodynamics (3) F (Offered alternate years) 

Prerequisite: Egr. 410. Frames of reference, Eulerian angles, spinning disks and 
rotors, gravity effects, gyroscopes, control of forced and free vibrations. 

518 Advanced Fluid Mechanics (3) S (Offered alternate years) 

Prerequisite: Egr. 508. Viscous flow, Couette and Poiscuille flow, introduction 
to turbulence and boundary layer theory. 

524 Advanced Thermodynamics (3) F (Offered alternate years) 

Prerequisite: Egr. 316. Equilibrium and stability criteria, chemical thermody- 
namics, multiple reaction systems, ionization, equilibrium composition. 

530 Advanced Strength of Materials (3) F (Offered alternate years) 

Prerequisite: Egr. 301. Castigliano’s theorem, principle of virtual work, applica- 
tions to cylinders, shrink fits, curved beams, clastic and inelastic buckling of 
columns. 

535 Numerical Methods (3) S 

Prerequisite: Egr. 403. Introduction to the theory of errors, difference operators, 
summation procedures, polynomial approximations and Gaussian quadrature. 

555 Applied Electromagnetic Theory (3) S (Offered alternate years) 

Prerequisite: Egr. 419. Dynamic electromagnetic field theory; solution of vector 
boundary' value problems with applications to guided waves, cavities, and an- 
tennas. 

557 Sampled-data Systems (3) F (Offered alternate years) 

Prerequisite: Egr. 416. Compensation techniques for linear control systems, 
analysis of sampled-data and digital control systems, Z-transforms, consideration 
of stability'. 

559 Active Network Synthesis (3) S (Offered alternate years) 

Prerequisite: Egr. 504. Analysis and design of linear active circuits based on 
pole-zero concepts; synthesis of active networks with controlled sources, nega- 
tive emittance converters, operational amplifiers. 

569 Orbital Mechanics (3) S (Offered alternate years) 

Prerequisite: Egr. 410. The two-body problem, geometry of orbits, transfers, 
perturbation, stability' and oscillations, rendezvous. 

573 Aerospace Guidance Systems (3) S (Offered alternate years) 

Prerequisite: Egr. 512. Rate and integrating gyros, accelerometers, stabilized plat- 
forms, gimbal servos, principles of inertial navigation systems. 

575 Kinetic Theory and Statistical Thermodynamics (3) S (Offered alternate 
years) 

Prerequisite: Egr. 524. Statistical study of ideal gases, kinetic theory', statistical 
mechanics, electron gas, thermionic emission, photon and phonon gases. 


281 


Engineering 

577 Stress Analysis (3) S (Offered alternate years) 

Prerequisite: Egr. 421. Analysis of stresses and strains in structural members and 
machine elements under static and dynamic loads, analytical and experimental 
techniques. 

581A Systems Engineering Methodology (3) F 

Prerequisite: graduate standing in engineering. The systems engineering process, 
the encrgy-materials-information interdependency, modeling and simulation and 
the functions of computing. 

581 B Systems Engineering Methodology (3) S 

Prerequisite: Egr. 581 A. Large-scale systems; the basic concepts of signals, noise 
and information; optimization methods and applications thereof. 

585 Systems Engineering Mathematical Tools (3) F 

Prerequisite: Math. 335A or Egr. 423 and Fourier and Laplace transforms. 
Metric and linear space theory, transformations, linear functionals, optimization 
techniques, linear programming. 

587 Operational Analysis Techniques in Systems Engineering (3) S 

Prerequisite: Math. 335A or Egr. 423. Operational research models; applications 
of probability theory to reliability, quality control, waiting line theory, Markov 
chains; Monte Carlo methods. 

591 Analytical Methods in Engineering (1-6) F, S 

Prerequisite: graduate standing and consent of the instructor. Application of 
advanced analytical methods in the solution of complicated problems in civil, 
electrical and mechanical engineering. 

597 Graduate Projects (1-6) F, S 

Prerequisite: permission of adviser. 

598 Thesis (1-6) F, 5 

Prerequisite: permission of adviser. 


282 


FACULTY AND ADMINISTRATION 

1966-67 


(Year in parentheses indicates date of appointment) 

LANGSDORF, WILLIAM B. (1959), President and Professor of History 
B.A., M.A., Occidental College; Ph.D., University of California 
ABRAHAM, JOHN A. (1965), Associate Professor of English 

Ph.B., Marquette University; M.A., Ph.D., University of Wisconsin 
* ADAMS, PHILLIP A. (1963), Associate Professor of Biology 
B.S., University of California; M.A., Ph.D., Harvard University 
ADAMS, RAYMOND V. (1960), Professor of Physics and Chairman, Physics Department 
B.S., Kansas State University; Ph.D., California Institute of Technology 
ALAMSHAII, WILLIAM H. (1959), Professor of Philosophy and Chairman, Philosophy Depart- 
ment 

M.A., Claremont Graduate School; Ph.D., University of Southern California 
ALBRECHT, EDNA L. (1966), Assistant Professor of Physical Education 
B.A., M.Ed., Whittier College 

ALEXANDER, JAMES P. (1960), Associate Professor of Communication 
B.A., M.S., University of Southern California 
ALLEN, HOLLIS P. (1960), Professor of Education and Coordinator of Graduate Studies 
Emeritus since 1965 

B.A., Pomona College; M.A., Ed.D., Stanford University; LL.D., Claremont Graduate School 
AMES, DENNIS B. (1960), Professor of Mathematics and Chairman, Mathematics Department 
B.A., M.A., Bishop’s University; Ph.D., Yale University 
ANDERSEN, MARTIN P. (1965), Professor of Speech 
B.A., M.A., Ph.D., University of Wisconsin 
ARANA, OSWALDO (1965), Associate Professor of Spanish 

B.A., Texas Christian University; M.A., Ph.D., University of Colorado 
ASHLEY, THOMAS J. (1961), Associate Professor of Political Science 
B.A., Fresno State College; Ph.D., Claremont Graduate School 
AUSTIN, DON D. (1963), Assistant Professor of English 

B.A., M.A., University of Redlands; Ph.D., University of Washington 
BABCOCK, RICHARD D. (1966), Assistant Professor of Management 
B.S., Indiana University; M.S., Arizona State University 
tBAILLIE, ALLAN S. (1965), Assistant Professor of Management 

B.Sc., B.S.M.E., Ohio University; M.B.A., University of Washington 
BARISH, NATALIE (1966), Associate Professor of Biology 

A. B., Goucher College; M.A., Indiana University; Ph.D., Ohio State University 

BARRES, STEPHEN J. (1961), Professor of Labor Relations and Management and Chairman, 
Management Department 

B. A., Texas Western College; M.S., Ph.D., Purdue University 
BARRETT, JEAN A. (1963), Associate Professor of Physical Education 

B.S., Cortland State Teachers; Ed.M., Ed.D., University of Buffalo 
BATES, MARILYN M. (1966), Assistant Professor of Education 
B.A., M.A., California State College at Long Beach 
BEATON, C. RUSSELL (1964), Assistant Professor of Quantitative Methods 
B.A., VViliamette University 
BECK, WARREN A. (1961), Professor of History 

B.A., M.A., Wayne University; Ph.D., Ohio State University 
BECKER, ERNEST A. (1959), Dean of Students and Professor of Philosophy 

B.A., Amherst College; B.D., Hartford Theological Seminary; M.A., Ed.D., University of 
Southern California 

*BELL, CHARLES G. (1964), Assistant Professor of Political Science 
B.A., Pomona College; M.A., Ph.D., University of Southern California 


* On leave spring 1967. 
t On leave fall 1966. 


283 


Faculty and Administration 


BELLOT, LELAND J. (1964), Assistant Professor of History 
B.A., Lamar State College; M.A., Rice Institute 
BENSON, RUSSELL V. (1965), Associate Professor of Mathematics 

B.E.E., Cornell University; M.A., Ph.D., University of Southern California 
BIGELOW, RALPH (1966), Associate Dean of Students, Director of Admissions and Records, 
and Associate Professor 
B.Mus., M.Mus., University of Rochester 
BLANCHARD, MILTON C. (1961), Building Coordinator 
B.S., M.Ed., Tufts University 
BLEND, HARVEY (1963), Professor of Physics 

B.S., University of Texas; M.S., Ph.D., University of California, Los Angeles 
BOARINO, GERALD L. (1965), Assistant Professor of Spanish 
B.A., M.A., Ph.D., University of California 
BRADLEY, BETTY (1966), Student Activities Adviser 
B.A., San Diego State College 

BRADSHAW, L. JACK (1965), Associate Professor of Biology 
B.A., Ph.D., Stanford University 
BRAGG, MARY JANE (1966), Librarian II 

B.A., Occidental Collge; M.A., 1941, Columbia University; M.L.S., University of California at 
Los Angeles 

tBRATTSTROM, BAYARD H. (1960), Professor of Zoology 

B.S., San Diego State College; M.A., Ph.D., University of California, Los Angeles 
BREESE, LAUREN W., Assistant Professor of History 

B.A., Pomona College; M.A., University of California at Los Angeles 
BRISTOW, RONALD M. (1959), Associate Dean of Counseling and Testing, and Associate 
Professor 

B.A., M.A., Ed.D., University of Southern California 
BROCKMANN, LOUIS O. (1963), Professor of Education, and Chairman, School Services Depart- 
ment 

B.A., M.A., Ph.D., University of Wisconsin 
BROWN, EDWARD D. (1963), Professor of Drama 

B.A., Louisiana State University; M.A., Michigan State University; Ph.D., University of Denver 
BROWN, GILES T. (1960), Professor of History, Chairman, Histqry Department 

B.A., San Diego State College; M.A., University of California; Ph.D., Claremont Graduate School 
BRYDEN, JOHN H. (1961), Professor of Chemistry 

B.S., College of Idaho; M.S., California Institute of Technology; Ph.D., University of California, 
Los Angeles 

BUCK, CHARLES W. (1964), Counselor in Counseling and Testing 
B.A., Occidental College; M.A., University of Oregon 
BURKE, MAX W. (1960), Director of Placement Services and Associate Professor 
B.A., University of Iowa; B.D., Colgate-Rochester Divinity School 
CALHOUN, ROLAND L. (1961), Assistant Professor of Psychology 
B.A., Claremont Men’s College; M.A., Ph.D., University of Michigan 
CALLAHAN, ROBERT D. (1965), Assistant Professor of English 
B.A., M.A., University of Washington 
CARLSON, RAE S. (1961), Associate Professor of Psychology 

B.A., University of Nebraska; M.S., University of Washington; Ph.D., University of Michigan 
CARR, EDWIN R. (1960), Professor of Education 

B.A., Jamestown College; M.A., Columbia University; Ph.D., University of Minnesota 
CARTLEDGE, SAMUEL J. (1966), Assistant Professor of French 

A. B., 1955, King College; Ph.D., Yale University 
CHARLTON, F. ANDREW (1965), Assistant Professor of Music 

B. M.Ed., Pepperdine College; M.A., Los Angeles State College 
CHEN, WILLIAM P. (1960), Librarian IV 

B.A., National Wu-Han University, China; M.S. in L.S., M.A., Ph.D., University of Illinois 
CHRISTENSEN, LAWRENCE L. (1966), Assistant Professor of Anthropology 
B.A., M.A., University of California at Los Angeles 
CLAYDON, ELLEN E. (1966), Assistant Professor of Spanish 
B.A., M.A., Ph.D., University of Colorado 


t On leave 1966-67. 


284 


Faculty and Administration 


COCHRUM, ELLEN J. (1966), Lecturer in Russian 
B.A., California State College at Fullerton 
COLGAN, FRED R. (1965), Assistant Professor of Management 
B.S., M.S., University of Southern California 

COLMAN, RONALD VV. (1964), Systems Analyst for College Computer Center and Lecturer in 
Quantitative Methods 

B.A., University of California at Los Angeles 
COPP, CAROL M. (1965), Assistant Professor of Sociology 
B.A., M.A., University of Michigan 
COPPOLINO, IDA S. (1960), Professor of Education 

B.S., University of Utah; M.A., New York University; Ed.D., University of California, Los 
Angeles 

CORMAN, EUGENE J. (1966), Assistant Professor of Accounting 
B.Sc., M.B.A., University of Santa Clara 
CROWLEY, RONALD J. (1965), Assistant Professor of Physics 
B.S., M.A., University of Southern California 
CROY, HAZEL M. (1960), Professor of Education 

B.A., M.A., University of Redlands; Ed.D., University of California, Los Angeles 
CUMMINGS, SHERWOOD P. (1963), Professor of English and Coordinator of Graduate Studies 
B.S., University of Illinois; M.A., Ph.D., University of Wisconsin 
CURTIS, DWIGHT W., JR. (1965), Assistant Professor of Psychology 

B.A., College of the Pacific; M.A., Sacramento State College; Ph.D., University of Oregon 
CUSICK, JAMES W. (1961), Associate Professor of Education, Coordinator of Secondary Educa- 
tion and Chairman, Secondary Education Department 
B.S., Montana State College; M.A., Washington State University; Ph.D., University of Min- 
nesota 

DAVIS, BARBARA E. (1960), Librarian IV 

B.S., Camegie Institute of Technology; B.Mus., University of Wisconsin; M. in L.S., Carnegie 
Library School 

DAVIS, F. JAMES (1962), Professor of Sociology and Chairman, Sociology Department 
B.A., Ph.D., State University of Iowa 
DE GRAFF, LAWRENCE B. (1959), Associate Professor of History 

B.A., Occidental College; M.A., Ph.D., University of California, Los Angeles 
DENNISON, WALTER J. (1965), Associate Professor of Accounting and Finance 
B.B.A., University of Miami; M.S., Columbia University; C.P.A. 

DENNO, RAYMOND E. (1961), Director of Audiovisual and Television Services and Professor of 
Education 

B.A., University of California, Santa Barbara; M.S., University of Southern California; Ed.D., 
University of California, Los Angeles 
DIETZ, NAOMI G. (1960), Professor of Art 

B.S., Whitworth College; M.A., Teachers College, Columbia University 
DITTMAN, ROGER R. (1964), Associate Professor of Physics 

B.A., University of California, Santa Barbara; M.S., University of Delaware; Ph.D., University 
of Southern California 

DOANE, KENNETH R. (1960), Professor of Education and Dean, School of Education 
B.S., Wisconsin State College, La Crosse; M.S., Ph.D., University of Wisconsin 
DONDIS, ERNEST H. (1966), Assistant Professor of Psychology 

B.A., M.A., California State College at Long Beach; Ph.D., University of California 
DONOGHUE, MILDRED R. (1962), Associate Professor of Education 

B.A., University of Michigan; M.A., University of Detroit; Ed.D., University of California, 
Los Angeles 

DUERR, EDWIN (1964), Associate Professor of Drama 
B.A., University of California; M.A., Cornell University 
EARICK, ARTHUR D. (1960), Professor of Geography and Chairman, Geography Department 
B.A., Indiana University; M.A., Ph.D., University of Michigan 
EDWARDS, RICHARD A. (1964), Assistant Professor of English 
B.A., University of California, Santa Barbara; M.A., Yale University 
EDWARDS, ROBERT E. (1966), Professor of Psychology and Chairman, Psychology Department 
B.S., M.S., University of Oregon; Ph.D., University of Washington 
EHMANN, GERHARD E. (1959), Dean of Educational Services and Summer Session, and Pro- 
fessor of Education 

B.A., Occidental College; M.A., Ed.D., University of California, Los Angeles 


285 


Faculty and Administration 


EL-SADEN, MUNIR R. (1966), Professor of Engineering 

B.Sc., University of Denver; M.S., Ph.D., University of Michigan 
ENELL, GEORGE O. (1965), Assistant Professor of Speech 

B.A., Pomona College; B.D., Fuller Theological Seminary; M.A., University of Southern Cali- 
fornia 

EPSTEIN, CYRIL R., Assistant Professor of English 

B.A., University of California, Santa Barbara; M.A., Yale University 
ETUE, GEORGE E. (1963), Assistant Professor of History 
B.A., Union College; M.A., Ph.D., University of California 
EVJENTH, HENRY A. (1964), Assistant Professor of Art 
B.A., M.A., Long Beach State College 
FAIA, MICHAEL (1964), Assistant Professor of Sociology 

B.A., University of Southern California; M.A., University of Chicago 
FARMER, MARJORIE M. (1965), Lecturer in English 
B.A., M.A., California State College at Fullerton 
FASHEH, ISSA I. (1966), Librarian I 

B.A., University of California at Los Angeles; M.L.S., University of Southern California 
FELDMAN, DAVID M. (1964), Associate Professor of Spanish 

B.A., University of Southern California; M.A., Ph.D., Cornell University 
FELDMAN, ROBERT S. (1964), Assistant Professor of History 
B.S., Illinois State University; M.A., Indiana University 
FERARU, ANNE T. (1966), Assistant Professor of Political Science 

B.A., Wilson College; M.A., Columbia University; Ph.D., University of Lyons 
FESSENDEN, SETH A. (1959), Professor of Speech and Chairman, Speech Department 
B.S., M.S., University of Illinois; Ph.D., New York University 
HERMAN, MORTON C. (1963), Associate Professor of Education and Acting Chairman, Foun- 
dations of Education Department 

B.A., Western Reserve University; M.H.L., Hebrew Union College; M.A., Tulsa University; 
Ed.D., Arizona State University 

FLETCHER, ROBERT F. (1965), Assistant Professor of Mathematics Education 
B.A., M.A., San Diego State College 
FLICKEMA, THOMAS O. (1966), Assistant Professor of History 

A. B., Hope College; M.A., Ph.D., Wayne State University 
FOREST, GEORGE C. (1965), Assistant Professor of Drama 

B. F.A., M.F.A., Art Institute of Chicago; B.M., M.M., Roosevelt University; Ph.D., Stanford 
University 

FORREST, C. DORSEY (1966), Professor of Marketing 

B.S., Northwestern University; M.B.A., University of Southern California; Ph.D., Ohio State 
University 

FOSTER, JULIAN F. S. (1963), Associate Professor of Political Science 

B.A., M.A., New College, Oxford, England; Ph.D., University of California, Los Angeles 
FRIEND, GEORGE L. (1964), Assistant Professor of English 
B.A., Miami University; M.A., Ph.D., University of Illinois 
FULTON, MARTIN W. (1965), Assistant Professor of Physical Education 
B.A., M.A., Los Angeles State College; H.S.D., Indiana University 
FUSZEK, RITA M. (1964), Assistant Professor of Music 
B.M., Butler University; M.M., Michigan State University 
GIACllMAKIS, GEORGE. JR. (1963), Assistant Professor of History 
B.A., Shelton College; M.A., Ph.D., Brandeis University 
GILBERT, RICHARD C. (1963), Professor of Mathematics 

B.A., Harvard College; Ph.D., University of California, Los Angeles 
GILDE, JOSEPH M. (1965), Assistant Professor of English 

B.A., Syracuse University; M.A., Ph.D., University of Chicago 
GLEESON, LARRY A. (1966), Assistant Professor of Art 

B.A., Dartmouth College: M.A., University of California at Los Angeles 
GOLDSTEIN, JONAS L. (1966), Librarian II 

A. B., University of California at Los Angeles; B.L.S., University of California; M.A., George 
Washington University; M.S., Navy Postgraduate School 

GOOD, KAYE M. (1963), Assistant Professor of Speech 

B. A., Washington State College; M.A., Long Beach State College 
GOODELL, ROBERT A. (1964), Associate Professor of Management 

B.A., Augustana College; M.A., Ph.D., State University of Iowa 


286 


Faculty and Administration 


GOULD, BETTY VV. (1965), Assistant Professor of Education 

B.A., University of Southern California; M.A., Fresno State College 
GRANELL, LEE E. (1960), Associate Professor of Speech 

B.A., San Diego State College; M.A., Ph.D., University of Southern California 
GRAVES, LEVERN F. (1960), Associate Professor of Economics 
B.A., Ph.D., University of California 

GRAY, J. JUSTIN (1961), Professor of Music and Associate Dean, School of Letters, Arts and 
Science 

B.Mus., University of Michigan; M.Mus., Eastman School of Music; D.Mus., University of 
Southern California 

•GRAYSON, THERESA S. (1965), Assistant Professor of Psychology 
B.A., San Diego State College; Ph.D., University of California 
GREENFIELD, DAVID W. (1966), Assistant Professor of Zoology 

A. B., Humboldt State College; Ph.D., University of Washington 
GREENWOOD, JOAN V. (1963), Assistant Professor of English 

B. A., Wellesley College; M.A., Ph.D., Stanford University 
HAAKER, ANNABELLE M. (1965), Associate Professor of English 

B.A., University of Texas; M.A., Claremont Graduate School; Ph.D., Shakespeare Institute, 
University of Birmingham 

HAGEDORN, ROBERT B. (1966), Associate .Professor of Sociology 

B.A., San Francisco State College; M.A., University of Washington; Ph.D., University of Texas 
HANAUER, ERIC S. (1966), Assistant Professor of Physical Education 

B.S., George Williams College; M.S., University of California at Los Angeles 
HANSEN, ARTHUR A. (1966), Assistant Professor of History 
B.A., M.A., University of California at Santa Brabara 
HARDMAN, O. CLYDE (1965), Assistant Professor of Accounting and Finance 
B.S., M.S., University of Utah 

HARDY, B. CARMON (1966), Assistant Professor of History 

B.A., Washington State University; M.A., Brigham Young University; Ph.D., Wayne State 
University 

HARRIS, ARLO D. (1965), Assistant Professor of Chemistry 
B.S., University of Dayton; Ph.D., Tulane University 
tHARTSIG, BARBARA A. (1959), Professor of Education, Coordinator of Elementary Education 
and Chairman, Elementary Education Department 
B.A., Occidental College; M.S., University of Southern California; Ed.D., University of Cali- 
fornia, Los Angeles 

HAYDEN, MARY H. (1965), Instructor in English 

B.A., California State College at Fullerton; M.A., University of California at Riverside 
HAYNER, HELEN L. (1965), Librarian II 

B.A., State Univrsity of New York; B.S. in L.S., Syracuse University 
HAYNER, PAUL C. (1964), Associate Professor of Philosophy 

B.A., Union College; B.D., Union Theological Seminary; Ph.D., Columbia University 
HEIN, RAYMOND (1961), Professor of Art 
B.A., M.A., Long Beach State College 
HEINZE, BETTY L. (1965), Instructor in English 

B.A., California State College at Fullerton; M.A., University of Southern California 
HELIN, RONALD A. (1963), Associate Professor of Geography 

B.A., Ph.D., University of California, Los Angeles; M.A., Miami University 
HENRY, DONALD R. (1966), Assistant Professor of Drama 

B.A., State College of Iowa; M.A., University of Washington; Ph.D., University of Wisconsin 
HERMAN, LINDA E. (1965), Librarian II 

B.A., California State College at Los Angeles; M.L.S., University of California at Los Angeles 
HERRING, JACK W. (1966), Associate Professor of English 

A. B., M.A., Baylor University; Ph.D., University of Pennsylvania 
HIEGEL, GENE A. (1966), Assistant Professor of Chemistry 

B. S., Ph.D., University of Wisconsin 
HIRSCH, A. JAY (1966), Professor of Accounting 

B.A., M.S., The Pennsylvania State University; Ph.D., University of Illinois 
HITCHCOCK, LEONARD A. (1966), Instructor in Philosophy 
BA., University of Iowa; M.A., Claremont Graduate School 


• On leave 1966-67. 
t On leave spring 1967. 


287 


Faculty and Administration 


HODGES, ROBERT R. (1965), Assistant Professor of English 

B.A., Valparaiso University; M.A., University of Missouri; Ph.D., Stanford University 
HOKANSON, DON C. (1964), Lecturer in Physics 
B.A., California State College at Fullerton 
HOLMES, EMMA E. (1961), Associate Professor of Education 

B.A., Mount Holyoke College; M.A., University of Illinois; Ph.D., State University of Iowa 
HUNT, EUGENE B. (1966), Professor of Engineering 

B.S., South Dakota State College; M.S., Kansas State College; Ph.D., Purdue University 
HUOTARI, FRANCES I. (1966), Assistant Professor of Chemistry 
B.S., M.S., Montana State University; Ph.D., University of Minnesota 
HYINK, BERNARD L. (1960), Vice President, Academic Affairs, and Professor of Political Science 
B.A., University of Redlands; M.A., University of California; Ph.D., University of Southern 
California 

IMHOFF, MYRTLE M. (1960), Professor of Education 

B.A., Harris Teachers College; M.A., St. Louis University; Ph.D., Washington University 
IVY, GREGORY D. (1965), Professor of Art and Chairman, Art Department 
B.S., Central Missouri State College; M.A., Columbia University 
JACOBSON, PERRY E., JR. (1963), Assistant Professor of Sociology 

B.A., Hamline University; M.S., Iowa State University; Ph.D., University of Minnesota 
JEFFRIES, LUCY B. (1966), Assistant Professor of Art 

B.S., Virginia Polytechnic Institute; M.F.A., University of North Carolina 
JEFFRIES, VICTORIA M. (1966), Librarian I 

B.A., Florida Presbyterian College; M.S.L.S., University of Kentucky 
JOESINK-MANDEVILLE, LEROY V. (1966), Assistant Professor of Anthropology 
B.A., Sacramento State College; M.A., Mexico City College 
JOHNSON, ELMER L. (1964), Professor of Physical Education, and Chairman, Health Educa- 
tion, Physical Education and Recreation Department, and Director of Athletics 
B.A., Moorhead State College; M.Ed., University of Minnesota; Ed.D., University of Southern 
California 

JOHNSON, RAYNOLDS (1961), Assistant Professor of Communication 
B.A., Los Angeles State College; M.A., Stanford University 
JONES, HAZEL J. (1960), Associate Professor of English 

B.A., Western State College of Colorado; M.S., Ed.D., University of Southern California 
JORDAN, JAMES E. (1965), Assistant Professor of History 

B.A., Washburn University; M.A., Ph.D., University of California 
JORDAN, JOHN R. (1965), Instructor in Art 

B.A. ; M.F.A., University of California at Los Angeles 
JOUN, YOUNG P. (1965), Assistant Professor of Economics 

B.A., Seoul National University; M.A., Ph.D., University of Washington 
KAPLAN, DONALD E. (1964), Associate Professor of Speech 

B.A., University of California, Los Angeles; M.A., Long Beach State College 
KARSON, BURTON L. (1965), Assistant Professor of Music 
B.A., M.A., D.M.A., University of Southern California 
KASUN, JACQUELINE R. (1965), Assistant Professor of Economics 
B.A., University of California; M.S., Ph.D., Columbia University 
KELLER, ALVIN J. (1966), Assistant Professor of Drama 

B.A., University of California at Los Angeles; M.F.A., Yale University; Ph.D., Stanford Uni- 
versity 

KERAN. DONALD W. (1961), Librarian III 

B.A., University of California, Los Angeles; M.S. in L.S., University of Southern California 
KERCIU, GEORGE R. (1963), Assistant Professor of Art 

B.A., Michigan State University; M.F.A., Cranbrook Academy of Art 
KERSCHNER, LEE R. (1961), Associate Professor of Political Science 

B.A., Rutgers University; M.A., Johns Hopkins University; Ph.D., Georgetown University 
KETTERINGHAM, WILLIAM J. (1966), Assistant Professor of Geography 
B.A., University of California, Los Angeles; M.A., Stanford University 
KILKER, DOROTHY K. (1965), Instructor in English 
B.A., M.A., California State College at Fullerton 
KINCAID, DESMOND (1966), Assistant Professor of Music 

B.A., University of California at Santa Barbara; B.A., M.A., University of Washington 


288 


Faculty and Administration 


KINNEY, PAUL T. (1963), Professor of Finance and Director of the Computer Center 
B.A., San Jose State College; Ph.D., University of Southern California 
KLASSEN, VURYL J. (1965), Assistant Professor of Mathematics 
B.A., Butler University; M.S., Ph.D., University of Arizona 
KLASSEN, VYRON M. (1965), Assistant Professor of Mathematics 
B.A., Butler University; M.S., Ph.D., Virginia Polytechnic Institute 
KLINE, WALTER D. (1963), Associate Professor of Spanish and Chairman, Foreign Languages 
and Literatures Department 

B.A., Indiana State Teachers College; M.A., University of Wisconsin; Ph.D., University of 
Michigan 

KRAVITZ, BERNARD (1961), Associate Professor of Education 

B.A., University of Southern California; M.A., Ed.D., University of California 
KUNI, MASAMI (1964), Lecturer in Drama 

B. Humanities, Matsue Kota Gakko University, Japan; Bungakushi, Tokyo Imperial University; 
Ph.D., Friedrich Wilhelm University 
LACKEY, PAT N. (1966), Assistant Professor of Sociology 

A. B., Southwest Missouri State College; M.A., University of Pittsburgh 
LAFKY, JOHN D. (1963), Assistant Professor of Economics 

B. S., New Mexico State University; M.A., Ph.D., University of Texas 
LAKE, ERNEST G. (1966), Professor of Education 

B.A., Montana University; M.Ed., Ed.D., Harvard University 
LAKE, JEANETTE M. (1964), Librarian III 

B.A., Mount Holyoke Collge; M.S., University of Southern California 
LANCE, WAYNE D. (1964), Assistant Professor of Education 

B.A., M.A., University of Redlands; Ed.D., George Peabody College 
LANDON, JOSEPH W. (1960), Professor of Music and Chairman, Music Department 

B.A., Occidental College; M.A., Claremont Graduate School; Ed.D., University of Southern 
California 

LANE, SYLVIA (1965), Associate Professor of Accounting and Finance 

B.A., M.A., University of California; Ph.D., University of Southern California 
LANGE, IRENE L. (1965), Assistant Professor of Marketing 
B.S., M.S., University of Illinois 

LANGWORTHY, WILLIAM C. (1965), Assistant Professor of Chemistry 
B.S., Tufts University; Ph.D., University of California 
LAWRENCE, JOHN ERIC (1966), Instructor in Communication 
B.A., University of California; B.P.A., Art Center College of Design 
LAY, L. CLARK (1960), Professor of Mathematics Education 

B.S., Aurora College; M.A., University of Southern California; Ed.D., University of California, 
Los Angeles 

LAYDEN, WILLIAM T. (1966), Lecturer in Marketing 
B.S., M.B.A., University of Southern California 
LEDER, HANS H. (1965), Assistant Professor of Anthropology 
B.A., New York University; M.A., Stanford University 
LEE, LOUISE G. (1964), Foreign Student Adviser 
B.S., University of Wisconsin 

LEMMON, ROBERT A. (1963), Assistant Professor of Education 
B.S., M.A., Ohio State University 
LEPPER, MARY K. (1965), Assistant Professor of Political Science 

B.A., California State College at Fullerton; Ph.D., Florida State University 
LEPPER, ROBERT E. (1965), Associate Professor of Science and Mathematics Education 
B.S., M.A., San Jose State College; Ph.D., The Florida State University 
LINDLEY, RICHARD IL, Professor of Psychology 
B.A., Ph.D., University of California 
LINDNER, WILLIAM A. (1966), Assistant Professor of Psychology 

A. B., Columbia College; Ph.D., Indiana University 
UU, GEORGE B. (1961), Librarian III 

B. A., Fresno State College; M.A., M.L.S., University of Illinois 
LIVENGOOD, EDWARD B. (1960), Librarian II 

B.A., University of Redlands; M.S. in L.S., University of Southern California 
LONG, EMMETT T. (1959), Associate Dean of Students; Director of Relations with Schools, 
and Professor of Speech 

B.A., Pepperdine College; B.A., M.A., University of California; Ph.D., University of Southern 
California 


289 


Faculty and Administration 

LYNN, ARTHUR W. (1962), Counselor and Test Officer 

B.A., University of Redlands; M.A., Claremont Graduate School 
LYNN, JOANNE L. (1966), Lecturer in English 

B.A., Pomona College; M.A., California State College at Fullerton 
LYONS, JACK E. (1959), Business Manager 
B.A., University of Southern California 
MASON, JOHN B. (1960), Professor of Political Science 

B.A., Butler University; M.A., Ph.D., University of Wisconsin 
•MATHIEU, GUSTAVE (1960), Professor of French and German 
B.S., M.A., Ph.D., Columbia University 
MAUCH, ANNETTA B. (1965), Instructor in English 

B.A., Mexico City College; M.A., California State College at Fullerton 
MAXWELL, J. WILLIAM (1960), Professor of Communication and Chairman, Communications 
Department 

B.A., University of Southern California; M.S., Columbia University; Ph.D., University of 
Iowa 

MAYER, LAWRENCE C. (1966), Assistant Professor of Political Science 

A. B., University of Florida; M.A., University of California 

MCCARTHY, MILES D. (1959), Dean, School of Letters, Arts and Science, Professor of Biology 

B. S., Westchester State Teachers College, Pennsylvania; Ph.D., University of Pennsylvania 
McCARTY, FRANK L. (1966), Instructor in Music 

B.A., San Diego State College; M.A., University of Southern California 
McCLANAIIAN, LONNIE L., JR. (1966), Assistant Professor of Biology 
B.S., University of Redlands; Ph.D., University of California at Riverside 
McCLEARY, JAMES A. (1960), Professor of Botany 

B.A., Asbury College; M.S., Ohio University; Ph.D., University of Michigan 
McCLOUD, LELAND W. (1962), Professor of Quantitative Methods and Management 
B.S., M.S., North Texas University; Ph.D., University of Texas 
McCOLGAN, HARRY B. (1964), Instructor in Drama 

B.A., Wesleyan University; M.A., Northwestern University 
McCOMB, STUART F. (1959), Executive Dean and Professor of Education 

B.A., Arizona State University; M.S., Ed.D., University of Southern California; LL.D., Upper 
Iowa University 

McCULLOUGH, EDI HI L. (1966), Assistant Professor of Education 

B.A., Colorado State College; M.B.E., University of Colorado; Ph.D., University of Southern 
California 

McGARRY, EUGENE L. (1962), Associate Dean, School of Education; Associate Professor of 
Education 

B.A., Cornell College; M.A., Northwestern University; Ph.D., State University of Iowa 
McKEE, KENT E. (1964), Associate Professor of Business Law 

B.B.A., University of Toledo; M.B.A., Michigan State University; LL.B., University of Michi- 
gan; C.P.A. 

McNELLY, WILLIS E. (1961), Associate Professor of English 

B.A., Central YMCA College; M.A., Loyola University (Chicago); Ph.D., Northwestern Uni- 
versity 

McSHERRY, ELIZABETH (1966), Assistant Professor of Art 
B.S., M.A., Columbia University Teachers College 
MEND, MICHAEL R. (1965), Assistant Professor of Sociology 
B.A., M.A., University of California at Los Angeles 
MERRIFIELD, DORIS F. (1965), Assistant Professor of German 
M.A., Ph.D., The University of Texas 
MICHALSKY, DONAL R. (1960), Associate Professor of Music 

B.Mus., M.Mus., University of Southern California; D.M.A., University of Southern California 
MONTANA, ANDREW F. (1963), Associate Professor of Chemistry and Chairman, Chemistry 
Department 

B.S., Seattle Pacific College; Ph.D., University of Washington 
MORRIS, THOMAS D. (1964), Financial Aids Officer 
B.A., M.Ed., Gonzaga University 

MORROW, JOSEPH E. (1965), Assistant Professor of Psychology 

B.A., M.A., Sacramento State College; Ph.D., Washington State University 


* On leave 1966-67. 


290 


Faculty and Administration 


MORTON, HELEN L. (1963), College Medical Officer 

B.A., University of Nevada; M.D., Medical College of Virginia 
NELSON, MAX (1965), Professor of Speech 

B.A., University of Akron; M.A., Ph.D., University of Michigan 
NICHOLS, E. RAY (1966), Lecturer in Speech 

B.A., 1936; M.A., Cornell University; Ph.D., University of Southern California 
NICHOLS, JOHN R., JR. (1965), Associate Professor of Finance 
B.A., Baldwin-Wallace College; M.A., Ph.D., Ohio State University 
NUDD, THOMAS R. (1966), Associate Dean of Students, Activities and Housing 
B.S., M.S., University of Oregon; Ed.D., University of California at Los Angeles 
OBLER, PAUL C. (1962), Associate Professor of English 

B.A., American University; M.A., Columbia University; Ph.D., Rutgers University 
O’HEARN, JOHN F. (1966), Lecturer in Accounting 

B.S., Ball State University; M.B.A., University of Washington 
OLSEN, JOHN W. (1961), Professor of Art 

B.Ed., University of California, Los Angeles; M.A., Ed.D., Columbia University 
•OLEYAR, RITA D. (1966), Instructor in English 

A. B., Seton Hill College; M.A., California State College at Fullerton 

OMALEV, ALEXANDER (1960), Associate Professor of Physical Education and Coach of Basket- 
ball 

B. A., M.S., University of Southern California 
ONORATO, MICHAEL P. (1965), Assistant Professor of History 

B.S., St. Peter’s College; M.A., Ph.D., Georgetown University 
O'TOOLE, JOHN B. (1962), Associate Professor of Mathematics 
B.A., Duquesne University; Lit.M., Ph.D., University of Pittsburgh 
OVERVOLD, GARY E. (1966), Assistant Professor of Philosophy 
B.A., St. Olaf College; Ph.D., Claremont Graduate School 
PALISI, BARTOLOMEO J. (1963), Assistant Professor of Sociology 
B.A., M.A., Brooklyn College; Ph.D., University of Nebraska 
•PAN, DOROTHY (1964), Assistant Professor of Chemistry 

B.S., University of Oklahoma; M.S., University of Minnesota; Ph.D., Case Institute of Tech- 
nology 

PARTIN, ROBERT E. (1966), Professor of Art 

B.A., University of California at Los Angeles; M.F.A., Columbia University 
PASTOR, PAUL J. (1960), Professor of Physical Education 
B.S., M.Ed., Springfield College; Ed.D., University of Oregon 
PENA, ERVIE (1963), Instructor in Spanish 

B.A., Mexico City College; M.A., University of Southern California 
PETALAS, URANIA C. (1965), Assistant Professor of English 
B.A., M.A., San Fernando Valley State College 
PHILLIPS, DORIS G. (1965), Associate Professor of Economics 
B.A., Ph.D., University of California 
PICKERSGILL, JOYCE E. (1966), Assistant Professor of Economics 
B.A., Smith College; M.A., Ph.D., University of Washington 
PIVAR, DAVID J. (1965), Assistant Professor of History 

B.S., Millersville State College; M.A., Temple University; Ph.D., University of Pennsylvania 
PONTNEY, JACK A. (1961), Associate Dean, School of Business Administration and Economics, 
and Associate Professor of Economics 
B.A., University of Redlands; M.A.. Ph.D., Northwestern University 
POORKAJ, HOUSHANG (1965), Assistant Professor of Sociology 
B.A., M.A., University of Southern California 

POVLOVICH, CHARLES A. (1960), Associate Dean, School of Letters, Arts, and Science, and 
Professor of History 

B.A., University of Kansas City; M.A., University of Missouri; Ph.D., University of Southern 
California 

PRANCE, W. WERNER (1965), Professor of German, and Assistant to the President 
B.A., Paedagogium, Bad Godesberg; Ph.D., University of Bonn 
PREBLE, KENNETH J., JR. (1963), Associate Professor of Education 
B.A., University of Miami; M.A., Ph.D., University of Chicago 
PRENZLOW, CARL F. (1965), Assistant Professor of Chemistry 
B.A., University of Colorado; Ph.D., University of Washington 


On leave spring 1967. 


291 


Faculty and Administration 


PUTNAM, JACKSON K. (1965), Assistant Professor of History 
B.S., M.A., University of North Dakota; Ph.D., Stanford University 
QUALLS, CLIFFORD R. (1964), Instructor in Mathematics 

B.A., Long Beach State College; M.A., University of California, Riverside 
RACSTER, MARY L. (1966), Assistant Professor of Finance 

A. B., Ohio University; A.M., University of Illinois 

RAMSAY, ORRINGTON C. (I960), Professor of English, Chairman, English Department 

B. S., Northwestern University; M.A., Ph.D., University of Wisconsin 
RANSFORD, II. EDWARD (1966), Assistant Professor of Sociology 

B.A., Occidental College; M.A., Ph.D., University of California at Los Angeles 
REIMS, CLIFFORD W. (1966), Assistant Professor of Music 

A. B., Buckncll University; M.M., Indiana University 

REITII, GERTRUDE M. (1961), Associate Professor of Geography 

B. A., M.A., University of Washington; Ph.D., Clark University 
REMSEN, LESTER E. (1966), Assistant Professor of Music 

B.M., Eastman School of Music; M.M., D.M.A., University of Southern California 
RETAN, E. ELIZABETH (1966), Librarian III 

B.A., Pomona College; B.S.L.S., Columbia University 

RICHARDSON, IVAN L. (1964), Professor of Political Science and Chairman, Political Science 
Department 

B.A., University of Illinois; M.A., Ph.D., University of Iowa 
RILEY, GLYNDON D. (1966), Assistant Professor of Speech 
B.A., M.A., Pepperdine College; Ph.D., Florida State University 
ROBERTS, CECIL E. (1963), Librarian III 

B.A., M.A., University of Iowa; M.L.S., University of Illinois 

ROBERTS, FRANK L. (1961), Professor of Management and Marketing and Chairman, Marketing 
Department 

B.S., University of Arkansas; M.B.A., University of Texas; Ph.D., University of Illinois 
ROTHMAN, ALVIN II. (1964), Associate Professor of Biology 

B.A., M.A., University of California, Los Angeles; D.Sc., The Johns Hopkins University 
RUBINSTEIN, WILLIAM C. (1966), Associate Professor of English 

B.A., College City of New York; M.A., New York University; Ph.D., Yale University 
RUSSELL, JACK (1966), Counselor and Test Officer 

B.A., Pepperdine College; M.S., University of Southern California 
RUTEMILLER, BESSIE M. (1966), Librarian II 

B.A., Baldwin Wallace College; M.S. in L.S., Western Reserve University 

RUTEMILLER, HERBERT C. (1966), Associate Professor of Quantitative Methods and Acting 
Chairman, Quantitative Methods Department 
B.S., Case Institute of Technology; M.S., Ph.D., Western Reserve University 
SAILOR, DANTON B. (1962), Associate Professor of History 
B.A., M.A., Ph.D., Universtiy of Illinois 
SALZ, P. JUNE (1961), Associate Professor of English 
B.A., M.A., Ph.D., University of Southern California 
SAMUELSON, GERALD D. (1962), Associate Professor of Art 
B.A., M.A., University of California, Los Angeles 
SANDBERG, ROLLIN T. (1964), Associate Professor of Mathematics 

B.A., Alfred University; M.A., University of Buffalo; Ph.D., University of Arizona 
SASTRY’, RAMA M. V. (1965), Assistant Professor of Quantitative Methods 

B.A., Andhra University, India; M.A., Gujarat University; Ph.D., Iowa State University 
SCHICK, GUY A. (1964), Assistant Professor of Economics 
B.S., M.S., Purdue University 

SCHILD, RICHARD J. (1965), Assistant Professor of Physical Education 
B.S., M.S., Wisconsin State University 
SCHMIDT, LOUIS G. (1961), Professor of Psychology 

B.S., Stout State College; M.S., Ph.D., University of Wisconsin 
SCHNEIDER, CLARENCE E. (1962), Professor of English 

B.A., Iowa State Teachers College; M.A., University of Iowa; Ph.D., University of Southern 
California 

SCHON, MICHAEL P. (1966), Lecturer in Speech 

B.A., California State College at Los Angeles; M.A., University of Denver 


292 


Faculty and Administration 

SCHULTZ, DEANNA L. (1965), Assistant Professor of Physical Education 
B.S., University of California at Los Angeles; University of Florida 

SCOTT, MILDRED H. (1965), Registrar 
B.A., University of California 
SCOTT SARI, E. (1963), Assistant Professor of English 

B.A., Carnegie Institute of Technology; M.Litt., University of Pittsburgh; Ph.D., University 
of Iowa 

SCOUFOS, ALICE L. (1966), Assistant Professor of English 
B.A., Ph.D., University of Oklahoma 
SEE, RICHARD E. (1966), Assistant Professor of Anthropology 
B.A., M.A., Ph.D., University of California at Los Angeles 

SELLER, HOWARD J., Assistant Professor of English 

B.A., University of California, Los Angeles; M.A., Ph.D., University of Southern California 

SHAPIRO, SHIRLEY (1965), Instructor in English 

B.A., Brooklyn College; M.A., University of Washington 
SHAPLEY, CHARLES S. (1962), Associate Professor of French 
B.A., M.A., Ph.D., University of California 
SHARMA, RADHA MOHAN (1966), Assistant Professor of Finance 
B.S., M.B.A., Florida State University 
SHARMA, SOM PARKASH (1966), Assistant Professor of English 

B.A., B.M., College of Simla; M.A., Punjab University; Ph.D., University of Wisconsin 

SHAUL, DONALD R. (1964), Associate Professor of Management 

B.S., United States Naval Academy; M.B.A., Ph.D., University of California, Los Angeles 
SHIELDS, LORAN D. (1963), Associate Professor of Chemistry 

H.A., University of California, Riverside; Ph.D., University of California, Los Angeles 

SICA, MORRIS G. (1964), Associate Professor of Education 

B.A., Brooklyn College; M.A., University of Michigan; Ed.D., Florida State University 

SIEGFRIED, CLAUDE L. (1965), Lecturer in French 
Lie en Droit, University of Paris 
SILVERS, STUART (1965), Assistant Professor of Philosophy 

B.A., M.A., Michigan State University; Ph.D., University of Pittsburgh 
SMITH, ALDEN W. (1964), Associate Professor of Education 

B.A., M.A., University of California; M.A., Ph.D., Columbia University 
SMITH, EDWARD W. (1964), Director of Development 

B.S., University of Michigan; M.S., University of Southern California 
SMITH, J. REX (1961), Associate Professor of Sociology 

B.A., Phillips University; B.D., Yale University, Divinity School; M.A., Ph.D., University of 
Southern California 

•SMITH, THEODORE H. (1960), Professor of Finance and Marketing 

B.A., Heidelberg College; M.B.A., Northwestern University; Ph.D., Ohio State University 

SMITH, VICTOR V. (1962), Associate Professor of Art 
B.A., M.A., Long Beach State College 
SMYTHE, TED C. (1963), Assistant Professor of Communication 
B.S., Sterling College; M.S., University of Oregon 
SOMMER, MICHAEL II. (1965), Assistant Professor of Communication 

B.A., University of California; M.S., University of California at Los Angeles 
SPANGLER, GEORGE M. (1966), Assistant Professor of English 

A. B., Haverford College; M.A., Ph.D., University of California 
SPENGER, ROBERT E. (1964), Assistant Professor of Chemistry 

B. A., University of California; Ph.D., University of California, Los Angeles 
STARK, SHIRL A. (1966), Assistant Professor of Education 

A. B., California State College at Los Angeles; M.S., University of Southern California 

STIEL, BETH T. (1966), Librarian II 

B. A., University of California at Los Angeles; M.L.S., University of California 
STIEL, EDSEL F. (1962), Associate Professor of Mathematics 

B.A., M.A., Ph.D., University of California, Los Angeles 
STIER, DUDLEY A. (1966), Housing Coordinator 

A. B., Stanford University; M.B.A., Cornell University 

STOVALL, EULA M. (1965), Assistant Professor of Physical Education 

B. A., Colorado State College of Education; M.A., San Francisco State College; Ph.D., Univer- 
sity of Southern California 

• On leave 1966-67. 

293 


Faculty and Administration 


SULLIVAN, JAMES E. (1965), Instructor in Art 
B.A., M.A., University of California, Los Angeles 
SULLIVAN, PHILIP E. (1966), Assistant Professor of English 

A. B., St. Mary’s College; M.A., University of California; Ph.D., University of Southern 
California 

SUTTON, DONALD D. (1960), Professor of Biology and Acting Chairman, Biological Science 
Department 

B. A., University of California; M.A., Ph.D., University of California, Davis 
SUTTON, IMRE (1964), Assistant Professor of Geography 

B.A., M.A., University of California, Los Angeles; Ph.D., University of California, Los 
Angeles 

TEEL, ERIC A. (1966), Librarian II 

B.A., St. John’s College, Annapolis; M.S. in L.S., Western Reserve University 
THOMPSON, CECIL B. (1965), Assistant Professor of Economics 
B.A., M.A.. University of California at Los Angeles 
TIIORSEN, DAVID O. (1960), Professor of Music 

B.Mus., University of Redlands; M.A., Occidental College 
TOWNSIIEND-ZELLNER, NORMAN (1964), Professor of Economics and Chairman, Eco- 
nomics Department 
B.S., Ph.D., University of California 

TOY, ERNEST W., JR. (1959), College Librarian and Associate Professor of History 

B.A., College of St. Thomas; M.S., University of Southern California; M.A., University of 
California, Los Angeles 

TREGO, JOHN W. (1964), Associate Professor of Management and Business Education 
B.A., Lebanon Valley College; M.A., Columbia University; Ed.D., Temple University 
•TSAI, LOH SENG (1965), Professor of Psychology 

B.A., Nanking University; M.S., Fuh Tan University; Ph.D., University of Chicago 
TULL, DONALD S. (1961), Dean, School of Business Administration and Economics, Pro- 
fessor of Quantitative Methods, Economics and Marketing 
B.S., M.B.A., Ph.D., University of Chicago 
TUMAS, ELENA V. (1965), Assistant Professor of English 

B.A., Immaculate Heart College; M.A., Ph.D., University of Southern California 
TURNER, GEORGE C. (1960). Associate Professor of Biology and Science Education and 
Chairman, Science and Mathematics Education Department 
B.A., Stanford University; M.S., Utah State University; M.Ed., Eastern Washington College 
of Education; Ed.D., Arizona State University 
TUSSING, MARJORIE O. (1965), Instructor in German 
B.A., Whittier College; M.A., Middlebury 
UNTERBERGER, BETTY M. (1961), Professor of History 

B.A., Syracuse University; M.A., Radcliffe-Harvard; Ph.D., Duke University 
UNTEREINER, WAYNE W. (1964), Professor of Anthropology and Chairman, Anthropology 
Department 

B.A., University of California; M.A., Ph.D., Harvard University 
VALPEY, ROBERT G. (1965), Dean, School of Engineering and Professor of Engineering 
B.S., United States Military Academy; B.M.E., Cornell University; M.S., University of Colo- 
rado; Ph.D., University of Illinois 

VAN CLEAVE, R. HAROLD (1965), Director of Extension and Coordinator of Summer Ses- 
sion and Evening Classes 
B.S., M.S., Indiana State University 
VAN DEVENTER. DAVID E. (1965), Assistant Professor of History 
B.A.. Baldwin-Wallace College; M.A., Western Reserve University 
VAN GINNEKF.N, EVA (1964). Assistant Professor of French 
B.A., M.A., Wayne University: Ph.D., Brown University 
VAUGHAN, RODGER D. (1965), Assistant Professor of Music 

B.Mus., University of Kansas at Lawrence; M.Mus., University of Kansas at Wichita 
VERTINSKY, I LAN B. (1966), Assistant Professor of Quantitative Methods 
B.A., 1964, the Hebrew University; M.A., University of California 
+ VINOD, IIRISHIKESII D. (1965), Assistant Professor of Economics 

B.Com., B.M., College of Commerce, Poona, India; M.A., Delhi School of Economics 


• On leave spring 1967. 
t On leave 1966-67. 


294 


Faculty and Administration 


VOYADJIS, THEODORK A. (1966), Assistant Professor of Economics 
B.A., 1960, Brandeis University; M.A., University of Buffalo 
WAGNER, DIANE T. (1966), Assistant Professor of Biology 
B.S., University of Florida; M.A., Ph.D., Duke University 
WAGNER, M. JOHN (1964), Associate Professor of English and Acting Chairman, English 
Department 1 

B.A., M.A., University of Chicago; Ph.D., Northwestern University 
WALKINGTON, DAVID L. (1963), Assistant Professor of Biology 

B.A., M.S., Arizona State University; Ph.D., Claremont Graduate School 
WATKIN, LAWRENCE E. (1965), Professor of English 
B.A., Syracuse University; M.A., Harvard University 
WELEBA, SHIRLEY ANN (1966), Assistant Professor of History 
B.Mus., University of Southern California 
YVEYMAN, BRADLEY S. (1965), Placement Supervisor 
B.A., M.A., San Francisco State College 
WILCOX, HERBERT G. (1966), Assistant Professor of Political Science 

B.A., Reed College; M.A., Yale University; Ph.D., New York University Graduate School of 
Public Administration 

WILEY, EDGAR A. (1966), Assistant Professor of Management 
B.A., Claremont Men’s College; M.S., Claremont Graduate School 
WISEMAN, DORSEY E. (1961), Professor of Accounting and Finance and Chairman, Account- 
ing and Finance Department 

B.S., West Virginia University; M.B.A., University of Pennsylvania; Ph.D., University of 
Illinois; C.P.A. 

WITCHEY, RONALD L. (1965), Instructor in Physical Education 
B.A., Denison University; M.Ed., Bowling Green State University 
WOO, JOHN C. H. (1962), Associate Professor of Accounting 

B.A., National University, Nanking, China; M.A., San Francisco State College; M.A., Ph.D., 
University of California 

WORKS, ERNEST (1964), Associate Professor of Sociology 

B.A., Arkansas A.M. & N. College; M.A., Ph.D., University of Illinois 
WU, KINGSLEY K. (1966), Assistant Professor of Art 
B.A., University of Washington; M.F.A., Pratt Institute 
YESSIS, MICHAEL (1966), Assistant Professor of Physical Education 

B.S., M.A., City College of New York; Ph.D., University of Southern California 
YINGER, JON A. (1966), Assistant Professor of Political Science 
B.A., Whittier College; M.A., Ph.D., Claremont Graduate School 
YOUNG, JAMES D. (I960), Professor of Drama and Chairman, Drama Department 
B.S., Pepperdine College; M.A., Ph.D., University of Southern California 
ZELTZER, ALLEN M. (1963), Associate Professor of Drama 
B.A., M.A., Ph.D., Wayne State University 
ZIMMERMAN, JON E. (1966), Assistant Professor of German 
B.S., University of Wisconsin; M.A., University of Colorado 


1 Spring 1967 semester. 


295 


PART-TIME FACULTY 
1966-67 


ASH, EDWARD C. (1962), Lecturer in Management 
B.S., M.B.A., University of Southern California 
AUSTIN, JACKSON J. (1965), Lecturer in Education 
B.S., M.S., Kansas State Teachers College 
BARKER, SHIRLEY (1966), Lecturer in Psychology 

BsMe., University of Arizona; M.A., California State College at Long Beach 
BARNES, JEAN (1966), Lecturer in Music 
B.A., Pomona College 

BARSTOW, VERA (1966), Lecturer in Music 
BAUMGARDNER, LEONA M. (1966), Lecturer in Education 
B.S., Miami University, Ohio 

BAWDEN, WILLIAM O. (1967), Lecturer in Science and Mathematics Education 
B.A., University of Southern California 
BECKMAN, WALTER F. (1966), Lecturer in Education 

B.A., Northern Illinois State College; M.A., Northwestern University 
BENGSTON, KURT L. (1963), Lecturer in Physics 
B.S., M.A., Wayne State University 
BERC.EL, KURT (1966), Lecturer in Foreign Languages 

M.A., University of Frankfurt; Ph.D., University of California, Berkeley 
BERTHA, BRIAN A. (1965), Lecturer in Finance 

B.S., University of Illinois; M.B.A., University of California at Berkeley 
BLANK, VERNON (1966), Lecturer in Science and Mathematics Education 
B.S., Iowa State College; M.S., Western Illinois University 
BLOCH, KALMAN (1966), Lecturer in Music 
BOND, THOMAS G. (1964), Lecturer in Marketing 

B.A., University of Colorado; M.B.A., Arizona State University 
BORST, PHILIP W. (1967), Lecturer in Political Science 
B.A., M.A., Stanford University 
BRADY, MELVIN (1963), Lecturer in Marketing 

B.S., University of Utah; M.B.A., University of Southern California 
BREUNIG, HELEN (1966), Lecturer in Art 
B.A., University of Denver 

BUNCH, LARRY L. (1964), Graduate Assistant of Philosophy 
B.A., California State College at Fullerton 
CAMPO, FRANK (1966), Lecturer in Music 
B.M., M.M., University of Southern California 
CANNON, JOHN P. (1962), Lecturer in Geography 

B.A., California State College at Long Beach; M.A., Mexico City College; Ph.D., University 
of Mexico 

CANNON, MARGARET (1966), Lecturer in Art 

CAPDEVIELLE, MARY K. (1966), Graduate Assistant in Political Science 
B.A., Newcomb College — Tulane University 
CARLSON, ANDREW H. (1966), Graduate Assistant in Music 
B.A., California State College at Fullerton 
CARTER, JOSEPH L. (1966), Lecturer in Science and Mathematics Education 
B.S., University of Kansas 

CASH, GORDON (1966), Lecturer in Mathematics 
B.S., M.S., University of Illinois 
CATHEY. WADE T., JR. (1967), Lecturer in Engineering 

B.S., M.S., University of South Carolina; Ph.D., Yale University 
CAUDILL. MARIANNE, (1966), Lecturer in Music 
B.M., University of Southern California 
CHEADLE, JANE B. (1966), Lecturer in Mathematics 
B.A., Mills College; M.A., University of Wisconsin 


296 


Part-time Faculty 


CHETRON, MARTIN R. (1965), Lecturer in Management 

B.S., Massachusetts Institute of Technology; M.B.A., University of Southern California 
CINCUSH, LAWRENCE (1966), Assistant in Art 
B.A., California State College at Fullerton 
CONRAD, GLADYS K. (1965), Lecturer in Education 

B.S., Washington University; M.A., M.D., University of Wisconsin 
CORDES, ROBERT (1966), Graduate Assistant in Music 
B.A., California State College at Fullerton 
COURTER, GENE W. (1966), Lecturer in Speech 

B.S., Central Michigan University; M.A., University of Michigan 
COX, MIRIAM (1961), Lecturer in English 

B.S., Utah State University; M.S., University of Idaho 
CUNNINGHAM, GEORGE E. (1966), Lecturer in Science and Mathematics Education 
B.A., Whittier College; M.A., Long Beach State College 
DASTYCK, RICHARD D. (1966), Lecturer in Geography 

B.A., Southern Illinois University; M.S., Northwestern University 
DAVIS, ROBERT D. (1966), Lecturer in Science and Mathematics Education 
B.S., M.S., Illinois State University; M.A., University of Illinois 
DEMES, STANLEY B. (1964), Librarian II 

B.A., University of California, Santa Barbara; A.M., Washington University; M.S. in L.S., 
University of Southern California 
DISRUD, SHELDON (1966), Lecturer in Music 
B.M., University of Southern California 
DOLSTRA, JAN R. (1966), Assistant in Physical Education 
DONNELLY, SR. GERTRUDE JOSEPH, CSJ (1966), Lecturer in English 

A. B., Dominican College; M.A., Ph.D., Catholic University of America 
DRUGG, WARREN (1966), Lecturer in Biology 

B. S., M.S., University of Washington; Ph.D., Claremont Graduate School 
D’URSO, DANIEL (1966), Graduate Assistant in Marketing and Quantitative Methods 

B.A., California State College at Fullerton 
EELLS, MURRAY (1965), Graduate Assistant of Biology 
B.S., California State Polytechnic College 
ELLIOTT, JOHN (1966), Lecturer in Economics 

B.A., Occidental College; M.A., Ph.D., Harvard University 
FELDMAN, SUSAN (1966), Lecturer in Mathematics 

A. B., University of California, Los Angeles; M.A.T., Indiana University 
FISHER, JOEL M. (1966), Lecturer of Political Science 

B. S., University of Southern California; M.A., University of California at Berkeley 
FITCH, ROBERT J. (1966), Lecturer in Psychology 

B.A., M.A., California State College at Los Angeles 
FORLEY, MAURICE (1962), Lecturer in Speech 
Ph.B., Yale College; J.D., Northwestern Law School 
FOSTER, WILLIAM W. (1966), Lecturer in Music 

B.M., Chicago Conservatory; M.S., University of Southern California 
FULLER, MARJORIE G. (1967), Lecturer in English 

A. B., University of Michigan; M.A., California State College at Fullerton 
GRANT, WILLIAM E. (1965), Lecturer in Management 

B. S., University of Denver; M.S., California State College at Long Beach 
GRUBB, ED (1966), Lecturer in Accounting 

GUSSOW, MARGARET B. (1962), Librarian II 

B.A., Queen’s University; M.S.C. in L.S., University of Southern California 
HAMILTON, KENNETH (1965), Graduate Assistant of Biology 
B.S., Bates College 

HARRIS, RALPHE W. (1963), Lecturer in Sociology 

B.S., University of Louisville; M.S., Kent School of Social Work 
HATFIELD, DOROTHY (1967), Lecturer in English 
B.A., M.A., California State College at Fullerton 
HAVEN, DAVID F. (1964), Graduate Assistant of Biology 
B.A., University of Redlands 
HAYTHORNE, KARYL (1966), Lecturer in Drama 

B.F.A., University of Arizona; M.F.A., University of Utah 


297 


Part-time Faculty 


HECKMAN, WILLIAM O. (1964), Lecturer in English 
B.A., Rutgers University; M.A., Columbia University 
1IEINZE, EMIL (1966), Graduate Assistant in Biology 
B.A., California State College at Fullerton 
HEMANN, RAYMOND G. (1965), Lecturer of Business Statistics 
B.S., Florida State University 

HINTON HEATHER (1967), lecturer in Political Science 

B.A., University of Southern California; M.A., Harvard University 
HOL JEN, DANIEL W. (1962), Assistant Professor of Management 
B.S., University of California; LL.B., Loyola University 
HUDDLE, FRANKLIN P. (1966), Lecturer in Political Science 
B.F.A., University of Arizona; M.A., Ph.D., American University 
HUNTINGTON, JOHN (1965), Lecturer in Art 
B.A., M.A., University of California at Los Angeles 
JACKSON, RUTH (1966), Assistant in Speech 
B.A., University of Redlands 

JAMISON, JANET (1966), Graduate Assistant in Biology 
B.S., California State Polytechnic 
JOHN, RANDY W. (1966), Graduate Assistant in Psychology 
B.A., California State College at Fullerton 
JONES, WILLIAM A. (1967), Graduate Assistant in Quantitat e Methods 
B.A., Fresno State College 

JOY, ROBERT (1966), Graduate Assistant in Accounting id Finance 
B.A., California State College at Fullerton 
KEITH, JOHN (1966), Lecturer in Music 

B.S., University of Illinois; M.S., Northwestern University 
KEMALYAN, STEVEN (1966), Lecturer in Music 
KESLER, SUAD WAKIM (1966), Lecturer in Education 

B.S., Ph.D., Cornell University; M.A., American University of Beirut 
KING, THOMAS (1964), Lecturer in Physics 

KLIPPENSTEIN, ERVIN R. (1966), Lecturer in Physics 
B.A., Bethel College; M.S., Iowa State University 
KOCH, ERNEST (1967), Lecturer in Science and Mathematics Education 
B.A., University of California at Los Angeles 
KRANZ, M. MURRAY (1966), Lecturer in History 
B.A., M.A., New York University 
KRAUZE, MARINA (1966), Lecturer in Russian 

B.A., M.A., University of California at Los Angeles 
KRUEGER, SALLY (1966), Graduate Assistant in Biology 
B.A., Pomona College 

LAMPH, JOHN (1966), Graduate Assistant in Art 
B.A., California State College at Fullerton 
LANCASTER, WAYNE (1966), Lecturer in Economics 
B.A., California State College at Fullerton 
LANGFELDT, JOAN E. (1966), Lecturer in Art 

B.A., Michigan State College; M.S., University of Wisconsin 
LARSON, THALIA (1964), Lecturer in Speech 

B.A., University of Southern California; M.A., C alifornia State College at Long Beach 
LEWIS, DANIEL (1963), Lecturer in Mus- 

B.A., San Diego State College; M.A., ClaremoL: Graduate School 
UEDLICH, RAYMOND D. (1961), Lecturer in nglish 

B.S., Bowling Green State University; M.A., L Angeles State College 
LUSTGARTEN, EDGAR (1966), Lecturer in Mi c 
LYLE, WILLIAM G. (1966), Lecturer in Manage ment 

B.A., Univt sity of California, Berkeley; M.B.A. University of Southern California 
MADDOX, JAY (1966), Giaduate Assistant in Art 
B.A., California State College at Fullerton 
MANOOGIAN, LORRAi IE (1966), Lecturer in Geography 
B.A., M.A., San Fernando Valley State College 
MA1JLICH, LOR1TTA K. (1966), Lecturer in Inglis » 

B.A., M.A., Cal* >mia State College at Fullerto*' 


298 


Part-time Faculty 


McWILLIAMS, ROBERT G. (1964), Lecturer in Finance 
B.S., Boston College; M.B.A., Harvard University 
MEINHARD, JAMES E. (1966), Lecturer in Physics 
B.S., Ph.D., University of Wisconsin 
MELTEBARGER, DOROTHY ( 1966), > Assistant in Speech 
B.A., California State College at Fullerton 
MILLER, DONALD E. (1967), Lecturer in English 
B.A., University of California, Los Angeles 

MILLS, THEODORE D. (1966), Graduate Assistant in Science and Mathematics Education 
B.A., California State College at Fullerton 
MOORE, STANLEY W. (1966), Lecturer in Political Science 
B.A., Wheaton College 

MORGAN, JOANNE (1966), Lecturer in Psychology 
B.A., M.A., Pepperdine College 
MORGAN, JOSEPH C., JR. (1966), Lecturer in Marketing 
B.S., M.B.A., University of Southern California 
MORITZ, ROLAND (1966), Lecturer in Music 
B.M., M.M., Eastern School of Music 
MORTIMER, GRETA S. (1966), Lecturer in Accounting 

A. B., Chico State College; M.B.A., University of California, Berkeley 
MUGGEklDGE, DONALD (1966), Lecturer in Music 

B. A., University of California, Los Angeles 
MURPHY, WILLIAM D. (1967), Lecturer in Mathematics 

B.S., University of California, Berkeley; M.S., Ph.D., New York University 
MYRES, BRIAN C. (1964), Graduate Assistant of Biology 
B.A., California State College at Fullerton 
NEPHEW, ERVIN H. (1966), Lecturer in Education 
B.S., University of Minnesota; M.A., Stanford University 
OGDEN, DOUGLAS K. (1967), Lecturer in Political Science 

B.S., University of Southern California; M.S., California State College at Los Angeles 
OLSSON, BETTY (1966), Lecturer in Music 

B.M., Yale University School of Music; M.M., Los Angeles Conservatory 
OSBORN, ROBERT C. (1966), Assistant Professor of Physical Education 
B.A., M.Ed., Whittier College 

PARKER. EDWARD L. (1966), Graduate Assistant in History 
B.A., California State College at Fullerton 
PARMF.LEF, SANDRA (1966), Assistant in Speech 
B.A., California State College at Fullerton 
PATTERSON. LOU (1966), Lecturer in Music 
PATTERSON, PIERCE (1959), Lecturer in Education 

B.S., Montana State College; M.A., San Diego State College 
PATTISON, MARGARET (1966), Lecturer in Foreign Languages 
B.A., University of California, Los Angeles 
PIERNO, ANTHONY R. (1961), Lecturer in Management 
B.A., Whittier College; LL.B., Stanford Law School 
PIETSCH, R. DONELDA (1966), Graduate Assistant in Psychology 
B.A., California State College at Fullerton 
REMSEN, DOROTHY (1966), Lecturer in Music 
B.M., Eastman School of Music 

RICHARDS, FLORENCE C. (1966), Graduate Assistant in History 
B.A., California State College at Fullerton 
RICKER, GEORGE G. (1967), Lecturer in Engineering 

B.S., University of Illinois; M.S., University of California, Los Angeles 
ROSSER, LYLE II. (1966), Graduate Assistant in Chemistry 
B.A., California State College at Fullerton 
RUBEY, CHARLENE C. (1966), Lecturer in Biology 
B.S., University of Arizona 

RUBINSTEIN, CHARLOTTE (1966), Lecturer in Art 

B.A., Brooklyn College; M.A., Teachers College Columbia University 
SANTANGELO, THERESA A. (1966), Lecturer in English 
B.A., M.A.. California State College at Fullerton 


299 


Part-time Faculty 


SCHMIDT, MERCEDES W. (1962), Librarian II 

B.M., Northwestern University; M.A., University of Illinois 
SCHRYER, RONALD (1966), Lecturer in Science and Mathematics Education 
B.A., California State College at Long Beach; M.A., Wesleyan University 
SCHULTZ, JOHN H. (1966), Lecturer in Political Science 
B.A., Whittier College; M.A., Claremont Graduate School 
SEIBEL, ROBERTA V. (1965), Assistant in Biology 
B.A., California State College at Fullerton 
SHAFFER, CHARLES (1966), Lecturer in Music 
B.M., M.M., University of Redlands 
SIKES, RONALD R. (1966), Lecturer in Quantitative Methods 
B.A., University of Oregon 
SMITH, DEBORAH K. (1964), Lecturer in Art 

A. B., California State College at Long Beach 
SMITH, GEORGE (1966), Lecturer in Finance 

B. S., University of California, Los Angeles; M.B.A., Harvard Graduate School of Business 
SMITH, WILLIAM F. (1966), Lecturer in English 

B.A., Stanford University; M.A., Los Angeles State College 
STACK, GENEVIEVE C. (1965), Lecturer in Education 

B.A., B.S., Oklahoma College for Women; M.A., Ph.D., University of Oklahoma; Ed.M., 
Mills College 

STAMETZ, ERIC (1966), Graduate Assistant in Biology 
B.A., University of California, Riverside 
STRANGE, ALLAN (1966), Graduate Assistant in Music 
B.A., California State College at Fullerton 
TAYLOR, CHARLES A. (1966), Graduate Assistant in Biology 
B.A., California State College at Fullerton 
THOMAS, DODIE (1966), Lecturer in Sociology 
B.S., M.S.W., Ohio State University 
THOMAS, FLORENCE H. (1966), Lecturer in English 

B.A., Carleton College; M.A., University of Southern California 
THOMSON, PATRICIA L. (1966), Assistant Professor in Physical Education 
B.A., University of Washington; M.S., University of California, Los Angeles 
TRABAND, JOHN (1964), Lecturer in Management 

A. B., Western Maryland College; M.B.A., University of Maryland 
TUCKER, ROY T. (1963), Lecturer in History 

B. A., M.A., Ohio State University 

TURNER, JACK C. (1966), Graduate Assistant in Biology 
B.A., California State College at Fullerton 
VASQUEZ, ANTONIO J. (1966), Graduate Assistant in Quantitative Methods 
B.A., California State College at Fullerton 
VOORHIES, EARLE C. (1966), Lecturer in Music 
WADE, RUTH S. (1965), Graduate Assistant of Chemistry 
B.A., University of Colorado 
WALKUP, FAIRFAX P. (1964), Lecturer of Drama 

B.A., University of California, Los Angeles; M.A., Ph.D., University of Utah 
WALTER, JURGEN (1966), Lecturer in Foreign Languages 
M.A., Stanford University 

WATSON, KAREN ANN (1967), Lecturer in English 
B.A., California State College at Fullerton 
WEAVER, DANIEL J. (1966), Graduate Assistant in Political Science 
B.A., California State College at Fullerton 
WEBB, DAVID R., JR. (1966), Graduate Assistant in Biology and Chemistry 
B.A., California State College at Fullerton 
WEIDERT, CARL L. (1965), Assistant in Biology 
B.A., California State College at Fullerton 
WELDS, MAURICE W. (1964), Lecturer in Management 
B.A., University of Washington; M.A., Columbia University 
WHITSITT, JAMES (1966), Lecturer in Music 
B.M., M.M., University of Southern California 


300 


Part-time Faculty 


WITHERS, ELIZABETH I. (1966), Lecturer in English 

B.B.A., University of Texas; M.A., California State College at Fullerton 
WULFING, MARY (1965), Graduate Assistant of Psychology 
B.A., California State College at Fullerton 
YURKOWSKY, WILLIAM (1965), Lecturer in Business Statistics 
B.S., Ohio State University; M.B.A., Western Reserve University 
ZITLAU, WARREN (1966), Graduate Assistant in Art 
B.A., California State College at Fullerton 


301 


PUBLIC SCHOOL TEACHERS COOPERATING IN 
STUDENT TEACHING PROGRAM 1966 

ANAHEIM CITY SCHOOL DISTRICT 

Marilyn Baker, Helen Beasley, Halleen Berry, Jean Blocher, Jayne Breckwedel, Lois Cran- 
mer, Susan Hing, Prudence Mitchell, Philomena O’Neal, Corrine Purcell, Lorene Skaggs, Edna 
Stout, Rena Strong, Joan Von Karvally, Beth Wik, Judy Willgeroth, Vee Yamafuji. 

ANAHEIM UNION HIGH SCHOOL DISTRICT 

Mike DeCruz, Hildcgard Evans, Bruce Haselton, Douglas Hunter, George James, Tennyson 
Jenkins, Lester Johnson, Robert Lamb, Alan Leonard, Donald MacLeod, Richard McKee, 
Robert McMahon, Dorothy McPhillips, Jane Norgren, Walt Otto, Genevieve Ray. 

BREA OLINDA UNION HIGH SCHOOL DISTRICT 
Jean Martin, Kenneth Reed, Harold Yates. 

CENTRALIA SCHOOL DISTRICT 
Roxy Linfesty, Mona Lowe, Shirley Rhine, Grant Smith. 

FOUNTAIN VALLEY SCHOOL DISTRICT 

Gene Bcdley, Charlotte Coder, Edward Lavelle, Lyn Murray. 

FULLERTON SCHOOL DISTRICT 

Wilma Bohannon, Marilec Bramlett, Janet Chadwick, Mary Glass, Don Hamilton, Joyce 
McMahan, Margaret Mergenthal, Linda Miller, Patricia Murphy, Connie Naasz, Judith Phillips, 
Shelia Rose, Margaret Silva, Les Starke, Laura Stearns, Robert Wilcox. 

FULLERTON UNION HIGH SCHOOL DISTRICT 

Karl Adams, Lloyd Alford, Lee Arth, Robert Baar, Violet Balmes, Walter Bayler, Gene 
Beaver, Warren Bowen, Don Bryant, David Coerper, Norman Cottom, Wayne Daniels, Robert 
Eberly, John Feastcr, Vera Ferraris, Mary Jane Flaa, Betty Geftakys, William Gienapp, John 
Hamilton. David Hamlin, Rowena L. Harwood, Thomas Hewitson, Bill Hock, Catheryn 
Hoehn, LeRoy Hollenbeck, John Hyma, Darwin Johnson, Duncan Johnson, Lindell Jones, 
Keith Jorgensen, Elizabeth Joy, Beulah King, Anne Kline, Donald Knorr, Jack Leyda, Margery 
McIntosh, Edwin Martin, Dorothy Newton, Ruth Nordstrom, Vincent Preece, William Purlciss, 
Irene Randall, Joan Reiner, Ben Rogers, Saul Schachter, Gloria Takeda, Rex Terry, Elizabeth 
vanOppen, Robert Van Voorhis, Louise Vinson, H. M. Wareberg, Bernard Weiner, Norma 
Wilson, Robert Wood, Janet Wright, James Young. 

GARDEN GROVE UNIFIED SCHOOL DISTRICT 

Pat Bucciarelli, Marjorie Carter, Jan DeLauter, Rhoda Hickenbottom, Sue Landstedt, Roberta 
Massey, Emily Pett, Kelly Puch, June Radke, Ernest RasRowe, Leah Rhodes. 

HUNTINGTON BEACH UNION HIGH SCHOOL DISTRICT 
Jack Agcaoili. 

LA HABRA CITY SCHOOL DISTRICT 

Jean D. Cochran, Frances Cunningham, Marie Dennison, Victoria Ducote, Tony Gianetto, 
Virginia Givens, Donald Johnson, LaFrance Kingsbury, Betty Letson, Reita Lutz, Ardyth 
Nobbe, Nina Ralston, Robert Townsend, Sarah Vanoski. 

NEWPORT-MESA UNIFIED SCHOOL DISTRICT 

Patricia Cline, Helen Fries, Mabel Koral, Elizabeth Meyer, Jerome Shannon, June Taylor, 
Eleanor O. White. 

ORANGE UNIFIED SCHOOL DISTRICT 

LaVonne Abbas, Gaylord Albright, Bob Bird, Kay Blair, Harriet Boone, Mary Bunger, Nancy 
Cast, Maxine Clark, Anita Friedman, Anita Houpt, Alfrieda Hull, Kathryn LaBee, Myrna 
Noland, Nancy Racine, Albert Smith, Francis Turner. 

PLACENTIA UNIFIED SCHOOL DISTRICT 

Margaret Alexander, Faye Austin, Omar Blanchard, Jerry Blansett, Faye Burger, Thomas 
Byrnes, Helen Chuvarsky, Lawrence Gem, Emilie Disen, Sheldon Disrud, Carol Downey, 
Marian Dutcher, Joyce Graham, Marian Headman, Linda Klinger, Marilyn McClanahan, 
Marjorie Merkle, Anthony Miscione, Linda Mullen, John Mullins, Karen Policy, Carol Potts, 
Carol Reynolds, Marilyn Sampica. Charles Smith, Joseph Stephens, John Tynes, Barbara 
Vignone, Richard Vouga, Winifred Walker, Clyde Williams. 

SANTA ANA UNIFIED SCHOOL DISTRICT 

Harold Bush, Michael Campbell, Melvin Garrison, William Hemmen, David Hoy, Walden 
Leecing, Truman Risa, Elwood Schoff, Marjorie Sewell, Gloria Todd, Mildred Watson, John 
Wright. 

TUSTIN UNION HIGH SCHOOL DISTRICT 

Janice Campbell, Edward Doyle, James McDonald, Robert Patterson, Kenneth Turknette. 


302 


INDEX 


Academic Affairs Cabinet, 29 
Academic advisement, 60 
Academic Standards Committee, 30 
Accounting courses, 251 
Accreditation, 34 
Administration, 27 
college, 27 
departments, 28 
schools, 28 
Admission, 49 

application for, 49 
cancellation of, 53 
health requirements for, 54 
honors at entrance, 53 
of auditors, 56 
of foreign students, 5 1 
of freshmen, 49 
of graduates, 51 
of nonresidents, 49 
of summer session students, 5 1 
of undergraduate transfers, 50 
on academic probation, 66 
readmission, 51 
to credential programs, 53 
to the college, 49 
undergradute entrance testing, 53 
Advanced placement, 55 
Advisement, academic, 60 
Advisory board, 15 
Advisory councils, 16 
Announcement of courses, 168 
Anthropology, 81, 169 

bachelor of arts degree, 8 1 
courses, 169 
department, 81 
minor, 82 
Art, 82, 172 

bachelor of arts degree, 82 
courses, 172 
department, 82 
education courses, 83, 177 
master of arts degree, 84 
minor, 84 

Athletics, 41, 154, 275 
Audiovisual services, 37 
Bachelor’s degree, general requirements, 68 
Biological science, 86, 178 
bachelor of arts degree, 86 
courses, 178 
department, 86 
master of arts degree, 88 
minor, 88 

Business administration, 129, 251 
bachelor of arts degree, 1 30 
courses, 251 
school of, 129 
majors, 131 
master’s degree, 132 
Business education, 132 
courses, 253 
major, 132 
Calendar, 6 

California State Colleges, 14 
Campus Planning Committee, 29 
Chancellor’s Office, 13 


Change of program, 56 
Chemistry, 89, 183 

bachelor of arts degree, 89 
courses, 183 
department, 89 
minor, 90 

Classification in college, 63 
College curricula, 77 
Committees of the college, 29 
Communication, 92, 184 
bachelor of arts degree, 92 
courses, 184 
department, 92 
minor, 94 

Comparative literature, 94 
courses, 189 
Computer center, 37 
Concurrent enrollment, 56 
Conferences, 36 
Continuous residency, 65 
Correspondence courses, 55 
Counseling, 43 
Course numbering codes, 168 
Credential programs, 53, 1**1 
Credit 

acceptance of, 55 
advanced placement, 55 
by examination, 55 
by challenge, 55 
correspondence course, 55 
extension course, 55 
for military service, 55 
transfer, 55 
unit of, 63 

Curriculum Committee, 30 
Dean’s list, 66 
Discipline, 66 
Disqualification, 66 
Drama, 95, 190 

bachelor of arts degree, 96 
courses, 190 
department, 95 

master’s degree in speech with 
drama emphasis, 97 
minor, 97 

Economic Education Center, 39 
Economics, 135, 253 

bachelor of arts degree, 135 
courses, 253 
department, 129 
minor, 136 
Education, 141 

credential programs, 53, 141 
courses, 265 
publications, 152 
school, 141 

Educational services committee, 31 
Elementary education, 141,265 
courses, 265 

elementary school teacher education, 141 
Engineering, 159, 279 
Advisory Council, 16 
bachelor of science degree, 159 
courses, 279 
school, 159 


303 


INDEX— Continued 


English, 98, 194 

bachelor of arts degree, 98 
courses, 194 
department, 98 
education courses, 198 
master of arts degree, 99 
minor, 99 
Enrollment, 63 
concurrent, 56 
definitions, 63 

Entrance examinations, 49, 50, 53, 54 
Evaluations, 54 
Evening Classes, 35 
Examinations, 64 

credit by (challenge), 55 
final, 64 

Extension program, 36 
Faculty, 30, 31, 283 
Affairs committee, 31 
council members, 29 
council standing committees, 30 
directory, 283 
personnel committee, 3 1 
Fees, 57 

Finance courses, 257 
Financial aids, 44 

Foreign language, 100, 198, 204, 212, 234, 
237, 243 

credential programs, 100 
education courses, 198 
majors, 100 
minors, 101 

Foreign languages and literatures, 100 
bachelor of arts degree, 105 
department, 100 
master of arts degree, 101 
Foreign students, 44 
Foundation, 38 

advisory council, 17 
board of trustees, 32 
California State College, 38 
Foundations of education, 141 
courses, 267 
French courses, 198 
Friends of College, 22 
General education, 68 
General regulations, 63 
Geography, 102, 201 

bachelor of arts degree. 102 
courses, 201 
department, 102 
teaching minor, 103 
Geology, 203 
courses, 203 
German courses, 204 
Good standing, 53, 65 
Governmental Studies Center, 39 
Grade reports, 64 
Grading system, 63 

Graduate students genet al information, 51, 70 
Graduate policies, 73 

admission, nonaccredited schools, 73 
assistantships, 74 
course work over 7 years old, 73 
graduate credit for seniors, 73 
international study, 74 


leave of absence, 65 
minimum full-time load, 63 
Standards for graduate study, 74 
waiver of nonresident tuition fee, 74 
waiver of prerequisites, 73 
Graduation requirements, 68, 70 
Health education courses, 274 
Health requirements, 54 
Health services, 42 
History, 103, 206 

bachelor of arts degree, 103 
or the college, 33 
courses, 206 
department, 103 
master of arts degree, 104 
teaching minor, 104 
Honors, 53, 66 
at entrance, 53 
dean’s list, 66 
at graduation, 66 
Housing, 41 
Humanities, 94, 189 

bachelor of arts degree, 94 
Incomplete work, 64 
Independent study, 168 
International programs, 44 
Intramural activities, 41 
Journalism education courses, 211 
Junior college teacher education, 146 
Language laboratory, 101 
Late registration, 56 
Latin courses, 212 
Leave of absence, 53, 65 
Library, 36 
Library committee, 31 
Loans, 44 

Management courses, 258 
Marketing courses, 261 
Master’s degree general requirements, 70 
Mathematics, 106, 213, 215 
bachelor of arts degree, 106 
courses, 213 
department, 106 
education courses, 215 
minor, 107 
Music, 107 

bachelor of arts degree, 109, 111 
courses, 216, 221 
department, 107 
education courses, 221 
master of arts degree, 113 
minor, 112 

Objectives of the college, 33 
Orientation, 56 
Parking fees, 57 
Part-time faculty, 296 
Patrons of Library, 23 
Petition, 67 
Philosophy, 113, 222 

bachelor of arts degree, 114 
courses, 222 
department, 113 
minor, 114 

Physical education, 154, 275 
bachelor of science degree, 154 
courses, 275 
minor. 156 


304 


INDEX— Continued 


Physical science courses, 225 
Physics, 115, 225 

bachelor of arts degree, 115 
courses, 225 
department, 115 
minor, 116 

Placement services, 42 
Political science, 117, 228 
bachelor of arts degree, 1 17 
courses, 228 
department, 117 
master of arts degree, 118 
teaching minor, 118 
Portuguese courses, 234 
Premedical committee, 32 
Preprofcssional committees, 32 
President’s cabinet, 29 
Probation, academic, 66 
admission on, 66 
Professional committees, 32 
Professional education, 146 
Psychology, 1 19, 234 

bachelor of arts degree, 1 19 
courses, 234 
department, 119 
master of arts degree, 120 
Quantitative methods courses, 263 
Radiological Safety Advisory Committee, 30 
Rcadmission, 53 
Real estate research, 39 
Recreation courses, 278 
Registration, 56 
Regulations, election of, 65 
Repetition of courses, 64 
Research centers and clinics, 39 
Residence, 65 
Right of petition, 67 
Russian courses, 237 
Scholarships, 44 
School services courses, 267 
Science Advisory Council, 18 
Science education courses, 238 
Science and mathematics education 
department, 121 

Secondary education courses, 270 

secondary school teacher education, 144 
Selective Service, 57 
Social sciences, 121 

master of arts degree, 121 
Social welfare courses, 240 


Sociology, 122, 240 

bachelor of arts degree, 1 22 
courses, 240 
department, 122 
master of arts degree, 123 
teaching minor, 123 
Spanish courses, 243 
Speech, 124, 246 

and hearing clinics, 39 
bachelor of arts degree, 124 
courses, 246 
department, 124 
master of arts degree, 126 
minor, 125 
Student activities, 40 
athletics, 41 
conduct, 66 

intramural and extramural, 4 1 
news bureau, 41 
organizations, 40 
publications, 40 
Student Affairs Committee, 3 1 
personnel services, 40 
Study list limits, 63 
Summer sessions, 36 
Teacher education, 141 
admission, 53 
advisory council, 19 
Teaching credential statutory 
requirements, 142 

Technical Communications Advisory 
Council, 20 
Testing, 43 
Transcripts, 49, 64 

Trustees of the California State Colleges, 1 1 
Undergraduate 
admission, 49 

enrollment in graduate level courses, 63 
testing, 43, 53 
transfers, 50 
Units 

for graduation, 69 
of credit, 63 
resident, 69 
Veterans, 57 
Withdrawal 

from college, 65 
grades, 65 


O 


printed in California office of state piintimc 
20 M 


A 88766— 701 


2-67 


NOTES 


NOTES 


NOTES 


NOTES 


NOTES 


NOTES 


NOTES 


NOTES 


NOTES 


NOTES 


NOTES 


NOTES 


NOTES 


NOTES 


NOTES 
































U. S. POSTAGE